Teledyne Drums T200H M Users Manual
T200HM to the manual f6049b5b-ec69-458f-95a5-93fcff74246b
2015-02-03
: Teledyne Teledyne-Drums-T200H-M-Users-Manual-464456 teledyne-drums-t200h-m-users-manual-464456 teledyne pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 412
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
INSTRUCTION MANUAL MODEL T200H/M NITROGEN OXIDES ANALYZER © TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION 9480 CARROLL PARK DRIVE SAN DIEGO, CA 92121-5201 USA Toll-free Phone: Phone: Fax: Email: Website: Copyright 2011-2012 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation 800-324-5190 858-657-9800 858-657-9816 api-sales@teledyne.com http://www.teledyne-api.com/ 07270B DCN6512 20 June 2012 ABOUT TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION (TAPI) Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation, Inc. (TAPI) is a worldwide market leader in the design and manufacture of precision analytical instrumentation used for air quality monitoring, continuous emissions monitoring, and specialty process monitoring applications. Founded in San Diego, California, in 1988, TAPI introduced a complete line of Air Quality Monitoring (AQM) instrumentation, which comply with the United States Environmental Protection Administration (EPA) and international requirements for the measurement of criteria pollutants, including CO, SO2, NOX and Ozone. Since 1988 TAPI has combined state-of-the-art technology, proven measuring principles, stringent quality assurance systems and world class after-sales support to deliver the best products and customer satisfaction in the business. For further information on our company, our complete range of products, and the applications that they serve, please visit www.teledyne-api.com or contact sales@teledyne-api.com. NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT © 2011-2012 Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation. All rights reserved. TRADEMARKS All trademarks, registered trademarks, brand names or product names appearing in this document are the property of their respective owners and are used herein for identification purposes only. 07270B DCN6512 i Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. ii 07270B DCN6512 SAFETY MESSAGES Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual for the purpose of avoiding personal injury or instrument damage. Please read these messages carefully. Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol, and are placed throughout this manual; the safety symbols are also located inside the instrument. It is imperative that you pay close attention to these messages, the descriptions of which are as follows: WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard HAZARD: Strong oxidizer GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION: Read the accompanying message for specific information. CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning Do Not Touch: Touching some parts of the instrument without protection or proper tools could result in damage to the part(s) and/or the instrument. Technician Symbol: All operations marked with this symbol are to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only. Electrical Ground: This symbol inside the instrument marks the central safety grounding point for the instrument. CAUTION This instrument should only be used for the purpose and in the manner described in this manual. If you use this instrument in a manner other than that for which it was intended, unpredictable behavior could ensue with possible hazardous consequences. NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas(es)! For Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of this instrument or any other Teledyne API product, contact Teledyne API’s Technical Support Department: Telephone: 800-324-5190 Email: sda_techsupport@teledyne.com or access any of the service options on our website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/ 07270B DCN6512 iii Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ Des consignes de sécurité importantes sont fournies tout au long du présent manuel dans le but d’éviter des blessures corporelles ou d’endommager les instruments. Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes. Chaque consigne de sécurité est représentée par un pictogramme d’alerte de sécurité; ces pictogrammes se retrouvent dans ce manuel et à l’intérieur des instruments. Les symboles correspondent aux consignes suivantes : AVERTISSEMENT : Risque de choc électrique DANGER : Oxydant puissant AVERTISSEMENT GÉNÉRAL / MISE EN GARDE : complémentaire pour des renseignements spécifiques Lire la consigne MISE EN GARDE : Surface chaude Ne pas toucher : Toucher à certaines parties de l’instrument sans protection ou sans les outils appropriés pourrait entraîner des dommages aux pièces ou à l’instrument. Pictogramme « technicien » : Toutes les opérations portant ce symbole doivent être effectuées uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifié. Mise à la terre : Ce symbole à l’intérieur de l’instrument détermine le point central de la mise à la terre sécuritaire de l’instrument. MISE EN GARDE Cet instrument doit être utilisé aux fins décrites et de la manière décrite dans ce manuel. Si vous utilisez cet instrument d’une autre manière que celle pour laquelle il a été prévu, l’instrument pourrait se comporter de façon imprévisible et entraîner des conséquences dangereuses. NE JAMAIS utiliser un analyseur de gaz pour échantillonner des gaz combustibles! iv 07270B DCN6512 WARRANTY WARRANTY POLICY (02024 F) Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI), a business unit of Teledyne Instruments, Inc., provides that: Prior to shipment, TAPI equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment failure occur, TAPI assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available. COVERAGE After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, TAPI stands ready to provide on-site or in-plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers in the industry. All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting are to be performed by the customer. NON-TAPI MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT Equipment provided but not manufactured by TAPI is warranted and will be repaired to the extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment manufacturer’s warranty. PRODUCT RETURN All units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the repair, the equipment will be returned, freight prepaid. The complete Terms and Conditions of Sale can be reviewed at http://www.teledyneapi.com/terms_and_conditions.asp CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation Failure to comply with proper anti-Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) handling and packing instructions and Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) procedures when returning parts for repair or calibration may void your warranty. For anti-ESD handling and packing instructions please refer to “Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API’s Customer Service” in the Primer on ElectroStatic Discharge section of this manual, and for RMA procedures please refer to our Website at http://www.teledyne-api.com under Customer Support > Return Authorization. 07270B DCN6512 v Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. vi 07270B DCN6512 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual is comprised of multiple documents, in PDF format, as listed below. Part No. Rev Name/Description 07270 B T200H/M Operation Manual 05147 H Menu Trees and Software Documentation (inserted as Appendix A in this manual) 07351 A Spare Parts List - T200H (located in Appendix B of this manual) 07367 A Spare Parts List - T200M (located in Appendix B of this manual)t 05149 B Repair Request Form (inserted as Appendix C in this manual) Documents included in Appendix D: 0691101 A Interconnect Wire List 06911 A Interconnect Wiring Diagram 01669 G PCA 016680300, Ozone generator board 01840 B PCA Thermo-electric cooler board 03632 A PCA 03631, 0-20mA Driver 03956 A PCA 039550200, Relay Board 04354 D PCA 04003, Pressure/Flow Transducer Interface 04181 H PCA 041800200, PMT pre-amplifier board 04468 B PCA, 04467, Analog Output 01840 B SCH, PCA 05802, MOTHERBOARD, GEN-5 03632 D SCH, PCA 06697, INTRFC, LCD TCH SCRN, 03956 B SCH, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD 06731 A SCH, AUXILLIARY-I/O BOARD Note 07270B DCN6512 We recommend that all users read this manual in its entirety before operating the instrument. vii Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. viii 07270B DCN6512 REVISION HISTORY This section provides information regarding changes to this manual. T200H/T200M Operation Manual PN 07270 Date 2012 June 20 2011 March 04 07270B DCN6512 Rev B A DCN 6512 5999 Change Summary Administrative updates Initial Release ix Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. x 07270B DCN6512 TABLE OF CONTENTS ABOUT TELEDYNE ADVANCED POLLUTION INSTRUMENTATION (TAPI) ............................................................................... i SAFETY MESSAGES ..................................................................................................................................................................iii CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ...................................................................................................................................................... iv Warranty ...................................................................................................................................................................................... v About This Manual ......................................................................................................................................................................vii Revision History .......................................................................................................................................................................... ix Table of Contents........................................................................................................................................................................ xi List of Figures.............................................................................................................................................................................xiv List of Tables..............................................................................................................................................................................xvi LIST OF APPENDICES ............................................................................................................................................................xvii 1. Introduction, Features, and Options ....................................................................................................................................... 19 1.1. Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 19 1.2. Features ......................................................................................................................................................................... 19 1.3. Using This Manual.......................................................................................................................................................... 19 1.4. Options ........................................................................................................................................................................... 20 2. Specifications and Approvals ................................................................................................................................................. 23 2.1. T200H/M Operating Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 23 2.2. Approvals and Certifications........................................................................................................................................... 24 2.2.1. Safety ..................................................................................................................................................................... 24 2.2.2. EMC........................................................................................................................................................................ 24 3. Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................................................... 25 3.1. Unpacking and Initial Setup............................................................................................................................................ 25 3.2. Ventilation Clearance ..................................................................................................................................................... 26 3.3. T200H/M Layout............................................................................................................................................................. 26 3.4. Electrical Connections .................................................................................................................................................... 32 3.4.1. Power Connection .................................................................................................................................................. 32 3.4.2. Analog Inputs (Option 64) Connections .................................................................................................................. 33 3.4.3. Analog Output Connections.................................................................................................................................... 33 3.4.4. Connecting the Status Outputs............................................................................................................................... 34 3.4.5. Current Loop Analog Outputs (OPT 41) Setup ....................................................................................................... 36 3.4.6. Connecting the Control Inputs ................................................................................................................................ 38 3.4.7. Connecting the Alarm Relay Option (OPT 61)........................................................................................................ 39 3.4.8. Connecting the Communications Ports................................................................................................................... 40 3.5. Pneumatic Connections ................................................................................................................................................. 42 3.5.1. About Zero Air and Calibration (Span) Gases ........................................................................................................ 42 3.5.2. Pneumatic Connections to T200H/M Basic Configuration ...................................................................................... 44 3.5.3. Connections with Internal Valve Options Installed .................................................................................................. 49 3.6. Initial Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 59 3.6.1. Startup .................................................................................................................................................................... 59 3.6.2. Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................................. 59 3.6.3. Functional Check .................................................................................................................................................... 60 3.7. Calibration ...................................................................................................................................................................... 61 3.7.1. Basic NOx Calibration Procedure............................................................................................................................ 61 3.7.2. Basic O2 Sensor Calibration Procedure.................................................................................................................. 66 4. Operating Instructions ............................................................................................................................................................ 71 4.1. Overview of Operating Modes ........................................................................................................................................ 71 4.2. Sample Mode ................................................................................................................................................................. 73 4.2.1. Test Functions ........................................................................................................................................................ 73 4.2.2. Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................................. 75 4.3. Calibration Mode ............................................................................................................................................................ 77 4.3.1. Calibration Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 77 4.4. SETUP MODE................................................................................................................................................................ 77 4.5. SETUP CFG: Viewing the Analyzer’s Configuration Information ............................................................................... 78 4.6. SETUP ACAL: Automatic Calibration......................................................................................................................... 79 4.7. SETUP DAS - Using the Data Acquisition System (DAS)......................................................................................... 80 4.7.1. DAS Structure......................................................................................................................................................... 81 4.7.2. Default DAS Channels............................................................................................................................................ 83 4.7.3. Remote DAS Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 96 07270B DCN6512 xi Table of Contents Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.8. SETUP RNGE: Range Units and Dilution Configuration............................................................................................ 97 4.8.1. Range Units............................................................................................................................................................ 97 4.8.2. Dilution Ratio .......................................................................................................................................................... 98 4.9. SETUP PASS: Password Feature ............................................................................................................................. 99 4.10. SETUP CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock ............................................................................................ 101 4.11. SETUP MORE COMM: Setting Up the Analyser’s Communication Ports ......................................................... 103 4.11.1. DTE and DCE Communication ........................................................................................................................... 103 4.11.2. COM Port Default Settings ................................................................................................................................. 103 4.11.3. Communication Modes, Baud Rate and Port Testing ......................................................................................... 104 4.11.4. Analyzer ID ......................................................................................................................................................... 108 4.11.5. RS-232 COM Port Cable Connections ............................................................................................................... 109 4.11.6. RS-485 Configuration of COM2.......................................................................................................................... 111 4.11.7. Ethernet Interface Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 111 4.11.8. USB Port Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 117 4.11.9. Multidrop RS-232 Set Up.................................................................................................................................... 119 4.11.10. MODBUS SETUP ............................................................................................................................................. 122 4.12. SETUP MORE VARS: Internal Variables (VARS) ............................................................................................. 124 4.12.1. Setting the Gas Measurement Mode .................................................................................................................. 126 4.13. SETUP MORE DIAG: Diagnostics MENU ........................................................................................................ 127 4.13.1. Accessing the Diagnostic Features..................................................................................................................... 128 4.13.2. Signal I/O............................................................................................................................................................ 128 4.13.3. Analog Output Step Test .................................................................................................................................... 130 4.13.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS and Reporting Ranges...................................................................................................... 131 4.13.5. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................ 134 4.13.6. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION .................................................................................................................... 148 4.13.7. OTHER DIAG MENU FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................... 158 4.14. SETUP – ALRM: Using the optional Gas Concentration Alarms (OPT 67) ................................................................ 166 4.15. Remote Operation ...................................................................................................................................................... 167 4.15.1. Remote Operation Using the External Digital I/O ............................................................................................... 167 4.15.2. Remote Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 169 4.15.3. Additional Communications Documentation ....................................................................................................... 176 4.15.4. Using the T200H/M with a Hessen Protocol Network ......................................................................................... 176 5. Calibration Procedures......................................................................................................................................................... 183 5.1.1. Interferents for NOX Measurements...................................................................................................................... 183 5.2. Calibration Preparations ............................................................................................................................................... 184 5.2.1. Required Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables................................................................................................ 184 5.2.2. Zero Air................................................................................................................................................................. 184 5.2.3. Span Calibration Gas Standards & Traceability.................................................................................................... 185 5.2.4. Data Recording Devices ....................................................................................................................................... 186 5.2.5. NO2 Conversion Efficiency (CE) ........................................................................................................................... 186 5.3. Manual Calibration ....................................................................................................................................................... 191 5.4. Calibration Checks ....................................................................................................................................................... 195 5.5. Manual Calibration with Zero/Span Valves................................................................................................................... 196 5.6. Calibration Checks with Zero/Span Valves................................................................................................................... 199 5.7. Calibration With Remote Contact Closures .................................................................................................................. 200 5.8. Automatic Calibration (AutoCal) ................................................................................................................................... 201 5.9. Calibration Quality Analysis.......................................................................................................................................... 204 6. Instrument Maintenance....................................................................................................................................................... 205 6.1. Maintenance Schedule ................................................................................................................................................. 205 6.2. Predictive Diagnostics .................................................................................................................................................. 207 6.3. Maintenance Procedures.............................................................................................................................................. 207 6.3.1. Changing the Sample Particulate Filter ................................................................................................................ 207 6.3.2. Changing the O3 Dryer Particulate Filter............................................................................................................... 209 6.3.3. Maintaining the External Sample Pump................................................................................................................ 210 6.3.4. Changing the NO2 converter................................................................................................................................. 211 6.3.5. Cleaning the Reaction Cell ................................................................................................................................... 212 6.3.6. Changing Critical Flow Orifices............................................................................................................................. 214 6.3.7. Checking for Light Leaks ...................................................................................................................................... 215 7. Troubleshooting & Repair .................................................................................................................................................... 217 7.1. General Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................................................. 217 7.1.1. Fault Diagnosis with Warning Messages .............................................................................................................. 218 7.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions ..................................................................................................................... 219 7.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Function ............................................................................................................. 220 7.1.4. Status LED’s ......................................................................................................................................................... 222 7.2. Gas Flow Problems ...................................................................................................................................................... 225 xii 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table of Contents 7.2.1. T200H Internal Gas Flow Diagrams...................................................................................................................... 226 7.2.2. T200M Internal Gas Flow Diagrams ..................................................................................................................... 229 7.2.3. Zero or Low Flow Problems.................................................................................................................................. 231 7.2.4. High Flow.............................................................................................................................................................. 233 7.2.5. Sample Flow is Zero or Low But Analyzer Reports Correct Flow ......................................................................... 233 7.3. Calibration Problems .................................................................................................................................................... 234 7.3.1. Negative Concentrations ...................................................................................................................................... 234 7.3.2. No Response........................................................................................................................................................ 234 7.3.3. Unstable Zero and Span....................................................................................................................................... 235 7.3.4. Inability to Span - No SPAN Key .......................................................................................................................... 235 7.3.5. Inability to Zero - No ZERO Button ....................................................................................................................... 236 7.3.6. Non-Linear Response........................................................................................................................................... 236 7.3.7. Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display ............................................................................................... 237 7.3.8. Discrepancy between NO and NOX slopes........................................................................................................... 237 7.4. Other Performance Problems....................................................................................................................................... 237 7.4.1. Excessive noise .................................................................................................................................................... 238 7.4.2. Slow Response..................................................................................................................................................... 238 7.4.3. Auto-zero Warnings .............................................................................................................................................. 238 7.5. Subsystem Checkout ................................................................................................................................................... 239 7.5.1. Simple Leak Check using Vacuum and Pump...................................................................................................... 239 7.5.2. Detailed Leak Check Using Pressure ................................................................................................................... 239 7.5.3. Performing a Sample Flow Check ........................................................................................................................ 240 7.5.4. AC Power Configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 241 7.5.5. DC Power Supply Test Points .............................................................................................................................. 245 7.5.6. I2C Bus ................................................................................................................................................................. 245 7.5.7. Touch Screen Interface ........................................................................................................................................ 246 7.5.8. LCD Display Module ............................................................................................................................................. 246 7.5.9. General Relay Board Diagnostics......................................................................................................................... 246 7.5.10. Motherboard ....................................................................................................................................................... 247 7.5.11. CPU .................................................................................................................................................................... 249 7.5.12. RS-232 Communication...................................................................................................................................... 250 7.5.13. PMT Sensor........................................................................................................................................................ 251 7.5.14. PMT Preamplifier Board ..................................................................................................................................... 251 7.5.15. High Voltage Power Supply ................................................................................................................................ 251 7.5.16. Pneumatic Sensor Assembly.............................................................................................................................. 252 7.5.17. NO2 Converter .................................................................................................................................................... 253 7.5.18. O3 Generator ...................................................................................................................................................... 255 7.5.19. Box Temperature ................................................................................................................................................ 255 7.5.20. PMT Temperature............................................................................................................................................... 255 7.6. Repair Procedures ....................................................................................................................................................... 256 7.6.1. Disk-on-Module Replacement .............................................................................................................................. 256 7.6.2. O3 Generator Replacement .................................................................................................................................. 257 7.6.3. Sample and Ozone Dryer Replacement ............................................................................................................... 257 7.6.4. PMT Sensor Hardware Calibration ....................................................................................................................... 258 7.6.5. Replacing the PMT, HVPS or TEC ....................................................................................................................... 260 7.7. Removing / Replacing the Relay PCA from the Instrument .......................................................................................... 263 7.8. Frequently Asked Questions ........................................................................................................................................ 264 7.9. Technical Assistance.................................................................................................................................................... 265 8. Principles of Operation......................................................................................................................................................... 267 8.1. Measurement Principle................................................................................................................................................. 267 8.1.1. Chemiluminescence ............................................................................................................................................. 267 8.1.2. NOX and NO2 Determination ................................................................................................................................. 269 8.2. Chemiluminescence Detection ..................................................................................................................................... 270 8.2.1. The Photo Multiplier Tube..................................................................................................................................... 270 8.2.2. Optical Filter ......................................................................................................................................................... 270 8.2.3. Auto Zero.............................................................................................................................................................. 271 8.2.4. Measurement Interferences.................................................................................................................................. 272 8.3. Pneumatic Operation.................................................................................................................................................... 274 8.3.1. Pump and Exhaust Manifold................................................................................................................................. 274 8.3.2. Sample Gas Flow ................................................................................................................................................. 275 8.3.3. Flow Rate Control - Critical Flow Orifices ............................................................................................................. 276 8.3.4. Sample Particulate Filter....................................................................................................................................... 280 8.3.5. Ozone Gas Air Flow.............................................................................................................................................. 281 8.3.6. O3 Generator ........................................................................................................................................................ 282 8.3.7. Perma Pure® Dryer ............................................................................................................................................... 283 07270B DCN6512 xiii Table of Contents Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.3.8. Ozone Supply Air Filter......................................................................................................................................... 285 8.3.9. Ozone Scrubber ................................................................................................................................................... 285 8.3.10. Pneumatic Sensors............................................................................................................................................. 286 8.3.11. Dilution Manifold ................................................................................................................................................. 287 8.4. Oxygen Sensor (OPT 65A) Principles of Operation ..................................................................................................... 288 8.4.1. Paramagnetic Measurement of O2........................................................................................................................ 288 8.4.2. Operation Within the T200H/M Analyzer .............................................................................................................. 289 8.4.3. Pneumatic Operation of the O2 Sensor................................................................................................................. 289 8.5. Electronic Operation ..................................................................................................................................................... 290 8.5.1. CPU ...................................................................................................................................................................... 291 8.5.2. Sensor Module, Reaction Cell .............................................................................................................................. 292 8.5.3. Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT)................................................................................................................................. 293 8.5.4. PMT Cooling System ............................................................................................................................................ 295 8.5.5. PMT Preamplifier .................................................................................................................................................. 295 8.5.6. Pneumatic Sensor Board...................................................................................................................................... 297 8.5.7. Relay Board.......................................................................................................................................................... 297 8.5.8. Status LEDs & Watch Dog Circuitry...................................................................................................................... 301 8.5.9. Motherboard ......................................................................................................................................................... 302 8.5.10. Analog Outputs ................................................................................................................................................... 304 8.5.11. External Digital I/O.............................................................................................................................................. 304 8.5.12. I2C Data Bus ....................................................................................................................................................... 304 8.5.13. Power-up Circuit ................................................................................................................................................. 304 8.6. Power Distribution & Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................................................ 305 8.7. Front Panel/Display Interface Electronics..................................................................................................................... 306 8.7.1. Front Panel Interface PCA.................................................................................................................................... 306 8.8. Software Operation ...................................................................................................................................................... 307 8.8.1. Adaptive Filter....................................................................................................................................................... 308 8.8.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset............................................................................................................................... 308 8.8.3. Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC) ....................................................................................................... 309 8.8.4. NO2 Converter Efficiency Compensation.............................................................................................................. 310 8.8.5. Internal Data Acquisition System (DAS) ............................................................................................................... 310 9. A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge................................................................................................................................... 311 9.1. How Static Charges are Created.................................................................................................................................. 311 9.2. How Electro-Static Charges Cause Damage................................................................................................................ 312 9.3. Common Myths About ESD Damage ........................................................................................................................... 313 9.4. Basic Principles of Static Control.................................................................................................................................. 314 9.4.1. General Rules....................................................................................................................................................... 314 9.4.2. Basic anti-ESD Procedures for Analyzer Repair and Maintenance ...................................................................... 315 Glossary................................................................................................................................................................................... 319 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 3-1: Figure 3-2: Figure 3-3: Figure 3-4: Figure 3-5: Figure 3-6: Figure 3-7: Figure 3-8: Figure 3-9: Figure 3-10: Figure 3-11: Figure 3-12: Figure 3-13: Figure 3-14: Figure 3-15: Figure 3-16: Figure 3-17: xiv Front Panel ..................................................................................................................................27 Display Screen and Touch Control ..............................................................................................27 Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts .............................................................29 T200H/M Rear Panel Layout .......................................................................................................30 T200H/M Internal Layout .............................................................................................................31 Analog In Connector ....................................................................................................................33 Analog Output Connector ............................................................................................................34 Status Output Connector .............................................................................................................35 Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard .....................................................................36 Control Input Connector...............................................................................................................38 Alarm Relay Output Pin Assignments..........................................................................................39 T200H/M Multidrop Card .............................................................................................................41 Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator.............................44 Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas.....................................45 T200H Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration ..........................................47 T200M Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration..........................................48 Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50A) ....................................................49 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-18: Figure 3-19: Figure 3-20: Figure 3-21: Figure 3-22: Figure 3-23: Figure 3-24: Figure 3-23: Figure 4-1: Figure 4-2: Figure 4-3: Figure 4-4: Figure 4-5: Figure 4-6: Figure 4-7: Figure 4-8: Figure 4-9: Figure 4-10: Figure 4-11: Figure 4-12: Figure 4-13: Figure 4-14. Figure 4-15: Figure 4-16: Figure 4-17: Figure 4-18: Figure 5-1: Figure 5-2: Figure 5-3: Figure 5-4: Figure 6-1: Figure 6-2: Figure 6-3: Figure 6-4: Figure 6-5: Figure 7-1: Figure 7-2: Figure 7-3: Figure 7-4: Figure 7-5: Figure 7-6: Figure 7-7: Figure 7-8: Figure 7-9: Figure 7-10: Figure 7-11: Figure 7-12: Figure 7-13: Figure 7-14: Figure 7-15: Figure 7-16: Figure 7-17: Figure 7-18: Figure 7-19. Figure 7-20: Figure 7-21: Figure 8-1: Figure 8-2: Table of Contents Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (50D) –Using Bottled Span Gas.................49 T200H – Internal Pneumatics with Ambient Zero-Span Valve Option 50A .................................50 T200M – Internal Pneumatics with Ambient Zero-Span Valve Option 50A.................................51 T200H - Internal Pneumatics for Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span, Option 50D ...............55 T200M - Internal Pneumatics for Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span, Option 50D...............56 T200H – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A .........................................................57 T200M – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A..........................................................58 O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up ......................................................................................................66 Front Panel Display with “SAMPLE” Indicated in the Mode Field ...............................................72 Viewing T200H/M TEST Functions..............................................................................................75 Viewing and Clearing T200H/M WARNING Messages ...............................................................76 APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the DAS .......................................................96 Default Pin Assignments for Rear Panel com Port Connectors (RS-232 DCE & DTE) ........... 109 CPU COM1 & COM2 Connector Pin-Outs in RS-232 mode. ................................................... 110 COM – LAN / Internet Manual Configuration............................................................................ 115 Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode.................................................................................... 120 RS-232-Multidrop Host-to-Analyzer Interconnect Diagram ...................................................... 121 Analog Output Connector Key .................................................................................................. 131 Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs ....................................................................................... 151 Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs ...................................................................................... 153 Alternative Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs .................................................................... 154 DIAG – Analog Inputs (Option) Configuration Menu ................................................................ 157 Status Output Connector .......................................................................................................... 167 Control Inputs with local 5 V power supply ............................................................................... 169 Control Inputs with external 5 V power supply ......................................................................... 169 APICOM Remote Control Program Interface ........................................................................... 175 Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency......................................... 187 Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50A) ................................................. 191 Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (50D) –Using Bottled Span Gas.............. 192 Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50) ................................................... 196 Sample Particulate Filter Assembly .......................................................................................... 208 Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer ....................................................................................... 209 NO2 Converter Assembly.......................................................................................................... 211 Reaction Cell Assembly............................................................................................................ 213 Critical Flow Orifice Assembly .................................................................................................. 214 Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages ................................................................................ 219 Switching Signal I/O Functions ................................................................................................. 221 Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator .................................................................................. 222 Relay Board PCA...................................................................................................................... 223 T200H – Basic Internal Gas Flow ............................................................................................. 226 T200H – Internal Gas Flow with Ambient Zero Span, OPT 50A .............................................. 227 T200H – Internal Gas Flow with O2 Sensor, OPT 65A............................................................. 228 T200M – Basic Internal Gas Flow............................................................................................. 229 T200M – Internal Gas Flow with Ambient Zero Span, OPT 50A.............................................. 230 T200M – Internal Gas Flow with O2 Sensor, OPT 65A ............................................................ 231 Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers .......................................................................... 241 Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7)............................................................................................... 242 Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2) ....................................................................... 243 Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP6) ....................................................................... 244 Typical Set Up of Status Output Test ....................................................................................... 248 Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly............................................................................................ 253 Pre-Amplifier Board Layout....................................................................................................... 259 T200H/M Sensor Assembly ...................................................................................................... 260 3-Port Reaction Cell Oriented to the Sensor Housing .............................................................. 261 Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place............................................................................ 263 Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations .................................................................................... 263 T200H/M Sensitivity Spectrum ................................................................................................. 268 NO2 Conversion Principle ......................................................................................................... 269 07270B DCN6512 xv Table of Contents Figure 8-3: Figure 8-4: Figure 8-5: Figure 8-6: Figure 8-7: Figure 8-8: Figure 8-9: Figure 8-10: Figure 8-11: Figure 8-12: Figure 8-13: Figure 8-14: Figure 8-15: Figure 8-16: Figure 8-17: Figure 8-18: Figure 8-19: Figure 8-20: Figure 8-21: Figure 8-22: Figure 8-23: Figure 8-24: Figure 8-25: Figure 8-26: Figure 9-1: Figure 9-2: Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Reaction Cell with PMT Tube ................................................................................................... 270 Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle ................................................................................. 271 External Pump Pack ................................................................................................................. 275 Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T200H............................................................... 277 Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T200M .............................................................. 278 Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice ......................................................................... 279 Ozone Generator Principle ....................................................................................................... 282 Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process ........................................................................... 283 T200H/M Perma Pure® Dryer ................................................................................................... 284 Vacuum Manifold ...................................................................................................................... 286 Dilution Manifold ....................................................................................................................... 288 Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation ................................................................................... 289 T200H/M Electronic Block Diagram.......................................................................................... 290 T200H/M CPU Board Annotated .............................................................................................. 291 PMT Housing Assembly ........................................................................................................... 293 Basic PMT Design .................................................................................................................... 294 PMT Cooling System ................................................................................................................ 295 PMT Preamp Block Diagram .................................................................................................... 296 Heater Control Loop Block Diagram. ........................................................................................ 298 Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs............................................................... 299 Status LED Locations – Relay PCA.......................................................................................... 301 Power Distribution Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 305 Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram.................................................................... 306 Basic Software Operation ......................................................................................................... 307 Triboelectric Charging............................................................................................................... 311 Basic anti-ESD Work Station .................................................................................................... 314 LIST OF TABLES Table 2-1: Table 3-1: Table 3-4: Table 3-5: Table 3-6: Table 5-5: Table 3-8: Table 3-9: Table 3-10: Table 3-11: Table 4-1: Table 4-2: Table 4-3: Table 4-4: Table 4-5: Table 4-6: Table 4-7: Table 4-8: Table 4-9: Table 4-10: Table 4-11: Table 4-13: Table 4-14: Table 4-15: Table 4-16: Table 4-17: xvi Model T200H/M Basic Unit Specifications...................................................................................23 Analog Output Data Type Default Settings..................................................................................34 Analog Output Pin-Outs...............................................................................................................34 Status Output Signals ..................................................................................................................35 Control Input Signals ...................................................................................................................38 Alarm Relay Output Assignments................................................................................................39 Inlet / Outlet Connector Descriptions ...........................................................................................42 NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases ................................................43 Zero/Span Valve States...............................................................................................................51 Two-Point Span Valve Operating States .....................................................................................53 Analyzer Operating modes ..........................................................................................................73 Test Functions Defined................................................................................................................74 List of Warning Messages ...........................................................................................................76 Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions .............................................................................77 Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions ........................................................................78 Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS.................................................................................80 DAS Data Channel Properties .....................................................................................................81 DAS Data Parameter Functions ..................................................................................................82 T200H/M Default DAS Configuration...........................................................................................84 Password Levels..........................................................................................................................99 COM Port Communication modes ............................................................................................ 104 LAN/Internet Configuration Properties...................................................................................... 113 Internet Configuration Menu Button Functions ......................................................................... 116 Variable Names (VARS) ........................................................................................................... 124 T200H/M Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions .................................................................................... 127 Analog Output Voltage Ranges with Over-Range Active ......................................................... 131 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 4-18: Table 4-19: Table 4-20: Table 4-21: Table 4-22: Table 4-23: Table 4-24: Table 4-25: Table 4-26: Table 4-27: Table 4-28: Table 4-30: Table 4-31: Table 4-32: Table 4-33: Table 4-34: Table 6-28: Table 4-35: Table 4-36: Table 5-1: Table 5-2: Table 5-3: Table 5-4: Table 5-5: Table 6-1: Table 6-2: Table 7-4: Table 7-5: Table 7-6: Table 7-7: Table 7-8: Table 7-9: Table 7-10: Table 7-11: Table 8-1: Table 8-2: Table 8-3: Table8-4: Table 8-5: Table 9-1: Table 9-2: Table of Contents Analog Output Pin Assignments ............................................................................................... 131 Analog Output Current Loop Range ......................................................................................... 132 Example of Analog Output Configuration for T200H/M ............................................................ 132 DIAG - Analog I/O Functions .................................................................................................... 134 Analog Output Data Type Default Settings............................................................................... 140 Analog Output DAS Parameters Related to Gas Concentration Data ..................................... 141 Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration ................................................................... 151 Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor ......................................................................... 154 T200H/M Available Concentration Display Values ................................................................... 158 T200H/M Concentration Display Default Values ...................................................................... 159 Concentration Alarm Default Settings....................................................................................... 166 Control Input Pin Assignments ................................................................................................. 168 Terminal Mode Software Commands ....................................................................................... 170 Command Types....................................................................................................................... 170 Serial Interface Documents ...................................................................................................... 176 RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol ....................................................... 177 T200H/M Hessen Protocol Response Modes .......................................................................... 178 T200H/M Hessen GAS ID List .................................................................................................. 180 Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments ................................................................................... 181 NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases ............................................. 185 AutoCal Modes ......................................................................................................................... 201 AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters......................................................................................... 201 Example Auto-Cal Sequence.................................................................................................... 202 Calibration Data Quality Evaluation .......................................................................................... 204 T200H/M Preventive Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................... 206 Predictive Uses for Test Functions ........................................................................................... 207 Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2) ............................................................... 243 Power Configuration for Optional AC Heaters (JP6) ................................................................ 244 DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code........................................................................... 245 DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels ....................................................................................... 245 Relay Board Control Devices.................................................................................................... 246 Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values ....................................................................... 247 Status Outputs Pin Assignments ............................................................................................. 248 Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs ................................................................................ 252 List of Interferents ..................................................................................................................... 273 T200H/M Valve Cycle Phases .................................................................................................. 276 T200H/M Critical Flow Orifice Diameters and Gas Flow Rates................................................ 280 Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs............................................................... 299 Typical Thermocouple Settings ................................................................................................ 300 Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities ...................................................................... 312 Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD ............................................................... 312 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION APPENDIX B - T200H/M SPARE PARTS LIST APPENDIX C - REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE - T200H/M APPENDIX D - ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS 07270B DCN6512 xvii Table of Contents Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. xviii 07270B DCN6512 1. INTRODUCTION, FEATURES, AND OPTIONS 1.1. OVERVIEW The Models T200H and T200M (also referred to in this manual as T200H/M when applicable to both models) use the proven chemiluminescence measurement principle, coupled with state-of-the-art microprocessor technology for monitoring high and medium levels of nitrogen oxides. User-selectable analog output ranges and a linear response over the entire measurement range make them ideal for a wide variety of applications, including extractive and dilution CEM, stack testing, and process control. 1.2. FEATURES The Models T200H and T200M include the following features: LCD Graphical User Interface with capacitive touch screen Bi-directional RS-232, and 10/100Base-T Ethernet (optional USB and RS-485) ports for remote operation Front panel USB ports for peripheral devices T200H: 0-5 ppm to 0-5000 ppm, user selectable T200M: 0-1 to 0-200 ppm, user selectable Independent ranges for NO, NO2, NOX Auto ranging and remote range selection NOX-only or NO-only modes Microprocessor controlled for versatility Multi-tasking software allows viewing of test variables while operating Continuous self checking with alarms Permeation drier on ozone generator Digital status outputs provide instrument condition Adaptive signal filtering optimizes response time Temperature & pressure compensation, automatic zero correction Converter efficiency correction software Minimum CO2 and H2O interference Catalytic ozone scrubber Internal data logging with 1 min to 365 day multiple averages 1.3. USING THIS MANUAL The flowcharts in this manual contain typical representations of the analyzer’s display during the various operations being described. These representations are not intended to be exact and may differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument. 07270B DCN6512 19 Introduction, Features, and Options Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 1.4. OPTIONS Option Number Option Description/Notes Reference Pumps meet all typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting same pneumatic performance. Pumps 11A Ship without pump N/A 11B Pumpless Pump Pack N/A 12A Internal Pump 115V @ 60 Hz N/A 12B Internal Pump 220V @ 60 Hz N/A 12C Internal Pump 220V @ 50 Hz N/A Rack Mount Kits Options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks 20A Rack mount brackets with 26 in. (660 mm) chassis slides N/A 20B Rack mount brackets with 24 in. (610 mm) chassis slides N/A 21 Rack mount brackets only (compatible with carrying strap, Option 29) N/A Rack mount for external pump pack (no slides) N/A 23 Carrying Strap/Handle Side-mounted strap for hand-carrying analyzer Extends from “flat” position to accommodate hand for carrying. 29 Recesses to 9mm (3/8”) dimension for storage. Can be used with rack mount brackets, Option 21. N/A Cannot be used with rack mount slides. CAUTION – GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD THE T200H OR T200M ANALYZER WEIGHS ABOUT 18 KG (40 POUNDS). TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY WE RECOMMEND THAT TWO PERSONS LIFT AND CARRY THE ANALYZER. DISCONNECT ALL CABLES AND TUBING FROM THE ANALYZER BEFORE MOVING IT. Analog Input and USB port 64B Current Loop Analog Outputs Used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation (such as meteorological instruments). Also can be used for logging these signals in the analyzer’s internal DAS Section 3.4.2 Adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog outputs. Can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA. 41 May be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs. Section 3.4.5 Can be installed at the factory or retrofitted in the field. Parts Kits Spare parts and expendables 42A Expendables Kit includes a recommended set of expendables for one year of operation of this instrument including replacement sample particulate filters. Appendix B Used to control the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources, rather than manually switching the rear panel pneumatic connections. Calibration Valves AMBIENT ZERO AND AMBIENT SPAN VALVES 50A Zero Air and Span Gas input supplied at ambient pressure. Gases controlled by 2 internal valves; SAMPLE/CAL & ZERO/SPAN. Section 3.5.3.1 ZERO SCRUBBER AND DUAL PRESSURIZED SPAN VALVES 50D 20 Zero Air Scrubber produces/supplies zero air to the ZERO inlet port. Dual Pressurized Span Valves for two gas mixtures to separate inlet ports, HIGH SPAN and LOW SPAN. Section 3.5.3.2 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Option Option Number Communication Cables Introduction, Features, and Options Description/Notes Reference For remote serial, network and Internet communication with the analyzer. Type Description Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-25M cable, about 1.8 m long. Used to interface with older computers or code activated switches with DB-25 serial connectors. Section 3.4.8 60A RS-232 60B RS-232 Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about 1.8 m length. Section 3.4.8 60C Ethernet Patch cable, 2 meters long, used for Internet and LAN communications. Section 3.4.8 60D USB Cable for direct connection between instrument (rear panel USB port) and personal computer. Section 3.4.8 USB Port For remote connection 64A Concentration Alarm Relays 61 RS-232 Multidrop For connection to personal computer. (Separate option only when Option 64B, Analog Input and USB Com Port not elected). Sections 3.4.8.2 and 4.11.8 Issues warning when gas concentration exceeds limits set by user. Four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear panel of the instrument. This relay option is different from and in addition to the “Contact Closures” that come standard on all TAPI instruments. Section 3.4.7 Enables communications between host computer and up to eight analyzers. Multidrop card seated on the analyzer’s CPU card. 62 Other Gas Options Each instrument in the multidrop network requres this card and a communications cable (Option 60B). Sections 3.4.8.3 and 4.11.9 Second gas sensor and gas conditioners 65A Oxygen (O2) Sensor Figure 3-23, Figure 3-24 and Sections 3.7.2 and 8.4 86A Sample Gas Conditioner (Dryer/NH3 Removal) for sample gas stream only. Converts analyzer to dual-conditioner instrument. (contact Sales) 87 Special Features N/A Sample Oxygenator for proper operation of the NO2-to-NO catalytic converter. Injects oxygen into sample gas that is depleted of oxygen. Built in features, software activated Maintenance Mode Switch, located inside the instrument, places the analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling, yet ignore calibration, diagnostic, and reset instrument commands. This feature is of particular use for instruments connected to Multidrop or Hessen protocol networks. (contact Sales) N/A Call Customer Service for activation. N/A Second Language Switch activates an alternate set of display messages in a language other than the instrument’s default language. N/A Call Customer Service for a specially programmed Disk on Module containing the second language. N/A Dilution Ratio Option allows the user to compensate for diluted sample gas, such as in continuous emission monitoring (CEM) where the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas. Section 4.8.2 Call Customer Service for activation. 07270B DCN6512 21 Introduction, Features, and Options Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. 22 07270B DCN6512 2. SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS 2.1. T200H/M OPERATING SPECIFICATIONS Table 2-1: Min/Max Range (Physical Analog Output) Model T200H/M Basic Unit Specifications T200H: Min: 0-5 ppm; Max: 0-5000 ppm T200M: Min: 0-1 ppm; Max: 0-200 ppm 3 Measurement Units ppm, mg/m (user selectable) Zero Noise <20 ppb (RMS) Span Noise <0.2% of reading above 20 ppm Lower Detectable Limit 40 ppb (2x noise as per USEPA) Zero Drift (24 hours) <20 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.) Zero Drift (7 days) <20 ppb (at constant temperature and voltage.) Span Drift (7 Days) <1% of reading (at constant temperature and voltage.) Linearity 1% of full scale Precision 0.5% of reading Lag Time 20 s Rise/Fall Time Gas Flow Rates 95% in <60 s (~10 s in NO only or NOX only modes) T200H: 40 cm³/min sample gas through NO2 converter & sensor module 250 cm3/min ± 10% through bypass manifold 290 cm³/min total flow T200M: 250 cm³/min sample gas through NO2 converter & sensor module O2 Sensor option adds 80 cm³/min to total flow though T200H/M when installed. Temperature Range 5 - 40 C operating range Humidity Range 0-95% RH non-condensing Dimensions H x W x D 18 cm x 43 cm x 61 cm (7" x 17" x 23.6") Weight, Analyzer 18 kg (40 lbs) without options Weight, Ext Pump Pack 7 kg (16 lbs) AC Power T200H: 100V-120V, 60 Hz (175W) 220V-240V, 50 Hz (155W) Power, Ext Pump 100 V, 50 Hz (300 W); 100 V, 60 Hz (255 W); 115 V, 60 Hz (285 W); 220 - 240 V, 50 Hz (270 W); 230 V, 60 Hz (270 W) T200M: 100V-120V, 60 Hz (55W) 220V-240V, 50 Hz (75W) Environmental Installation category (over-voltage category) II; Pollution degree 2 Analog Outputs 4 user configurable outputs Analog Output Ranges All Outputs: 0.1 V, 1 V, 5 V or 10 V Three outputs convertible to 4-20 mA isolated current loop. All Ranges with 5% under/over-range Analog Output Resolution 1 part in 4096 of selected full-scale voltage (12 bit) Status Outputs 8 Status outputs from opto-isolators, 7 defined, 1 spare Control Inputs 6 Control inputs, 4 defined, 2 spare Alarm outputs 2 relay alarms outputs (Optional equipment) with user settable alarm limits - 1 Form C: SPDT; 3 Amp @ 125 VAC Standard I/O 1 Ethernet: 10/100Base-T 2 RS-232 (300 – 115,200 baud) 2 USB device ports 8 opto-isolated digital outputs 6 opto-isolated digital inputs 4 analog outputs Optional I/O 1 USB com port 1 RS485 8 analog inputs (0-10V, 12-bit) 4 digital alarm outputs Multidrop RS232 3 4-20mA current outputs 07270B DCN6512 23 Specifications and Approvals Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 2.2. APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS The Teledyne API Nitrogen Oxides Analyzers T200H and T200M were tested and certified for Safety and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). This section presents the compliance statements for those requirements and directives. 2.2.1. SAFETY IEC 61010-1:2001, Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control, and laboratory use. CE: 2006/95/EC, Low-Voltage Directive North American: cNEMKO (Canada): CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1-04 NEMKO-CCL (US): UL No. 61010-1 (2nd Edition) 2.2.2. EMC EN 61326-1 (IEC 61326-1), Class A Emissions/Industrial Immunity EN 55011 (CISPR 11), Group 1, Class A Emissions FCC 47 CFR Part 15B, Class A Emissions CE: 2004/108/EC, Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 24 07270B DCN6512 3. GETTING STARTED 3.1. UNPACKING AND INITIAL SETUP CAUTION THE T200H AND THE T200M EACH WEIGHS ABOUT 18 KG (40 POUNDS) WITHOUT OPTIONS INSTALLED. TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY, WE RECOMMEND TO USE TWO PERSONS TO LIFT AND CARRY THE ANALYZER. CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system. Damage resulting from failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. See A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge section in this manual for more information on preventing ESD damage. Note It is recommended that you store shipping containers/materials for future use if/when the instrument should be returned to the factory for repair and/or calibration service. See Warranty section in this manual and shipping procedures on our Website at http://www.teledyne-api.com under Customer Support > Return Authorization. WARNING NEVER DISCONNECT ELECTRONIC CIRCUIT BOARDS, WIRING HARNESSES OR ELECTRONIC SUBASSEMBLIES WHILE THE UNIT IS UNDER POWER. 1. Inspect the received packages for external shipping damage. If damaged, please advise the shipper first, then Teledyne API. 2. Included with your analyzer is a printed record of the final performance characterization performed on your instrument at the factory. This record, titled Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04413) is an important quality assurance and calibration record for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality records file for this instrument. 3. Carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for internal shipping damage, as follows: a. Remove the set-screw located in the top, center of the front panel. 07270B DCN6512 25 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual b. Remove the 2 screws fastening the top cover to the unit (one per side towards the rear). c. Slide the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer’s front bezel. d. Lift the cover straight up. 4. Inspect the interior of the instrument to make sure all circuit boards and other components are in good shape and properly seated. 5. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic hoses to make sure they are firmly and properly seated. 6. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed. These are checked on the paperwork (Form 04490) accompanying the analyzer. 3.2. VENTILATION CLEARANCE Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be sure to leave sufficient ventilation clearance. AREA MINIMUM REQUIRED CLEARANCE Back of the instrument 10 cm / 4 inches Sides of the instrument 2.5 cm / 1 inch Above and below the instrument. 2.5 cm / 1 inch 3.3. T200H/M LAYOUT Figure 3-1 shows the front panel layout of the analyzer, and Figure 3-4 shows the rear panel with optional zero-air scrubber mounted to it and two optional fittings for the IZS option. Figure 3-5 shows a top-down view of the analyzer. This configuration includes the IZS option, zero-air scrubber and an additional sample dryer (briefly described in Section 1.4). 26 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-1: Figure 3-2: Getting Started Front Panel Display Screen and Touch Control CAUTION – Avoid Damaging Touch screen Do not use hard-surfaced instruments such as pens to operate the touch screen. 07270B DCN6512 27 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual The front panel liquid crystal display screen includes touch control. Upon analyzer startup, the screen shows a splash screen and other initialization indicators before the main display appears, similar to Figure 3-2 above (may or may not display a Fault alarm). The LEDs on the display screen indicate the Sample, Calibration and Fault states; also on the screen is the gas concentration field (Conc), which displays real-time readouts for the primary gas and for the secondary gas if installed. The display screen also shows what mode the analyzer is currently in, as well as messages and data (Param). Along the bottom of the screen is a row of touch control buttons; only those that are currently applicable will have a label. Table 3-1 provides detailed information for each component of the screen. Table 3-1: Field Status Conc Display Screen and Touch Control Description Description/Function LEDs indicating the states of Sample, Calibration and Fault, as follows: Name Color State Definition Unit is not operating in sample mode, DAS is disabled. Off Sample Mode active; Front Panel Display being updated; DAS data On SAMPLE Green being stored. Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display being updated, Blinking DAS hold-off mode is ON, DAS disabled Auto Cal disabled Off CAL Yellow Auto Cal enabled On Unit is in calibration mode Blinking Off No warnings exist FAULT Red Blinking Warnings exist Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer in the currently selected units of measure Mode Displays the name of the analyzer’s current operating mode Param Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operational data, test function values and response messages during interactive tasks. Control Buttons Displays dynamic, context sensitive labels on each button, which is blank when inactive until applicable. Figure 3-3 shows how the front panel display is mapped to the menu charts illustrated in this manual. The Mode, Param (parameters), and Conc (gas concentration) fields in the display screen are represented across the top row of each menu chart. The eight touch control buttons along the bottom of the display screen are represented in the bottom row of each menu chart. 28 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-3: Getting Started Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts The rear panel is illustrated in Figure 3-4 and described in Table 3-2. 07270B DCN6512 29 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-4: T200H/M Rear Panel Layout Table 3-2: Rear Panel Description Component Function Cooling Fan Pulls ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausts through rear. Connector for three-prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer. AC power connector CAUTION! The cord’s power specifications (specs) MUST comply with the power specs on the analyzer’s rear panel Model number label Model label Identifies the analyzer model number and provides voltage and frequency specs Connect a gas line from the source of sample gas here. SAMPLE Calibration gases are also inlet here on units without zero/span valve options installed. Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters long here that leads outside EXHAUST the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument. On units with zero/span valve options installed, connect a gas line to the source of SPAN 1 calibrated span gas here. ZERO AIR Internal Zero Air: On units with zero/span valve options installed but no internal zero air (option) scrubber attach a gas line to the source of zero air here. RX TX LEDs indicate receive (RX) and transmit (TX) activity on the when blinking. COM 2 Serial communications port for RS-232 or RS-485. RS-232 Serial communications port for RS-232 only. Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment DCE DTE during RS-232 communication. STATUS For outputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs). ANALOG OUT For voltage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and/or a data logger. CONTROL IN For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes. ALARM Option for concentration alarms and system warnings. ETHERNET Connector for network or Internet remote communication, using Ethernet cable Option for external voltage signals from other instrumentation and for logging these ANALOG IN signals. USB Option for direct connection to laptop computer, using USB cable. 30 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-5: 07270B DCN6512 Getting Started T200H/M Internal Layout 31 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 3.4. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS Note To maintain compliance with EMC standards, it is required that the cable length be no greater than 3 meters for all I/O connections, which include Analog In, Analog Out, Status Out, Control In, Ethernet/LAN, USB, RS-232, and RS-485. Refer to Figure 3-4 for the location of the rear panel electrical and pneumatic connections. 3.4.1. POWER CONNECTION Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying at least 10 A current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning earth ground. CAUTION CHECK THE VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY SPECIFICATIONS ON THE REAR PANEL LABEL SHOWING THE MODEL NAME AND NUMBER OF THE INSTRUMENT FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THE LOCAL POWER BEFORE PLUGGING THE T200H/M INTO LINE POWER. Do not plug in the power cord if the voltage or frequency is incorrect. WARNING – RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE INSTRUMENT’S CHASSIS. POWER CONNECTION MUST HAVE FUNCTIONING GROUND CONNECTION. DO NOT DEFEAT THE GROUND WIRE ON POWER PLUG. TURN OFF ANALYZER POWER BEFORE CONNECTING ELECTRICAL SUBASSEMBLIES. DISCONNECTING OR DO NOT OPERATE WITH COVER OFF. The T200H/M analyzer can be configured for both 100-130 V and 210-240 V at either 50 or 60 Hz. To avoid damage to your analyzer, make sure that the AC power voltage matches the voltage indicated on the rear panel serial number label and that the frequency is between 47 and 63 Hz. 32 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started 3.4.2. ANALOG INPUTS (OPTION 64) CONNECTIONS The Analog In connector is used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation (such as meteorological instruments) and for logging these signals in the analyzer’s internal DAS. The input voltage range for each analog input is 0-10 VDC, and the input impedance is nominally 20kΩ in parallel with 0.1µF. Figure 3-6: Analog In Connector Pin assignments for the Analog In connector are presented in Table 3-3. Table 3-3: PIN DESCRIPTION DAS PARAMETER1 1 Analog input # 1 AIN 1 2 Analog input # 2 AIN 2 3 Analog input # 3 AIN 3 4 Analog input # 4 AIN 4 5 Analog input # 5 AIN 5 6 Analog input # 6 AIN 6 7 Analog input # 7 AIN 7 8 GND 1 Analog Input Pin Assignments Analog input # 8 AIN 8 Analog input Ground N/A See Section 4.7 for details on setting up the DAS. 3.4.3. ANALOG OUTPUT CONNECTIONS The T200H/M is equipped with four analog output channels accessible through a connector on the back panel of the instrument. Each of these outputs may be set to reflect the value of any of the instrument’s DAS data types. (see Table A-6 of T200H/M Appendix A – P/N 05147). The following table lists the default settings for each of these channels. To change these settings, see Sections 6.13.4 07270B DCN6512 33 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 3-1: PARAMETER DATA TYPE1 Analog Output Data Type Default Settings CHANNEL DEFAULT SETTING A1 A2 NXCNC1 NOCNC1 RANGE 0 - 5 VDC2 REC OFS 0 mVDC AUTO CAL. ON CALIBRATED NO OUTPUT ON SCALE 100 ppm UPDATE 5 sec A3 A43 N2CNC1 NXCNC2 1 See Table A-6 of T200H/M Appendix A for definitions of these DAS data types 2 Optional current loop outputs are available for analog output channels A1-A3. 3 On analyzers with O2 sensor options installed, DAS parameter O2CONC is assigned to output A4. To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate contacts of the analog output connecter on the rear panel of the analyzer. A1 + - Figure 3-7: Table 3-4: ANALOG OUT A2 A3 + + - A4 + - Analog Output Connector Analog Output Pin-Outs PIN ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE SIGNAL CURRENT SIGNAL 1 A1 V Out I Out + 2 3 A2 4 5 A3 6 7 8 A4 Ground I Out - V Out I Out + Ground I Out - V Out I Out + Ground I Out - V Out Not Available Ground Not Available 3.4.4. CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS The analyzer’s status outputs to interface with a device that accepts logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable logic controller (PLC) chips, are accessed through a 12 pin connector labeled STATUS on the analyzer’s rear panel. 34 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started Figure 3-8: Note 8 + D FOR PINS 1-8 7 EMITTER BUS 6 LOW SPAN 5 DIAGNOSTIC MODE 4 SPAN CAL 3 ZERO CAL 2 HIGH RANGE SYSTEM OK 1 CONC VALID STATUS Status Output Connector Most PLCs have internal provisions for limiting the amount of current the input will draw. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, external resistors must be used to limit the current through the individual transistor outputs to ≤50mA (120 Ω for 5V supply). Table 3-5: Status Output Signals PIN # STATUS 1 SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present. CONDITION (ON = CONDUCTING) 2 CONC VALID ON if concentration measurement (NO, NO2 or NOx) is valid. OFF any time the hold-off feature is active. 3 HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of the Auto Range Mode. 4 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO point calibration mode. 5 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN point calibration mode. 6 DIAG MODE 7 LOW SPAN CAL 8 Not Used D EMITTER BUS ON whenever the instrument is in diagnostic mode. ON when in low span calibration (optional equipment necessary) The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are tied together. Not Used + DC POWER + 5 VDC, 300 mA (combined rating with Control Output, if used). Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies 07270B DCN6512 35 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 3.4.5. CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS (OPT 41) SETUP This option adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog outputs. This option may be ordered separately for the first three of the analog outputs and can be installed at the factory or added later. Call Teledyne API sales for pricing and availability. The current loop option can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA (for example 0-20, 2-20 or 4-20 mA). Information on calibrating or adjusting these outputs can be found in Section 4.13.6.3. CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system. Damage resulting from failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. See A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge in this manual for more information on preventing ESD damage. Figure 3-9: 36 Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started 3.4.5.1. Converting Current Loop Analog Outputs to Standard Voltage Outputs. CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system. Damage resulting from failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. See A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge in this manual for more information on preventing ESD damage. To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC output operation: 1. Turn off power to the analyzer. 2. If a recording device was connected to the output being modified, disconnect it. 3. Remove the top cover: a. Remove the set screw located in the top, center of the rear panel b. Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit (four per side). c. Lift the cover straight up. 4. Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the motherboard. 5. Place a shunt between the leftmost two pins of the connector (see Figure 3-9). 6. Reattach the top case to the analyzer. The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage-sensing, recording device attached to that output. 07270B DCN6512 37 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 3.4.6. CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS Control Inputs are used to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes. Locate the 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear panel. There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available from the pin labeled “+” is the most convenient method. However, if full isolation is required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be used. CONTROL IN + A B C D Figure 3-10: Table 3-6: U + 5 VDC Power Supply + Control Input Connector Control Input Signals ON CONDITION A REMOTE ZERO CAL The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode. The mode field of the display will read ZERO CAL R. B REMOTE SPAN CAL The analyzer is placed in Span Calibration mode. The mode field of the display will read SPAN CAL R. C REMOTE LO SPAN CAL The analyzer is placed in low span calibration mode as part of performing a low span (midpoint) calibration. The mode field of the display will read LO CAL R. D REMOTE RANGE HI The analyzer is placed into high range when configured for dual ranges.. E SPARE F SPARE U + 38 STATUS DEFINITION F External Power Connections Local Power Connections INPUT # E RANGE HI U LOW SPAN F SPAN CAL E ZERO CAL D RANGE HI C LOW SPAN B SPAN CAL ZERO CAL A CONTROL IN Digital Ground The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies (same as chassis ground). External Power input Input pin for +5 VDC required to activate pins A - F. 5 VDC output Internally generated 5V DC power. To activate inputs A - F, place a jumper between this pin and the “U” pin. The maximum amperage through this port is 300 mA (combined with the analog output supply, if used). 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started 3.4.7. CONNECTING THE ALARM RELAY OPTION (OPT 61) The T200H/M can be equipped with a set of 2 concentration alarms. Each alarm can be independently enabled or disabled as well as programmed with its own, individual alarm limit point (see Section 4.14 for details on programming the alarms). The status of each alarm is available via a set of alarm relay outputs located on the lower right hand corner of the analyzer’s rear panel (see Figure 3-4). While there are four relay outputs on the back of the analyzer, only Two of the outputs correspond to the instrument’s two concentration alarms. Table 5-5: RELAY NAME ASSIGNED ALARM 1 Alarm Relay Output Assignments AL1 1 ST_SYSTEM_OK2 AL2 AL3 AL4 CONCENTRATION ALARM 1 CONCENTRATION ALARM 2 SPARE ST_SYSTEM OK2 is a second system OK status alarm available on some analyzers. ALARM OUT AL2 AL3 AL1 AL4 NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC ST_SYSTEM_OK2 (Optional Alert) CONCENTRATION ALARM 1 Figure 3-11: CONCENTRATION ALARM 2 SPARE Alarm Relay Output Pin Assignments Each of the two concentration relay outputs has 3-pin connections that allow the relay to be connected for either normally open or normally closed operation. Table 3-7 describes how to connect the alarm relays. 07270B DCN6512 39 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 3-7: Concentration Alarm Relay Output Operation RELAY FUNCTION Concentration Alarm 1 AL2 Active C COMMENTS N C Gas concentration level is above the trigger limit set for CONC_ALARM_1 DAS Trigger CONCW1 ACTIVATED Inactive Gas concentration level is below the trigger limit set for CONC_ALARM_1 Concentration Alarm 2 Gas concentration level is above the trigger limit set for CONC_ALARM_2 Active DAS Trigger CONCW2 ACTIVATED CONC ALARM2 WARN appears on Analyzer Display Concentration Alarm 2 Inactive 1 N O CONC ALARM1 WARN appears on Analyzer Display Concentration Alarm 1 AL3 RELAY PIN 1 STATE Gas concentration level is below the trigger limit set for CONC_ALARM_2 NO = Normally Open operation. C = Common NC = Normally Closed operation. 3.4.8. CONNECTING THE COMMUNICATIONS PORTS For RS-232 or RS-485 (option) communications through the analyzer’s two serial interface ports, refer to Section 4.11 for information and connection instructions. 3.4.8.1. Connecting to a LAN or the Internet For network or Internet communication with the analyzer, connect an Ethernet cable from the analyzer’s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet port. See Section 4.11.7 for configuration instructions. Note The T200H/M firmware supports dynamic IP addressing or DHCP. If your network also supports DHCP, the analyzer will automatically configure its LAN connection appropriately. If your network does not support DHCP, see Section 4.11.7.2 for instructions on manually configuring the LAN connection. 3.4.8.2. Connecting to a Personal Computer (PC) If the USB port is configured for direct communication between the analyzer and a desktop or a laptop PC, connect a USB cable between the analyzer and the PC or laptop USB ports, and follow the set-up instructions in Section 4.11.8. (RS-485 communication is not available with the USB com port option). 40 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started 3.4.8.3. Connecting to a Multidrop Network The multidrop option is used with RS-232 and utilizes both com port DB-9 connectors (RS-232 and COM2) on the rear panel to enable communications of up to eight analyzers with the host computer over a chain of RS-232 cables. It is subject to the distance limitations of the RS 232 standard. The option consists of a small printed circuit assembly, which is seated on the analyzer’s CPU card (see Figure 3-12). One Option 62 is required for each analyzer along with one 6’ straight-through, DB9 male DB9 Female cable (P/N WR0000101). If your unit has a Teledyne API RS-232 multidrop card (Option 62), see Section 4.11.9 for instructions on setting it up. Figure 3-12: 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M Multidrop Card 41 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 3.5. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS Note To prevent dust from getting into the analyzer, it was shipped with small plugs inserted into each of the pneumatic fittings on the rear panel. Remove and store the dust plugs for future use, such as storage, moving, shipping. CAUTION! Do not operate this instrument until you’ve removed dust plugs from SAMPLE and EXHAUST ports on the rear panel! Table 3-8: REAR PANEL LABEL SAMPLE EXHAUST Inlet / Outlet Connector Descriptions FUNCTION Connects the sample gas to the analyzer. When operating the analyzer without zero span option, this is also the inlet for any calibration gases. Connects the exhaust of the analyzer with the external vacuum pump. SPAN On Units with a zero/span valve, this port connects the external calibration gas to the analyzer. ZERO AIR On Units with a zero/span valve, this port connects the zero air gas or the zero air cartridge to the analyzer. 3.5.1. ABOUT ZERO AIR AND CALIBRATION (SPAN) GASES 3.5.1.1. Zero Air Zero air or zero calibration gas is defined as a gas that is similar in chemical composition to the measured medium but without the gas to be measured by the analyzer, in this case NO and NO2. If your analyzer is equipped with an external zero air scrubber option, it is capable of creating zero air from ambient air. If your application is not a measurement in ambient air, the zero calibration gas should be matched to the matrix of the measured medium. Pure nitrogen could be used as a zero gas for applications where NOX is measured in nitrogen. Special considerations apply if measuring NOX in a matrix that does not contain oxygen, see Section 8.3.11 for more information. 3.5.1.2. Calibration (Span) Gas Calibration (or Span) gas is a gas specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range. In this case, NOX, NO and NO2 measurements made with the T200H/M, it is recommended that you use a span gas with an NO concentration equal to 80% of the measurement range for your application. EXAMPLE: If the application is to measure between 0 ppm and 500 ppm, an appropriate span gas concentration would be 400 ppm NOx. 42 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started Even though NO gas in nitrogen could be used as a span gas, the matrix of the balance gas is different and may cause interference problems or yield incorrect calibrations. The same applies to gases that contain high concentrations of other compounds (for example, CO2 or H2O). The span gas should match all concentrations of all gases of the measured medium as closely as possible. Cylinders of calibrated NO gas traceable to NIST-standard reference materials specifications (also referred to as EPA protocol calibration gases) are commercially available. Table 3-9: Note 07270B DCN6512 NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases NIST-SRM4 TYPE NOMINAL CONCENTRATION 2627a 2628a 2629a Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 5 ppm 10 ppm 20 ppm 1683b 1684b 1685b 1686b 1687b Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 50 ppm 100 ppm 250 ppm 5000 ppm 1000 ppm 2630 2631a 2635 2636a Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 1500 ppm 3000 ppm 800 ppm 2000 ppm 2631a 1684b Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in N2 Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in N2 3000 ppm 100 ppm If a dynamic dilution system such as the Teledyne API Model T700 is used to dilute high concentration gas standards to low, ambient concentrations, make sure that the NO concentration of the reference gas matches the dilution range of the calibrator. Choose an NO gas concentration that is in the middle of the dilution system’s range. 43 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 3.5.2. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS TO T200H/M BASIC CONFIGURATION Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 show the most common configurations for gas supply and exhaust lines to the Model T200H/M analyzer. Please refer to Figure 3-4 for the locations of pneumatic connections on the rear panel and Table 3-2 for the descriptions. Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE (Teflon) or glass or materials. They should not come in contact with FEP or stainless steel materials. Note Source of MODEL T700 Gas Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE GAS VENT here if input is pressurized Removed during calibration NOx Gas (High Concentration) SAMPLE MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator VENT (if no vent on calibrator) EXHAUST Instrument Chassis PUMP Figure 3-13: 44 Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator 3-way Valve Getting Started Source of SAMPLE GAS Removed during calibration VENT here if input is pressurized NOX Gas (High Concentration) SAMPLE EXHAUST Manual Control Valve VENT Figure 3-14: 07270B DCN6512 Instrument Chassis PUMP Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas 45 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 1. Attach a 1/4" exhaust line between the external pump and the EXHAUST port of the analyzer. 2. Attach an additional 1/4" exhaust port of the pump. CAUTION The exhaust from the analyzer must be vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument and conform to all safety requirements using a maximum of 10 meters of 1/4” PTFE tubing. 3. Attach a sample inlet line to the SAMPLE inlet port. Ideally, the pressure of the sample gas should be equal to ambient atmospheric pressure. Note Maximum pressure of any gas at the SAMPLE inlet should not exceed 1.5 in-Hg above ambient pressure and ideally should equal ambient atmospheric pressure. In applications where the sample gas is received from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be provided to equalize the sample gas with ambient atmospheric pressure before it enters the analyzer. The vented gas must be routed outside the immediate area or shelter surrounding the instrument. 4. Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using procedures defined in Section 7.5.1. Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the internal pneumatic flow of the standard configuration of the T200H and T200M respectively. 46 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-15: 07270B DCN6512 Getting Started T200H Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration 47 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual FLOW PRESSURE SENSOR PCA NO/NOX VALVE SAMPLE GAS INLET NO2 Converter NO COM VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR NC SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR EXHAUST GAS OUTLET COM AUTOZERO VALVE O3 NC GENERATOR EXHAUST MANIFOLD NOX Exhaust Scrubber NO Orifice Dia. 0.007" Orifice Dia. 0.007" REACTION CELL Orifice Dia. 0.004" O3 FLOW SENSOR Getting Started O3 Destruct PMT Filter PUMP PERMAPURE DRYER Figure 3-16: Note INSTRUMENT CHASSIS T200M Internal Pneumatic Block Diagram - Standard Configuration Pneumatic Diagrams do not reflect the physical layout of the instrument. The most significant differences between the T200H and T200M versions in regards to pneumatic flow are: 48 A bypass line leading directly from the particulate filter to the exhaust manifold is present on the T200H, but not in the T200M. The diameter of the critical flow orifice controlling the gas flow into the sample chamber is smaller and therefore the flow rate of sample gas through the instrument is lower. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started 3.5.3. CONNECTIONS WITH INTERNAL VALVE OPTIONS INSTALLED If your analyzer is equipped with either the zero/span valve option (50A) or the 2-span point valve option (50D), the pneumatic connections should be made as shown in Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18: VENT here if input is pressurized Source of SAMPLE Gas at HIGH Span Concentration Calibrated NO MODEL T700 Gas Dilution Calibrator MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator Sample PUMP Exhaust Span Point Instrument Chassis Zero Air Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50A) Source of SAMPLE Gas VENT here if input is pressurized PUMP VENT at LOW Span Concentration VENT On/Off Valves Calibrated NO at HIGH Span Concentration Calibrated NO Figure 3-17: Sample Exhaust High Span Point Low Span Point Instrument Chassis Zero Air Figure 3-18: Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span Point Option (50D) –Using Bottled Span Gas Once the appropriate pneumatic connections have been made, check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using the procedures defined in Section 7.5. 07270B DCN6512 49 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 3.5.3.1. Ambient Zero/Ambient Span Valves (OPT 50A) The Model T200H/M NOx analyzer can be equipped with a zero/span valve option for controlling the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources. This option contains two solenoid valves located inside the analyzer that allow the user to switch either zero, span or sample gas to the instrument’s sensor. The user can control these valves from the front panel keyboard either manually or by activating the instrument’s CAL or AutoCal features (Section 5.8). The valves may also be opened and closed remotely through the serial ports (Section 4.11) or through the external, digital control inputs (Section 4.15). This option also includes a two-stage, external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all NO and NO2 from the zero air source (ambient air). The scrubber is filled with 50% Purafil Chemisorbant® (for conversion of NO to NO2) and 50% activated charcoal (for removal of NO2). This assembly also includes a small particle filter to prevent scrubber particles to enter the analyzer as well as two more rear panel fittings so each gas can enter the analyzer separately. EXHAUST MANIFOLD NOX Exhaust Scrubber O3 FLOW SENSOR Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-20 show the internal, pneumatic layouts with the zero/span valve option installed for a Model T200H and T200M respectively. Filter Figure 3-19: 50 T200H – Internal Pneumatics with Ambient Zero-Span Valve Option 50A 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-20: Getting Started T200M – Internal Pneumatics with Ambient Zero-Span Valve Option 50A Table 3-10: Zero/Span Valve States MODE VALVE CONDITION Sample/Cal Open to sample gas inlet Zero/Span Open to zero air inlet ZERO CALIBRATION Sample/Cal Open to zero/span inlet (activated) Zero/Span Open to zero air inlet SPAN CALIBRATION Sample/Cal Open to zero/span inlet (activated) SAMPLE Zero/Span Open to span gas inlet / IZS gas (activated) The state of the zero/span valves can also be controlled: Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls located under the DIAG Menu (Section 4.13.2), By activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (Section 5.8), Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 4.15.1.2) or Ethernet option. Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 4.11). All supply lines should be vented outside of the analyzer’s enclosure. In order to prevent back-diffusion and pressure drop effects, these vent lines should be between 2 and 10 meters in length. 07270B DCN6512 51 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 3.5.3.2. Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span Valve (OPT 50D) The zero air scrubber of Option 50D is a cartridge, which is used to produce and supply zero air to the analyzer’s ZERO inlet port. The cartridge mounts to the outside rear panel and contains two chemicals: 50% volume of Purafil Chemisorbant to convert NO to NO2, followed by 50% volume of charcoal to absorb NO2. The dual pressurized span valves of Option 50D are a special set of valves that allows two separate NOx mixtures to enter the analyzer from two independent sources. Typically these two gas mixtures will come from two, separate, pressurized bottles of certified calibration gas: one mixed to produce a NO, NO2 or NOx concentration equal to the expected span calibration value for the application and the other mixed to produce a concentration at or near the midpoint of the intended measurement range. Individual gas inlets, labeled HIGH SPAN and LOW SPAN are provided at the back on the analyzer. The valves allow the user to switch between the two sources via the front panel touchscreen control buttons or from a remote location by way of either the analyzer’s digital control inputs or by sending commands over its serial I/O port(s). Note 52 The analyzer’s software only allows the SLOPE and OFFSET to be calculated when sample is being routed through the HIGH SPAN inlet. The LOW SPAN gas is for midpoint reference checks only. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started The state of the optional valves can be controlled: Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O submenu located under the DIAG menu (Section 4.13.2), By activating the instrument’s CAL or AutoCal features (Section 5.8), Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (Section 4.15.1.2) or Ethernet. Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (Section 4.11). Table 3-11: Two-Point Span Valve Operating States MODE SAMPLE ZERO CAL HIGH SPAN CAL Low Span Check 07270B DCN6512 VALVE CONDITION Sample/Cal Open to SAMPLE inlet Zero Gas Valve Closed to ZERO AIR inlet High Span Valve Closed to HIGH SPAN inlet Low Span Valve Closed to LOW SPAN inlet Sample/Cal Closed to SAMPLE inlet Zero Gas Valve Open to ZERO AIR inlet High Span Valve Closed to HIGH SPAN inlet Low Span Valve Closed to LOW SPAN inlet Sample/Cal Closed to SAMPLE inlet Zero Gas Valve Closed to ZERO AIR inlet High Span Valve Open to HIGH SPAN inlet Low Span Valve Closed to LOW SPAN inlet Sample/Cal Closed to SAMPLE inlet Zero Gas Valve Closed to ZERO AIR inlet High Span Valve Closed to HIGH SPAN inlet Low Span Valve Open to LOW SPAN inlet 53 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. 54 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-21: 07270B DCN6512 Getting Started T200H - Internal Pneumatics for Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span, Option 50D 55 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-22: 56 T200M - Internal Pneumatics for Zero Scrubber/Dual Pressurized Span, Option 50D 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started 3.5.3.3. Internal Flow for O2 Sensor Option 65A Please see Section 3.7.2 for calibration connections and method. NO/NOX VALVE NO2 Converter FLOW PRESSURE SENSOR PCA NO COM NC VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR OPTION, O2 SENSOR, P/N 04453 EXHAUST GAS OUTLET COM AUTOZERO VALVE NC NOX Exhaust Scrubber EXHAUST MANIFOLD O2 Sensor O3 GENERATOR NO Orifice Dia. 0.004" O3 FLOW SENSOR SAMPLE GAS INLET Orifice Dia. 0.007" Orifice Dia. 0.007" REACTION CELL Orifice Dia. 0.004" O3 Destruct PMT Filter PUMP PERMAPURE DRYER Figure 3-23: 07270B DCN6512 INSTRUMENT CHASSIS T200H – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A 57 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 3-24: 58 T200M – Internal Pneumatics with O2 Sensor Option 65A 07270B DCN6512 3.6. INITIAL OPERATION CAUTION! If the presence of ozone is detected at any time, call Teledyne API Technical Support as soon as possible: 800-324-5190 or email: sda_techsupport@teledyne.com If you are unfamiliar with the theory of operation of the T200H/M analyzer, we recommend that you read Section 8 before proceeding. For information on navigating the analyzer’s software menus, see the menu trees described in Appendix A. 3.6.1. STARTUP After the electrical and pneumatic connections are made, an initial functional check is in order. Turn on the instrument. The pump and exhaust fan should start immediately. The display will briefly show a logo splash screen at the start of initialization. The analyzer should automatically switch to Sample Mode after completing the boot-up sequence and start monitoring NOX, NO, NO2 gases. Allow a one-hour warm-up period. During the warm-up period, the front panel display may show messages in the Parameters field, such as WARNING messages. 3.6.2. WARNING MESSAGES During warm-up, internal temperatures and other parameters may be outside of specified limits. The software will suppress most warning conditions for 30 minutes after power up. SAMPLE TEST HVPS WARNING CAL SAMPLE CLR SAMPLE MSG HVPS WARNING CAL MSG TEST deactivates warning messages SETUP RANGE=200.0 PPM < TST TST > CAL TEST MSG NOX = 0.0 NO = 0.0 CLR SETUP NOX = 0.0 CLR NOTE: If the warning message persists after several attempts to clear it, the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm-up period SETUP MSG activates warning messages.keys replaced with TEST key Press CLR to clear the current message. If more than one warning is active, the next message will take its place Once the last warning has been cleared, the analyzer returns to SAMPLE mode Section 4.2.2 provides a table of warning messages with their definitions and the steps to view and clear them. If warning messages persist after 30 minutes, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting guidelines in Section 7. 07270B DCN6512 59 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 3.6.3. FUNCTIONAL CHECK After the analyzer’s components have warmed up for at least 30 minutes, verify that the software properly supports any hardware options that were installed. Check to make sure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters. Appendices A and C include a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer’s front panel as well as their expected values. These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with your analyzer (Section 7). The enclosed Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (part number 04490) lists these values before the instrument left the factory. To view the current values of these test functions press the buttons: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM < TST TST > CAL Toggle to scroll through list of functions 1 default settings for user selectable reporting range settings. 2 Only appears if O 2 sensor option is installed. 60 NOX = XXX SETUP A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM 1 A2:N0CNC1=100 PPM1 1 A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM 1 A4:NXCNC2=100% NOX STB SAMP FLOW OZONE FLOW PMT NORM PMT AZERO HVPS RCELL TEMP BOX TEMP PMT TEMP MF TEMP O2 CELL TEMP 2 MOLY TEMP RCEL SAMP NOX SLOPE NOX OFFSET NO SLOPE NO OFFSET O2 SLOPE 2 2 O2 OFFSET TIME 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started 3.7. CALIBRATION An initial calibration and functional check should be conducted upon first-time startup. Note Once you have completed the followng set-up procedures, please fill out the quality questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it to Teledyne API. This information is vital to our efforts in continuously improving our service and our products. Thank you. 3.7.1. BASIC NOX CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The initial calibration should be carried out using the same reporting range set up as used during the analyzer’s factory calibration. This will allow you to compare your calibration results to the factory calibration as listed on the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet. The following procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any of the available valve options installed. Section 5 contains instructions for calibrating instruments with these options. If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instrument’s analog outputs e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter. Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1 Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2. See Sections 4.13.3 and 4.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges. 07270B DCN6512 61 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual STEP 1 - Set Units: To select the concentration units of measure press: SAMPLE < TST TST > SETUP X.X A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X UNIT Press this button to select the concentration units of measure: PPM RANGE CONTROL MENU DIL SETUP X.X MGM EXIT EXIT CONC UNITS: PPM ENTR EXIT PPM or MGM 62 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started STEP 2 - Dilution Ratio: If the dilution ratio option is enabled on your T200H/M and your application involves diluting the sample gas before it enters the analyzer, set the dilution ratio as follows: SAMPLE < TST TST > A1:NXCNC1=100PPM CAL NOX=XXX.X SETUP SETUP X.X SETUP X.X UNIT PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE RANGE CONTROL MENU DIL EXIT EXIT SETUP X.X 0 0 DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain 0 0 .0 ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to select the dilution ratio factor EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous display.. 07270B DCN6512 63 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual STEP 3 – Set NOx and NO span gas concentrations : Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of concentration values likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable analog outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output (see Section 4.13.4) If you supply NO span gas to the analyzer as well as NOx, the values for expected NO and NOx span gas concentrations need to be identical. SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > CAL SAMPLE NOX NOX=XXX.X SETUP GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 ENTR EXIT SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH M-P CAL ENTR EXIT A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX ZERO SPAN CONC M-P CAL NOX CONCENTRATION MENU NO CONV M-P CAL 0 The NOX & NO span concentration values automatically default to 80.0 Conc. If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the NO X and NO calibration gases. 64 EXIT EXIT NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the CONCENTRATION MENU. If using NO span gas in addition to NOX repeat last step. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started STEP 4 – Zero/Span Calibration : To perform the zero/span calibration procedure: S A M P LE A nalyzer continues to cycle through N O x , N O , and N O 2 m easurem ents throughout this procedure . A 1:N X C N C 1=100P P M < TS T T S T > N O X =X X X .X CAL SETUP T oggle T S T > button until ... S A M P LE N O X S T B = X X X .X P P M < TS T T S T > S et the D isplay to show the N O X S T B test function. T his function calculates the stability of the N O /N O x m easurem ent N O X =X X X .X CAL SETUP A llow zero gas to enter the sam ple port at the rear of the analyzer. W ait until N O X S T B falls below 0.5 ppm . T his m ay take several m inutes. S A M P LE N O X S T B = X X X .X P P M < TS T T S T > S A M P LE NOX G A S T O C A L:N O X E N T R E X IT R A N G E T O C A L :LO W H IG H M -P C A L M -P C A L N O X =X X X .X ZERO CONC N O X S T B = X X X .X P P M ENTR E X IT N O X = X .X X X CONC E X IT A llow span gas to enter the sam ple port at the rear of the analyzer . P ress E N T R to changes the O F F S E T & S LO P E values for both the N O and N O x m easurem ents. P ress E X IT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous m enu. W ait until N O X S T B falls below 0.5 ppm . T his m ay take several m inutes. S A M P LE N O X S T B = X X X .X P P M < TS T T S T > S A M P LE NOX T he S P A N key now appears during the transition from zero to span . Y ou m ay see both keys. G A S T O C A L:N O X E N T R E X IT If either the Z E R O or S P A N buttons fail to appear see S ection 10 for troubleshooting tips . R A N G E T O C A L :LO W H IG H M -P C A L E N T R E X IT N O X S T B = X X X .X P P M < T S T T S T > ZE R O S P A N C O N C M -P C A L N O X S T B = X X X .X P P M ENTR M -P C A L CONC N O X S T B = X X X .X P P M ENTR 07270B DCN6512 N O X =X X X .X SETUP O2 S A M P LE LO W CAL CONC N O X =X .X X X E X IT N O X = X .X X X E X IT N O X = X .X X X E X IT P ress E N T R to changes the O F F S E T & S LO P E values for both the N O and N O x m easurem ents. P ress E X IT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous m enu. E X IT at this point returns to the S A M P LE m enu . 65 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 3.7.2. BASIC O2 SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE If your instrument has an O2 sensor option installed that should be calibrated as well. 3.7.2.1. O2 Calibration Setup The pneumatic connections for calibrating are as follows: VENT here if input Source of is pressurized Removed during calibration at HIGH Span Concentration at 20.8% Span Concentration 3-way Valve Calibrated O2 Calibrated N2 SAMPLE GAS SAMPLE EXHAUST Manual Control Valve VENT Figure 3-25: Instrument Chassis PUMP O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up O2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne API’ recommends using pure N2 when calibration the zero point of your O2 sensor option. O2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne API’ recommends using 21% O2 in N2 when calibration the span point of your O2 sensor option. 66 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started 3.7.2.2. O2 Calibration Method STEP 1 – Set O2 span gas concentration : Set the expected O2 span gas concentration. This should be equal to the percent concentration of the O2 span gas of the selected reporting range (default factory setting = 20.8%; the approximate O2 content of ambient air). SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > SAMPLE NOX CAL NOX=XXX.X SETUP GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 ENTR EXIT M-P CAL A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM ZERO SPAN CONC SAMPLE NOX NOX=X.XXX EXIT GAS TO CAL:O2 O2 ENTR EXIT M-P CAL 0 The O2 span concentration value automatically defaults to 20.8 %. If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the O2 calibration gases. 07270B DCN6512 O2 SPAN CONC:20.8% 2 0 .8 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. 67 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual STEP 2 – Activate O2 sensor stability function To change the stability test function from NOx concentration to the O2 sensor output, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > SETUP X.X NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X SETUP X.X EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT SETUP X.X 2) STABIL_GAS=NOX JUMP SETUP X.X 8 1 ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X NO NO2 SETUP X.X Press ENTR to keep changes, then press EXIT 3 times to return to SAMPLE menu Note 68 EDIT PRNT EXIT NO NO2 STABIL_GAS:NOX NOX O2 ENTR EXIT STABIL_GAS:O2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to NOx when the O2 calibration procedure is complete. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Getting Started STEP 4 – O2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION : To perform the zero/span calibration procedure: The Model T200H/M analyzer is now ready for operation. 07270B DCN6512 69 Getting Started Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. 70 07270B DCN6512 4. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS To assist in navigating the analyzer’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in Appendix A of this manual. Note The flow charts appearing in this section contain typical representations of the analyzer’s display during the various operations being described. These representations may differ slightly from the actual display of your instrument. The ENTR button may disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter, such as trying to set the 24hour clock to 25:00:00. Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR button will re-appear. 4.1. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES The T200H/M software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the analyzer will be operating in SAMPLE mode. In this mode, a continuous read-out of the NO, NO2 and NOx concentrations are displayed on the front panel and are available to be output as analog signals from the analyzer’s rear panel terminals. Also, calibrations can be performed, and TEST functions and WARNING messages can be examined. The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for performing certain configuration operations, such as for the DAS system, configuring the reporting ranges, or the serial (RS-232/RS-485/Ethernet) communication channels. The SET UP mode is also used for performing various diagnostic tests during troubleshooting. 07270B DCN6512 71 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 4-1: Front Panel Display with “SAMPLE” Indicated in the Mode Field The mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the unit is currently running. In addition to SAMPLE and SETUP, other modes the analyzer can be operated in are: 72 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 4-1: MODE Operating Instructions Analyzer Operating modes EXPLANATION SAMPLE Sampling normally, flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on. M-P CAL This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing the CAL key. SETUP X.#2 SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer. The gas measurement will continue during this process. SAMPLE A Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated. ZERO CAL M1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by the user. ZERO CAL A1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically by the AUTOCAL feature. ZERO CAL R1 Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs. LO CAL A Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature. LO CAL R Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs. 1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user. 1 SPAN CAL A Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature. SPAN CAL R1 Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control inputs. SPAN CAL M DIAG One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is active (Section 4.13). 1 Only Appears on units with Z/S valve or IZS options. The revision of the analyzer firmware is displayed following the word SETUP, e.g., SETUP F.0. 2 The very important CAL mode, which allows calibration of the analyzer in various ways, is described in detail in Section 7. 4.2. SAMPLE MODE This is the analyzer’s standard operating mode. In this mode, the instrument is analyzing NO and NOX and calculating NO2 concentrations. 4.2.1. TEST FUNCTIONS A series of test functions is available at the front panel while the analyzer is in SAMPLE mode. These parameters provide information about the present operating status of the instrument and are useful during troubleshooting (Section 7). They can also be recorded in one of the DAS channels (Section 4.7) for data analysis or output on one of the configurable analog outputs. 07270B DCN6512 73 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 4-2: DISPLAY PARAMETER UNITS Test Functions Defined DESCRIPTION A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM Analog output range configuration A2:N0CNC1=100 PPM These functions show the default settings for the enabled analog output channels. See section 4.13.4 for more information. A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM A4:NXCNC2=100% The stability is a standard deviation of the NOX concentration over 25 samples, each recorded every 10 seconds. A low NOX STB value indicates low variability in NOX. NOX STB STABILITY PPM, MGM SAMP FLW SAMPLE FLOW cm³/min (cc/m) OZONE FL OZONE cm³/min (cc/m) PMT PMT Signal MV The raw output voltage of the PMT. NORM PMT NORMALIZED PMT Signal MV The output voltage of the PMT after normalization for auto-zero offset and temperature/pressure compensation (if activated). AZERO AUTO-ZERO MV The PMT signal with zero NOX, which is usually slightly different from 0 V. This offset is subtracted from the PMT signal and adjusts for variations in the zero signal. HVPS HVPS V RCELL TEMP REACTION CELL TEMP C The current temperature of the reaction cell. BOX TEMP BOX TEMPERATURE C The ambient temperature of the inside of the analyzer case. PMT TEMP PMT TEMPERATURE C The current temperature of the PMT. CONV TEMP CONVERTER TEMPERATURE C The current temperature of the NO2 converter. RCEL REACTION CELL PRESSURE in-Hg-A The current gas pressure of the reaction cell as measured at the vacuum manifold. This is the vacuum pressure created by the external pump. SAMP SAMPLE PRESSURE in-Hg-A The current pressure of the sample gas as it enters the reaction cell, measured between the NO/NOx and Auto-Zero valves. NOX SLOPE NOx SLOPE -- The slope of the current NOx calibration as calculated from a linear fit during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration. NOX OFFS NOx OFFSET MV The offset of the current NOx calibration as calculated from a linear fit during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration. NO SLOPE NO SLOPE -- The slope of the current NO calibration as calculated from a linear fit during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration. NO OFFS NO OFFSET MV The offset of the current NO calibration as calculated from a linear fit during the analyzer’s last zero/span calibration. NO2 NO2 concentration PPM, MGM The current NO2 concentration in the chosen unit. NOX NOx concentration PPM, MGM The current NOx concentration in the chosen unit. PPM, MGM The current NO concentration in the chosen unit. 74 NO NO concentration TEST TEST SIGNAL MV TIME CLOCK TIME hh:mm:ss 2 The flow rate of the sample gas through the reaction cell. This value is not measured but calculated from the sample pressure. Flow rate of the O3 gas stream as measured with a flow meter The PMT high voltage power supply. Signal of a user-defined test function on output channel A4. The current day time for DAS records and calibration events. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM 1 < TST TST > CAL Toggle to scroll through list of functions 1 Default settings for user selectable reporting range settings. 2 Only appears if O 2 sensor option is installed. Figure 4-2: Note Operating Instructions NOX = XXX SETUP A1:NXCNC1=100 PPM 1 A2:NOCNC1=100 PPM 1 A3:N2CNC1=25 PPM1 A4:NXCNC2=100%1 RANGE NOX STB SAMP FLW OZONE FL PMT NORM PMT AZERO HVPS RCELL TEMP BOX TEMP PMT TEMP CONV TEMP O2 CELL TEMP2 RCEL SAMP NOX SLOPE NOX OFFS NO SLOPE NO OFFS 2 O2 SLOPE 2 O2 OFFS TIME Viewing T200H/M TEST Functions A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an out-of-range reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it. All pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure. Absolute, atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It decreases about 1 in-Hg per 300 m gain in altitude. A variety of factors such as air conditioning and passing storms can cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure. 4.2.2. WARNING MESSAGES The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer’s front panel and through the COM ports. Appendix A provides the recommended action and explains how to use these messages to troubleshoot problems. 7.1.1 shows how to view and clear warning messages. 07270B DCN6512 75 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 4-3: MESSAGE ANALOG CAL WARNING AZERO WRN XXX.X MV BOX TEMP WARNING CANNOT DYN SPAN CANNOT DYN ZERO CONFIG INITIALIZED CONV TEMP WARNING DATA INITIALIZED HVPS WARNING OZONE FLOW WARNING OZONE GEN OFF PMT TEMP WARNING RCELL PRESS WARN RCELL TEMP WARNING REAR BOARD NOT DET RELAY BOARD WARN SAMPLE FLOW WARN SYSTEM RESET List of Warning Messages DEFINITION The instrument’s analog-to-digital converter (A/D) circuitry or one of the analog outputs are not calibrated. The reading taken during the Auto-zero cycle is outside the specified limits. The value shown here as “XXX.X” indicates the actual auto-zero reading at the time of the warning. The temperature inside the T200H/M chassis is outside the specified limits. Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was ON. Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was ON. Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or was erased. NO2 converter temperature is outside of specified limits. DAS data storage was erased. High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits. Ozone flow is outside of specified limits. Ozone generator is off. This is the only warning message that automatically clears itself when the ozone generator is turned on. PMT temperature is outside of specified limits. Reaction cell pressure is outside of specified limits. Reaction cell temperature is outside of specified limits. The firmware is unable to communicate with the motherboard. The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board. The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits. The computer rebooted or was powered up. To view and clear warning messages SAMPLE TEST deactivates warning messages TEST A1:NXCNC1=100PPM CAL MSG A1:NXCNC1=100PPM SAMPLE MSG < TST TST > CAL HVPS WARNING SAMPLE NOTE: If the warning message persists after several attempts to clear it, the message may indicate a real problem and not an artifact of the warm-up period Figure 4-3: 76 TEST CAL Make sure warning messages are not due to real problems. MSG NOX=XXX.X CLR SETUP NO=XXX.X CLR SETUP NO2=XXX.X CLR SETUP MSG activates warning messages. keys replaced with TEST key All Warning messages are hidden, but MSG button appears Press CLR to clear the current message. If more than one warning is active, the next message will take its place Once the last warning has been cleared, the analyzer returns to SAMPLE mode Viewing and Clearing T200H/M WARNING Messages 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.3. CALIBRATION MODE 4.3.1. CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS Pressing the CAL key switches the T200H/M into calibration mode. In this mode, the user can calibrate the instrument with the use of calibrated zero or span gases. If the instrument includes the zero/span valve option, the display will also include CALZ and CALS buttons. Pressing either of these buttons also puts the instrument into multipoint calibration mode. The CALZ button is used to initiate a calibration of the zero point. The CALS button is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer. It is recommended that this span calibration is performed at 90% of full scale of the analyzer’s currently selected reporting range. Because of their critical importance and complexity, calibration operations are described in detail in Section 5. 4.4. SETUP MODE The SETUP mode contains a variety of choices that are used to configure the analyzer’s hardware and software features, perform diagnostic procedures, gather information on the instruments performance and configure or access data from the internal data acquisition system (DAS). The areas access under the Setup mode are: Table 4-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions MODE OR FEATURE MENU BUTTON Analyzer Configuration CFG Auto Cal Feature ACAL Internal Data Acquisition (DAS) DAS Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration RNGE Used to set the units of measure for the display and set the dilution ratio on instruments with that option active. Calibration Password Security PASS Turns the password feature ON/OFF Internal Clock Configuration CLK Advanced SETUP features MORE 07270B DCN6512 DESCRIPTION Lists key hardware and software configuration information Used to set up an operate the AutoCal feature. Only appears if the analyzer has one of the internal valve options installed Used to set up the DAS system and view recorded data Used to Set or adjust the instrument’s internal clock This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu 77 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 4-5: 1 Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions MODE OR FEATURE KEYPAD LABEL External Communication Channel Configuration COMM Used to set up and operate the analyzer’s various external I/O channels including RS-232; RS 485, modem communication and/or Ethernet access. System Status Variables VARS Used to view various variables related to the instruments current operational status System Diagnostic Features and Analog Output Configuration DIAG Alarm Limit Configuration1 ALRM MANUAL SECTION DESCRIPTION Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure, test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer’s basic systems. 6.11 & 6.15 6.12 6.13 Most notably, the menus used to configure the output signals generated by the instruments Analog outputs are located here. Used to turn the instrument’s two alarms on and off as well as set the trigger limits for each. 6.14 Only present if the optional alarm relay outputs (Option 61) are installed. Note Any changes made to a variable during one of the following procedures is not acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR button is pressed. If the EXIT button is pressed before the ENTR button, the analyzer will beep, alerting the user that the newly entered value has not been accepted. 4.5. SETUP CFG: VIEWING THE ANALYZER’S CONFIGURATION INFORMATION Pressing the CFG key displays the instrument configuration information. This display lists the analyzer model, serial number, firmware revision, software library revision, CPU type and other information. Use this information to identify the software and hardware when contacting Technical Support. Special instrument or software features or installed options may also be listed here. 78 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual SAMPLE Operating Instructions A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > CAL Press NEXT of PREV to move back and forth through the following list of Configuration information: MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION1 HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION 1 ACTIVE SPECIAL SOFTWARE OPTIONS1 CPU TYPE DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION SAVED SAMPLE NOX=XXX.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SAMPLE NEXT EXIT T200 NOX ANALYZER PREV EXIT Press EXIT at any time to return to the SAMPLE display Press EXIT at any time to return to SETUP menu 1 Only appears if relevant option of Feature is active. 4.6. SETUP ACAL: AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION Instruments with one of the internal valve options installed can be set to automatically run calibration procedures and calibration checks. These automatic procedures are programmed using the submenus and functions found under the ACAL menu. A menu tree showing the ACAL menu’s entire structure can be found in Appendix A-1 of this manual. Instructions for using the ACAL feature are located in the Section 7.7 of this manual along with all other information related to calibrating the T200H/M analyzer. 07270B DCN6512 79 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.7. SETUP DAS - USING THE DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS) The T200H/M analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, internal data acquisition system (DAS) that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a host of diagnostic parameters. The data points can cover days, weeks or months of valuable measurements, depending on how the DAS is configured. The data are stored in non-volatile memory and are retained even when the instrument is powered off. Data are stored in plain text format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs (such as spreadsheet-type programs). Note Please be aware that all stored data will be erased if the analyzer’s diskon-module, CPU board or configuration is replaced/reset. The DAS is designed to be flexible. Users have full control over the type, length and reporting time of the data. The DAS permits users to access stored data through the instrument’s front panel or its communication ports. Teledyne API also offers APICOM, a program that provides a visual interface for configuration and data retrieval of the DAS or using a remote computer. Additionally, the analyzer’s four analog output channels can be programmed to carry data related to any of the available DAS parameters. The principal use of the DAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive diagnostics, which can assist in identifying possible problems before they affect the functionality of the analyzer. The secondary use is for data analysis, documentation and archival in electronic format. DAS STATUS The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer status, also indicates certain aspects of the DAS status: Table 4-6: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS LED STATE Off Blinking On DAS STATUS System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode. Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods, concentration data are typically not sampled, diagnostic data should be collected. Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits calibrations. DAS channels can be enabled or disabled for this period. Concentration data are typically disabled whereas diagnostic should be collected. Sampling normally. The DAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data channels. 80 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.7.1. DAS STRUCTURE The DAS is designed around the feature of a “record”, an automatically stored single data point. (e.g. concentration, PMT signal level, etc.). Records are organized into data channels which are defined by properties that characterize the: Type of date recorded (e.g. concentration, PMT signal level, etc.); Trigger event that causes the record to be made (e.g. every minute, upon exiting calibration mode, etc.); How many records to be stored, as well as; How the information is to be stored (e.g. average over 1 hour, individual points, minimum value over last 5 minutes, etc.). The configuration of each DAS channel is stored in the analyzer’s memory as a script, which can be edited from the front panel or downloaded, edited and uploaded to the instrument in form of a string of plain-text lines through the communication ports. 4.7.1.1. DAS Channels The key to the flexibility of the DAS is its ability to store a large number of combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels. Users may create up to 20 data channels. For each channel one triggering event is selected and one or all of the T200H/M’s 25 data parameters are allowed. The number of parameters and channels is limited by available memory. The properties that define the structure of an DAS data channel are: Table 4-7: PROPERTY DAS Data Channel Properties DEFAULT SETTING RANGE The name of the data channel. “NONE” Up to 6 letters or digits1. TRIGGERING EVENT The event that triggers the data channel to measure and store the datum ATIMER Any available event (see Appendix A-5). NUMBER AND LIST OF PARAMETERS A User-configurable list of data types to be recorded in any given channel. 1 - PMTDET Any available parameter (see Appendix A-5). 000:01:00 000:00:01 to 366:23:59 (Days:Hours:Minutes) 100 1 to 1 million, limited by available storage space. OFF OFF or ON ON OFF or ON OFF OFF or ON NAME REPORT PERIOD NUMBER OF RECORDS RS-232 REPORT CHANNEL ENABLED CAL HOLD OFF DESCRIPTION The amount of time between each channel data point. The number of reports that will be stored in the data file. Once the limit is exceeded, the oldest data is over-written. Enables the analyzer to automatically report channel values to the RS-232 ports. Enables or disables the channel. Allows a channel to be temporarily turned off without deleting it. Disables sampling of data parameters while 2 instrument is in calibration mode . 1 More with APICOM, but only the first six are displayed on the front panel). 2 When enabled records are not recorded until the DAS HOLD OFF period is passed after calibration mode. DAS HOLD OFF set in the VARS menu (see Section 4.12.) 07270B DCN6512 81 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.7.1.2. DAS Parameters Data parameters are types of data that may be measured by the analyzers instrumentality concentrations of measured gases, temperatures of heated zones,, pressures and flows of the pneumatic subsystem as well as calibration data such as slope and offset for each gas. For each Teledyne API analyzer model, the list of available data parameters is different, fully defined and not customizable (see Appendix A for a list of T200H/M parameters). Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppm, cm³/min, etc., although some parameters have no units. The only units that can be changed are those of the concentration readings according to the SETUP-RANGE settings. Note The DAS does not keep track of the unit of each concentration value and DAS data files may contain concentrations in multiple units if the unit was changed during data acquisition. Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are recorded. Table 4-8: DAS Data Parameter Functions FUNCTION EFFECT PARAMETER Instrument-specific parameter name. INST: Records instantaneous reading. AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval. MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval. MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval. SDEV: Records the standard deviation of the data points recorded during the reporting interval. SAMPLE MODE PRECISION Decimal precision of parameter value(0-4). STORE NUM. SAMPLES OFF: stores only the average (default). ON: stores the average and the number of samples in each average for a parameter. This property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used. Note that the number of samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified only for one of the parameters. 4.7.1.3. DAS Triggering Events Triggering events define when and how the DAS records a measurement of any given data channel. Triggering events are firmware-specific and are listed in Appendix A-5. The most common triggering events are: 82 ATIMER: Sampling occurs at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer. Trending information is often stored via such intervals, as either individual datum or averaged. EXITZR, EXITSP, SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at the end of an irregularly occurring event such as calibration or when the slope changes. These events create individual data points. Zero and slope values can be used to monitor response drift and to document when the instrument was calibrated. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning messages appears. This is helpful for trouble-shooting by monitoring when a particular warning occurred. 4.7.2. DEFAULT DAS CHANNELS The T200H/M is configured with a basic DAS configuration, which is enabled by default. New data channels are also enabled by default but each channel may be turned off for later or occasional use. Note that DAS operation is suspended while its configuration is edited through the front panel. To prevent such data loss, it is recommended to use the APICOM graphical user interface for DAS changes. A set of default data channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging nitrogen oxides concentrations, calibration and predictive diagnostic data. They are: CONC: Samples NOX, NO and NO2 concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every hour with a time and date stamp along with the number of (1-minute) samples within each average(for statistical evaluation). Readings during calibration and calibration hold off are not included in the data. By default, the last 800 hourly averages are stored. CALDAT: Every time a zero or span calibration is performed CALDAT logs concentration, slope and offset values for NOX and NO with a time and date stamp. The NOX stability (to evaluate calibration stability) as well as the converter efficiency (for reference) are also stored. This data channel will store data from the last 200 calibrations and can be used to document analyzer calibration. The slope and offset data can be used to detect trends in (instrument response. CALCHECK: This channel logs concentrations and the stability each time a zero or span check (not calibration) is finished. This allows the user to track the quality of zero and span responses over time and assist in evaluating the quality of zero and span gases and the analyzer’s noise specifications. The last 200 data points are retained. DIAG: Daily averages of temperature zones, flow and pressure data as well as some other diagnostic parameters (HVPS, AZERO). These data are useful for predictive diagnostics and maintenance of the T200H/M. The last 1100 daily averages are stored to cover more than four years of analyzer performance. HIRES: Records one minute, instantaneous data of all active parameters in the T200H/M. Short-term trends as well as signal noise levels can be detected and documented. Readings during calibration and the calibration hold off period are included in the averages. The last 1500 data points are stored, which covers a little more than one day of continuous data acquisition. This data channel is disabled by default but may be turned on when needed such as for trouble-shooting problems with the analyzer. The default data channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized from the front panel or through APICOM to fit a specific application. The Teledyne API website contains this default and other sample DAS scripts for free download. We recommend that the user backs up any DAS configuration and its data before altering it. Note 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne-API recommends downloading and storing existing data and the DAS configurations regularly for permanent documentation and future data analysis. Sending a DAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will replace the existing configuration and will delete all stored data. 83 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 4-9: T200H/M Default DAS Configuration PARAMETERS CHANNELS with PROPERTIES Name: CONC Event: ATIMER Sample Period: 000:00:01 Report Period: 000:01:00 Number of Records: 800 RS-232 report: OFF Channel enabled: ON DAS HOLDOFF: ON Name: CALDAT Event: SLPCHG Number of Records: 200 RS-232 report: OFF Channel enabled: ON DAS HOLDOFF: OFF Name: CALCHECK Event: EXITMP Number of Records: 200 RS-232 report: OFF Channel enabled: ON DAS HOLDOFF: OFF Name: CALCHECK Event: EXITMP Number of Records: 200 RS-232 report: OFF Channel enabled: ON DAS HOLDOFF: OFF Name: HIRES Event: ATIMER Sample Period: 000:00:01 Report Period: 000:00:01 Number of Records: 1500 RS-232 report: OFF Channel enabled: OFF DAS HOLDOFF: OFF 84 NAME MODE EVENT PRECISION NUM SAMPLES NOXCNC1 AVG -- 4 ON NOCNC1 AVG -- 4 OFF N2CNC1 AVG -- 4 OFF STABIL AVG -- 4 OM NXZSC1 -- SLPCHG 4 OFF NOXSLP1 NOXOFFS1 NOZSC1 ---- SLPCHG SLPCHG SLPCHG 4 4 4 OFF OFF OFF NOSLP1 NOOFFS1 N2ZSC1 CNVEF1 STABIL ------ SLPCHG SLPCHG SLPCHG SLPCHG SLPCHG 4 4 4 4 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF NXZSC1 -- EXITMP 4 OFF NOZSC1 -- EXITMP 4 OFF N2ZSC1 -- EXITMP 4 OFF -- EXITMP 4 OFF SMPFLW O3FLOW STABIL AVG AVG --- 2 2 OFF OFF RCPRESS SMPPRES RCTEMP PMTTMP CNVTMP BOXTMP AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG ------- 2 2 2 2 2 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF HVPS AZERO AVG AVG --- 2 2 OFF OFF NOXCNC1 AVG -- 4 OFF NOCNC1 N2CNC1 STABIL SMPFLW O3FLOW RCPRESS SMPPRES AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG -------- 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF RCTEMP PMTTMP CNVTMP BOXTMP HVPS AZERO REFGND AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG AVG ------- 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF REF4096 AVG 1 OFF 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.7.2.1. Viewing DAS Data and Settings DAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following keystroke sequence. FRONT PANEL CONTROL BUTTON FUNCTIONS SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL EXIT will return to the main SAMPLE Display. SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X EXIT BUTTON FUNCTION Moves to the previous Parameter NX10 Moves the view forward 10 data points/channels NEXT Moves to the next data point/channel PREV Moves to the previous data point/channel PV10 Moves the view back 10 data points/channels DATA ACQUISITION VIEW EDIT EXIT Buttons only appear if applicable SETUP X.X NEXT SETUP X.X PREV NEXT CONC : DATA AVAILABLE VIEW EXIT SETUP X.X 287:10:00 PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 cc/m EXIT EXIT PV10 PREV SETUP X.X PRM> DIAG: DATA AVAILABLE SETUP X.X Default setting for HIRES is DISABLED. NEXT NX10 CALDAT: DATA AVAILABLE SETUP X.X SETUP X.X NXCNC1: XXX.X PPM 00:00::00 PMTDET=0000.0000 m EXIT HIRES: NO DATA AVAILABLE EXIT 85 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.7.2.2. Editing DAS Data Channels DAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote control program. The following sequence of touchscreen button presses shows how to edit using the front panel. SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL EXIT will return to the previous SAMPLE display. SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X EXIT DATA ACQUISITION VIEW EDIT SETUP X.X 8 1 EXIT ENTER DAS PASS: 818 8 ENTR EXIT Edit Data Channel Menu Moves the display up & down the list of Data Channels Inserts a new Data Channel into the list BEFORE the Channel currently being displayed Moves the display between the PROPERTIES for this data channel. SETUP X.X 0) CONC: PREV NEXT INS ATIMER, 8, DEL EDIT PRNT 800 Exits to the Main Data Acquisition Menu EXIT Exports the configuration of all data channels to RS-232 interface. Deletes The Data Channel currently being displayed SETUP X.X NAME:CONC EDIT PRNT Allows to edit the channel name, see next key sequence. EXIT EXITS returns to the previous Menu Reports the configuration of current data channels to the RS-232 ports. When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the configuration parameters. For example, the display line: 0) CONC : ATIMER, 4, 800 Translates to the following configuration: Channel No.: 0 NAME: CONC TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER PARAMETERS: Four parameters are included in this channel EVENT: This channel is set up to record 800 data points. 86 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions To edit the name of a data channel, follow the above key sequence and then press: FROM THE PREVIOUS BUTTON SEQUENCE … SETUP X.X EDIT SETUP X.X C NAME:CONC O PRINT EXIT NAME:CONC N C - - ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new string and returns to the previous menu. EXIT ignores the new string and returns to the previous menu. Press each key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set: 0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ? 4.7.2.3. Trigger Events To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, press: From the DATA ACQUISITION menu (see Section 6.7.2.2) Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X.X 0) CONC: PREV NEXT SETUP X.X PRNT 800 EXIT EXITS to the Main Data Acquisition menu PRINT EXIT EVENT:ATIMER SET> EDIT SETUP X.X DEL EDIT 8, NAME:CONC SET> EDIT SETUP X.X EDIT PRINT Exits to the main Data Acquisition menu 800 EXIT EXIT Press SET> key until… SETUP X.X EDIT PRINT SETUP X.X YES PARAMETERS: EXIT EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA) NO returns to the previous menu and retains all data. NO Edit Data Parameter Menu Moves the display between available Parameters Inserts a new Parameter before the currently displayed Parameter 88 SETUP X.X PREV NEXT 0) PARAM=DETREP, MODE=INST INS DEL EDIT Deletes the Parameter currently displayed. EXIT Exits to the main Data Acquisition menu Use to configure the functions for this Parameter. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions To configure the parameters for a specific data parameter, press: FROM THE EDIT DATA PARAMETER MENU (see previous section) SETUP X.X 0) PARAM=NXCNC1, MODE=AVG PREV NEXT SETUP X.X INS DEL EDIT EXIT PARAMETERS: NOCNC1 SET> EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X PARAMETER: NXCNC1 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Cycle through list of available Parameters. SETUP X.X SAMPLE MODE: INST EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X INST AVG SAMPLE MODE: INST MIN MAX EXIT Press the key for the desired mode SETUP X.X PRECISION:4 EDIT EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. SETUP X.X PRECISION: 4 1 EXIT Set for 0-4 SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF EDIT DEL EDIT 8, PRNT PRINT 8500 EXIT Exits to the main Data Acquisition menu. EXIT Press SET> until you reach REPORT PERIOD (OR SAMPLE PERIOD) … SETUP X.X EDIT SETUP X.X Set the number of days between reports (0-366). Press buttons to set hours between reports in the format : HH:MM (max: 23:59). This is a 24 hour clock . PM hours are 13 thru 23, midnight is 00:00. Example 2:15 PM = 14:15 07270B DCN6512 0 0 SETUP X.X 0 REPORT PERIOD:000:01:00 1 PRINT EXIT REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0 0 ENTR EXIT REPORT PERIODD:TIME:01:01 0 0 ENTR EXIT IIf at any time an illegal entry is selected (e.g., days > 366) the ENTR button will disappear from the display. ENTR accepts the new string and returns to the previous menu. EXIT ignores the new string and returns to the previous menu. 91 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.7.2.7. Number of Records The DAS is capable of capturing several months worth of data, depending on the configuration. Every additional data channel, parameter, number of samples setting etc. will reduce the maximum amount of data points somewhat. In general, however, the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all channels (max: 20) and parameters (max: 50 per channel). The DAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from specifying too many records at any given point. If, for example, the DAS memory space can accommodate 375 more data records, the ENTR key will disappear when trying to specify more than that number of records. This check for memory space may also make an upload of an DAS configuration with APICOM or a Terminal program fail, if the combined number of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to either try from the front panel what the maximum number of records can be or use trial-anderror in designing the DAS script or calculate the number of records using the DAS or APICOM manuals. To set the number of records for one channel from the front panel, follow the instruction shown in section 4.7.2.2 then press. Edit Data Channel From the Menu DATA ACQUISITION menu (see Section 6.7.2.2) SETUP X.X 0) CONC: PREV NEXT INS SETUP X.X EDIT PRINT EXIT Press SET> key until… SETUP X.X EDIT SETUP X.X YES PRINT EXIT EDIT RECOPRDS (DELET DATA) NO returns to the previous menu. NO SETUP X.X 0 NUMBER OF RECORDS:000 0 REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.7.2.8. RS-232 Report Function The T200H/M DAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where they can be captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user. To enable automatic COM port reporting, follow the instruction shown in section 4.7.2.2 then press: From the DATA ACQUISITION menu (see Section 6.7.2.2) Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X.X PREV NEXT SETUP X.X 0) CONC: INS ATIMER, DEL EDIT 8, 800 PRNT EXIT Exits to the main Data Acquisition menu NAME:CONC EDIT PRINT EXIT Press SET> key until… SETUP X.X RS-232 REPORT: OFF EDIT PRINT SETUP X.X Toggle button to turn reporting ON or OFF OFF EXIT RS-232 REPORT: OFF ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. 4.7.2.9. Compact Report When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are reported in one line, instead. For example, channel DIAG would report its record in two lines (10 parameters) instead of 10 lines. Individual lines carry the same time stamp and are labeled in sequence. 4.7.2.10. Starting Date This option allows to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user wants to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date. If the Starting Date is in the past, the DAS ignores this setting. 07270B DCN6512 93 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.7.2.11. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the disk-on-chip. The HIRES channel of the T200H/M, for example, is disabled by default. To disable a data channel, follow the instruction shown in section 4.7.2.2 then press: From the DATA ACQUISITION menu (see Section 6.7.2.2) Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X.X PREV NEXT SETUP X.X EDIT PRINT EXIT Press SET> key until… SETUP X.X CHANNEL ENABLE:ON EDIT PRINT SETUP X.X Toggle button to turn channel ON or OFF 94 OFF EXIT CHANNEL ENABLE:ON ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.7.2.12. HOLDOFF Feature The DAS HOLDOFF feature allows to prevent data collection during calibrations and during the DAS_HOLDOFF period enabled and specified in the VARS (Section 4.12). To enable or disable the HOLDOFF for any one DAS channel, follow the instruction shown in section 6.7.2.2 then press: From the DATA ACQUISITION menu (see Section 6.7.2.2) Edit Data Channel Menu SETUP X.X 0) CONC: PREV NEXT SETUP X.X INS ATIMER, DEL EDIT 2, 900 PRNT EXIT Exits to the main Data Acquisition menu NAME:CONC EDIT PRINT EXIT Press SET> key until… SETUP X.X CAL HOLD OFF:ON SET> EDIT SETUP X.X Toggle button to turn HOLDOFF ON or OFF 07270B DCN6512 ON PRINT EXIT CAL HOLD OFF:ON ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. 95 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.7.3. REMOTE DAS CONFIGURATION Editing channels, parameters and triggering events as described in 6.7 is much more conveniently done in one step through the APICOM remote control program using the graphical interface shown in Figure 4-4. Refer to Section 4.15 for details on remote access to the T200H/M analyzer. Figure 4-4: APICOM Graphical User Interface for Configuring the DAS Once a DAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting DAS data collection), it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on a computer for later review, alteration or documentation and archival. Refer to the APICOM manual for details on these procedures. The APICOM user manual is included in the APICOM installation file, which can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/. Note 96 Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of DAS channels and parameters of one channel through the front-panel touch screen can be done without affecting the other channels, uploading a DAS configuration script to the analyzer through its communication ports will erase all data, parameters and channels by replacing them with the new DAS configuration. It is advised to download and backup all data and the original DAS configuration before attempting any DAS changes. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.8. SETUP RNGE: RANGE UNITS AND DILUTION CONFIGURATION This Menu is used to set the units of measure to be associated with the analyzer’s reporting ranges (see Section 4.13.4.2. for more information on reporting ranges vs. physical ranges) and for instruments with the sample gas dilution option operating, to set the dilution ratio. 4.8.1. RANGE UNITS The T200H/M can display concentrations in parts per million (106 mols per mol, PPM) or milligrams per cubic meter (mg/m3, MGM). Changing units affects all of the display, COM port and DAS values for all reporting ranges regardless of the analyzer’s range mode. To change the concentration units: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1= 100.0 PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X. UNIT Select the preferred concentration unit. EXIT RANGE CONTROL MENU DIL SETUP X.X EXIT CONC UNITS: PPM PPM MGM SETUP X.X PPM MGM EXIT returns to the main menu. ENTER EXIT CONC UNITS: MGM ENTER EXIT ENTR accepts the new unit, EXIT returns to the SETUP menu. Conversion factors from volumetric to mass units used in the T200H/M: NO: ppm x 1.34 = mg/m3 NO2: ppm x 2.05 = mg/m3 Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and µg/m3 use 0° C and 760 Torr as standard temperature and pressure (STP). Consult your local regulations for the STP used by your agency. EPA protocol applications, for example, use 25° C as the reference temperature. Changing the units may cause a bias in the measurements if standard temperature and pressure other than 0C and 760 Torr are used. This problem can be avoided by recalibrating the analyzer after any change from a volumetric to a mass unit or vice versa. Note 07270B DCN6512 In order to avoid a reference temperature bias, the analyzer must be recalibrated after every change in reporting units. 97 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.8.2. DILUTION RATIO The dilution ratio is a software option that allows the user to compensate for any dilution of the sample gas before it enters the sample inlet. 1. The SPAN value entered during calibration is the maximum expected concentration of the undiluted calibration gas 2. The span gas should be either supplied through the same dilution inlet system as the sample gas or be supplied at an appropriately lower actual concentration. For example, with a dilution set to 100, a 1 ppm gas can be used to calibrate a 100 ppm sample gas if the span gas is not routed through the dilution system. On the other hand, if a 100 ppm span gas is used, it needs to pass through the same dilution steps as the sample gas. 3. Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1 part of sample gas): The analyzer will multiply the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and displays the result. SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP C.3 CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE DIL only appears if the dilution ratio option has been activateded SETUP C.3 Toggle each as needed to set the dilution factor. SETUP C.3 This is the number by which the analyzer will multiply the NO, NO 2 and NOx concentrations of the gas passing through the reaction cell UNIT 0 RANGE CONTROL MENU DIL 0 EXIT 0 EXIT ignores the new setting. DIL FACTOR: 1.0 GAIN 0 SETUP C.3 0 EXIT 1 .0 ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting. DIL FACTOR: 20.0 GAIN 2 0 .0 ENTR EXIT The analyzer multiplies the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and displays the result. Calibrate the analyzer. Once the above settings have been entered, the instrument needs to be recalibrated using one of the methods discussed in Section 5. 98 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.9. SETUP PASS: PASSWORD FEATURE The T200H/M provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to prevent unauthorized adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS menu item, the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a passwordprotected functio n (e.g., SETUP) is selected. This allows normal operation of the instrument, but requires the password (101) to access to the menus under SETUP. When PASSWORD is disabled (SETUP>OFF), any operator can enter the Primary Setup (SETUP) and Secondary Setup (SETUP>MORE) menus. Whether PASSWORD is enabled or disabled, a password (default 818) is required to enter the VARS or DIAG menus in the SETUP>MORE menu. There are three levels of password protection, which correspond to operator, maintenance, and configuration functions. Each level allows access to all of the functions in the previous level. Table 4-10: Password Levels Password Level Null (000) Operation Menu Access Allowed All functions of the MAIN menu: TEST, GEN, initiate SEQ , MSG, CLR 101 Configuration/Maintenance Access to Primary Setup and Secondary SETUP Menus when PASSWORD is enabled. 818 Configuration/Maintenance Access to Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG whether PASSWORD is enabled or disabled. To enable or disable passwords, press the following menu button sequence: SAMPLE < TST TST > SETUP X.X A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X Toggle this button to enable, disable password feature OFF SETUP X.X ON 07270B DCN6512 EXIT PASSWORD ENABLE: OFF ENTR EXIT PASSWORD ENABLE: ON ENTR EXIT 99 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Example: If all passwords are enabled, the following menu button sequence would be required to enter the SETUP menu: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL prompts for password number SAMPLE Press individual buttons to set numbers SAMPLE 0 8 SETUP ENTER SETUP PASS: 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT ENTER SETUP PASS: 0 1 SETUP X.X 8 ENTR EXIT Example: this password enables the SETUP mode PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT Note that the instrument still prompts for a password when entering the VARS and DIAG menus, even if passwords are disabled, but it displays the default password (818) upon entering these menus. The user only has to press ENTR to access the passwordprotected menus but does not have to enter the required number code. 100 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.10. SETUP CLK: SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK The T200H/M has a built-in clock for the AutoCal timer, Time TEST function, and time stamps on COM port messages and DAS data entries. To set the time-of-day, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X Enter Current Time-of-Day SETUP X.X TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK TIME DATE SETUP X.X 1 2 :0 0 EXIT SETUP X.X TIME: 12:00 1 2 :0 0 0 1 ENTR EXIT 0 1 ENTR EXIT 0 2 SETUP X.X JAN 0 2 ENTR EXIT DATE: 01-JAN-02 ENTR EXIT TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK TIME DATE EXIT PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE 07270B DCN6512 JAN Enter Current Date-of-Year DATE: 01-JAN-02 SETUP X.X TIME: 12:00 SETUP X.X EXIT EXIT EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display 101 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual In order to compensate for CPU clocks which run fast or slow, there is a variable to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed amount every day. To change this variable, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP SETUPX.X PREV NEXT JUMP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EDIT PRNT EXIT Continue to press NEXT until … EXIT SETUP X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X PREV COMM VARS DIAG JUMP SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818 1 8 EDIT PRNT EXIT EXIT SETUP X.X 8 1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO + 0 CLOCK_ADJ:0 Sec/Day 0 ENTR EXIT ENTR EXIT Enter sign and number of seconds per day the clock gains (-) or loses (+). SETUP X.X 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes SETUP X.X NEXT JUMP 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day EDIT PRNT EXIT PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT 3x EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display 102 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.11. SETUP MORE COMM: SETTING UP THE ANALYSER’S COMMUNICATION PORTS The T200H/M is equipped with an Ethernet port, a USB port and two serial communication (COMM) ports located on the rear panel (see Figure 3-2). Both com ports operate similarly and give the user the ability to communicate with, issue commands to, and receive data from the analyzer through an external computer system or terminal. By default, both ports operate on the RS-232 protocol. The RS232 port (used as COM1) can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 multidrop mode (option 62; See Section 5.9.2 and 4.11.8). The COM2 port, can be configured for standard RS-232 operation or for half-duplex RS-485 communication (RS485 configuration disables the USB communication port). A code-activated switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically between 2 and 16 send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, data loggers, analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one communications hub. Contact Teledyne API sales for more information on CAS systems. 4.11.1. DTE AND DCE COMMUNICATION RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment (DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices. The difference between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions. DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3. DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2. To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers (which can be either), a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows the user to set the configuration of COM1 for one of these two modes. This switch exchanges the receive and transmit lines on COM1 emulating a cross-over or nullmodem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2. 4.11.2. COM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS As received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE or modem, with Pin 3 of the DB-9 connector designated for receiving data and Pin 2 designated for sending data. 07270B DCN6512 RS232: (used as COM 1) RS-232 (fixed), DB-9 male connector. o Baud rate: 115200 bits per second (baud). o Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit. o Parity: None. COM2: RS-232 (configurable to RS-485), DB-9 female connector. o Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud). o Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit. o Parity: None. 103 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.11.3. COMMUNICATION MODES, BAUD RATE AND PORT TESTING Use the SETUP>MORE>COMM menu to configure COM1 (labeled RS232 on instrument rear panel) and/or COM2 (labeled COM2 on instrument rear panel) for communication modes, baud rate and/or port testing for correct connection. 4.11.3.1. COM Port Communication Modes Each of the analyzer’s serial ports can be configured to operate in a number of different modes, which are listed in the following table. Each COM port needs to be configured independently. Table 4-11: COM Port Communication modes MODE1 ID DESCRIPTION 1 Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (DAS reports, and warning messages) to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with a computer program such as APICOM. Such feedback is still available but a command must be issued to receive them. COMPUTER 2 Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is communicating with a computer program, such as APICOM. SECURITY 4 When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The only command that is active is the help screen (? CR). HESSEN PROTOCOL 16 QUIET The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. Teledyne API part number 02252 contains more information on this protocol. When turned on this mode switches the com port settings from E, 7, 1 No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit 2048 to Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit 1024 Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence over multidrop mode if both are enabled. When the COM2 port is configured for RS-485 communication, the rear panel USB port is disabled. MULTIDROP PROTOCOL 32 Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications channel. Multidrop is an option requiring a special PCA and the use of instrument IDs. ENABLE MODEM 64 Enables sending a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the RS-232 port to enable the modem to communicate. ERROR 2 CHECKING 128 Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations. XON/XOFF 2 HANDSHAKE 256 Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking. HARDWARE HANDSHAKE 8 HARDWARE FIFO2 512 COMMAND PROMPT 4096 RS-485 Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation protocols as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software. Improves data transfer rate when on of the com ports. Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode. 1 Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the SETUP MORE com COM[1 OR 2] MODE menu 2 The default sting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne API Technical Support personnel. 104 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions Press the following buttons to select a communication mode for a one of the com ports, such as the following example where HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is enabled: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X COMM VARS DIAG Select which COM port to configure SETUP X.X ID The sum of the mode IDs of the selected modes is displayed here ALRM EXIT EXIT returns to the previous menu COMMUNICATIONS MENU INET COM1 SETUP X.X SET> EXIT COM2 EXIT COM1 MODE:0 EDIT SETUP X.X EXIT COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF NEXT OFF ENTR EXIT Continue pressing next until … SETUP X.X Use PREV and NEXT to move between available modes. A mode is enabled by toggling the ON/OFF button. PREV NEXT SETUP X.X COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF OFF ENTR EXIT COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON PREV NEXT ON ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new settings EXIT ignores the new settings Continue pressing NEXT and/or PREV to select any other modes you which to enable or disable 07270B DCN6512 105 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.11.3.2. COM Port Baud Rate To select the baud rate of one of the COM Ports, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X COMM VARS DIAG Select which COM port to configure. SETUP X.X COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID COM1 INET SETUP X.X Press SET> until you reach COM1 BAUD RATE EXIT SET> COM2 EXIT returns to the previous menu EXIT COM1 MODE:0 EDIT EXIT EXAMPLE Use PREV and NEXT keys to move between available baud rates. 300 1200 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 SETUP X.X COM1 BAUD RATE:115200 EDIT SETUP X.X PREV NEXT SETUP X.X NEXT ON 106 EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting COM1 BAUD RATE:115200 ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new setting COM1 BAUD RATE:9600 ENTR EXIT 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.11.3.3. COM Port Testing The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the com menu. This test sends a string of 256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is running, the red LED on the rear panel of the analyzer should flicker. To initiate the test press the following key sequence. SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP SETUP X.X SET> SETUP X.X EXIT COM1 BAUD RATE:19200 EXIT EDIT EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG EXIT SETUP X.X CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X ID INET Toggle these buttons to cycle through the available character set: 0-9 COMMUNICATIONS MENU COM1 SETUP X. 0 2 COM2 EXIT ENTR button accepts the new settings MACHINE ID: 200 ID 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT key ignores the new settings The ID can be any 4 digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any number of ways (e.g. location numbers, company asset number, etc.) 108 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.11.5. RS-232 COM PORT CABLE CONNECTIONS In its default configuration, the T200H/M analyzer has two available RS-232 com ports accessible via 2 DB-9 connectors on the back panel of the instrument. The COM1 connector, labeled RS232, is a male DB-9 connector and the COM2 is a female DB9 connector. Figure 4-5: Default Pin Assignments for Rear Panel com Port Connectors (RS-232 DCE & DTE) The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring harness to two 10-pin connectors on the CPU card, J11 (COM1) and J12 (COM2). 07270B DCN6512 109 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 4-6: CPU COM1 & COM2 Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode Teledyne API offers two mating cables, one of which should be applicable for your use. Part number WR000077, a DB-9 female to DB-9 female cable, 6 feet long. Allows connection of COM1 with the serial port of most personal computers. Also available as Option 60 (see Section 5.9.1). Part number WR000024, a DB-9 female to DB-25 male cable. Allows connection to the most common styles of modems (e.g. Hayes-compatible) and code activated switches. Both cables are configured with straight-through wiring and should require no additional adapters. Note Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors may incorporate internal wiring that make the link inoperable. Check cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne API for pin assignments before using. To assist in properly connecting the serial ports to either a computer or a modem, there are activity indicators LEDs labeled RX and TX) just above the rear panel RS-232 port. Once a cable is connected between the analyzer and a computer or modem, both the red and green LEDs should be on. If the RX TX LEDs for RS232 are not lit, change position of rear panel DCE DTE mode switch (see 4.11.1). If both LEDs are still not illuminated, check the cable for proper wiring. 110 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.11.6. RS-485 CONFIGURATION OF COM2 Opting to use RS-485 communications for the COM2 port will disable the USB port. To configure your instrument for RS-485 communications, please consult the factory. 4.11.7. ETHERNET INTERFACE CONFIGURATION When using the Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard 10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers. The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP device on port 3000. This allows a remote computer to connect through the network to the analyzer using APICOM, terminal emulators or other programs. The Ethernet cable connector on the rear panel has two LEDs indicating the Ethernet’s current operating status. Table 4-12 Ethernet Status Indicators LED FUNCTION amber (link) On when connection to the LAN is valid. green (activity Flickers during any activity on the LAN. The analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default. This allows the instrument to be connected to a network or router with a DHCP server. The instrument will automatically be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server (Section Configuring Ethernet Communication Using DHCP). This configuration is useful for quickly getting an instrument up and running on a network. However, for permanent Ethernet connections, a static IP address should be used. Section 4.11.7.2 below details how to configure the instrument with a static IP address. 07270B DCN6512 111 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.11.7.1. Configuring Ethernet Communication Using DHCP 1. Consult with your network administrator to affirm that your network server is running DHCP. 2. Access the Ethernet Menu (SETUP>MORE>COMM>INET). 3. After pressing ENTR at the password menu, press SET> to view the DHCP settings: COMMUNICATIONS MENU SETUP X.X From this point on, EXIT returns to COMMUNICATIONS MENU ID INET SAMPLE COM1 COM2 EXIT ENTER SETUP PASS : 818 8 1 8 SETUP X.X ENTR EXIT DHCP: ON SET> EDIT EXIT DHCP: ON is default setting. If it has been set to OFF, press EDIT and set to ON. SETUP X.X SETUP X.X ON SET> SETUP X.X EDIT EXIT Do not alter unless directed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel TCP PORT2: 502 SET> SETUP X.X SETUP X.X SETUP X.X ENTR EXIT INST IP: 0.0.0.0 SETUP X.X MORE>COMM>INET). 3. Follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 4-7, and edit the Instrument and Gateway IP addresses and the Subnet Mask to the desired settings. 4. From the computer, enter the same information through an application such as HyperTerminal. 5. Table 4-13 shows the default Ethernet configuration settings. 114 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual SETUP X.X ID INET SAMPLE 8 DHCP: ON is default setting. Skip this step if it has been set to OFF. Internet Configuration Button Functions COMMUNICATIONS MENU COM1 EXIT 8 SETUP X.X [0] EXIT Deletes a character at the cursor location. ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. Some buttons appear only when relevant. SET> EDIT EXIT DHCP: OFF SET> EDIT SETUP X.X FUNCTION Location of cursor. Press to cycle through the range of numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”) DEL ENTR DHCP: ON SETUP X.X BUTTON Moves the cursor one character left or right. ENTER SETUP PASS : 818 1 Operating Instructions EXIT INST IP: 000.000.000.000 EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X Cursor location is indicated by brackets INST IP: [0] 00.000.000 DEL [0] ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000 EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000 DEL [?] ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0 EDIT ENTR accepts the new assigned numbers; EXIT ignores EXIT SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0 SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000 EDIT ENTR EXIT The PORT number must remain at 3000. Do not change this setting unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel. SETUP X.X SETUP X.X INITIALIZING INET 0% … INITIALIZING INET 100% INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED SETUP X.X ID Figure 4-7: 07270B DCN6512 DEL [?] EXIT INET SETUP X.X INITIALIZATION FAILED Contact your IT Network Administrator COMMUNICATIONS MENU COM1 EXIT COM – LAN / Internet Manual Configuration 115 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.11.7.3. Changing the Analyzer’s HOSTNAME The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network. The default name for all Teledyne API Model T200H/M analyzers is initially blank. To create or later change this name (particularly if you have more than one analyzer on your network), press. SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > CAL SET> SETUP CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMMUNICATIONS MENU INET EDIT EXIT EXIT SETUP X.X ID HOSTNAME: UNTIL … PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X DHCP: ON SETUP X.X NOX=XXX.X COM1 HOSTNAME: T200 INS DEL [?] ENTR EXIT EXIT Press to edit HOSTNAME SAMPLE ENTER SETUP PASS : 818 SETUP X.X 8 1 8 ENTR HOSTNAME: T200X STATION 1 EXIT Moves the cursor one character to the right. INS Inserts a character before the cursor location. DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location. [?] Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion. 0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ? ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. Some keys only appear as needed. 116 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.11.8. USB PORT SETUP The analyzer can be operated through a personal computer by downloading the TAPI USB driver and directly connecting their respective USB ports. 1. Install the Teledyne T-Series USB driver on your computer, downloadable from the Teledyne API website under Help Center>Software Downloads (www.teledyneapi.com/software). 2. Run the installer file: “TAPIVCPInstaller.exe” 3. Connect the USB cable between the USB ports on your personal computer and your analyzer. The USB cable should be a Type A – Type B cable, commonly used as a USB printer cable. 4. Determine the Windows XP Com Port number that was automatically assigned to the USB connection. (Start → Control Panel → System → Hardware → Device Manager). This is the com port that should be set in the communications software, such as APIcom or Hyperterminal. Refer to the Quick Start (Direct Cable Connection) section of the Teledyne APIcom Manual, PN 07463. 07270B DCN6512 117 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 5. In the instrument’s SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM2 menu, make the following settings: Baud Rate: 115200 COM2 Mode Settings: Quiet Mode ON Computer Mode ON MODBUS RTU OFF MODBUS ASCII OFF E,8,1 MODE OFF E,7,1 MODE OFF RS-485 MODE OFF SECURITY MODE OFF MULTIDROP MODE OFF ENABLE MODEM OFF ERROR CHECKING ON XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE OFF HARDWARE HANDSHAKE OFF HARDWARE FIFO ON COMMAND PROMPT OFF 6. Next, configure your communications software, such as APIcom. Use the COM port determined in Step 4 and the baud rate set in Step 5. The figures below show how these parameters would be configured in the Instrument Properties window in APIcom when configuring a new instrument. See the APIcom manual (PN 07463) for more details. Note 118 USB configuration requires that instrument and PC baud rates match; check the PC baud rate and change if needed. Using the USB port disallows use of the rear panel COM2 port except for multidrop communication. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.11.9. MULTIDROP RS-232 SET UP When the RS-232 Multidrop option is installed, connection adjustments and configuration through the menu system are required. This section provides instructions for the internal connection adjustments, then for external connections, and ends with instructions for menu-driven configuration. Note that because the RS-232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232 and COM2 DB9 connectors on the analyzer’s rear panel to connect the chain of instruments, COM2 port is no longer available for separate RS-232 or RS-485 operation. CAUTION – Risk of Instrument Damage and Warranty Invalidation Printed circuit assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static discharges too small to be felt by the human nervous system. Damage resulting from failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies will void the instrument warranty. See A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge section in this manual for more information on preventing ESD damage. In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt jumpering two pins on the serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly (PCA), as shown in Figure 4-8. This shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in the multidrop chain, which must remain terminated. This requires powering off and opening each instrument and making the following adjustments: 1. With NO power to the instrument, remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open for access to the multidrop PCA, which is seated on the CPU. 2. On the Multidrop/LVDS PCA’s JP2 connector, remove the shunt that jumpers Pins 21 22 as indicated in Figure 4-8. (Do this for all but the last instrument in the chain where the shunt should remain at Pins 21 22). 3. Check that the following cable connections are made in all instruments (again refer to Figure 4-8). J3 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to the CPU’s COM1 connector (Note that the CPU’s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop) J4 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard J1 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCS to the front panel LCD 07270B DCN6512 119 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 4-8: Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode Note: If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously configured chain, remove the shunt between Pins 21 22 of the Multidrop PCA in the instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain. 4. Close the instrument. 5. Referring to Figure 4-9, use straight-through DB9 male-DB9 female cables to interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer’s RS232 port; then from the first analyzer’s COM2 port to the second analyzer’s RS232 port; from the second analyzer’s COM2 port to the third analyzer’s RS232 port, etc., connecting in this fashion up to eight analyzers, subject to the distance limitations of the RS-232 standard. 6. On the rear panel of each analyzer, adjust the DCE DTE switch so that the green and the red LEDs (RX and TX) of the COM1 connector (labeled RS232) are both lit. (Ensure you are using the correct RS-232 cables that are internally wired specifically for RS232 communication). 120 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions Female DB9 Host Male DB9 RS-232 port Analyzer Analyzer Analyzer Last Analyzer COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 Ensure jumper is installed between JP2 pins 21 22 in last instrument of multidrop chain. Figure 4-9: RS-232-Multidrop Host-to-Analyzer Interconnect Diagram 7. BEFORE communicating from the host, power on the instruments and check that the Machine ID (Section 4.11.1) is unique for each. On the front panel menu, use SETUP>MORE>COMM>ID. The default ID is typically the model number or “0”; to change the 4-digit identification number, press the button below the digit to be changed; once changed, press/select ENTER to accept the new ID for that instrument. 8. Next, in the SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM1 menu (do not use the COM2 menu for multidrop), edit the COM1 MODE parameter as follows: press/select EDIT and set only QUIET MODE, COMPUTER MODE, and MULTIDROP MODE to ON. Do not change any other settings. 9. Press/select ENTER to accept the changed settings, and ensure that COM1 MODE now shows 35. 10. Press/select SET> to go to the COM1 BAUD RATE menu and ensure it reads the same for all instruments (edit as needed so that all instruments are set at the same baud rate). NOTES: 07270B DCN6512 The (communication) Host instrument can address only one instrument at a time, each by its unique ID (see Step 7 above). Teledyne API recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and the first analyzer, and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain. 121 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.11.10. MODBUS SETUP The following set of instructions assumes that the user is familiar with MODBUS communications, and provides minimal information to get started. For additional instruction, please refer to the Teledyne API MODBUS manual, PN 06276. Also refer to www.modbus.org for MODBUS communication protocols. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS Instrument firmware with MODBUS capabilities installed. MODBUS-compatible software (TAPI uses MODBUS Poll for testing; see www.modbustools.com) Personal computer Communications cable (Ethernet or USB or RS232) Possibly a null modem adapter or cable ACTIONS Set Com Mode parameters Comm Ethernet: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – INET; scroll through the INET submenu until you reach TCP PORT 2 (the standard setting is 502), then continue to TCP PORT 2 MODBUS TCP/IP; press EDIT and toggle the menu button to change the setting to ON, then press ENTR. (Change Machine ID if needed: see “Slave ID”). USB/RS232: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – COM2 – EDIT; scroll through the COM2 EDIT submenu until the display shows COM2 MODBUS RTU: OFF (press OFF to change the setting to ON. Scroll NEXT to COM2 MODBUS ASCII and ensure it is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings. (If RTU is not available with your communications equipment, set the COM2 MODBUS ASCII setting to ON and ensure that COM2 MODBUS RTU is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings). Slave ID If your analyzer is connected to a network with at least one other analyzer of the same model, a unique Slave ID must be assigned to each. Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – ID. The MACHINE ID default is the same as the model number. Toggle the menu buttons to change the ID. Reboot analyzer For the settings to take effect, power down the analyzer, wait 5 seconds, and power up the analyzer. Make appropriate cable connections Connect your analyzer either: Specify MODBUS software settings (examples used here are for MODBUS Poll software) Read the Modbus Poll Register 122 via its Ethernet or USB port to a PC (this may require a USB-to-RS232 adapter for your PC; if so, also install the software driver from the CD supplied with the adapter, and reboot the computer if required), or via its COM2 port to a null modem (this may require a null modem adapter or cable). Click Setup / [Read / Write Definition] /. a. In the Read/Write Definition window (see example that follows) select a Function (what you wish to read from the analyzer). b. Input Quantity (based on your firmware’s register map). c. In the View section of the Read/Write Definition window select a Display (typically Float Inverse). d. Click OK. 2. Next, click Connection/Connect. a. In the Connection Setup window (see example that follows), select the options based on your computer. b. Press OK. Use the Register Map to find the test parameter names for the values displayed (see example that follows If desired, assign an alias for each. 1. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions Example Read/Write Definition window: Example Connection Setup window: Example MODBUS Poll window: 07270B DCN6512 123 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.12. SETUP MORE VARS: INTERNAL VARIABLES (VARS) The T200H/M has several-user adjustable software variables, which define certain operational parameters. Usually, these variables are automatically set by the instrument’s firmware, but can be manually re-defined using the VARS menu. Table 4-15 lists all variables that are available within the 818 password protected level. See Appendix A2 for a detailed listing of all of the T200H/M variables that are accessible through the remote interface. Table 4-15: Variable Names (VARS) NO. 0 1 VARIABLE DESCRIPTION DAS_HOLD_OFF Duration of no data storage in the DAS. This is the time when the analyzer returns from one of its calibration modes to the SAMPLE mode. The DAS_HOLD_OFF can be disabled in each DAS channel. MEASURE_MODE Selects the gas measurement mode in which the instrument is to operate. NOx only, NO only or dual gas measurement of NOx and NO simultaneously. Dual gas mode requires that a special switching optional be installed. ALLOWED VALUES Can be between 0.5 and 20 minutes Default=15 min. NO; NOx; NOx–NO 2 STABIL_GAS Selects which gas measurement is displayed when the STABIL test function is selected. 3 TPC_ENABLE Enables or disables the temperature and pressure compensation (TPC) feature (Section 8.8.3). ON/OFF Default=ON 4 DYN_ZERO Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the NO and NOX response when performing a zero point calibration during an AutoCal (Section 7.7). ON/OFF Default=OFF 5 DYN_SPAN Dynamic span automatically adjusts the offsets and slopes of the NO and NOx response when performing a zero point calibration during an AutoCal (Section 7.7). Note that the DYN_ZERO and DYN_SPAN features are not allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency. NO; NOx; NO2; O21 ON/OFF Default=OFF 6 CONC_PRECISION Allows to set the number of decimal points of the concentration and stability parameters displayed on the front panel. AUTO, 1, 2, 3, 4 Default=AUTO 7 CLOCK_ADJ Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock. Choose the + sign if the clock is too slow, choose the - sign if the clock is too fast. -60 to +60 s/day Default=0 8 SERVICE_CLEAR Resets the service interval timer . (Changing the setting to ON resets the timer and then returns the setting back to default OFF). ON/OFF 9 TIME_SINCE_SVC Tracks the time since last service (restarts the time when the service interval timer, SERVICE_CLEAR, is reset). 10 SVC_INTERVAL 1 Sets the interval between service reminders. Default=OFF 0-500000 Default=0 0-100000 Default=0 Only available in analyzers with O2 sensor options installed. Note 124 There is a 2-second latency period between the time a VARS value is changed and the time the new value is stored into the analyzer’s memory. DO NOT turn the analyzer off during this period or the new setting will be lost. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following touchscreen button sequence: SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X.X EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting. ENTER VARS PASS: 818 ENTR accepts the new setting. 8 1 8 SETUP X.X ENTR EXIT 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes SETUP X.X NEXT JUMP SETUP X.X 1 5 .0 ENTR EXIT Toggle this keys to change setting EDIT PRNT EXIT See Section 6.12.1. for information on setting the MEASRUE MODE 2 ) STABIL_GAS=NOX PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X NO SETUP X.X 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes 1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO NEXT JUMP SETUP X.X EDIT PRNT EXIT NO2 2 ) STABIL GAS =NOX NOX O2 ENTR EXIT 3 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Choose Gas SETUP X.X 3 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON ON SETUP X.X ENTR EXIT 4 ) DYN_ZERO=ON PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Toggle this keys to change setting 4 ) DYN_ZERO=ON SETUP X.X ON SETUP X.X ENTR EXIT 5) DYN_SPAN=ON PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT Toggle this keys to change setting 5 ) DYN_SPAN=ON SETUP X.X ON SETUP X.X ENTR EXIT Toggle this keys to change setting 6) CONC_PRECUISION : 1 PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X AUTO 6) CONC_PRECUISION : 3 0 1 2 3 4 ENTR EXIT Toggle these keys to change setting SETUP X.X 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day PREV NEXT JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT SETUP X.X + 0 0 7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day ENTR EXIT Toggle to change setting 07270B DCN6512 125 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.12.1. SETTING THE GAS MEASUREMENT MODE In its standard operating mode the T200H/M measures NO, NO2 and NOx. It can also be set to measure only NO or only NOX. To select one of these three measurement modes, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SAMPLE 8 1 8 ENTR EXIT 0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15 minutes NEXT JUMP SETUP X.X SETUP X.X EDIT PRNT EXIT MEASURE MODE: NOX-NO PREV ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X NEXT EXIT ignores the new setting. ENTR accepts the new setting. MEASURE MODE: NOX PREV NEXT SETUP X.X 126 EDIT PRNT EXIT 1 ) MEASURE_MODE=NOX-NO PREV NEXT JUMP Press the PREV and NEXT buttons to move back and forth between gas modes EXIT ENTER SETUP PASS : 818 SETUP X.X NOX-NO mode is the default mode for the 200EH/M EXIT ENTR EXIT MEASURE MODE: NO ENTR EXIT 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13. SETUP MORE DIAG: DIAGNOSTICS MENU A series of diagnostic tools is grouped together under the SETUP-MORE-DIAG menu. These parameters are dependent on firmware revision. These tools can be used in a variety of troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures and are referred to in many places of the maintenance and trouble-shooting sections. An overview of the entire DIAG menu can be found in menu tree A-6 of Appendix A.1. Table 4-16: T200H/M Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions FRONT PANEL MODE INDICATOR SECTION DIAG I/O 4.13.2 DIAG AOUT 4.13.3 ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION: This submenu allows the user to configure the analyzer’s four analog output channels, including choosing what parameter will be output on each channel. Instructions that appear here allow adjustment and calibration the voltage signals associated with each output as well as calibration of the analog to digital converter circuitry on the motherboard. DIAG AIO 6.13.4, through 6.13.6 DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION: Allows the user to program which concentration values are displayed in the . DIAG DISP 6.13.7.1 OPTIC TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an optic test, which turns on an LED located inside the sensor module near the PMT (Fig. 10-15). This diagnostic tests the response of the PMT without having to supply span gas. DIAG OPTIC 6.13.7.2 ELECTRICAL TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an electric test, which generates a current intended to simulate the PMT output to verify the signal handling and conditioning of the PMT preamp board. DIAG ELEC 6.13.7.3 DIAG OZONE 6.13.7.4 DIAG FCAL 6.13.7.5 DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION AND MEANING SIGNAL I/O: Allows observation of all digital and analog signals in the instrument. Allows certain digital signals such as valves and heaters to be toggled ON and OFF. ANALOG OUTPUT: When entered, the analyzer performs an analog output step test. This can be used to calibrate a chart recorder or to test the analog output accuracy. OZONE GEN OVERRIDE: Allows the user to manually turn the O3 generator on or off. This setting is retained when exiting DIAG. During initial power up TMR (timer) is displayed while the Ozone brick remains off for the first 30 minutes. FLOW CALIBRATION: This function is used to calibrate the gas flow output signals of sample gas and ozone supply. These settings are retained when exiting DIAG. 07270B DCN6512 127 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.13.1. ACCESSING THE DIAGNOSTIC FEATURES To access the DIAG functions press the following keys: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X DIAG SETUP PREV < TST TST > CAL EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display SETUP X.X At this point EXIT returns to the PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X From this point forward, EXIT returns to the SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT 1 EXIT DIAG ENTR EXIT ENTR DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT NEXT NEXT PREV PREV EXIT ENTR EXIT ENTR EXIT OPTIC TEST NEXT ENTR EXIT ELECTRICAL TEST NEXT DIAG SIGNAL I / O NEXT PREV PREV ENTR DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG. DIAG ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 8 PREV NEXT DIAG SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG 8 DIAG PRIMARY SETUP MENU ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION ENTR EXIT OZONE GEN OVERRIDE NEXT DIAG ENTR EXIT FLOW CALIBRATION EXIT PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT 4.13.2. SIGNAL I/O The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows to review and change the digital and analog input/output functions of the analyzer. See Appendix A-4 for a complete list of the parameters available for review under this menu. Note 128 Changes to signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the signal I/O menu is exited. Exceptions are the ozone generator override and the flow sensor calibration, which remain as entered when exiting. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions To enter the signal I/O test mode, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT returns to the main SAMPLE display SETUP X.X EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X.X 8 1 EXIT ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 8 DIAG ENTR EXIT SIGNAL I / O NEXT DIAG I / O ENTR EXIT Test Signals Displayed Here PREV NEXT JUMP PRNT EXIT Use the NEXT & PREV keys to move between signal types. Press JUMP to go directly to a specific signal See Appendix A-4 for a complete list of available SIGNALS EXAMPLE DIAG I / O 0 JUMP TO: 5 5 ENTR EXIT DIAG I / O CAL_LED = ON PREV NEXT JUMP ON PRNT EXIT Enter 05 to Jump to Signal 5: (CAL_LED) Exit to return to the DIAG menu Pressing the PRNT key will send a formatted printout to the serial port and can be captured with a computer or other output device. 07270B DCN6512 129 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.13.3. ANALOG OUTPUT STEP TEST This test can be used to check the accuracy and proper operation of the analog outputs. The test forces all four analog output channels to produce signals ranging from 0% to 100% of the full scale range in 20% increments. This test is useful to verify the operation of the data logging/recording devices attached to the analyzer. To begin the Analog Output Step Test press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X.X 8 1 EXIT ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 8 DIAG ENTR EXIT SIGNAL I / O NEXT ENTR DIAG ANALOG OUTPUT PREV NEXT DIAG AOUT EXIT ENTR [0%] EXIT Performs analog output step test. 0% - 100% EXIT Exit-Exit returns to the DIAG menu ANALOG OUTPUT 0% DIAG AOUT EXIT ANALOG OUTPUT Pressing the key under “0%” while performing the test will pause the test at that level. Brackets will appear around the value: example: [20%] Pressing the same key again will resume the test. 130 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.4. ANALOG OUTPUTS AND REPORTING RANGES 4.13.4.1. Analog Output Signals Available on the T200H/M The analyzer has four analog output signals, accessible through a connector on the rear panel. ANALOG OUT A1 + A2 - + - + A3 - A4 + - 0-20 mA current loop output available for these channels only Figure 4-10: Analog Output Connector Key The signal levels of each output can be independently configured as follows. An overrange feature is available that allows each range to be usable from -5% to + 5% of its nominal scale: Table 4-17: Analog Output Voltage Ranges with Over-Range Active RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0-0.1 V -5 mV +105 mV 0-1 V -0.05 V +1.05 V 0-5 V -0.25 V +5.25 V 0-10 V -0.5 V +10.5 V The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC. Pin assignments for the ANALOG output connector at the rear panel of the instrument: Table 4-18: Analog Output Pin Assignments PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 07270B DCN6512 ANALOG OUTPUT A1 A2 A3 A4 VOLTAGE SIGNAL CURRENT SIGNAL V Out I Out + Ground I Out - V Out I Out + Ground I Out - V Out I Out + Ground I Out - V Out Not Available Ground Not Available 131 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Additionally A1, A2 andA3 may be equipped with optional 0-20 mA current loop drivers. A4 is not available for the current loop option. Table 4-19: Analog Output Current Loop Range RANGE MINIMUM OUTPUT MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0-20 mA 0 mA 20 mA These are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical applications use 2-20 or 4-20 mA for the lower and upper limits. Please specify desired range when ordering this option. The default offset for all ranges is 0 mA. All of these outputs can be configured output signals representing any of the DAS parameters available on this model (See Table A-6 of Appendix A.5 for a complete list). The ability to select any one of the T200H/M’s 40+ DAS data types coupled with the ability to select from a variety of signal ranges and scales makes the analog outputs of the T200H/M extremely flexible. Table 4-20: Example of Analog Output Configuration for T200H/M OUTPUT DAS PARAMETER ASSIGNED SIGNAL SCALE A1 NXCNC1 0-5 V A2 N2CNC2 4-20 mA1 A3 PMTDET 0-1V A4 O2CONC 0-10 V 1 With current loop option installed 4.13.4.2. Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges The entire measurement range of the analyzer is quite large, 0 – 5,000 ppm for the T200H and 0-200 PPM for the T200M, but many applications use only a small part of the analyzer’s full measurement range. This creates two performance challenges: 1. The width of the analyzer’s physical range can create data resolution problems for most analog recording devices. For example, in an application where a T200H is being used to measure an expected concentration of typically less than 200 ppm NOx, the full scale of expected values is only 4% of the instrument’s full 5000 ppm measurement range. Unmodified, the corresponding output signal would also be recorded across only 4% of the range of the recording device. The T200H/M solves this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for the analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the specific application. Only the reporting range of the analog outputs is scaled, the physical range of the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front panel remain unaltered. 2. Applications where low concentrations of NO, NO2 and NOx are measured require greater sensitivity and resolution than typically necessary for measurements of higher concentrations. The T200H/M solves this issue by using two hardware physical ranges that cover the instruments entire measurement range The analyzer’s software automatically 132 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions selects which physical range is in effect based on the analog output reporting range selected by the user: FOR THE T200M: Low range spans 0 to 20 ppm NOX (20 ppm = 5 V); High range spans 0-200 ppm NOX (200 ppm = 5 V). If the high end of the selected reporting range is 20 ppm. The low physical range is selected. If the high end of the selected reporting range is > 20 ppm. The high physical range is selected. FOR THE T200H: Low range spans 0 to 500 ppm NOX (500 ppm = 5 V); High range spans 0-5000 ppm NOX (5000 ppm = 5 V). If the high end of the selected reporting range is 500 ppm. The low physical range is selected. If the high end of the selected reporting range is > 500 ppm. The high physical range is selected. Once properly calibrated, the analyzer’s front panel will accurately report concentrations along the entire span of its 0 and 200 ppm or 5,000 ppm physical range regardless of which reporting range has been selected for the analog outputs and which physical range is being used by the instruments software. Both reporting ranges need to be calibrated independently to the same span gas concentrations in order to allow switching back and forth between high and low ranges. 07270B DCN6512 133 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.13.5. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION 4.13.5.1. The Analog I/O Configuration Submenu. Table 4-21 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the T200H/M. Table 4-21: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions SUB MENU FUNCTION AOUTS CALIBRATED: Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of all analog output channels. DATA_OUT_1: Configures the A1 analog output: RANGE1: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and full scale value of the output. OVERRANGE: Turns the ± 5% over-range feature ON/OFF for this output channel. REC_OFS1: Sets a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is set to CURRent loop. AUTO_CAL1: Sets the channel for automatic or manual calibration CALIBRATED1: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on this one channel only. OUTOUT: Turns the output channel ON/OFF. A signal. Equal to the low end of the output scale (zero point) is still output by the analyzer, but no data is sent. DATA: Allows the user to select which DAS parameter to be output. SCALE: Sets the top end of the reporting range scale for this channel. The analyzer automatically chooses the units of measure appropriate for the DAS parameter chosen (e.g. ppm for concentration parameters; in-Hg-A for pressure measurements, etc.) UPDATE: Sets the time interval at which the analyzer updates the data being output on the channel. DATA_OUT_2 Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 2 (NO) DATA_OUT_3 Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 3 (NO2) DATA_OUT_4 Same as for DATA_OUT_1 but for analog channel 4 (O2) AIN CALIBRATED Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the analog to digital converter circuit on the motherboard. XIN1 For each of 8 external analog input channels, shows the gain, offset, engineering units, and whether the channel is to show up as a Test function. . . . XIN8 1 Changes to RANGE or REC_OFS require recalibration of this output. To configure the analyzer’s four analog outputs, set the electronic signal type of each channel and calibrate the outputs. This consists of: 1. Selecting an output type (voltage or current, if an optional current output driver has been installed) and the signal level that matches the input requirements of the recording device attached to the channel. 2. Determine if the over-range feature is needed and turn it on or off accordingly. 3. If a Voltage scale is in use, a bipolar recorder offset may be added to the signal if required (Section 4.13.5). 4. Choose an DAS parameter to be output on the channel. 134 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 5. Set the reporting range scale for the data type chosen. 6. Set the update rate for the channel. 7. Calibrating the output channel. This can be done automatically or manually for each channel (see Sections 4.13.6). To access the analog I/O configuration sub menu, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP DIAG AIO A OUTS CALIBRATED: NO SETUP X.X CAL PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_1: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT SETUP X.X COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT EXIT ENTER PASSWORD:818 1 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO DIAG ENTR AIO Configuration Submenu DIAG AIO ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION 07270B DCN6512 DATA_OUT_4: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... ENTR EXIT EXIT DIAG AIO PREV NEXT DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT SIGNAL I/O NEXT DIAG EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X 8 EXIT EXIT AIN CALIBRATED: NO CAL EXIT EXIT 135 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.13.5.2. Analog Output Signal Type and Range Selection To select an output signal type (DC Voltage or current) and level for one output channel press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET> CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT These keys set the signal level and type of the selected channel 136 DIAG AIO 0.1V EXIT DATA_OUT_3: RANGE: 5V 1V 5V 10V CURR ENTR EXIT Pressing ENTR records the new setting and returns to the previous menu. Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.5.3. Turning the Analog Output Over-Range Feature ON/OFF In its default configuration a ± 5% over-range is available on each of the T200H/M’s analog output channels. This over-range can be disabled if your recording device is sensitive to excess voltage or current. Note 07270B DCN6512 Instruments with current range options installed on one or more of the outputs often are delivered from the factory with the over-range feature turned OFF on those channels. 137 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To Turn the over-range feature on or off, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO SET> ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V SET> EDIT DIAG AIO DIAG AIO EXIT DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: ON ON DIAG AIO EXIT DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: ON EDIT Toggle this button to turn the OverRange feature ON or OFF EXIT ENTR EXIT DATA_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: OFF OFF ENTR EXIT 4.13.5.4. Adding a Recorder Offset to an Analog Output Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal is significantly different from the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise 138 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions around the zero point. This can be achieved in the T200H/M by defining a zero offset, a small voltage (e.g., 10% of span). To add a zero offset to a specific analog output channel, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET> CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT DIAG AIO EXIT DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V SET> EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV EDIT Toggle these buttons to set ther value of the desired offset. DIAG AIO + DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV 0 0 0 0 ENTR EXIT EXAMPLE DIAG AIO – DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: -10 mV 0 0 1 0 ENTR EXIT DATA_OUT_2 REC OFS: -10 mV EDIT 07270B DCN6512 EXIT EXIT 139 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.13.5.5. Assigning a DAS Parameter to an Analog Output Channel The T200H/M analog output channels can be assigned to output data from any of the 40+ available DAS parameters (see Table A-6 of Appendix A.5). The default settings for the four output channels are: Table 4-22: Analog Output Data Type Default Settings PARAMETER DATA TYPE1 CHANNEL DEFAULT SETTING A1 A2 NXCNC1 NOCNC1 A3 A43 N2CNC1 NXCNC2 2 RANGE 0 - 5 VDC REC OFS 0 mVDC AUTO CAL. ON CALIBRATED NO OUTPUT ON SCALE 100 ppm UPDATE 5 sec 1 See Table A-6 of T200H/M Appendix A for definitions of these DAS data types 2 Optional current loop outputs are available for analog output channels A1-A3. 3 On analyzers with O2 sensor options installed, DAS parameter O2CONC is assigned to output A4. 4.13.5.6. DAS Configuration Limits The number of DAS objects are limited by the instrument’s finite storage capacity. For information regarding the maximum number of channels, parameters, and records and how to calculate the file size for each data channel, refer to the DAS manual downloadable from the T-API website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/ under Special Manuals. 4.13.5.7. Reporting Gas Concentrations via the T200H/M Analog Output Channels While the DAS parameters available for output over via the analog channels A1 thru A4 include a vide variety internal temperatures, gas flows and pressures as well as certain key internal voltage levels, most of the DAS parameters are related to gas concentration levels. Two parameters exist for each gas type measured by the T200H/M. They are generally referred to as range 1 and range 2 (e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2; NOCNC1 and NOCNC2; etc.). These take the place of the high and low concentration ranges of previous versions of the analyzer software. Concentrations for each range are computed using separate slopes and offsets which are also stored via separate DAS parameters. Note 140 If an analog output channel is set to report a gas concentration (e.g. NXCNC1; NOx concentration; Range 1) it is generally a good idea to use 80% of the reporting range for that channel for the span point calibration. If both available parameters for a specific gas type are being reported (e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2) separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions The available gas concentration DAS parameters for output via the T200H/M analog output channels are: Table 4-23: Analog Output DAS Parameters Related to Gas Concentration Data REPORTING RANGE PARAMETER NAME1 DESCRIPTION NXCNC1 Concentration NXSLP1 Slope NXOFS1 Offset NXZSC1 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset NXCNC2 Concentration NXSLP2 Slope NXOFS2 Offset NXZSC2 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset NOCNC1 Concentration NOSLP1 Slope NOOFS1 Offset NOZSC1 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset NOCNC2 Concentration NOSLP2 Slope NOOFS2 Offset NOZSC2 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset NO2 Range 12 (LOW) N2CNC1 Concentration - Computed with data from NOx Range 1 and NO Range 1 N2ZSC1 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset NO2 RANGE 22 (HIGH) N2CNC2 Concentration - Computed with data from NOx Range 2 and NO Range 2 N2ZSC2 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset NOx Range 1 (LOW) NOx RANGE 2 (HIGH) NO Range 1 (LOW) NO RANGE 2 (HIGH) 3 O2 Range3 O2CONC Concentration O2OFST3 Slope 3 Offset 3 Concentration during calibration, prior to computing new slope and offset O2SLPE O2ZSCN 1 Parameters are not listed in the order they appear on the DAS list (see Table A-6 or Appendix A.5 for the proper order of the full list of parameters) 2 Since NO2 values are computed rather than measured directly, no separate slope or offset exist. 3 Only available on instruments with O2 sensor options installed. 07270B DCN6512 141 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To assign a DAS parameter to a specific analog output channel, press, From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET> CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT DIAG AIO EXIT DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V SET> EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: NOCNC1 EDIT DIAG AIO EXIT DATA_OUT_2 DATA: NOCNC1 PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT Use these buttons to move up and down the list if available DAS parameters (See Table A-6 of Appendix A.5) EXAMPLE DIAG AIO DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 DATA: STABIL INS [1] ENTR EXIT DATA_OUT_2 DATA: STABIL EDIT 142 DEL EXIT 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.5.8. Setting the Reporting Range Scale for an Analog Output Once the DAS parameter has been set, the top end of the scale must be selected. For concentration values this should be equal to the expected maximum value for the application. The analog channel will scale its output accordingly. EXAMPLE: DAS parameter being output: NXCNC1 Maximum value expected: 800 ppm Output range; 10 V Output:...0 ppm 0.000 V 100 ppm 1.250 V 200 ppm 2.500 V 400 ppm 5.000 V 750 ppm 9.375 V Note Regardless of how the reporting range for an analog output channel is set, the instrument will continue to measure NO, NO2 and NOx accurately for the entire physical range of the instrument (See Section 4.13.4.2 for information on Physical range versus reporting range). Each output channel can be programmed for a separate gas with independent reporting range. EXAMPLE: A1 NXCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-1000 ppm NOX. A1 NXCNC2 (NOx Range 2) 0-1250 ppm NOX. A3 NOCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-500 ppm NO. A4 N2CNC1 (NO2 Range 1) 0-750 ppm NO2. Note While Range 1 for each gas type is often referred to as the LOW range and Range 2 as the HIGH range, this is simply a naming convention. The upper limit for each range can be set to any value. EXAMPLE: A1 NXCNC1 (NOx Range 1) 0-1500 ppm NOX A2 NXCNC2 (NOx Range 2) 0-1000 ppm NOX 07270B DCN6512 143 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To set the reporting range for an analog output, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET> CAL DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V SET> EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT EXIT DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 100.00 PPM EDIT EXIT EXIT DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: [1]00.00 PPM INS DEL [1] ENTR EXIT EXAMPLE DIAG AIO DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 12[5]0. PPM INS DEL [1] ENTR EXIT DATA_OUT_2 SCALE: 1250.00 PPM EDIT EXIT RANGE SELECTION TOUCH SCREEN CONTROL BUTTON FUNCTIONS BUTTON FUNCTION Moves the cursor one character to the right. INS Inserts a character before the cursor location. DEL Deletes a character at the cursor location. [?] Press this key to cycle through the range of numerals and characters available for insertion: 0-9; as well as “+” & “-“. ENTR Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu. EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. Some keys only appear as needed. 144 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.5.9. Setting Data Update Rate for an Analog Output The data update rate for the T200H/M analog outputs can be adjusted to match the requirements of the specific DAS parameter chosen for each channel. For instance, if the parameter NXCNC1 (NOx concentration; Range 1) is chosen for channel A1 on an instrument set for dual gas measurement mode, it would be meaningless to have an update rate of less than 30 seconds, since the NOx-No measurement cycle takes that long to complete. On the other hand, if the channel were set to output the PMTDET voltage or the temperature of the moly converter, it might be useful to have output updated more frequently. 07270B DCN6512 145 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To change the update rate for an individual analog output channel, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET> CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT DIAG AIO EXIT DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V SET> EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 5 SEC EDIT Toggle these buttons to set the data update rate for this channel. DIAG AIO 0 DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 5 SEC 0 5 ENTR EXIT EXAMPLE DIAG AIO 0 DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 30 SEC 3 0 ENTR EXIT DATA_OUT_2 UPDATE: 30 SEC EDIT 146 EXIT EXIT 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.5.10. Turning an Analog Output On or Off Each output can be temporarily turned off. When off, no data is sent to the output. Electronically, it is still active, but there is simply no data being output, so the signal level at the rear of the instrument will fall to zero. To turn an individual analog output channel ON/OFF, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO SET> ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT DIAG AIO EXIT DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: 5V SET> EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: ON EDIT Toggle this button to turn the channel ON/OFF DIAG AIO ON DIAG AIO OFF 07270B DCN6512 EXIT DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: ON ENTR EXIT DATA_OUT_2 OUTPUT: OFF ENTR EXIT 147 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.13.6. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION Analog calibration needs to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer (performed in the factory as part of the configuration process) or whenever recalibration is required. The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically, either as a group or individually (Section 4.13.6.1), or adjusted manually (see Section 4.13.6). (Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device. Manual calibration requires the AUTOCAL feature to be disabled).During automatic calibration the analyzer tells the output circuitry to generate a zero mV signal and high-scale point signal (usually about 90% of chosen analog signal scale) then measures actual signal of the output. Any error at zero or high-scale is corrected with a slope and offset. To enable or disable the Auto-Cal feature for one output channel, press. From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO SET> ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3: 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT DIAG AIO EXIT DATA_OUT_3 RANGE: 5V SET> EDIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:ON EDIT Toggle this button to turn AUTO CAL ON or OFF DIAG AIO ON EXIT DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:ON ENTR EXIT (OFF = manual calibration mode). DIAG AIO OFF Note 148 ENTR accepts the new setting. EXIT ignores the new setting DATA_OUT_3 AUTO CAL.:OFF ENTR EXIT Channels with current loop output options cannot be calibrated automatically. Outputs Configured for 0.1V full scale should always be calibrated manually. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.6.1. Automatic Analog Output Calibration To calibrate the outputs as a group with the AOUTS CALIBRATION command, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO CAL DIAG AIO If any of the channels have not been calibrated ot if at least one channel has AUTO-CAL turned OFF, this message will read NO. Note 07270B DCN6512 EXIT AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_1 DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_2 DIAG AIO NOT AUTO CAL. DATA_OUT_3 DIAG AIO DIAG AIO EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET> Analyzer automatically calibrates all channels for which AUTO-CAL is turned ON ENTR AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_4 This message appears when AUTO-CAL is Turned OFF for a channel AOUTS CALIBRATED: YES SET> CAL EXIT Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device. 149 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To initiate an automatic calibration for an individual output channel, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO SET> ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO CAL EXIT DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING DATA_OUT_2 DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V SET> EDIT DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES CAL EXIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... 150 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.6.2. Manual Calibration of Analog Output Configured for Voltage Ranges For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated. Note The menu for manually adjusting the analog output signal level will only appear if the AUTO-CAL feature is turned off for the channel being adjusted. Calibration is performed with a voltmeter connected across the output terminals (See Figure 6-14) and by changing the actual output signal level using the front panel keys in 100, 10 or 1 count increments. See the Electrical Connections section for pin assignments of Analog Out connector on the rear panel V +DC Gnd V OUT + V IN + V OUT - V IN - Recording Device ANALYZER Figure 4-11: Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs Table 4-24: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration FULL SCALE ZERO TOLERANCE SPAN VOLTAGE SPAN TOLERANCE MINIMUM ADJUSTMENT (1 count) 0.1 VDC ±0.0005V 90 mV ±0.001V 0.02 mV 1 VDC ±0.001V 900 mV ±0.001V 0.24 mV 5 VDC ±0.002V 4500 mV ±0.003V 1.22 mV 10 VDC ±0.004V 4500 mV ±0.006V 2.44 mV 07270B DCN6512 151 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To manually adjust the signal levels of an analog output channel, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO DIAG AIO SET> AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO CAL SET> EDIT Continue pressing SET> until ... DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 5V, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT Continue adjustments until the voltage measured at the output of the analyzer and/or the input of the recording device matches the value in the upper right hand corner of the display (within the tolerances listed in Table 6-24). 152 DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO CAL EXIT EXIT DIAG AIO These buttons increase / decrease the analog output signal level (not the value on the display) by 100, 10 or 1 counts. EXIT EXIT Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V DATA_OUT_2 VOLT-Z: 0 mV U100 UP10 UP DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 VOLT-S: 4500 mV U100 UP10 UP DIAG AIO DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT These menus only appear if AUTO-CAL is turned OFF DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES CAL EXIT 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.6.3. Manual Calibration of Analog Outputs Configured for Current Loop Ranges The current loop output option (see Section 5.4) uses a small converter assembly to change the DC voltage output by the standard voltage output to a current signal ranging between 0-20 mA. Since the exact current increment per voltage count varies from converter to converter and from instrument to instrument, analog outputs with this option installed cannot be calibrated automatically and must be adjusted manually. Adjusting the signal zero and full scale values of the current loop output is done in a similar manner as manually adjusting analog outputs configured for voltage output except that: In this case calibration is performed with a current meter connected in series with the output circuitry (See Figure 4-12). Adjustments to the output are made using the front panel touchscreen, also in 100, 10 or 1 count increments, but the change in the voltage driving the converter assembly is displayed on the front panel. As before, adjustment of the output is performed until the current reading of the meter reaches the desired point (e.g. 2 mA, 4 mA, 20 mA, etc.) See Table 3-2 for pin assignments of the Analog Out connector on the rear panel. mA Current Meter IN I OUT + I IN + I OUT - I IN - Analyzer Figure 4-12: Note 07270B DCN6512 OUT Recording Device Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs Do not exceed 60 V between current loop outputs and instrument ground. 153 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual If a current meter is not available, an alternative method for calibrating the current loop outputs is to connect a 250 1% resistor across the current loop output. Using a voltmeter, connected across the resistor, follow the procedure above but adjust the output to the following values: V +DC Gnd V OUT + Volt Meter V IN + 250 O V OUT - V IN - ANALYZER Recording Device Figure 4-13: Alternative Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs Table 4-25: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor 154 FULL SCALE VOLTAGE FOR 2-20 MA (measured across 250Ω resistor) VOLTAGE FOR 4-20 MA (measured across 250Ω resistor) 0% 0.5 V 1.0 V 100% 5.0 V 5.0 V 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions To adjust the zero and span values of the current outputs, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO SET> ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO CAL EXIT DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-Z: 0 mV U100 UP10 UP Continue pressing SET> until you reach the output to be configured EXAMPLE DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-Z: 13 mV U100 UP10 UP DIAG AIO DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT DATA_OUT_2: CURR, NXCNC1, NOCAL EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-S: 5000 mV U100 UP10 UP DIAG AIO DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT Increase or decrease the current output by 100, 10 or 1 counts. The resulting change in output voltage is displayed in the upper line. Continue adjustments until the correct current is measured with the current meter. DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT DATA_OUT_2 RANGE: CURR SET> EDIT EXIT EXAMPLE DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CURR-S: 4866 mV U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT Continue pressing SET> until ... DIAG AIO DIAG AIO DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED:NO CAL 07270B DCN6512 DATA_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES CAL EXIT EXIT 155 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.13.6.4. AIN Calibration This is the sub-menu calibrates the analyzer’s A-to-D conversion circuitry. This calibration should only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU, motherboard or power supplies. To perform a AIN CALIBRATION, press: From the AIO CONFIGURATION SUBMENU (See Section 6.13.4.1) DIAG ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION PREV NEXT DIAG AIO ENTR EXIT AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO SET> CAL EXIT Continue pressing SET> until …. DIAG AIO DIAG AIO < SET SET> ENTR AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO CAL XIN1:1.00,0.00,V,OFF EDIT DIAG AIO < SET XIN1 OFFSET:0.00V SET> EDIT XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V EDIT EXIT DIAG AIO EXIT + 0 XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V 0 1 .0 0 ENTR EXIT XIN1 UNITS:V SET> DIAG AIO Press EDIT at any channel to to change Gain, Offset, Units and whether to display the channel in the Test functions (OFF/ON). EXIT SET> < SET Press SET> to scroll to the first channel. Continue pressing SET> to view each of 8 channels. EXIT DIAG AIO DIAG AIO EXIT EDIT EXIT XIN1 DISPLAY:OFF < SET EDIT Figure 4-14. 07270B DCN6512 EXIT Press to change Gain value Pressing ENTR records the new setting and returns to the previous menu. Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. DIAG – Analog Inputs (Option) Configuration Menu 157 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.13.7. OTHER DIAG MENU FUNCTIONS 4.13.7.1. Display Sequence Configuration The model T200H/M analyzer allows the user to choose which gas concentration measurement and reporting range is to be displayed in the concentration field on the instrument’s front panel display as well as what order and how long each will appear before analyzer cycle to the next item on the display list. Note This T200H/M is constantly monitoring all of the gas measurements it is configured to make regardless of which range is being displayed. This feature merely changes how that display sequence occurs, not how the instrument makes measurements. The software permits the user to choose from the following list of display values: Table 4-26: T200H/M Available Concentration Display Values DISPLAY VALUE DESCRIPTION ASSOCIATED DAS PARAMETER NOX NOx value computed with the slope and offset values for the currently selected NOx range.1 -- NXL NOx value computed with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting range 1 (Low) NXCNC1 NXH NOx value computed with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting range 2 (High) NXCNC2 NO -- NOL NO value computed with the slope and offset values for NO reporting range 1 (Low) NOCNC1 NOH NO value computed with the slope and offset values for NO reporting range 2 (High) NOCNC2 N2 NO2 value of computed with the slope and offset values for the currently selected NO2 range 1 -- N2L NO2 value computed for with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting range 1 (Low) & N0 reporting range 1 (Low) N2CNC1 N2H NO2 value computed for with the slope and offset values for NOx reporting range 2 (High) & N0 reporting range 2 (High) N2CNC2 O2 1 NO value of computed with the slope and offset values for the currently selected NO range 1 O2 concentration value. O2CONC2 With the following exceptions this will be reporting range 1 (Low) for the appropriate gas type: If the analyzer is in calibration mode, this will be the concentration value computed with the slope and offset for which ever range is being calibrated. If the instrument is in either E-Test or O-Test mode, this will be the value computed with the slope and offset values used by those tests. 2 Only appears if O2 sensor option is installed. 158 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions The default settings for this feature are: Table 4-27: T200H/M Concentration Display Default Values 1 DISPLAY VALUE DISPLAY DURATION NOX 4 sec. NO 4 sec. NO2 4 sec. O2 4 sec. Only appears if O2 sensor option is installed. To change these settings, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP DIAG DISP SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU PREV NEXT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X COMM VARS DIAG ALRM 8 EXIT 8 DIAG DEL EDIT ENTR EXIT Moves back and forth along existing list of display values ENTR EXIT DIAG DISP SIGNAL I/O NEXT ENTR EXIT DIAG DISP ENTR ENTR EXIT Toggle PREV and NEXT keys until desired display value appears. DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG. PREV NEXT DISPLAY DATA: NOX PREV NEXT Continue pressing NEXT until ... DIAG INS INSERT adds a new entry on the display list before the currently selected value. ENTER PASSWORD:818 1 4 SEC EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X 1) NOX, PREV NEXT DISPLAY DATA: N2H ENTR EXIT EXIT DIAG DISP 0 4 DISPLAY DURATION: 4 SEC ENTR Accepts the new setting. EXIT discards the new setting. ENTR EXIT Toggle these buttons to set desired display duration in seconds 07270B DCN6512 159 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To delete an entry in the display value list, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > SETUP X.X NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X COMM SECONDARY SETUP MENU VARS DIAG SETUP X.X 8 EXIT ALRM EXIT ENTER PASSWORD:818 1 8 DIAG ENTR EXIT SIGNAL I/O NEXT ENTR EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... DIAG DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIG. PREV NEXT DIAG DISP PREV NEXT Moves back and forth along existing list of display values DIAG DISP YES 1) NOX, EXIT 4 SEC INS DEL EDIT ENTR EXIT DELETE? NO DIAG DISP 160 ENTR DELETED 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.7.2. Optic Test The optic test function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED located in the cooling block of the PMT (Fig. 10-15). The analyzer uses the light emitted from the LED to test its photo-electronic subsystem, including the PMT and the current to voltage converter on the pre-amplifier board. To make sure that the analyzer measures only the light coming from the LED, the analyzer should be supplied with zero air. The optic test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000±1000 mV. To activate the electrical test press the following touchscreen button sequence. SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM SETUP X.X 8 1 EXIT ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 8 DIAG EXIT ENTR EXIT SIGNAL I / O NEXT ENTR EXIT Press NEXT until… DIAG OPTIC TEST PREV NEXT DIAG OPTIC ENTR EXIT A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X EXIT Press TST until… While the optic test is activated, PMT should be 2000 mV ± 1000 mV DIAG ELEC Note 07270B DCN6512 PMT = 2751 MV NOX=X.X EXIT This is a coarse test for functionality and not an accurate calibration tool. The resulting PMT signal can vary significantly over time and also changes with low-level calibration. 161 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.13.7.3. Electrical Test The electrical test function creates a current, which substitutes the PMT signal, and feeds it into the preamplifier board. This signal is generated by circuitry on the preamplifier board itself and tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly along with the A/D converter on the motherboard. It does not test the PMT itself. The electrical test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 ±1000 mV. To activate the electrical test press the following buttons: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X.X 8 1 EXIT ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 8 ENTR EXIT SIGNAL I / O DIAG NEXT ENTR EXIT Press NEXT until… DIAG ELECTRICAL TEST PREV NEXT DIAG ELEC ENTR EXIT A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X EXIT Press TST until… While the electrical test is activated, PMT should equal: DIAG ELEC PMT = 1732 MV NOX=X.X 2000 mV ± 1000 mV 162 EXIT 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.7.4. Ozone Generator Override This feature allows the user to manually turn the ozone generator off and on. This can be done before disconnecting the generator, to prevent ozone from leaking out, or after a system restart if the user does not want to wait for 30 minutes during warm-up time. Note that this is one of the two settings in the DIAG menu that is retained after you exit the menu. (During initial power up TMR (timer) is displayed while the Ozone brick remains off for the first 30 minutes). Also note that the ozone generator does not turn on if the ozone flow conditions are out of specification (e.g., if there is no flow through the system or the pump is broken). 07270B DCN6512 163 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To access this feature press the following menu sequence: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X.X 8 1 EXIT ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 8 DIAG ENTR EXIT SIGNAL I / O NEXT JUMP ENTR EXIT Press NEXT until… DIAG OZONE GEN OVERRIDE PREV NEXT DIAG OZONE OFF ENTR EXIT OZONE GEN OVERRIDE EXIT Toggle this button to turn the O3 generator ON/OFF. 164 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.13.7.5. Flow Calibration The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they are displayed on the front panel and reported through COM ports to match the actual flow rate measured at the sample inlet. This does not change the hardware measurement of the flow sensors, only the software-calculated values. To carry out this adjustment, connect an external, sufficiently accurate flow meter to the sample inlet. Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK SETUP X.X MORE EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X.X 8 1 EXIT Exit at any time to return to main the SETUP menu ENTER DIAG PASS: 818 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG SIGNAL I / O NEXT ENTR EXIT Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . . DIAG FLOW CALIBRATION PREV NEXT DIAG Choose between sample and ozone flow sensors. FLOW SENSOR TO CAL: SAMPLE SAMPLE OZONE DIAG FCAL Adjust these values until the displayed flow rate equals the flow rate being measured by the independent flow meter. 07270B DCN6512 ENTR EXIT 0 Exit returns to the previous menu 4 ENTR EXIT ACTUAL FLOW: 480 CC / M 8 0 ENTR EXIT ENTR accepts the new value and returns to the previous menu EXIT ignores the new value and returns to the previous menu 165 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.14. SETUP – ALRM: USING THE OPTIONAL GAS CONCENTRATION ALARMS (OPT 67) The optional alarm relay outputs (Option 67) are installed includes two concentration alarms. Each alarm has a user settable limit, and is associated with an opto-isolated TTL relay accessible via the status output connector on the instrument’s back panel. If the concentration measured by the instrument rises above that limit, the alarm‘s status output relay is closed NO2. The default settings for ALM1 and ALM2 are: Table 4-28: Concentration Alarm Default Settings ALARM STATUS ALM1 Disabled ALM2 1 LIMIT SET POINT Disabled OUTPUT RELAY DESIGNATION 1 100 ppm 133.9 mg/m3 AL2 300 ppm 3 AL3 401.6 mg/m Set points listed are for PPM. Should the reporting range units of measure be changed the analyzer will automatically scale the set points to match the new range unit setting. Note To prevent the concentration alarms from activating during span calibration operations make sure to press CAL or CALS button prior to introducing span gas into the analyzer. To enable either of the concentration alarms and set the Limit points, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > CAL NOX=XXX.X SETUP SETUP X.X SETUP X.X ALARM MENU PRIMARY SETUP MENU ALM1 CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE ALM2 SETUP X. SETUP X.X EXIT EXIT ALARM 1 LIMIT: OFF SECONDARY SETUP MENU OFF COMM VARS DIAG ALRM ENTR EXIT EXIT SETUP X. ALARM 1 LIMIT: ON ON Toggle these buttons to cycle through the available character set: 0-9 SETUP X. 0 166 ENTR EXIT 1 ENTR accepts the new settings ALARM 1 LIMIT: 200 PPM 0 0 .0 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new settings 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.15. Remote Operation 4.15.1. REMOTE OPERATION USING THE EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O 4.15.1.1. Status Outputs The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors, which sink up to 50 mA of DC current. These outputs can be used interface with devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable logic controllers (PLCs). Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC. All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D. Note Most PLCs have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input will draw from an external device. When connecting to a unit that does not have this feature, an external dropping resistor must be used to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA, the transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from its collector to emitter. The status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel labeled STATUS (see Figure 6-17). The function of each pin is defined in Table 6–29 STATUS Figure 4-15: 07270B DCN6512 + GROUND D EMITTERS 8 COMMON 7 LOW SPAN 6 DIAG MODE 5 SPAN CAL 4 ZERO CAL 3 HIGH RANGE 2 CONC VALID SYSTEM OK 1 Status Output Connector 167 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 4-29: Status Output Pin Assignments CONNECTOR PIN STATUS 1 SYSTEM OK ON if no faults are present. 2 CONC VALID ON if concentration measurement is valid, OFF when invalid. 3 HIGH RANGE ON if unit is in high range of any AUTO range mode. 4 ZERO CAL ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO calibration mode. 5 SPAN CAL ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN calibration mode. 6 DIAG MODE ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode. 7 LOW RANGE ON if unit is in low range of any AUTO range mode. 8 CONDITION (ON=CONDUCTING) Unused. D EMITTER BUS + DC POWER DIGITAL GROUND The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together. For most applications, this pin should be connected to the circuit ground of the receiving device. + 5 VDC, 30 mA maximum (combined rating with Control Inputs). The ground from the analyzer’s internal, 5 VDC power supply. 4.15.1.2. Control Inputs Control inputs allow the user to remotely initiate ZERO and SPAN calibration modes are provided through a 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear panel. These are opto-isolated, digital inputs that are activated when a 5 VDC signal from the “U” pin is connected to the respective input pin. Table 4-30: Control Input Pin Assignments INPUT STATUS A EXTERNAL ZERO CAL Zero calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display will read ZERO CAL R. B EXTERNAL SPAN CAL Span calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display will read SPAN CAL R. C EXTERNAL LOW SPAN CAL Low span (mid-point) calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display will read LO CAL R. D, E & F 168 CONDITION WHEN ENABLED Unused DIGITAL GROUND Provided to ground an external device (e.g., recorder). U DC power for Input pull ups Input for +5 VDC required to activate inputs A - F. This voltage can be taken from an external source or from the “+” pin. + Internal +5V Supply Internal source of +5V which can be used to activate inputs when connected to pin U. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions There are two methods to activate control inputs. The internal +5V available from the “+” pin is the most convenient method (see Figure 6-18). However, to ensure that these inputs are truly isolated, a separate, external 5 VDC power supply should be used (see Figure 6-19). CONTROL IN ZERO Figure 4-16: C D E F U + SPAN B LOW SPAN A Control Inputs with Local 5 V Power Supply CONTROL IN C D Figure 4-17: E F U + SPAN B LOW SPAN ZERO A 5 VDC Power Supply + Control Inputs with External 5 V Power Supply 4.15.2. REMOTE OPERATION 4.15.2.1. Terminal Operating Modes The Model T200H/M can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the serial ports. As terminals and computers use different communication schemes, the analyzer supports two communicate modes specifically designed to interface with these two types of devices. 07270B DCN6512 Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated interface program such as APICOM. More information regarding APICOM can be found in later in this section or on the Teledyne API website at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/. Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or a “dumb” computer terminal. The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this mode are listed in Table 6-31 and in Appendix A-6. 169 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.15.2.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode Table 4-31: Terminal Mode Software Commands COMMAND Control-T Control-C CR (carriage return) BS (backspace) ESC (escape) ? [ID] CR Control-C Control-P FUNCTION Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF, the interface can be used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program. Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit). A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal/computer. The command will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done. On personal computers, this is achieved by pressing the ENTER key. Erases one character to the left of the cursor location. Erases the entire command line. This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their functionality to the display device of the terminal or computer being used. The ID number of the analyzer is only necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line, such as the multi-drop setup. Pauses the listing of commands. Restarts the listing of commands. 4.15.2.3. Command Syntax Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID numbers, keywords, data values, etc.) must be separated with a space character. All Commands follow the syntax: X [ID] COMMAND Where X is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command. Allowed designators are listed in Table 4-32 and Appendix A. [ID] is the analyzer identification number (see Section 4.11.4.). Example: the Command “? 200” followed by a carriage return would print the list of available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the instrument assigned ID Number 200. COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being issued (LIST, ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed. Press ? or refer to Appendix A for a list of available command designators. is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage return (usually achieved by pressing the ENTER key on a computer). Table 4-32: Command Types COMMAND C D L T V W 170 COMMAND TYPE Calibration Diagnostic Logon Test measurement Variable Warning 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.15.2.4. Data Types Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean expressions and text strings. 07270B DCN6512 Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter length, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more digits. For example, +1, -12, 123 are all valid integers. Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They consist of the two characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f), which is the ‘C’ programming language convention. No plus or minus sign is permitted. For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers. Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as temperature set points, time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by zero or more digits, an optional decimal point, and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear before or after the decimal point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, 0.1, 1 are all valid floating-point numbers. Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may assume only two values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF. Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data types, such as data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers. They consist of a quotation mark, followed by one or more printable characters, including spaces, letters, numbers, and symbols, and a final quotation mark. For example, “a”, “1”, “123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not possible to include a quotation mark character within a text string. Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items, such as DAS data channels, by name. When using these commands, you must type the entire name of the item; you cannot abbreviate any names. 171 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.15.2.5. Status Reporting Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the RS-232 interface (the other two being the command line interface for controlling the instrument and the download of data in electronic format). You can effectively disable the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (see Communication Mode). Status reports include DAS data (when reporting is enabled), warning messages, calibration and diagnostic status messages. Refer to Appendix A-3 for a list of the possible messages, and this section for information on controlling the instrument through the RS-232 interface. GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line request) are in the format: X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE Where X is a command type designator, a single character indicating the message type, as shown in the Table 6-31. DDD:HH:MM is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It consists of the Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour of the day (HH) as a number from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a number from 00 to 59. [ID] is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits. MESSAGE is the message content that may contain warning messages, test measurements, DAS reports, variable values, etc. is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message. The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse them into an easy structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any information on the time a message was issued, hence it is useful to log such messages for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review. 172 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.15.2.6. Remote Access by Modem The T200H/M can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable between the analyzer’s COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable (available from Teledyne API with part number WR0000024). Once the cable has been connected, check to make sure the DTE-DCE is in the correct position. Also make sure the T200H/M COM port is set for a baud rate that is compatible with the modem, which needs to operate with an 8-bit word length with one stop bit. The first step is to turn on the MODEM ENABLE communication mode (Mode 64). Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your modem can be entered into the analyzer. The default setting for this feature is AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0 This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100 characters long. Note If Hessen Protocol Mode is active for a com port, operation via a modem is not available on that port. To change this setting press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP SETUP X.X SET> SETUP X.X COM1 MODE:0 EDIT CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X EXIT returns to the previous menu SETUP X.X EXIT PRIMARY SETUP MENU COM1 BAUD RATE:19200 EDIT COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT SETUP X.X Select which COM Port is tested SETUP X.X ID INET COMMUNICATIONS MENU COM1 COM2 COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y &D &H EDIT EXIT EXIT SETUP X.X The buttons move the [ ] cursor left and right along the text string 07270B DCN6512 EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COM1 MODEM INIT:[A]T Y &D &H INS INS inserts a character before the cursor location. DEL [A] ENTR DEL deletes a character at the cursor location. EXIT ENTR accepts the new string and returns to the previous menu. EXIT ignores the new string and returns to the previous menu. Press the [?] key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set: 0-9 A-Z space ’ ~ ! # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ? 173 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To initialize the modem press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP SETUP X.X SETUP X.X SET> PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE COM1 MODE:0 EDIT EXIT SETUP X.X EXIT returns to the previous menu SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM SETUP X.X ID COM1 COM1 BAUD RATE:19200 EDIT EXIT EXIT SETUP X.X Select which COM Port is tested EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU COM2 COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y &D &H EDIT EXIT EXIT SETUP X.X COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM INIT SETUP X.X EXIT returns to the Communications Menu. EXIT INITIALIZING MODEM INIT EXIT 4.15.2.7. COM Port Password Security In order to provide security for remote access of the T200H/M, a LOGON feature can be enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done by turning on the SECURITY MODE (see Section 4.9). Once the SECURITY MODE is enabled, the following items apply. A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands. If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be achieved with the LOGOFF command. Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used. If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen. The following messages will be returned at logon: o LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given o LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect o LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully To log on to the T200H/M analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type: LOGON 940331 940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS232_PASS issued as follows: V RS232_PASS=NNNNNN Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9. 174 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.15.2.8. APICOM Remote Control Program APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows to access and control any of Teledyne API’ main line of ambient and stack-gas instruments from a remote connection through direct cable, modem or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a user can: Establish a link from a remote location to the T200H/M through direct cable connection via RS-232 modem or Ethernet. View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be accessed when standing in front of the instrument. Remotely edit system parameters and set points. Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis. Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload DAS configurations. Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control. APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and troubleshooting. Figure 6-20 shows examples of APICOM’s main interface, which emulates the look and functionality of the instruments actual front panel Figure 4-18: APICOM Remote Control Program Interface APICOM is included free of cost with the analyzer and the latest versions can also be downloaded for free at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/. 07270B DCN6512 175 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.15.3. ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATIONS DOCUMENTATION Table 4-33: Serial Interface Documents Interface / Tool Document Title Part Number Available Online* APICOM APICOM User Manual 039450000 YES Multi-drop RS-232 Multi-drop Documentation 021790000 YES DAS Manual Detailed description of the DAS. 028370000 YES * These documents can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/ 4.15.4. USING THE T200H/M WITH A HESSEN PROTOCOL NETWORK 4.15.4.1. General Overview of Hessen Protocol The Hessen protocol is a multidrop protocol, in which several remote instruments are connected via a common communications channel to a host computer. The remote instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer. The remote instruments are unaware that they are connected to a multidrop bus and never initiate messages. They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they receive a command containing their own unique ID number. The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things: to obtain the status of remote instruments, including the concentrations of all the gases measured; and to place remote instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode. API’s implementation supports both of these principal features. The Hessen protocol is not well defined, therefore while API’s application is completely compatible with the protocol itself, it may be different from implementations by other companies. The following subsections describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate over a Hessen Protocol network. For more detailed information as well as a list of host computer commands and examples of command and response message syntax, download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne API’ web site: http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp . 176 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.15.4.2. Hessen Com Port Configuration Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the T200H/M’s com ports to be set differently than the standard configuration as shown in the table below. Table 4-34: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol Parameter Note Standard Hessen Data Bits 8 7 Stop Bits 1 2 Parity None Even Duplex Full Half Ensure that the communication parameters of the host computer are properly set Be aware that the instrument software has a 200 ms latency response to commands issued by the host computer. Operation via modem is not available over any com port on which HESSEN protocol is active. The first step in configuring the T200H/M to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to activate the Hessen mode for com ports and configure the communication parameters for the port(s) appropriately. Press: SAMPLE Repeat the entire process to set up the COM2 port A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X NOX=XXX.X SETUP SETUP X.X NEXT OFF PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT PREV NEXT SETUP X.X ID The sum of the mode IDs of the selected modes is displayed here COM1 ALRM COM2 SETUP X.X EXIT COM1 MODE:0 EDIT OFF EXIT COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : ON PREV NEXT ON SETUP X.X COM1 E,7,1 MODE: OFF PREV NEXT OFF SETUP X.X COM1 E,7,1 MODE: ON PREV NEXT ON 07270B DCN6512 ENTR EXIT EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU SETUP X.X SET> COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL : OFF SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG Select which COMM port to configure ENTR EXIT Continue pressing next until … SETUP X.X SETUP X.X COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF ENTR EXIT Toggle OFF/ON buttons to change activate/deactivate selected mode. ENTR EXIT ENTR button accepts the new settings ENTR EXIT EXIT key ignores the new settings 177 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.15.4.3. Selecting a Hessen Protocol Type Currently there are two version of Hessen Protocol in use. The original implementation, referred to as TYPE 1, and a more recently released version, TYPE 2 that has more flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than one type of gas. For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1and TYPE 2 download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne API’ web site: http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp . To select a Hessen Protocol Type press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP SETUP X. SETUP X.X PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SET> HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1 EDIT ENTR accepts the new settings SETUP X.X SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X.X ID HESN EXIT Note ALRM EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU COM1 COM2 EXIT EXIT HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1 EXIT ignores the new settings TYPE1 TYPE 2 ENTR EXIT Press to change protocol type. SETUP X.X PREV NEXT HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 2 OFF ENTR EXIT While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for COM1 and COM2, the TYPE selection affects both ports. 4.15.4.4. Setting The Hessen Protocol Response Mode The Teledyne API’ implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of several different modes of response for the analyzer. Table 6-28: T200H/M Hessen Protocol Response Modes MODE ID MODE DESCRIPTION CMD This is the Default Setting. Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional command format. Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command. BCC Responses from the instrument are always delimited with (at the beginning of the response, (at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code (checksum), regardless of the command encoding. TEXT Responses from the instrument are always delimited with at the beginning and the end of the string, regardless of the command encoding. 178 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions To Select a Hessen response mode, press: SAMPLE RANGE = 500.000 PPB SO2 =XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SAMPLE 8 SETUP X.X SETUP ENTER SETUP PASS : 818 1 8 ENTR EXIT ID PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X EXIT COMM VARS DIAG ALRM HESN SETUP X.X SET> SECONDARY SETUP MENU EXIT Press to change response mode. COM1 COM2 EXIT HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1 EDIT EXIT ENTR accepts the new settings SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD EDIT SETUP X.X HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD BCC TEXT 07270B DCN6512 COMMUNICATIONS MENU SETUP X.X EDIT EXIT ignores the new settings EXIT ENTR EXIT 179 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 4.15.4.5. Hessen Protocol Gas ID Since the T200H/M measures NOx, NO2, NO and O2 (if the optional sensor is installed), all of these gases are listed in the Hessen protocol gas list. In its default state the Hessen protocol firmware assigns each of these gases a Hessen ID number and actively reports all of them even if the instrument is only measuring one (see MEASURE_MODE, Section 4.12) . To change or edit these settings press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X BUTTON < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X ID HESN SETUP X.X SET> Moves t o nex t gas entry in list NEXT> Moves t he cursor previous gas entry in list INS Inserts a new gas entry into the list. DEL Delet es t he >>>>>. ENTR Accept s the new setting and returns to the prev ious menu. EXIT Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu. SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X.X EXI FUNCTION EDIT SETUP X.X HESSEN GAS LIST EDIT EXIT EXIT HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1 EDIT SETUP X.X EXIT EXIT SETUP X.X NOX, 211, REPORTED INS DEL EDIT PRNT EXIT Use the PREV & NEXT keys to cycle existing entries in Hessen gas list SETUP X.X GAS TYPE NOX ENTR EXIT Use the PREV & NEXT keys to cycle through available gases SETUP X.X 0 0 ENTR accepts the new settings GAS ID: 211 0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new settings Toggle to change the gas ID number for the chosen gas. SETUP X.X REPORTED : ON ON ENTR EXIT Toggle to switch reporting Between ON and OFF Table 4-35: T200H/M Hessen GAS ID List 180 GAS DEFAULT HESSEN GAS ID NOx 211 NO 212 NO2 213 O2 214 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Operating Instructions 4.15.4.6. Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags Teledyne API’ implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that are included in responses to inform the host computer of the T200H/M’s condition. The default settings for these bit/flags are: Table 4-36: Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments STATUS FLAG NAME DEFAULT BIT ASSIGNMENT WARNING FLAGS SAMPLE FLOW WARNING 0001 OZONE FLOW WARNING 0002 RCELL PRESS WARN 0004 BOX TEMP WARNING 0008 RCELL TEMP WARNING 0010 PMT TEMP WARNING 0040 CONVERTER TEMP WARNING 0080 WARMUP MODE 1000 INVALID CONC 8000 OPERATIONAL FLAGS In Manual Calibration Mode 0200 In O2 Calibration Mode 0400 In Zero Calibration Mode 0400 In Low Span Calibration Mode 0800 In Span Calibration Mode 0800 UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS MGM 2000 PPM 6000 SPARE/UNUSED BITS 0020, 0100 UNASSIGNED FLAGS Box Temp Warning Analog Cal Warning System Reset Cannot Dyn Zero Rear Board Not Detected Cannot Dyn Span Relay Board Warning O2 Cell Temp Warn Manifold Temp Warn AutoZero Warning Ozone Gen Off Conc Alarm 2 Conc Alarm 1 In MP Calibration Mode HVPS Warning Note 07270B DCN6512 It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit. This allows the grouping of similar flags, such as all temperature warnings, under the same status bit. Be careful not to assign conflicting flags to the same bit as each status bit will be triggered if any of the assigned flags is active. 181 Operating Instructions Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments, press: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X < TST TST > CAL SETUP X.X SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG SETUP X.X ID EXIT ALRM EXIT COMMUNICATIONS MENU HESN COM1 COM2 EXIT Repeat pressing SET> until … SETUP X. SETUP X. PREV NEXT HESSEN STATUS FLAGS EDIT EXIT PMT DET WARNING: 0002 EDIT PRNT EXIT Repeat pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired message flag is displayed. See Table 6-29. For example … SETUP X. PREV NEXT move the [ ] cursor left and right along the bit string. SETUP X. SYSTEM RESET: 0000 EDIT PRNT EXIT SYSTEM RESET: [0]000 [0] ENTR key accepts the new settings ENTR EXIT EXIT key ignores the new settings Press the [?] key repeatedly to cycle through the available character set: 0-9 Note: Values of A-F can also be set but are meaningless. 4.15.4.7. Instrument ID Code Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique ID code. The T200H/M has a default ID of either 0 or 200. To change this code see Section 4.11.1 182 07270B DCN6512 5. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES This section describes calibration procedures for the T200H/M. All of the methods described here can be initiated and controlled through the front panel or the COM ports. Interferents should be considered prior to calibration. 5.1.1. INTERFERENTS FOR NOX MEASUREMENTS The chemiluminescence method for detecting NOX is subject to interference from a number of sources including water vapor (H2O), ammonia (NH3), sulfur dioxide (SO2) and carbon dioxide (CO2) but the Model T200H/M has been designed to reject most of these interferents. Section 8.2.4 contains more detailed information on interferents. Ammonia is the most common interferent, which is converted to NO in the analyzer’s NO2 converter and creates a NOX signal artifact. If the Model T200H/M is installed in an environment with high ammonia, steps should be taken to remove the interferent from the sample gas before it enters the reaction cell. Teledyne API offers a sample gas conditioning option to remove ammonia and water vapor (contact Sales). Carbon dioxide diminishes the NOX signal when present in high concentrations. If the analyzer is used in an application with excess CO2, contact Teledyne API Technical Support for possible solutions. Excess water vapor can be removed with one of the dryer options described in Section 1.4. In ambient air applications, SO2 interference is usually negligible. 5.1.1.1. Conditioners for High Moisture Sample Gas Several permeation devices using Nafion® permeation gas exchange tubes are available for applications with high moisture and/or moderate levels of NH3 in the sample gas. This type of sample conditioner is part of the standard T200H/M equipment to remove H2O and NH3 from the ozone generator supply gas stream but can be purchased for the sample gas stream as well. All gas conditioners remove water vapor to a dew point of about –20° C (~600 ppm H2O) and effectively remove concentrations of ammonia up to about 1 ppm. More information about these dryers and their performance is available at http://www.permapure.com/. It is MANDATORY that for calibrations and operation to be valid, the analyzer be calibrated using the same background gas (or dilutent) for zero and span, as the background gas in the sample stream. Any other combinations will lead to calibration or operational errors since the efficiency of the analyzer’s chemluminescent reaction varies with the background gas, since the background gas acts as a quencher. Note CALIBRATION vs. CALIBRATION CHECK: DO NOT press the ENTR button during the following procedures if you are performing only a calibration check. ENTR recalculates the stored values for OFFSET and SLOPE, altering the instrument’s calibration. 07270B DCN6512 183 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 5.2. CALIBRATION PREPARATIONS 5.2.1. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND EXPENDABLES Calibration of the Model T200H/M analyzer requires a certain amount of equipment and supplies. These include, but are not limited to, the following: Zero-air source (defined in Section 3.5.1.1). Span gas source (defined in Section 3.5.1.2). Gas lines - all gas line materials should be stainless steel or Teflon-type (PTFE or FEP). High concentration NO gas transported over long distances may require stainless steel to avoid oxidation of NO with O2 diffusing into the tubing. A recording device such as a strip-chart recorder and/or data logger (optional). For electronic documentation, the internal data acquisition system can be used. 5.2.2. ZERO AIR Zero air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all components that might affect the analyzer’s readings. For NOX measuring devices, zero air should be devoid of NOX and large amounts of CO2, NH3 and water vapor. Water vapor and moderate amounts of NH3 can be removed using a sample gas conditioner (Section 5.10). Devices such as the API Model 701 zero air generator that condition ambient air by drying and removal of pollutants are available. We recommend this type of device for generating zero air. Please contact our sales department for more information on this. 184 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures 5.2.3. SPAN CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS & TRACEABILITY Note We strongly recommend that span calibration is carried out with NO span gas, although it is possible to use NO2. Quick span checks may be done with either NO, NO2 or a mixture of NO and NO2. Span gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the gas being measured at about 80% of the desired full measurement range. For example, if the measurement range is 120 ppm, the span gas should have an NO concentration of about 96 ppm. Span gases should be certified to a specific accuracy to ensure accurate calibration of the analyzer. Typical gas accuracy for NOX gases is 1 or 2%. NO standards should be mixed in nitrogen (to prevent oxidation of NO to NO2 over time). For oxygen measurements, we recommend s reference gas of 21% O2 in N2. the user can either utilize the NOX standards (if mixed in air). For quick checks. ambient air can be used at an assumed concentration of 20.8%. Generally, O2 concentration in dry, ambient air varies by less than 1%. 5.2.3.1. Traceability All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST traceability, we recommend to acquire cylinders of working gas that are certified to be traceable to NIST standard reference materials (SRM). These are available from a variety of commercial sources. Table 5-1: 07270B DCN6512 NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of NOx Calibration Gases NIST-SRM4 TYPE NOMINAL CONCENTRATION 2627a 2628a 2629a Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 5 ppm 10 ppm 20 ppm 1683b 1684b 1685b 1686b 1687b Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 50 ppm 100 ppm 250 ppm 5000 ppm 1000 ppm 2630 2631a 2635 2636a Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 Nitric Oxide (NO) in N2 1500 ppm 3000 ppm 800 ppm 2000 ppm 2656 2660a Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in Air Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) in Air 2500 ppm 100 ppm 2659a Oxygen in Nitrogen (O2) 21 mol % 185 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 5.2.4. DATA RECORDING DEVICES A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should be used to record data from the serial or analog outputs of the T200H/M. If analog readings are used, the response of the recording system should be checked against a NIST traceable voltage source or meter. Data recording devices should be capable of bipolar operation so that negative readings can be recorded. For electronic data recording, the T200H/M provides an internal data acquisition system (DAS), which is described in detail in Section 4.7. APICOM, a remote control program, is also provided as a convenient and powerful tool for data handling, download, storage, quick check and plotting. 5.2.5. NO2 CONVERSION EFFICIENCY (CE) To ensure accurate operation of the T200H/M, it is important to check the NO2 conversion efficiency (CE) periodically and to update this value as necessary. The default setting for the NO2 converter efficiency is 1.0000. For the analyzer to function correctly, the converter efficiency must be between 0.9600 and 1.0200 (96102% conversion efficiency) as per US-EPA requirements. If the converter’s efficiency is outside these limits, the NO2 converter should be replaced. Note 186 The currently programmed CE is recorded along with the calibration data in the DAS for documentation and performance analysis. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures 5.2.5.1. Determining / Updating the NO2 Converter Efficiency The following procedure will cause the Model T200H/M to automatically calculate the current NO2 conversion efficiency. STEP ONE: Connect a source of calibrated NO2 span gas as shown below. Source of MODEL T700 Gas Dilution Calibrator SAMPLE GAS VENT here if input is pressurized Removed during calibration NO2 Gas (High Concentration) SAMPLE MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator VENT if not vented at calibrator EXHAUST Instrument Chassis PUMP Figure 5-1: 07270B DCN6512 Gas Supply Setup for Determination of NO2 Conversion Efficiency 187 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual STEP TWO: Set the expected NO2 span gas concentration: SAMPLE < TST TST > SAMPLE NOX A1:NXCNC1=100PPM CAL NOX=XXX.X SETUP SAMPLE LOW HIGH A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM ENTR EXIT NOX ENTR EXIT NO2 The NO X & NO span concentration values automatically default to 80.0 Conc. If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the NO X and NO calibration gases. 188 CONV EXIT CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU CAL M-P CAL 0 EXIT CONCENTRATION MENU NO M-P CAL RANGE TO CAL:LOW NOX=X.XXX ZERO SPAN CONC M-P CAL GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 M-P CAL SET EXIT NO2 CE CONC:80.0 Conc 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the CONVERTER EFFICIENCY MENU. If using NO span gas in addition to NO X repeat last step. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures STEP THREE Activate NO2 measurement stability function. SAMPLE RANGE = 50.000 PPM < TST TST > SETUP X.X CO =X.XXX CAL SETUP 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes JUMP EDIT PRNT EXIT PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X SETUP X.X EXIT Continue pressing NEXT until ... SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM EXIT SETUP X.X 2) STABIL_GAS=NOX JUMP SETUP X.X 8 1 ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X NO NO2 SETUP X.X Press ENTR first, then press EXIT 3 times to return to SAMPLE menu 07270B DCN6512 EDIT PRNT EXIT NO NO2 STABIL_GAS:NOX NOX O2 ENTR EXIT STABIL_GAS:NO2 NOX O2 ENTR EXIT 189 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual STEP FOUR: Perform the converter efficiency calculation procedure: S A M P LE A 1:N X C N C 1=100P P M < TS T T S T > N O X =X X X .X CAL S E TU P Toggle T S T> button until ... S A M P LE N O 2 S T B = X X X .X P P M < TS T TS T > S E TU P G A S TO C A L:N O X NOX O2 E N T R E X IT S A M P LE LO W N O X =X X X .X CAL S A M P LE R A N G E T O C A L:LO W H IG H E N T R E X IT M -P C A L S TB = X X X .X P P M O X =X .X X X ZE R O S P A N C O N C M -P C A L NOX E X IT C O N C E N T R A TIO N M E N U NO M -P C A L NO2 S et the D isplay to show the N O 2 S TB test function. This function calculates the stability of the m easurem ent CONV E X IT C O N V E R TE R E F F IC IE N C Y M E N U CAL SET M -P C A L E X IT C E FA C T O R :1.000 G ain 1 .0 0 0 0 E N T R E X IT A llow N O 2 to enter the sam ple port at the rear of the analyzer. M -P C A L NO2 W hen E N T R is pressed, the ratio of observed N O 2 concentration to expected N O 2 concentration is calculated and stored. C O N V E R TE R E F F IC IE N C Y M E N U CAL S A M P LE M -P C A L ENTR N O X =X X X .X W ait until N O 2 S TB falls below 0.5 ppm and the E N TR button appears. This m ay take several m inutes. S E TU P C O N V E R TE R E F F IC IE N C Y M E N U CAL M -P C A L 1 E X IT N O X S TB = X X X .X P P M < TS T TS T > NO2 190 SET SET E X IT C E FA C T O R :1.012 G ain .0 0 1 2 E N TR E X IT P ress E X IT 3 tim es top return to the S A M P LE display 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures 5.3. MANUAL CALIBRATION The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the Model T200H/M NOX analyzer. If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instruments analog outputs e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter. Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1 Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2. See Section 4.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown below. at HIGH Span Concentration Calibrated NO MODEL T700 Gas Dilution Calibrator VENT here if input VENT if not vented at calibrator MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator is pressurized Source of SAMPLE Gas PUMP Sample Exhaust Span Point Instrument External Zero Air Scrubber Figure 5-2: 07270B DCN6512 Filter Zero Air Chassis Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50A) 191 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual On/Off Valves Source of SAMPLE Gas VENT at LOW Span Concentration VENT here if input is pressurized PUMP VENT Calibrated NO at HIGH Span Concentration Calibrated NO Calibration Procedures Sample Exhaust High Span Point Low Span Point External Zero Air Scrubber Figure 5-3: 192 Filter Zero Air Instrument Chassis Pneumatic Connections–With 2-Span point Option (50D) –Using Bottled Span Gas 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures STEP TWO: Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations. These should be 80% of range of concentration values likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable analog outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output (see Section 4.13.4) SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > CAL SAMPLE NOX NOX=XXX.X SETUP GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 ENTR EXIT SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH M-P CAL ENTR EXIT A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX ZERO SPAN CONC M-P CAL NOX CONCENTRATION MENU NO CONV M-P CAL 0 The NOX & NO span concentration values automatically default to 80.0 Conc. If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the NO X and NO calibration gases. Note 07270B DCN6512 EXIT EXIT NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the CONCENTRATION MENU. If using NO span gas in addition to NOX repeat last step. The expected concentrations for both NOX and NO are usually set to the same value unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not entered properly in the conversion efficiency setting. When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas source (NO often contains 1-3% NO2 and vice versa). 193 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual STEP THREE: Perform Zero/Span Calibration: SAMPLE Analyzer continues to cycle through NO x, NO, and NO 2 measurements throughout this procedure. A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP Toggle TST> button until ... SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM < TST TST > Set the Display to show the NOX STB test function. This function calculates the stability of the NO/NO x measurement NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB falls below 0.5 ppm. This may take several minutes. SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM < TST TST > SAMPLE NOX NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 ENTR EXIT SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH M-P CAL ENTR EXIT NOX STB= XXX.X PPM M-P CAL ZERO CONC NOX STB= XXX.X PPM ENTR NOX=XXX.X EXIT NOX=X.XXX CONC EXIT Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET & SLOPE values for both the NO and NO x measurements. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. Wait until NOX STB falls below 0.5 ppm. This may take several minutes. SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM < TST TST > SAMPLE NOX You may see both keys. GAS TO CAL:NOX ENTR EXIT If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see Section 11 for troubleshooting tips. RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH M-P CAL ENTR EXIT NOX STB= XXX.X PPM ZERO SPAN CONC M-P CAL NOX STB= XXX.X PPM ENTR M-P CAL CONC NOX STB= XXX.X PPM ENTR 194 NOX=XXX.X SETUP O2 SAMPLE The SPAN key now appears during the transition from zero to span. CAL CONC NOX=X.XXX EXIT NOX=X.XXX EXIT NOX=X.XXX EXIT Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET & SLOPE values for both the NO and NO x measurements. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. EXIT at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures 5.4. CALIBRATION CHECKS Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response curve, are recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the analyzer’s performance. To carry out a calibration check rather than a full calibration, follow these steps. STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 7.2 or 7.3. STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span calibration check procedure: SAMPLE < TST TST > Analyzer display continues to cycle through all of the available gas measurements throughout this procedure. A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP Toggle TST> button until ... SAMPLE < TST TST > NOX STB= XXX.X PPM Set the Display to show the NOX STB test function. This function calculates the stability of the NO/NOx measurement NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB falls below 0.5 ppm. This may take several minutes. Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 zero point readings Wait until NOX STB falls below 0.5 ppm. Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. This may take several minutes. The ZERO and/or SPAN keys will appear at various points of this process. It is not necessary to press them. Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 span point readings 07270B DCN6512 195 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 5.5. MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES Zero and Span calibrations using the Zero/Span Valve option are similar to that described in Section 7.2, except that: Zero air and span gas is supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets rather than through the sample inlet. The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated keys (CALZ & CALS) If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the instruments analog outputs e.g. NXCNC1 and NXCNC2, separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter. Use the LOW button when calibrating for NXCNC1 Use the HIGH button when calibrating for NXCNC2. See Section 4.13.4 for more information on analog output reporting ranges STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas to the respective ports on the rear panel as shown below. at HIGH Span Concentration Calibrated NO MODEL T700 Gas Dilution Calibrator VENT here if input VENT if not vented at calibrator MODEL 701 Zero Gas Generator is pressurized Source of SAMPLE Gas PUMP Sample Exhaust Span Point External Zero Air Scrubber Figure 5-4: 196 Filter Instrument Chassis Zero Air Pneumatic Connections–With Zero/Span Valve Option (50) 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures STEP TWO: Set Expected NO and NOX Span Gas Concentrations. Set the expected NO and NOx span gas concentration. These should be 80% of range of concentration values likely to be encountered in this application. The default factory setting is 100 ppm. If one of the configurable analog outputs is to be set to transmit concentration values, use 80% of the reporting range set for that output. SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS SAMPLE NOX NOX=XXX.X SETUP GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 SAMPLE ENTR EXIT RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT SPAN CAL M A1:NXCNC1 =100PPM NOX=X.XXX ZERO SPAN CONC EXIT SPAN CAL M CONCENTRATION MENU NOX NO CONV EXIT SPAN CAL M NOX SPAN CONC:80.0 Conc 0 The NOX & NO span concentration values automatically default to 80.0 Conc. If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration of the NO X and NO calibration gases. Note 07270B DCN6512 0 8 0 .0 ENTR EXIT EXIT ignores the new setting and returns to the previous display. ENTR accepts the new setting and returns to the CONCENTRATION MENU. If using NO span gas in addition to NO X repeat last step. The expected concentrations for both NOX and NO are usually set to the same value unless the conversion efficiency is not equal to 1.000 or not entered properly in the conversion efficiency setting. When setting expected concentration values, consider impurities in your span gas source (NO often contains 1-3% NO2 and vice versa). 197 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual STEP THREE: Perform Zero/Span Calibration: SAMPLE Analyzer continues to cycle through NO x, NO, and NO 2 measurements throughout this procedure. A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > NOX=XXX.X CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Toggle TST> button until ... SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM < TST TST > Set the Display to show the NOX STB test function. This function calculates the stability of the NO/NO x measurement NOX=XXX.X CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB falls below 0.5 ppm. This may take several minutes. SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM < TST TST > SAMPLE NOX SETUP GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 ENTR EXIT SAMPLE Analyzers enters ZERO cal mode. NOX=XXX.X CAL CALZ CALS RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X ZERO ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X ENTR CONC EXIT CONC EXIT Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET & SLOPE values for both the NO and NO x measurements. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. Wait until NOX STB falls below 0.5 ppm. This may take several minutes. SAMPLE NOX STB= XXX.X PPM < TST TST > SAMPLE NOX Analyzers enters SPAN cal mode and the SPAN key appears. You may see both keysduring the transition from ZERO to SPAN modes. If either the ZERO or SPAN buttons fail to appear see Section 11 for troubleshooting tips. CAL CALZ CALS SETUP GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 SAMPLE ENTR EXIT RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM ZERO SPAN CONC SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM ENTR CONC SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM ENTR 198 NOX=XXX.X CONC NOX=X.XXX EXIT NOX=X.XXX EXIT NOX=X.XXX EXIT Press ENTR to changes the OFFSET & SLOPE values for both the NO and NO x measurements. Press EXIT to leave the calibration unchanged and return to the previous menu. EXIT at this point returns to the SAMPLE menu. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures 5.6. CALIBRATION CHECKS WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES Zero and span checks using the zero/span valve option are similar to that described in Section 7.4, except that zero air and span gas are supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets from two different sources. Informal calibration checks, which only evaluate but do not alter the analyzer’s response curve, are recommended as a regular maintenance item and in order to monitor the analyzer’s performance. To carry out a calibration check rather than a full calibration, follow these steps. To perform a manual calibration check with zero/span valve: STEP ONE: Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown in section 7-4. STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span check. Set the Display to show the NOX STB test function. This function calculates the stability of the NO/NOx measurement SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > NOX=XXX.X CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Toggle TST> button until ... SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X ZERO EXIT A1:NXCNC1=100PPM NOX=XXX.X NOX=XXX.X CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE < TST TST > Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB falls below 0.5 ppm. CONC CAL CALZ CALS SETUP Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the rear of the analyzer. Wait until NOX STB falls below 0.5 ppm. This may take several minutes. SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > This may take several minutes. NOX=XXX.X CAL CALZ CALS SETUP SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > The ZERO and/or SPAN keys will appear at various points of this process. It is not necessary to press them. SAMPLE NOX Analyzers enters ZERO cal mode. NOX=XXX.X CAL CALZ CALS SETUP GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 ENTR EXIT SAMPLE NOX SAMPLE GAS TO CAL:NOX O2 ENTR EXIT RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH ENTR EXIT SAMPLE RANGE TO CAL:LOW LOW HIGH ZERO CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X ZERO CONC EXIT ENTR EXIT SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 zero point readings Analyzers enters SPAN cal mode. NOX=X.XXX ZERO SPAN CONC 07270B DCN6512 Return to SAMPLE Display EXIT Record NOX, NO, NO2 or O2 span point readings SPAN CAL M NOX STB= XXX.X PPM NOX=XXX.X ZERO CONC EXIT Return to SAMPLE Display 199 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 5.7. CALIBRATION WITH REMOTE CONTACT CLOSURES Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear panel CONTROL IN connector. Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be found in Section 4.15.1.2. When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds, the instrument switches into zero, low span or high span mode and internal zero/span valves (if installed) will be automatically switched to the appropriate configuration. The remote calibration contact closures may be activated in any order. It is recommended that contact closures remain closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading; the instrument will stay in the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed. If contact closures are used in conjunction with the analyzer’s AutoCal (Section 5.8) feature and the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is enabled, the T200H/M will not recalibrate the analyzer until the contact is opened. At this point, the new calibration values will be recorded before the instrument returns to SAMPLE mode. If the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is disabled, the instrument will return to SAMPLE mode, leaving the instrument’s internal calibration variables unchanged. 200 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures 5.8. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (AUTOCAL) The AutoCal feature allows unattended, periodic operation of the zero/span valve options by using the analyzer’s internal time of day clock. The AutoCal feature is only available on the front panel menu (ACAL) if either the zero/span valve or the IZS option is installed. AutoCal operates by executing user-defined sequences to initiate the various calibration modes of the analyzer and to open and close valves appropriately. It is possible to program and run up to three separate sequences (SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3). Each sequence can operate in one of three modes or be disabled: Table 5-2: MODE DISABLED ZERO ZERO-LO1 ZERO-LO-HI1 ZERO-HI LO1 LO-HI1 HI AutoCal Modes BEHAVIOR Disables the sequence Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a mid-span concentration calibration or check Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a mid-span concentration calibration or check and finally a high-span point calibration or check. Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check followed by a high-span point calibration or check. Causes the sequence to perform a mid-span concentration calibration or check Causes the sequence to perform a mid-span concentration calibration or check followed by a high-span point calibration or check Causes the sequence to perform a high-span point calibration or check. O2 –ZERO2 Causes the sequence to do a zero-point calibration for the O2 sensor. Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration of the or check O2 sensor followed O2 ZERO-SP2 by a mid-span concentration calibration or check of the O2 sensor. O2 SPAN2 Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check of the O2 sensor. 1 Only applicable if analyzer is equipped with the second span point valve option (52) 2 Only applicable if instrument is equipped wit the O2 sensor option (65(. Each mode has seven parameters to control operational details of the sequence: Table 5-3: PARAMETER TIMER ENABLED STARTING DATE STARTING TIME DELTA DAYS DELTA TIME DURATION CALIBRATE RANGE TO CAL 07270B DCN6512 AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters BEHAVIOR Turns on the sequence timer Sequence will operate on Starting Date Sequence will operate at Starting Time Number of days between each sequence trigger. If set to 7, for example, the AutoCal feature will be enabled once every week on the same day. Incremental delay on each delta day that the sequence starts. If set to 0, the sequence will start at the same time each day. Delta Time is added to Delta Days for the total time between cycles. This parameter prevents the analyzer from being calibrated at the same daytime of each calibration day and prevents a lack of data for one particular daytime on the days of calibration. Duration of the each sequence step in minutes. This parameter needs to be set such that there is enough time for the concentration signal to stabilize. The STABIL parameter shows if the analyzer response is stable at the end of the calibration. This parameter is logged with calibration values in the DAS. Enable to do a true, dynamic zero or span calibration; disable to do a calibration check only. LOW calibrates the low range, HIGH calibrates the high range. Applies only to auto and remote range modes; this property is not available in single and independent range modes. 201 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual The following example sets sequence #2 to carry out a zero-span calibration every other day starting at 14:00 on 01 January, 2003, lasting 30 minutes (15 for zero and 15 for span). This sequence will start 30 minutes later each day. Table 5-4: Example Auto-Cal Sequence MODE AND ATTRIBUTE VALUE SEQUENCE 2 COMMENT MODE ZERO-HI TIMER ENABLE ON STARTING DATE 01-JAN-03 STARTING TIME 14:00 DELTA DAYS 2 DELTA TIME 00:30 Repeat sequence 30 minutes later each time (every 2 days and 30 minutes) DURATION 15.0 Each sequence step will last 15 minutes (total of 30 minutes when using zero-span mode) CALIBRATE ON The instrument will recalculate the slope and offset values for the NO and NOX channel at the end of the AutoCal sequence. Define sequence #2 Select zero and span mode Enable the timer Start on or after 01 January 2003 First sequence starts at 14:00 (24-hour clock format) Repeat this sequence every 2 days Please the following suggestions for programming the AutoCal feature. 202 The programmed Starting Time must be 5 minutes later than the real time clock. Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day. Any new sequence which is initiated from a timer, the COM ports, or the contact closures will override any sequence in progress. that two sequences with different daily increments may eventually overlap. If at any time an illegal entry is selected, (for example: Delta Days > 366) the ENTR button will disappear from the display. With CALIBRATE turned on, the state of the internal setup variables DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope and offset values for the NO and NOX response each time the AutoCal program runs. This continuous re-adjustment of calibration parameters can often mask subtle fault conditions in the analyzer. It is recommended that, if CALIBRATE is enabled, the analyzer’s test functions, slope and offset values be checked frequently to assure high quality and accurate data from the instrument. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Calibration Procedures To program the sample sequence shown above, follow this flow chart: SAMPLE RANGE = 500.0 PPB NOX=X.X < TST TST > CAL CALZ CZLS SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU SETUP X.X SEQ 1) DISABLED SETUP X.X EXIT SEQ 2) DISABLED EXIT MODE: DISABLED 0 ENTR EXIT SETUP X.X ENTR EXIT SEQ 2) ZERO–HI, 1:00:00 SETUP X.X EXIT TIMER ENABLE: ON SETUP X.X EXIT STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02 EDIT Toggle to set day, month & year: DDMON-YY SETUP X.X 0 4 SETUP X.X STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02 SEP 0 3 ENTR SETUP C.4 Toggle to set time: HH:MM. This is a 24 hr clock. PM hours are 13- SETUP C.4 EXIT STARTING TIME:00:00 EDIT 07270B DCN6512 EXIT DELTA TIME00:00 EXIT DELTA TIME: 00:00 :3 0 ENTR EXIT Toggle keys to set delay time for each iteration of the sequence: HH:MM (0 – 24:00) DELTA TIME:00:30 EXIT DURATION:15.0 MINUTES EXIT DURATION 15.0MINUTES .0 ENTR EXIT DURATION:30.0 MINUTES Toggle keys to set duration for each iteration of the sequence: Set in Decimal minutes from 0.1 – 60.0 EXIT CALIBRATE: OFF EXIT CALIBRATE: OFF ON ENTR EXIT Toggle key between Off and ON CALIBRATE: ON EDIT SETUP C.4 EXIT EXIT Toggle numbers to set number of days between procedures (1 367) DELTA D AYS:2 EDIT SETUP C.4 EXIT ENTR EDIT SETUP C.4 STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–03 EDIT 0 SETUP C.4 EXIT STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–03 EDIT 3 SETUP C.4 EXIT 2 EDIT SETUP C.4 SET> EDIT DELTA DAYS: 1 EDIT SETUP C.4 PREV NEXT MODE SET Default value is ON 0 SETUP C.4 PREV NEXT EXIT EDIT 0 MODE: ZERO–HI DELTA DAYS: 1 EDIT SETUP C.4 Toggle NEXT button until ... SETUP X.X 0 SETUP C.4 NEXT EXIT EDIT SETUP C.4 PREV NEXT MODE SETUP X.X EDIT SETUP C.4 NEXT MODE STARTING TIME:14:15 SETUP C.4 CFG AC AL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT SETUP X.X SETUP C.4 EXIT SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30 PREV NEXT MODE SET EXIT EXIT returns to the SETUP Menu 203 Calibration Procedures Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 5.9. CALIBRATION QUALITY ANALYSIS After completing one of the calibration procedures described above, it is important to evaluate the analyzer’s calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters. These values describe the linear response curve of the analyzer, separately for NO and NOX. The values for these terms, both individually and relative to each other, indicate the quality of the calibration. To perform this quality evaluation, you will need to record the values of the following test functions (Section 4.2.1 or Appendix A-3), all of which are automatically stored in the DAS channel CALDAT for data analysis, documentation and archival. NO OFFS NO SLOPE NOX OFFS NOX SLOPE Make sure that these parameters are within the limits listed in Table 5-5 and frequently compare them to those values on the Final Test and Checkout Sheet that came attached to your manual, which should not be significantly different. If they are, refer to the troubleshooting Section 7. Table 5-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation FUNCTION MINIMUM VALUE OPTIMUM VALUE MAXIMUM VALUE NOX SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300 NO SLOPE -0.700 1.000 1.300 NOX OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV NO OFFS -20.0 mV 0.0 mV 150.0 mV The default DAS configuration records all calibration values in channel CALDAT as well as all calibration check (zero and span) values in its internal memory. Up to 200 data points are stored for up 4 years of data (on weekly calibration checks) and a lifetime history of monthly calibrations. Review these data to see if the zero and span responses change over time. These channels also store the STABIL value (standard deviation of NOX concentration) to evaluate if the analyzer response has properly leveled off during the calibration procedure. Finally, the CALDAT channel also stores the converter efficiency for review and documentation. 204 07270B DCN6512 6. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE Predictive diagnostic functions, including data acquisition records, failure warnings and test functions built into the analyzer, allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary without performing unnecessary, preventative maintenance procedures. There is, however, a minimal number of simple procedures that, when performed regularly, will ensure that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime. Repair and troubleshooting procedures are covered in Section 7 of this manual. Pertinent information associated with the proper care, operation or maintenance of the analyzer or its parts. A span and zero calibration check must be performed following some of the maintenance procedures listed below. Refer to Section 5. WARNING Risk of electrical shock. Disconnect power before performing any operations that require entry into the interior of the analyzer. CAUTION The operations outlined in this Section must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only. 6.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Table 9-1 shows the recommended maintenance schedule for the T200H/M. Please that in certain environments with high levels of dust, humidity or pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown. 07270B DCN6512 205 Table 6-1: T200H/M Preventive Maintenance Schedule ITEM ACTION FREQUENCY CAL CHECK MANUAL SECTION Particulate Filter Change filter Weekly No 9.3.1 Verify Test Functions Review and evaluate Weekly No 9.2; Appendix C Zero/Span Check Evaluate offset and slope Weekly -- 7.3, 7.5, 7.7 Zero/Span Calibration Zero and span calibration Every 3 months -- 7.2, 7.4, 7.6, 7.7, 7,8 NO2 Converter Replace converter & check efficiency Every 3 years or if conversion efficiency < 96% Yes if CE factor is used -- 1 External Zero Air Scrubber (Optional) Exchange chemical Every 3 months No 3.5.3.2 Reaction Cell Window Clean optics, Change O-rings Annually or as necessary Yes 6.3.5 1 Air Inlet Filter Of Perma Pure Dryer Change particle filter Annually No 6.3.2 Pneumatic SubSystem Check for leaks in gas flow paths Annually or after repairs involving pneumatics Yes on leaks, else no 7.5.1, 7.5.2 1 All Critical Flow Orifice O-Rings & Sintered Filters Replace Annually Yes 6.3.6 Rebuild head Annually Yes 9.3.4 Inline Exhaust Scrubber Replace Annually No Pmt Sensor Hardware Calibration Low-level hardware calibration On PMT/ preamp changes & if 0.7< SLOPE >1.3 Yes 1 1 1 1, 2 1 2 Pump DATE PERFORMED 11.6.5 These Items are required to maintain full warranty, all other items are strongly recommended. A pump rebuild kit is available from Teledyne API Technical Support including all instructions and required parts (the pump part number is on the label of the pump itself). 07270B DCN6512206 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance 6.2. PREDICTIVE DIAGNOSTICS The analyzer’s test functions can be used to predict failures by looking at trends in their values. Initially it may be useful to compare the state of these test functions to the values measured on your instrument at the factory and recorded on the T200H/M Final Test and Validation Data Form (Teledyne API part number 04490, attached to the manual). Table 6-2 can be used as a basis for taking action as these values change with time. The internal data acquisition system (DAS) is a convenient way to record and track these changes. APICOM control software can be used to download and review these data even from remote locations (Section 4.15.2.8 describes APICOM). Table 6-2: FUNCTION EXPECTED RCEL pressure Constant to within ± 0.5 SAMPLE pressure Constant within atmospheric changes Ozone Flow Constant to within ± 15 Predictive Uses for Test Functions ACTUAL INTERPRETATION & ACTION Fluctuating Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks Slowly increasing Pump performance is degrading. Replace pump head when pressure is above 10 in-Hg-A Fluctuating Developing leak in pneumatic system. Check for leaks Slowly decreasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters Slowly increasing Developing leak in pneumatic system to vacuum (developing valve failure). Check for leaks Slowly decreasing Flow path is clogging up. Replace orifice filters Developing AZERO valve failure. Replace valve PMT cooler failure. Check cooler, circuit, and power supplies Constant within ±20 of check-out value Significantly increasing NO2 CONC Constant for constant concentrations Slowly decreasing signal for same concentration Converter efficiency may be degrading. Replace converter. NO CONC Constant for constant concentration Decreasing over time Drift of instrument response; clean RCEL window, change O3 air filter chemical. AZERO Developing light leak. Leak check. O3 air filter cartridge is exhausted. Change chemical 6.3. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The following procedures need to be performed regularly as part of the standard maintenance of the Model T200H/M. 6.3.1. CHANGING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or excess dirt. It should be replaced according to the service interval in Table 9-1 even without obvious signs of dirt. Filters with 1 µm pore size can clog up while retaining a clean look. We recommend to handle the filter and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing with gloves and tweezers. We recommend not to touch any part of the housing, filter element, PTFE 07270B DCN6512 207 Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual retaining ring, glass cover and the O-ring with bare hands as this may cause the pores to clog quicker and surfaces to become dirty due to possible oils from your hands. Figure 6-1: Sample Particulate Filter Assembly To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 9-1, follow this procedure: 1. Turn OFF the pump to prevent drawing debris into the sample line. 2. Remove the CE Mark locking screw in the center of the front panel and open the hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring of the filter assembly. 3. Carefully remove the retaining ring, glass window, PTFE O-ring and filter element. We recommend to clean the glass and O-rings at least once monthly, weekly in very polluted areas. 4. Install a new filter element, carefully centering it in the bottom of the holder. 5. Re-install the PTFE O-ring with the notches facing up (important!), the glass cover, then screw on the hold-down ring and hand-tighten the assembly. Inspect the (visible) seal between the edge of the glass window and the O-ring to assure proper gas tightness. 6. To fulfill CE Mark safety requirements, the front panel locking screw must be installed at all times during operation of the analyzer. 7. Re-start the analyzer. 208 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance 6.3.2. CHANGING THE O3 DRYER PARTICULATE FILTER The air for the O3 generator passes through a Perma Pure© dryer, which is equipped with a small particulate filter at its inlet. This filter prevents dust from entering the Perma Pure© dryer and degrading the dryer’s performance over time. To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 6-1: 1. Check and write down the average RCEL pressure and the OZONE flow values. 2. Turn off the analyzer, unplug the power cord and remove the cover. 3. Unscrew the nut around the port of the filter using 5/8” and 9/16” wrenches and by holding the actual fitting body steady with a 7/16” wrench. Note RISK OF SIGNIFICANT LEAK Make sure to use proper wrenches and to not turn the fitting against the Perma Pure© dryer. This may loosen the inner tubing and cause large leaks. 4. Take off the old filter element and replace it with a suitable equivalent (TAPI part# FL-3). Figure 6-2: Particle Filter on O3 Supply Air Dryer 5. Holding the fitting steady with a 5/8” wrench, tighten the nut with your hands. If necessary use a second wrench but do not over-tighten the nut. 6. Replace the cover, plug in the power cord and restart the analyzer. 7. Check the O3 flow rate, it should be around 250 cm³/min ± 15. Check the RCEL pressure, it should be the same value as before. 07270B DCN6512 209 Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 6.3.3. MAINTAINING THE EXTERNAL SAMPLE PUMP 6.3.3.1. Rebuilding the Pump The sample pump head periodically wears out and must be replaced when the RCEL pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A (at sea level, adjust this value accordingly for elevated locations). A pump rebuild kit is available from the factory. The part number of the pump rebuild kit is located on the label of the pump itself. Instructions and diagrams are included in the kit. A flow and leak check after rebuilding the sample pump is recommended. A span check and re-calibration after this procedure is necessary as the response of the analyzer changes with the RCEL pressure. 6.3.3.2. Changing the Inline Exhaust Scrubber CAUTION! Do NOT attempt to change the contents of the inline exhaust scrubber cartridge; change the entire cartridge. 1. Through the SETUP>MORE>DIAG menu turn OFF the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE. Wait 10 minutes to allow pump to pull room air through scrubber before proceeding to step 2. 2. Disconnect exhaust line from analyzer. 3. Turn off (unplug) analyzer sample pump. 4. Disconnect tubing from (NOx or charcoal) scrubber cartridge. 5. Remove scrubber from system. 6. Dispose of according to local laws. 7. Install new scrubber into system. 8. Reconnect tubing to scrubber and analyzer. 9. Turn on pump. 10. Through the SETUP menu (per Step 1 above) turn ON the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE. Note 210 The inline exhaust scrubber is strictly intended for Nitric Acid and NO2 only. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance 6.3.4. CHANGING THE NO2 CONVERTER The NO2 converter is located in the center of the instrument, see Figure 3-5 for location, and Figure 6-3 for the assembly. The converter is designed for replacement of the cartridge only, the heater with built-in thermocouple can be reused. 1. Turn off the analyzer power, remove the cover and allow the converter to cool. 2. Remove the top lid of the converter as well as the top layers of the insulation until the converter cartridge can be seen. CAUTION THE CONVERTER OPERATES AT 315º C. SEVERE BURNS CAN RESULT IF THE ASSEMBLY IS NOT ALLOWED TO COOL. DO NOT HANDLE THE ASSEMBLY UNTIL IT IS AT ROOM TEMPERATURE. THIS MAY TAKE SEVERAL HOURS. 3. Remove the tube fittings from the converter. 4. Disconnect the power and the thermocouple of the converter. Unscrew the grounding clamp of the power leads with a Phillips-head screw driver. 5. Remove the converter assembly (cartridge and band heater) from the can. Make a of the orientation of the tubes relative to the heater cartridge. 6. Unscrew the band heater and loosen it, take out the old converter cartridge. Figure 6-3: NO2 Converter Assembly 7. Wrap the band heater around the new replacement cartridge and tighten the screws using a high-temperature anti-seize agent such as copper paste. Make sure to use proper alignment of the heater with respect to the converter tubes. 8. Replace the converter assembly, route the cables through the holes in the can and reconnect them properly. Reconnect the grounding clamp around the heater leads for safe operation. 9. Re-attach the tube fittings to the converter and replace the insulation and cover. 07270B DCN6512 211 Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 10. Replace the instrument cover and power up the analyzer. 11. Allow the converter to burn-in for 24 hours, then re-calibrate the instrument. 6.3.5. CLEANING THE REACTION CELL The reaction cell should be cleaned whenever troubleshooting suggests. A dirty reaction cell will cause excessive noise, drifting zero or span values, low response or a combination of all. To clean the reaction cell, remove it from the sensor housing: refer to Section 7.6.5. for an overview of the entire sensor assembly. Use the following guide to clean the reaction cell: 1. Turn off the instrument power and vacuum pump. Refer to Figure 6-4 for the following procedure. 2. Disconnect the black 1/4" exhaust tube and the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell. Disconnect the heater/thermistor cable. 3. Remove four screws holding the reaction cell to the PMT housing and lift the cell and manifold out as shown in the inset of Figure 6-4. 212 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 6-4: Instrument Maintenance Reaction Cell Assembly 1. The reaction cell will separate into two halves, the stainless steel manifold assembly and the black plastic reaction cell with window, stainless steel cylinder and O-rings. 2. The reaction cell (both plastic part and stainless steel cylinder) and optical glass filter should be cleaned with methanol and a clean tissue and dried thereafter. 3. Usually it is not necessary to clean the ozone flow orifice since it is protected by a sintered filter. If tests show that cleaning is necessary, refer to Section 6.3.6 on how to perform maintenance on the critical flow orifice. 4. Do not remove the sample and ozone nozzles. They are Teflon threaded and require a special tool for reassembly. If necessary, the manifold with nozzles attached can be cleaned in an ultrasonic bath. 5. Reassemble in proper order and re-attach the reaction cell to the sensor housing. Reconnect pneumatics and heater connections, then re-attach the pneumatic sensor assembly and the cleaning procedure is complete. 6. After cleaning the reaction cell, it is also recommended to exchange the ozone supply air filter chemical. 7. After cleaning, the analyzer span response may drop 10 - 15% in the first 10 days as the reaction cell window conditions. This is normal and does not require another cleaning. 07270B DCN6512 213 Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 6.3.6. CHANGING CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES There are several critical flow orifices installed in the T200H/M, Figure 6-4 shows one of the two most important orifice assemblies, located on the reaction cell. Refer to Section 8.3.3 for a detailed description on functionality and locations. Despite the fact that these flow restrictors are protected by sintered stainless steel filters, they can, on occasion, clog up, particularly if the instrument is operated without sample filter or in an environment with very fine, sub-micron particle-size dust. The T200H/M introduces an orifice holder that makes changing the orifice very easy. In fact, it is recommended to keep spare orifice holder assemblies at hand to minimize downtime and swap orifices in a matter of a few minutes. Appendix B lists several complete spare part kits for this purpose. To replace a critical flow orifice, do the following: 1. Turn off power to the instrument and vacuum pump. Remove the analyzer cover and locate the reaction cell (Figure 3-7 for location in chassis, and Figure 6-4 for exploded view of assembly). 2. Unscrew the 1/8” sample and ozone air tubes from the reaction cell 3. For orifices on the reaction cell (Figure 6-4): Unscrew the orifice holder with a 9/16” wrench. This part holds all components of the critical flow assembly as shown in Figure 6-5. Appendix B contains a list of spare part numbers. 4. For orifices in the vacuum manifold: the assembly is similar to the one shown in Figure 6-5, but without the orifice holder, part number 04090, and bottom O-ring OR34 and with an NPT fitting in place of the FT 10 fitting. After taking off the connecting tube, unscrew the NPT fitting. Figure 6-5: Critical Flow Orifice Assembly 5. Take out the components of the assembly: a spring, a sintered filter, two O-rings and the orifice. For the vacuum manifold only, you may need to use a scribe or pressure from the vacuum port to get the parts out of the manifold. 214 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Instrument Maintenance 6. Discard the two O-rings and the sintered filter and the critical flow orifice. 7. Re-assemble the flow control assembly with new the parts (see Appendix B for part number or replacement kit) as shown in Figure 6-5 and re-connect them to the reaction cell manifold or the vacuum manifold. 8. Reconnect all tubing, power up the analyzer and pump and - after a warm-up period of 30 minutes, carry out a leak test as described in Section 7.5. 6.3.7. CHECKING FOR LIGHT LEAKS When re-assembled or operated improperly, the T200H/M can develop small leaks around the PMT, which let stray light from the analyzer surrounding into the PMT housing. To find such light leaks, follow the below procedures. CAUTION: this procedure can only be carried out with the analyzer running and its cover removed. This procedure should only be carried out by qualified personnel. 1. Scroll the TEST functions to PMT. 2. Supply zero gas to the analyzer. 3. With the instrument still running, carefully remove the analyzer cover. Take extra care not to touch any of the inside wiring with the metal cover or your body. Do not drop screws or tools into a running analyzer! 4. Shine a powerful flashlight or portable incandescent light at the inlet and outlet fitting and at all of the joints of the reaction cell as well as around the PMT housing. The PMT value should not respond to the light, the PMT signal should remain steady within its usually noise. 5. If there is a PMT response to the external light, symmetrically tighten the reaction cell mounting screws or replace the 1/4” vacuum tubing with new, black PTFE tubing (this tubing will fade with time and become transparent). Often, light leaks are also caused by O-rings being left out of the assembly. 6. Carefully replace the analyzer cover. 7. If tubing was changed, carry out a leak check (Section 7.5). 07270B DCN6512 215 Instrument Maintenance Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. 216 07270B DCN6512 7. TROUBLESHOOTING & REPAIR This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance problems with the analyzer. CAUTION The operations outlined in this Section must be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only. WARNING Risk of electrical shock. Some operations need to be carried out with the analyzer open and running. Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or mechanical damage to the analyzer. Do not drop tools into the analyzer or leave those after your procedures. Do not shorten or touch electric connections with metallic tools while operating inside the analyzer. Use common sense when operating inside a running analyzer. 7.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING The analyzer has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and repaired. During operation, the analyzer continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring operations. A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five steps: 07270B DCN6512 any warning messages and take corrective action as necessary. Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action. Use the internal electronic status LED’s to determine whether the electronic communication channels are operating properly. Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the voltage test points on the relay board. that the analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match the color of the corresponding test points on the relay board. Suspect a leak first! Technical Support data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually traced to leaks in the pneumatic system of the analyzer (including the external pump), the source of zero air or span gases or the sample gas delivery system. Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external gas lines, damaged seals, punctured gas lines, a damaged pump diaphragm, etc. Follow the procedures defined in Section 3.6.3. to confirm that the analyzer’s vital functions are working (power supplies, CPU, relay board, PMT cooler, etc.). See Figure 3-5 for general layout of components and sub-assemblies in the analyzer. See the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D. 217 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.1.1. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH WARNING MESSAGES The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message being displayed on the front panel. Table 4-3 lists warning messages, along with their meaning and recommended corrective action. It should be d that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same time, it is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub-system (power supply, relay board, motherboard) has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures referenced by the warnings. In this case, a combined-error analysis needs to be performed. The analyzer will alert the user that a Warning message is active by flashing the red FAULT LED, displaying the Warning message in the Param field along with the CLR button (press to clear Warning message). The MSG button displays if there is more than one warning in queue or if you are in the TEST menu and have not yet cleared the message. The following display/touch screen examples provide an illustration of each: The analyzer also issues an alert via the serial port(s). 218 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair To view or clear a warning messages press: SAMPLE buttonss replaced with TEST button. Pressing TEST suppresss warning messages. TEST SAMPLE SYSTEM RESET CAL NOX = XXX.X MSG A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > CAL MSG CLR SETUP NOX=XXX.X CLR SETUP MSG indicates that warning messages are active. SAMPLE If warning messages reappear, perform a combined error analysis until the problem is resolved. Do not repeatedly clear warnings without corrective action. SYSTEM RESET < TST TST > CAL Figure 7-1: NOX = XXX.X MSG CLR SETUP Press CLR to clear the current warning message. If more than one warning is active, the next message will take its place. Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages 7.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the TEST functions, viewable from the front panel, can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer’s theory of operation (Section 8). We recommend using the APICOM remote control program to download, graph and archive TEST data for analysis and long-term monitoring of diagnostic data ( Section 4.15.2.8). The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in Appendix A-3. The actual values for these test functions on checkout at the factory were also listed in the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet, which was shipped with the instrument. Values outside the acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer’s subsystems. Functions with values that are within the acceptable range but have significantly changed from the measurements recorded on the factory data sheet may also indicate a failure or a maintenance item. A problem report worksheet has been provided in Appendix C (Teledyne API part number 04503) to assist in recording the value of these test functions. The following table contains some of the more common causes for these values to be out of range. 07270B DCN6512 219 Troubleshooting & Repair Table 7-1: Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values TEST FUNCTION INDICATED FAILURE(S) NOX STB Unstable concentrations; leaks SAMPLE FL Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice OZONE FL Leaks; clogged critical flow orifice PMT Calibration off; HVPS problem; no flow (leaks) NORM PMT AutoZero too high AZERO Leaks; malfunctioning NO/NOx or AutoZero valve; O3 air filter cartridge exhausted HVPS HVPS broken; calibration off; preamp board circuit problems Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out RCELL TEMP BOX TEMP Environment out of temperature operating range; broken thermistor PMT TEMP TEC cooling circuit broken; relay board communication (I2C bus); 12 V power supply Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out IZS TEMP (OPTION) Malfunctioning heater; disconnected or broken thermocouple; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out; incorrect AC voltage configuration MOLY TEMP RCEL (PRESSURE) Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices SAMP (PRESSURE) Leak; malfunctioning valve; malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices; sample inlet overpressure; HVPS out of range; low-level (hardware) calibration needs adjustment; span gas concentration incorrect; leaks NOX SLOPE NOX OFF Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off NO SLOPE HVPS out of range; low-level calibration off; span gas concentration incorrect; leaks NO OFFS Incorrect span gas concentration; low-level calibration off TIME OF DAY Internal clock drifting; move across time zones; daylight savings time? 7.1.3. USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTION The signal I/O parameters found under the diagnostics (DIAG) menu combined with a thorough understanding of the instrument’s theory of operation (Section 8) are useful for troubleshooting in three ways: The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical inputs and outputs. All of the components and functions that are normally under instrument control can be manually changed. Analog and digital output signals can be manually controlled. This allows to systematically observe the effect of these functions on the operation of the analyzer. Figure 7-2 shows an example of how to use the signal I/O menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output voltage or control signal. The specific parameter will vary depending on the situation. 220 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > SETUP X.X Troubleshooting & Repair NOX=XXX.X CAL SETUP PRIMARY SETUP MENU CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM SETUP X.X 8 1 DIAG EXIT ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 ENTR EXIT SIGNAL I/O NEXT DIAG I/O ENTR 0) EXT_ZERO_CAL =OFF NEXT JUMP DIAG I/O 0 EXIT ENTR EXIT JUMP TO:0 0 ENTR EXIT Enter 07 to Jump to Signal 7: (CAL_LED) DIAG I/O 0 DIAG AIO JUMP TO:7 7 ENTR EXIT 7) CAL LED=OFF PREV NEXT JUMP OFF PRNT EXIT Toggle to turn the CAL LED ON/OFF Figure 7-2: 07270B DCN6512 Switching Signal I/O Functions 221 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.1.4. STATUS LED’S Several color-coded, light-emitting diodes (LED) are located inside the instrument to determine if the analyzer’s CPU, I2C communications bus and the relay board are functioning properly. 7.1.4.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog) A red LED labeled DS5 in the upper portion of the motherboard (Figure 11-3), just to the right of the CPU board, flashes when the CPU is running the main program. After power-up, DS5 should flash on and off about once per second. If characters are visible on the front panel display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have become corrupted. Contact Technical Support because it may be possible to recover operation of the analyzer. If 30 - 60 seconds after a restart neither DS5 is flashing nor any characters are visible on the front panel display, the firmware may be corrupted or the CPU may be defective. If DS5 is permanently off or permanently on, the CPU board is likely locked up and the analyzer should not respond (either with locked-up or dark front panel). Motherboard CPU Status LED Figure 7-3: Motherboard Watchdog Status Indicator 7.1.4.2. CPU Status Indicator The CPU board has two red LEDs, the lower of which is the watchdog timer (the device that pulses the motherboard watchdog). This LED is labeled LED2 and blinks about twice per second (twice as fast as the motherboard LED) when operating normally. LED1 above LED2 should always be on. However, both CPU LEDs only indicate if the CPU is powered up properly and generally working. The lower LED can continue to blink even if the CPU or firmware are locked up. 222 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.1.4.3. Relay Board and Status LEDs The most important status LED on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watch-dog LED, labeled D1, which indicates the health of the I2C communications bus. This LED is the left-most in LED row 1 in the center of the relay board when looking at the electronic components. If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in conjunction with the DIAG menu I/O functions to test hardware functionality by manually switching devices on and off and watching the corresponding LED go on or off. Figure 7-4 illustrates the relay board layout including the two rows of LEDs, Table 11-2 lists the individual LED functions and the menu tree below shows how to access the manual control of the I/O functions. that only some or the LEDs may be functional in your analyzer model; the relay board layout is conceptualized for spare, future functionality and is also common to many of the E-series analyzers. Thermocouple Signal Output Status LED’s (D2 through D16) Watchdog Status LED (D1) (JP5) Thermocouple Configuration Jumpers DC Power Supply Test Points I2 C Connector (J15) TC1 Input Power Connection for DC Heaters (J16) TC2 Input Shutter Control Connector (JP7) Pump AC Configuration Jumper (T100 Series Only) Valve Control Drivers Pump Power Output Valve Option Control Connector AC Power IN AC Heater Power Output Solid State AC Power Relays (Not Present on P/N 45230100) (JP6) (JP2) AC Configuration Jumpers for Optional IZS Valve Heaters & O 2Sensors Figure 7-4: 07270B DCN6512 DC Power Distribution Connectors Main AC Heater Configuration Jumpers AC Power Output for Optional O2 sensors Relay Board PCA 223 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 7-2: Relay Board Status LEDs COLOR FUNCTION FAULT STATUS INDICATED FAILURE(S) D1 Red Watchdog Circuit; I2C bus operation. Continuously ON or OFF Failed or halted CPU; faulty motherboard, keyboard, relay board; wiring between motherboard, keyboard or relay board; +5 V power supply D2 Yellow Relay 0 - reaction cell heater Continuously ON or OFF Heater broken, thermistor broken D3 Yellow Relay 1 - NO2 converter heater Continuously ON or OFF Heater broken, thermocouple broken D4 Yellow Relay 2 - manifold heater Continuously ON or OFF Heater broken, thermistor broken D7 1 Green Valve 0 - zero/span valve status Continuously ON or OFF Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip broken D8 1 Green Valve 1 - sample/cal valve status Continuously ON or OFF Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip broken D9 Green Valve 2 - auto-zero valve status Continuously ON or OFF Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip broken D10 Green Valve 3 - NO/NOx valve status Continuously ON or OFF Valve broken or stuck, valve driver chip broken D6 Yellow Relay 4 – (O2 sensor heater T200H/M) N/A N/A D11- 16 Green Spare N/A N/A LED LED ROW 1 LED ROW 2 1 Only active for instruments with Z/S valve options installed To enter the signal I/O test mode to manually control I/O functions such as valves and heaters, press the following touchscreen button sequence while observing the relay board LEDs: SAMPLE A1:NXCNC1=100PPM < TST TST > SETUP X.X NOX=XXX.X CAL PRIMARY SETUP MENU NEXT JUMP EXIT 0 1 JUMP TO:0 0 ENTR EXIT Enter 07 to Jump to Signal 7: (CAL_LED) EXIT DIAG I/O 0 8 JUMP TO:25 7 ENTR EXIT ENTER PASSWORD:818 8 ENTR EXIT DIAG AIO 07) CAL_LED=ON PREV NEXT JUMP DIAG SIGNAL I/O NEXT 224 ENTR EXIT SECONDARY SETUP MENU COMM VARS DIAG ALRM SETUP X.X 0) EXT_ZERO_CAL =OFF DIAG I/O CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE SETUP X.X DIAG I/O SETUP ENTR EXIT Toggle to turn the CAL LED ON/OFF ON PRNT EXIT See Menu Tree A-6 in Appendix A.1 for a list of I/O Signals 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.2. GAS FLOW PROBLEMS The T200H/M has two main flow paths, the sample flow and the flow of the ozone supply air. With zero/span valve option installed, there is a third (zero air) and a fourth (span gas) flow path, but either one of those is only controlled by critical flow orifices and not displayed on the front panel or stored to the DAS. The full flow diagrams of the standard configuration and with options installed (Appendix D, document 04574) help in trouble-shooting flow problems. In general, flow problems can be divided into three categories: Flow is too high Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable Flow is zero (no flow) When troubleshooting flow problems, it is essential to confirm the actual flow rate without relying on the analyzer’s flow display. The use of an independent, external flow meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 4.13.7.5 is essential. The flow diagrams found in a variety locations within this manual depicting the T200H and T200M in their standard configuration and with options installed can help in trouble-shooting flow problems. For your convenience they are collected here in Sections 11.2.1 (T200H) and 11.2.2 (T200M) 07270B DCN6512 225 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.2.1. T200H INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS Figure 7-5: 226 T200H – Basic Internal Gas Flow 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 7-6: 07270B DCN6512 Troubleshooting & Repair T200H – Internal Gas Flow with Ambient Zero Span, OPT 50A 227 Troubleshooting & Repair Figure 7-7: 228 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual T200H – Internal Gas Flow with O2 Sensor, OPT 65A 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.2.2. T200M INTERNAL GAS FLOW DIAGRAMS NO/NOX VALVE NO COM NC SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR COM O3 FLOW SENSOR VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR AUTOZERO VALVE NC EXHAUST MANIFOLD NO REACTION CELL PMT PERMAPURE DRYER Figure 7-8: 07270B DCN6512 T200M – Basic Internal Gas Flow 229 Troubleshooting & Repair Figure 7-9: 230 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual T200M – Internal Gas Flow with Ambient Zero Span, OPT 50A 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair NO/NOX VALVE COM NC VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR COM O3 FLOW SENSOR NO AUTOZERO VALVE NC EXHAUST MANIFOLD NO REACTION CELL PMT PERMAPURE DRYER Figure 7-10: T200M – Internal Gas Flow with O2 Sensor, OPT 65A 7.2.3. ZERO OR LOW FLOW PROBLEMS 7.2.3.1. Sample Flow is Zero or Low The T200H/M does not actually measure the sample flow but rather calculates it from a differential pressure between sample and vacuum manifold. On flow failure, the unit will display a SAMPLE FLOW WARNING on the front panel display and the respective test function reports XXXX instead of a value “0”. This message applies to both a flow rate of zero as well as a flow that is outside the standard range (200-600 cm³/min; 300-700 cm³/min with O2 option installed). If the analyzer displays XXXX for the sample flow, confirm that the external sample pump is operating and configured for the proper AC voltage. Whereas the T200H/M can be internally configured for two different power regimes (100-120 V and 220-240 V, either 50 or 60 Hz), the external pump is physically different for each of three power regimes (100 V / 50 Hz, 115 V / 60 Hz and 230 V / 50 Hz). If the pump is not running, use an AC Voltmeter to make sure that the pump is supplied with the proper AC power. If AC power is supplied properly, but the pump is not running, replace the pump. Note 07270B DCN6512 Sample and vacuum pressures mentioned in this Section refer to operation of the analyzer at sea level. Pressure values need to be adjusted for elevated locations, as the ambient pressure decreases by about 1 in-Hg per 300 m / 1000 ft. 231 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual If the pump is operating but the unit reports a XXXX gas flow, do the following: Check for actual sample flow. To check the actual sample flow, disconnect the sample tube from the sample inlet on the rear panel of the instrument. Make sure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE mode. Place a finger over the inlet and see if it gets sucked in by the vacuum or, more properly, use a flow meter to measure the actual flow. If there is proper flow (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), contact Technical Support. If there is no flow or low flow, continue with the next step. Check pressures. Check that the sample pressure is at or around 28 in-Hg-A at sea level (adjust as necessary when in elevated location, the pressure should be about 1” below ambient atmospheric pressure) and that the RCEL pressure is below 10 inHg-A. The T200H/M will calculate a sample flow up to about 14 in-Hg-A RCEL pressure but a good pump should always provide less than 10 in. If both pressures are the same and around atmospheric pressure, the pump does not operate properly or is not connected properly. The instrument does not get any vacuum. If both pressures are about the same and low (probably under 10 in-Hg-A, or ~20” on sample and 15” on vacuum), there is a cross-leak between sample flow path and vacuum, most likely through the Perma Pure dryer flow paths. See troubleshooting the Perma Pure dryer later in this Section. If the sample and vacuum pressures are around their nominal values (28 and <10 in-Hg-A, respectively) and the flow still displays XXXX, carry out a leak check as described in Section 7.5. If gas flows through the instrument during the above tests but goes to zero or is low when it is connected to zero air or span gas, the flow problem is not internal to the analyzer but likely caused by the gas source such as calibrators/generators, empty gas tanks, clogged valves, regulators and gas lines. If an Zero/Span valve option is installed in the instrument, press CALZ and CALS. If the sample flow increases, suspect a bad Sample/Cal valve. If none of these suggestions help, carry out a detailed leak check of the analyzer as described in Section 7.5.2. 7.2.3.2. Ozone Flow is Zero or Low If there is zero or a low (<200 cm³/min) ozone flow, the unit displays an OZONE FLOW WARNING message on the front panel and a value between 0.0 and 200 cm³/min for the actual ozone flow as measured by the internal mass flow meter. In this case, carry out the following steps: 232 Check the actual flow rate through the ozone dryer by using an external flow meter to the inlet port of the dryer. This inlet port is inside the analyzer at the end of the plastic particle filter (Section 6.3.2 for illustration). If there is nominal flow (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), consult Technical Support as there is a problem with the firmware or electronics. If the actual flow is low or zero, check if the pump operates properly. The RCEL pressure should be below 10 in-Hg-A at sea level. If it is above 10”, rebuild the pump (Section 6.3.3). Check the spare parts list in Appendix B on how to order pump rebuild kits. Check if the particle filter is clogged. Briefly remove the particle filter to see if this improves the flow. Be very cautious about handling the Perma Pure dryer fittings refer to Section 6.3.2 on proper handling instructions. If the filter is clogged, replace it with a new unit. If taking off this filter does not solve the problem, continue to the 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair next step. Do not leave the Perma Pure dryer without filter for more than a few seconds, as you may draw in dust, which will reduce the performance of the dryer. A leak between the flow meter and the reaction cell (where the flow-determining critical orifice is located) may cause a low flow (the system draws in ambient air through a leak after the flow meter). Check for leaks as described in Section 7.5. Repair the leaking fitting, line or valve and re-check. The most likely cause for zero or low ozone flow is a clogged critical flow orifice or sintered filter within the orifice assembly. The orifice that sets the ozone flow is located on the reaction cell. Check the actual ozone flow by disconnecting the tube from the reaction cell and measuring the flow going into the cell. If this flow is correct (see Table 10-3 for flow rates), the orifice works properly. If this flow is low, replace or clean the orifice. The orifice holder assembly allows a quick and easy replacement of the orifice, refer to Section 6.3.6 on how to do this. Appendix B lists a spare part kit with a complete orifice assembly that allows a quick replacement with minimum instrument down-time. The clogged orifice can then be cleaned while the instrument is running with the replacement. 7.2.4. HIGH FLOW Flows that are significantly higher than the allowed operating range (typically ±10-11% of the nominal flow) should not occur in the T200H/M unless a pressurized sample, zero or span gas is supplied to the inlet ports. Ensure to vent excess pressure and flow just before the analyzer inlet ports. When supplying sample, zero or span gas at ambient pressure, a high flow would indicate that one or more of the critical flow orifices are physically broken (very unlikely case), allowing more than nominal flow, or were replaced with an orifice of wrong specifications. If the flows are within 15% higher than normal, we recommend to re-calibrate the flow electronically using the procedure in Section 4.13.7.5, followed by a regular review of these flows over time to see if the new setting is retained properly. 7.2.5. SAMPLE FLOW IS ZERO OR LOW BUT ANALYZER REPORTS CORRECT FLOW that the T200H/M analyzer can report a correct flow rate even if there is no or a low actual sample flow through the reaction cell. The sample flow on the T200H/M is only calculated from the sample pressure and critical flow condition is verified from the difference between sample pressure and vacuum pressure. If the critical flow orifice is partially or completely clogged, both the sample and vacuum pressures are still within their nominal ranges (the pump keeps pumping, the sample port is open to the atmosphere), but there is no flow possible through the reaction cell. Although measuring the actual flow is the best method, in most cases, this fault can also be diagnosed by evaluating the two pressure values. Since there is no longer any flow, the sample pressure should be equal to ambient pressure, which is about 1 in-Hg-A higher than the sample pressure under normal operation. The reaction cell pressure, on the other hand, is significantly lower than under normal operation, because the pump no longer has to remove the sample gas and evacuates the reaction cell much better. Those two indicators, taken together with a zero or low actual flow, indicate a clogged sample orifice. The T200H/M features a orifice holder, which makes switching sample and ozone flow orifices very easy, refer to Section 6.3.6 on how to change the sample orifices and Appendix B for part numbers of these assemblies. Again, monitoring the pressures and 07270B DCN6512 233 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual flows regularly will reveal such problems, because the pressures would slowly or suddenly change from their nominal, mean values. Teledyne API recommends to review all test data once per week and to do an exhaustive data analysis for test and concentration values once per month, paying particular attention to sudden or gradual changes in all parameters that are supposed to remain constant, such as the flow rates. 7.3. CALIBRATION PROBLEMS 7.3.1. NEGATIVE CONCENTRATIONS Negative concentration values can be caused by any of several reasons: A slight, negative signal is normal when the analyzer is operating under zero gas and the signal is drifting around the zero calibration point. This is caused by the analyzer’s zero noise and may cause reported concentrations to be negative for a few seconds at a time down to -0.2 ppm, but should randomly alternate with similarly high, positive values. The T200H/M has a built-in Auto-zero function, which should take care of most of these deviations from zero, but may yield a small, residual, negative value. If larger, negative values persist continuously, check if the Auto-zero function was accidentally turned off using the remote variables in Appendix A-2. In this case, the sensitivity of the analyzer may be drifting negative. A corruption of the Auto-zero filter may also cause negative concentrations. If a short, high noise value was detected during the AutoZero cycle, that higher reading will alter the Auto-zero filter value. As the value of the Auto-zero filter is subtracted from the current PMT response, it will produce a negative concentration reading. High AutoZero readings can be caused by: a leaking or stuck AutoZero valve (replace the valve), by an electronic fault in the preamplifier causing it to have a voltage on the PMT output pin during the AutoZero cycle (replace the preamplifier), by a reaction cell contamination causing high background (>40 mV) PMT readings (clean the reaction cell), by a broken PMT temperature control circuit, allowing high zero offset (repair the faulty PMT cooler). After fixing the cause of a high Auto-zero filter reading, the T200H/M will take 15 minutes for the filter to clear itself, or by an exhausted chemical in the ozone scrubber cartridge (Section 6.3.4). Miscalibration is the most likely explanation for negative concentration values. If the zero air contained some NO or NO2 gas (contaminated zero air or a worn-out zero air scrubber) and the analyzer was calibrated to that concentration as “zero”, the analyzer may report negative values when measuring air that contains little or no NOx. The same problem occurs, if the analyzer was zero-calibrated using zero gas that is contaminated with ambient air or span gas (cross-port leaks or leaks in supply tubing or user not waiting long enough to flush pneumatic systems). If the response offset test functions for NO (NO OFFS) or NOX (NOX OFFS) are greater than 150 mV, a reaction cell contamination is indicated. Clean the reaction cell according to Section 6.3.5. 7.3.2. NO RESPONSE If the instrument shows no response (display value is near zero) even though sample gas is supplied properly and the instrument seems to perform correctly. 234 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair Check if the ozone generator is turned on. Usually, the analyzer issues a warning whenever the ozone generator is turned off. Go to SETUP-MORE-DIAG-ENTR, then scroll to the OZONE GEN OVERRIDE and see if it shows ON. If it shows OFF, turn it ON and EXIT the DIAG menu. If this is done and the ozone flow is correct, the analyzer should be properly supplied with ozone unless the generator itself is broken. A more detailed description of the ozone generator subsystem checks are in Section 11.5.17. Confirm the lack of response by supplying NO or NO2 span gas of about 80% of the range value to the analyzer. Check the sample flow and ozone flow rates for proper values. Check for disconnected cables to the sensor module. Carry out an electrical test with the ELECTRICAL TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu, see Section 4.13.7.3. If this test produces a concentration reading, the analyzer’s electronic signal path is correct. Carry out an optical test using the OPTIC TEST procedure in the diagnostics menu, see Section 4.13.7.2. If this test results in a concentration signal, then the PMT sensor and the electronic signal path are operating properly. If the T200H/M passes both ETEST and OTEST, the instrument is capable of detecting light and processing the signal to produce a reading. Therefore, the problem must be in the pneumatics or the ozone generator. If NO2 signal is zero while NO signal is correct, check the NO/NOX valve and the NO2 converter for proper operation. 7.3.3. UNSTABLE ZERO AND SPAN Leaks in the T200H/M or in the external gas supply and vacuum systems are the most common source of unstable and non-repeatable concentration readings. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 7.5. Consider pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the T200H/M such as a change in zero air source (ambient air leaking into zero air line or a worn-out zero air scrubber) or a change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient air leaking into the span gas line. Once the instrument passes a leak check, do a flow check (this Section) to make sure that the instrument is supplied with adequate sample and ozone air. Confirm the sample pressure, sample temperature, and sample flow readings are correct and steady. Verify that the sample filter element is clean and does not need to be replaced. 7.3.4. INABILITY TO SPAN - NO SPAN BUTTON In general, the T200H/M will not display certain keyboard choices whenever the actual value of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu does not show a SPAN key when carrying out a span calibration, the actual concentration must be outside of the range of the expected span gas concentration, which can have several reasons. 07270B DCN6512 Verify that the expected concentration is set properly to the actual span gas concentration in the CONC sub-menu. 235 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Confirm that the NOx span gas source is accurate. This can be done by comparing the source with another calibrated analyzer, or by having the NOx source verified by an independent traceable photometer. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 7.5. Leaks can dilute the span gas and, hence, the concentration that the analyzer measures may fall short of the expected concentration defined in the CONC sub-menu. If the low-level, hardware calibration has drifted (changed PMT response) or was accidentally altered by the user, a low-level calibration may be necessary to get the analyzer back into its proper range of expected values. One possible indicator of this scenario is a slope or offset value that is outside of its allowed range (0.7-1.3 for slope, -20 mV to 150 mV for offsets). See Section 13 on how to carry out a lowlevel hardware calibration. 7.3.5. INABILITY TO ZERO - NO ZERO BUTTON In general, the T200H/M will not display certain touchscreen buttons whenever the actual value of a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu does not show a ZERO button when carrying out a zero calibration, the actual gas concentration must be significantly different from the actual zero point (as per last calibration), which can have several reasons. Confirm that there is a good source of zero air. Check to make sure that there is no ambient air leaking into zero air line. Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 7.5. 7.3.6. NON-LINEAR RESPONSE The T200H/M was factory calibrated to a high level of NO and should be linear to within 1% of full scale. Common causes for non-linearity are: 236 Leaks in the pneumatic system. Leaks can add a constant of ambient air, zero air or span gas to the current sample gas stream, which may be changing in concentrations as the linearity test is performed. Check for leaks as described in Section 7.5. The calibration device is in error. Check flow rates and concentrations, particularly when using low concentrations. If a mass flow calibrator is used and the flow is less than 10% of the full scale flow on either flow controller, you may need to purchase lower concentration standards. The standard gases may be mislabeled as to type or concentration. concentrations may be outside the certified tolerance. The sample delivery system may be contaminated. Check for dirt in the sample lines or reaction cell. Calibration gas source may be contaminated (NO2 in NO gas is common). Dilution air contains sample or span gas. Ozone concentration too low because of wet air in the generator. Generator system needs to be cleaned and dried with dry supply air. Check the Perma Pure dryer for leaks. This mostly affects linearity at the low end. Sample inlet may be contaminated with NOX exhaust from this or other analyzers. Verify proper venting of the pump exhaust. Span gas overflow is not properly vented and creates a back-pressure on the sample inlet port. Also, if the span gas is not vented at all and does not supply Labeled 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair enough sample gas, the analyzer may be evacuating the sample line. Make sure to create and properly vent excess span gas. Diffusion of oxygen into Teflon-type tubing over long distances. PTFE or related materials can act as permeation devices. In fact, the permeable membrane of NO2 permeation tubes is made of PTFE. When using very long supply lines (> 1 m) between high concentrations span gases and the dilution system, oxygen from ambient air can diffuse into the line and react with NO to form NO2. This reaction is dependent on NO concentration and accelerates with increasing NO concentration, hence, affects linearity only at high NO levels. Using stainless steel for long span gas supply lines avoids this problem. 7.3.7. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN ANALOG OUTPUT AND DISPLAY If the concentration reported through the analog outputs does not agree with the value reported on the front panel, you may need to re-calibrate the analog outputs. This becomes more likely when using a low concentration or low analog output range. Analog outputs running at 0.1 V full scale should always be calibrated manually. See Section 4.13.6.2 for a detailed description of this procedure. 7.3.8. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN NO AND NOX SLOPES If the slopes for NO and NOX are significantly different after software calibration (more than 1%), consider the following two problems NO2 impurities in the NO calibration gas. NO gases often exhibit NO2 on the order of 1-2% of the NO value. This will cause differences in the calibration slopes. If the NO2 impurity in NO is known, it can easily be accounted for by setting the expected values for NO and NO2 accordingly to different values, e.g., 0.448 ppm NO and 0.45 ppm NOX. This problem is worse if NO gas is stored in a cylinder with balance air instead of balance gas nitrogen or large amounts of nitrous oxide (N2O). The oxygen in the air slowly reacts with NO to yield NO2, increasing over time. The expected concentrations for NO and NOX in the calibration menu are set to different values. If a gas with 100% pure NO is used, this would cause a bias. See Section 7.2 on how to set expected concentration values. The converter efficiency parameter has been set to a value not equal to 1.000 even though the conversion efficiency is 1.0. The actual conversion efficiency needs to match the parameter set in the CAL menu. See Section 5.2.5 for more information on this feature. 7.4. OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS Dynamic problems (i.e. problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is monitoring sample gas) can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and resolve. The following section provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions. 07270B DCN6512 237 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.4.1. EXCESSIVE NOISE Excessive noise levels under normal operation usually indicate leaks in the sample supply or the analyzer itself. Make sure that the sample or span gas supply is leak-free and carry out a detailed leak check as described earlier in this Section. Another possibility of excessive signal noise may be the preamplifier board, the high voltage power supply and/or the PMT detector itself. Contact the factory on troubleshooting these components. 7.4.2. SLOW RESPONSE If the analyzer starts responding too slow to any changes in sample, zero or span gas, check for the following: Dirty or plugged sample filter or sample lines. Sample inlet line is too long. Leaking NO/NOX valve. Carry out a leak check. Dirty or plugged critical flow orifices. Check flows, pressures and, if necessary, change orifices (Section 6.3.6). Wrong materials in contact with sample - use glass, stainless steel or Teflon materials only. Porous materials, in particular, will cause memory effects and slow changes in response. Dirty reaction cell. Clean the reaction cell. Insufficient time allowed for purging of lines upstream of the analyzer. Wait until stability is low. Insufficient time allowed for NO or NO2 calibration gas source to become stable. Wait until stability is low. NO2 converter temperature is too low. Check for proper temperature. 7.4.3. AUTO ZERO WARNINGS Auto-zero warnings occur if the signal measured during an auto-zero cycle is lower than –20 mV or higher than 200 mV. The Auto-Zero warning displays the value of the autozero reading when the warning occurs. 238 If this value is higher than 150 mV, check that the auto-zero valve is operating properly. To do so, use the SIGNAL I/O functions in the DIAG menu to toggle the valve on and off. Listen if the valve is switching, see if the respective LED on the relay board is indicating functionality. Scroll the TST functions until PMT is displayed and observe the PMT value change between the two valve states. If the valve is operating properly, you should be able to hear it switch (once a minute under normal operation or when manually activated from the SIGNAL I/O menu), the PMT value should drop from its nominal reading for span gas level measurements to less than 150 mV and the LED on the relay board should light up when the valve is activated. If the PMT value drops significantly but not to less than 150 mV, the valve is probably leaking across its ports. In this case, replace the valve. If the PMT value does not change at all, the valve is probably not switching at all. Check the power supply to the valve (12 V to the valve should turn on and off when measured with a voltmeter). that it takes only a small leak across the ports of the valve to show excessive autozero values when supplying high concentrations of span gas. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair Another reason for high (although not necessarily out-of-range) values for AutoZero could be the ozone air filter cartridge, if its contents has been exhausted and needs to be replaced. This cartridge filters chemicals that can cause chemiluminescence and, if saturated, these chemicals can break through to the reaction cell, causing an erroneously high AutoZero value (background noise). A dirty reaction cell can cause high AutoZero values. according to Section 6.3.5. Finally, a high HVPS voltage value may cause excess background noise and a high AZERO value. The HVPS value changes from analyzer to analyzer and could show nominal values between 450 and 800 V. Check the low-level hardware calibration of the preamplifier board and, if necessary, recalibrate exactly as described in Section 13 in order to minimize the HVPS. Clean the reaction cell 7.5. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases this included a list of possible causes and, in some cases, quick solutions or at least a pointer to the appropriate sections describing them. This section describes how to determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the problem being investigated. 7.5.1. SIMPLE LEAK CHECK USING VACUUM AND PUMP Leaks are the most common cause of analyzer malfunction; This section presents a simple leak check, whereas Section 7.5.2 details a more thorough procedure. The method described here is easy, fast and detects, but does not locate, most leaks. It also verifies the sample pump condition. Turn the analyzer ON, and allow at least 30 minutes for flows to stabilize. Cap the sample inlet port (cap must be wrench-tight). After several minutes, when the pressures have stabilized, pressure) and the RCEL (vacuum pressure) readings. If both readings are equal to within 10% and less than 10 in-Hg-A, the instrument is free of large leaks. It is still possible that the instrument has minor leaks. If both readings are < 10 in-Hg-A, the pump is in good condition. A new pump will create a pressure reading of about 4 in-Hg-A (at sea level). the SAMP (sample 7.5.2. DETAILED LEAK CHECK USING PRESSURE If a leak cannot be located by the above procedure, obtain a leak checker similar to Teledyne API part number 01960, which contains a small pump, shut-off valve, and pressure gauge to create both over-pressure and vacuum. Alternatively, a tank of pressurized gas, with the two stage regulator adjusted to ≤ 15 psi, a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be used. Note 07270B DCN6512 Once tube fittings have been wetted with soap solution under a pressurized system, do not apply or re-apply vacuum as this will cause soap solution to be sucked into the instrument, contaminating inside surfaces. Do not exceed 15 psi when pressurizing the system. 239 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Turn OFF power to the instrument and remove the instrument cover. Install a leak checker or a tank of gas (compressed, oil-free air or nitrogen) as described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel. Disconnect the pump tubing on the outside rear panel and cap the pump port. If zero/span valves are installed, disconnect the tubing from the zero and span gas ports and plug them (Figure 3-4). Cap the DFU particle filter on the Perma Pure dryer (Figure 6-2). Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker or tank gas, allowing enough time to fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice. Check each tube connection (fittings, hose clamps) with soap bubble solution, looking for fine bubbles. Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not re-apply vacuum as it will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it. Do not exceed 15 psi pressure. If the instrument has the zero and span valve option, the normally closed ports on each valve should also be separately checked. Connect the leak checker to the normally closed ports and check with soap bubble solution. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate of the indicated pressure should be less than 1 in-Hg-A (0.4 psi) in 5 minutes after the pressure is turned off. Clean surfaces from soap solution, re-connect the sample and pump lines and replace the instrument cover. Restart the analyzer. 7.5.3. PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK Note Use a separate, calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows between 0 and 1000 cm³/min to measure the gas flow rate though the analyzer. Do not use the built in flow measurement viewable from the front panel of the instrument. This value is only calculated, not measured Sample flow checks are useful for monitoring the actual flow of the instrument, as the front panel display shows only a calculated value. A decreasing, actual sample flow may point to slowly clogging pneumatic paths, most likely critical flow orifices or sintered filters. To perform a sample flow check: 240 Disconnect the sample inlet tubing from the rear panel SAMPLE port shown in Figure 3-4. Attach the outlet port of a flow meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel. Ensure that the inlet to the flow meter is at atmospheric pressure. The sample flow measured with the external flow meter should be within 10% of the nominal values shown in Table 10-3. Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.5.4. AC POWER CONFIGURATION The T-Series digital electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power regimes. As long as instrument is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either 50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30 seconds show a front panel display. Internally, the status LEDs located on the Relay PCA, Motherboard and CPU should turn on as soon as the power is supplied. On the other hand, some of the analyzer’s non-digital components, such as the pump and the various AC powered heaters must be properly configured for the type of power being supplied to the instrument. Figure 7-11 shows the location of the various sets of AC Configuration jumpers. JP6 O2 Sensor Connection. (optional) JP2 JP7 Main AC Heater Configuration Pump Configuration Figure 7-11: Location of AC power Configuration Jumpers Functions of the Relay PCA include: 07270B DCN6512 handling all AC and DC power distribution including power to the pump. a set of jumpers that connect AC power to heaters included in several optional items, such as the zero/span valve options and the O2 sensor option available on the T200H/M analyzers. 241 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.5.4.1. AC Configuration – Internal Pump (JP7) AC power configuration for internal pumps is set using Jumper set JP7 (see Figure 7-4 for the location of JP7). Table 7-3: LINE POWER AC Power Configuration for Internal Pumps (JP7) LINE FREQUENCY JUMPER COLOR 60 HZ WHITE 110VAC 115 VAC 1 50 HZ 220VAC 240 VAC 1 60 HZ 50 HZ1 BLACK FUNCTION JUMPER BETWEEN PINS Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 2 to 7 Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 3 to 8 Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral 4 to 9 Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 2 to 7 Connects pump pin 3 to 110 / 115 VAC power line 3 to 8 Connects pump pins 2 & 4 to Neutral 4 to 9 Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together 1 to 6 Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line 3 to 8 Connects pump pins 3 and 4 together 1 to 6 Connects pump pin 1 to 220 / 240VAC power line 3 to 8 BROWN BLUE A jumper between pins 5 and 10 may be present on the jumper plug assembly, but has no function on the T200H/M analyzers. 110 VAC /115 VAC 220 VAC /240 VAC 1 6 1 6 2 7 2 7 3 8 3 8 4 9 4 9 5 10 5 10 May be present on 50 Hz version of jumper set, but not functional T200H/M Figure 7-12: 242 Pump AC Power Jumpers (JP7) 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.5.4.2. AC Configuration – Standard Heaters (JP2) Power configuration for the AC the standard heaters is set using Jumper set JP2 (see Figure 7-4 for the location of JP2). Table 7-4: LINE VOLTAGE Power Configuration for Standard AC Heaters (JP2) JUMPER BETWEEN PINS FUNCTION 1 to 8 Common 2 to 7 Neutral to Load 3 to 10 Common 4 to 9 Neutral to Load 3 to 10 Common 4 to 9 Neutral to Load 5 to 12 Common 6 to 11 Neutral to Load Reaction Cell / Sample Chamber Heaters 1 to 7 Load Hi Concentration Converter 3 to 9 Load Moly Converter 3 to 9 Load 5 to 11 Load JUMPER COLOR HEATER(S) Reaction Cell / Sample Chamber Heaters 110 VAC / 115 VAC 50Hz & 60 Hz Mini Hi-Con Converter WHITE Moly Converter Bypass Manifold 1 220 VAC / 240 VAC 50Hz & 60 Hz BLUE Bypass Manifold 1 1 Bypass manifold is built into the reaction cell Reaction Cell or Sample Chamber Heaters Mini Hi-Con or Moly Converter Heaters T200M/H Bypass Manifold Heater 1 7 1 7 2 8 2 8 3 9 3 9 4 10 4 10 5 11 5 11 6 12 6 12 110 VAC /115 VAC Figure 7-13: 07270B DCN6512 Reaction Cell or Sample Cham ber Heaters Mini Hi-Con or Moly Converter Heaters T200H/M Bypass Manifold Heater 220 VAC / 240 VAC Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP2) 243 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.5.4.3. AC Configuration –Heaters for Option Packages (JP6) An O2 sensor option includes AC heaters that maintain an optimum operating temperature for key components of those options. Jumper set JP6 is used to connect the heaters associated with those options to AC power. Since these heaters work with either 110/155 VAC or 220/240 VAC, there is only one jumper configuration. Table 7-5: JUMPER COLOR Power Configuration for Optional AC Heaters (JP6) HEATER(S) MODEL’S 1 USED ON IZS1 Permeation Tube Heater 100s, 200s1 & 400s RED O2 Sensor Heater 1 100s & 200s JUMPER BETWEEN PINS FUNCTION 1 to 8 Common 2 to 7 Neutral to Load 3 to 10 Common 4 to 9 Neutral to Load IZS option not available on the T200H/M 10 IZS 12 11 6 5 9 8 7 2 1 (option not available on the T200H/M) O 2 Sensor Heater Permeation Tube Heater Figure 7-14: 244 4 3 Typical Set Up of AC Heater Jumper Set (JP6) 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.5.5. DC POWER SUPPLY TEST POINTS Table 7-6: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code NAME TEST POINT# COLOR DEFINITION DGND 1 Black Digital ground +5V 2 Red AGND 3 Green +15V 4 Blue -15V 5 Yellow +12R 6 Purple +12V 7 Orange Table 7-7: Analog ground 12 V return (ground) line DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE FROM TO Test Point Test Point NAME # NAME # MIN V MAX V PS1 +5 DGND 1 +5 2 +4.80 +5.25 PS1 +15 AGND 3 +15 4 +13.5 +16.0 PS1 -15 AGND 3 -15V 5 -14.0 -16.0 PS1 AGND AGND 3 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05 PS1 Chassis DGND 1 Chassis N/A -0.05 +0.05 PS2 +12 +12V Ret 6 +12V 7 +11.8 +12.5 PS2 DGND +12V Ret 6 DGND 1 -0.05 +0.05 The test points are located at the top, right-hand corner of the PCA (see Figure 7-4) 7.5.6. I2C BUS Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay PCA & D2 on the Valve Driver PCA . Assuming that the DC power supplies are operating properly, the I2C bus is operating properly if: D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve Driver PCA are flashing There is a problem with the I2C bus if both D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve Driver PCA are ON/OFF constantly. 07270B DCN6512 245 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.5.7. TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE Verify the functioning of the touch screen by observing the display when pressing a touch-screen control button. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly, but pressing a control button on the touch screen does not change the display, any of the following may be the problem: The touch-screen controller may be malfunctioning. The internal USB bus may be malfunctioning. You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal program. If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes accordingly, the touch-screen interface may be faulty. 7.5.8. LCD DISPLAY MODULE Verify the functioning of the front panel display by observing it when power is applied to the instrument. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power supplies are operating properly, the display screen should light and show the splash screen and other indications of its state as the CPU goes through its initialization process. 7.5.9. GENERAL RELAY BOARD DIAGNOSTICS The relay board circuit can most easily be checked by observing the condition of its status LEDs as described in Section 7.1.4.3, and the associated output when toggled on and off through the SIGNAL I/O function in the DIAG menu, see Section 4.13.2. If the front panel display responds to key presses and D1 on the relay board is not flashing, then either the wiring between the keyboard and the relay board is bad, or the relay board itself is bad. If D1 on the Relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in question (heater, valve, etc.) does not toggle properly using the Signal I/O function, then the associated device (valve or heater) or its control device (valve driver, heater relay) is malfunctioning. Several of the control devices are in sockets and can easily be replaced. The table below lists the control device associated with a particular function: Table 7-8: 246 Relay Board Control Devices Function Control Device Socketed All valves U5 Yes All heaters K1-K5 Yes 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.5.10. MOTHERBOARD 7.5.10.1. A/D functions A basic check of the analog to digital (A/D) converter operation on the motherboard is to use the Signal I/O function under the DIAG menu. Check the following two A/D reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter. Using the Signal I/O function (Section 4.13.2 Appendix D), view the value of REF_4096_MV and REF_GND. If both are within 3 mV of their nominal values (4096 and 0) and are stable to within ±0.5 mV, the basic A/D converter is functioning properly. If these values fluctuate largely or are off by more than 3 mV, one or more of the analog circuits may be overloaded or the motherboard may be faulty. Choose one parameter in the Signal I/O function such as SAMPLE_PRESSURE (see previous section on how to measure it). Compare its actual voltage with the voltage displayed through the SIGNAL I/O function. If the wiring is intact but there is a difference of more than ±10 mV between the measured and displayed voltage, the motherboard may be faulty. 7.5.10.2. Analog Output Voltages To verify that the analog outputs are working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output in question and perform an analog output step test as described in Section 4.13.3. For each of the steps, taking into account any offset that may have been programmed into the channel (Section 4.13.5.4), the output should be within 1% of the nominal value listed in the table below except for the 0% step, which should be within 2-3 mV. If one or more of the steps is outside of this range, a failure of one or both D/A converters and their associated circuitry on the motherboard is likely. Table 7-9: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values FULL SCALE OUTPUT VOLTAGE 100mV 07270B DCN6512 1V 5V 10V STEP % NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE 1 0 0 mV 0 0 0 2 20 20 mV 0.2 1 2 3 40 40 mV 0.4 2 4 4 60 60 mV 0.6 3 6 5 80 80 mV 0.8 4 8 6 100 100 mV 1.0 5 10 247 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.5.10.3. Status Outputs The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs. V +DC Figure 7-15: Gnd Typical Set Up of Status Output Test 1. Connect a cable between the “D“ pin and the “” pin on the status output connector. 2. Connect a 1000 Ω resistor between the “+” pin and the pin for the status output that is being tested. 3. Connect a voltmeter between the “D“ pin and the pin of the output being tested (Table 7-10). 4. Under the DIAG / SIGNAL I/O menu (Section 4.13.2), scroll through the inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question. Alternately turn the output on and off. The Voltmeter will read approximately 5 VDC when the output is OFF. The Voltmeter will read approximately 0 VDC when the output is ON. Table 7-10: Status Outputs Pin Assignments 248 PIN # STATUS 1 SYSTEM OK 2 CONC VALID 3 HIGH RANGE 4 ZERO CAL 5 SPAN CAL 6 DIAG MODE 7 LOW 8 SPARE 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.5.10.4. Control Inputs The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure: Connect a jumper from the +5 V pin on the STATUS connector to the +5 V on the CONTROL IN connector. Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the A pin on the CONTROL IN connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to ZERO CAL R mode. Connect a second jumper from the ‘-‘ pin on the STATUS connector to the B pin on the CONTROL IN connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to SPAN CAL R mode. In each case, the T200H/M should return to SAMPLE mode when the jumper is removed. 7.5.11. CPU There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure associated with the Disk-On-Module (DOM). If either of these failures occur, contact the factory. For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the wiring is intact, the CPU is faulty if on power-on: 07270B DCN6512 There is no activity from the primary RS-232 port (labeled RS232) on the rear panel even if “? ” is pressed. In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard, specifically U57, the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If this is true, removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the measurements will be incorrect. 249 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.5.12. RS-232 COMMUNICATION 7.5.12.1. General RS-232 Troubleshooting Teledyne API analyzers use the RS-232 protocol as the standard, serial communications protocol. RS-232 is a versatile standard, which has been used for many years but, at times, is difficult to configure. Teledyne API conforms to the standard pin assignments in the implementation of RS-232. Problems with RS-232 connections usually center around 4 general areas: Incorrect cabling and connectors. This is the most common problem. See Section 4.11.5 for connector and pin-out information. The communications (baud) rate and protocol parameters are incorrectly configured. See Section 4.11.3.2 on how to set the baud rate. The COM port communications mode is set incorrectly (Section 6.11.8). If a modem is used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed. See Section 6.15.2.6. Incorrect setting of the DTE - DCE switch. Typically, the red LED is on as soon as you power up the analyzer. If not, contact the factory, as this indicates a problem with the motherboard. As the analyzer is connected to the computer with a cable, the green LED should also illuminate. If not, set the DCE/DTE switch to the other position. See also Section 6.11.5. that some laptops do not enable their RS-232 port when in power-saving mode. In this case, connect the laptop and start either APICOM or a Hyperterminal window and start communicating with the analyzer. This will enable the serial port on the laptop and the green LED should illuminate. You may have to switch back and forth while communicating to get the right setting. 7.5.12.2. Modem or Terminal Operation These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a Teledyne API analyzer. Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer. Check the correct position of the DTE/DCE as described in Section 6.11.5. Check the correct setup command (Section 6.15.2.6). Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The T200H/M sets pin 7 (RTS) to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission. Make sure the baud rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and analyzer match, see Section 6.15.2.6 and 6.11.8. Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or computer; See Section 6.11.10. Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding down the space bar is one way). The green LED on the rear panel should flicker as the instrument is receiving data. Make sure that the communications software is functioning properly. Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232 Manual”, Teledyne API part number 013500000, available online at http://www.Teledyne-api.com/manuals/. 250 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.5.13. PMT SENSOR The photo multiplier tube detects the light emitted by the reaction of NO with ozone. It has a gain of about 1: 500000 to 1:1000000. It is not possible to test the detector outside of the instrument in the field. The best way to determine if the PMT is working properly is by using the optical test (OTEST), which is described in Section 6.13.6.2. The basic method to diagnose a PMT fault is to eliminate the other components using ETEST, OTEST and specific tests for other sub-assemblies. 7.5.14. PMT PREAMPLIFIER BOARD To check the correct operation of the preamplifier board, we suggest to carry out the optical and electrical tests described in Sections 6.13.6.2 and 4.13.7.3. If the ETEST fails, the preamplifier board may be faulty. Refer to Section 13 on hardware calibration through the preamplifier board. 7.5.15. HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY The HVPS is located in the interior of the sensor module and is plugged into the PMT tube (Section 8.5.2). It requires 2 voltage inputs. The first is +15 V, which powers the supply. The second is the programming voltage which is generated on the preamplifier board. Adjustment of the HVPS is covered in the factory calibration procedure in Section 13. This power supply has 10 independent power supply steps, one to each pin of the PMT. The following test procedure below allows you to test each step. 07270B DCN6512 Turn off the instrument. Remove the cover and disconnect the 2 connectors at the front of the NOX sensor module. Remove the end cap from the sensor (4 screws). Remove the HVPS/PMT assembly from the cold block inside the sensor (2 plastic screws). Re-connect the 7 pin connector to the sensor end cap, and power-up the instrument. Scroll the front panel display to the HVPS test parameter. Divide the displayed HVPS voltage by 10 and test the pairs of connector points as shown in Table 11-11. Check the overall voltage (should be equal to the HVPS value displayed on the front panel, for example 700 V) and the voltages between each pair of pins of the supply (should be 1/10th of the overall voltage, in this example 70 V): 251 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 7-11: Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs If HVPS reading = 700 VDC PIN PAIR NOMINAL READING 12 70 VDC 23 70 VDC 34 70 VDC 45 70 VDC 56 70 VDC 67 70 VDC 78 70 VDC 6 7 5 8 4 3 9 2 10 11 1 KEY Turn off the instrument power, and reconnect the PMT, then reassemble the sensor. If any faults are found in the test, you must obtain a new HVPS as there are no user serviceable parts inside the supply. 7.5.16. PNEUMATIC SENSOR ASSEMBLY The pressure/flow sensor circuit board, located behind the sensor assembly, can be checked with a voltmeter using the following procedure, which assumes that the wiring is intact and that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly. Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP2, it should be 10.0 0.25 V. If not, the board is faulty. Measure the voltage across the leads of capacitor C2. It should be 5.0 ± 0.25 V, if not, the board may be faulty. 7.5.16.1. Reaction Cell Pressure Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP5. With the sample pump disconnected or turned off, the voltage should be 4500 250 mV. With the pump running, it should be 800-1700 mV depending on the performance of the vacuum pump. The lower the reaction cell pressure, the lower the resulting voltage is. If this voltage is significantly different, the pressure transducer S1 or the board may be faulty. If this voltage is between 2 and 5 V, the pump may not be performing well, check that the reaction cell pressure is less than 10 in-Hg-A (at sea level). Ensure that the tubing is connected to the upper port, which is closer to the sensor’s contacts; the lower port does not measure pressure. 252 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.5.16.2. Sample Pressure Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP4. With the sample pump disconnected or turned off, this voltage should be 4500 250 mV. With the pump running, it should be about 0.2 V less as the sample pressure drops by about 1 in-Hg-A below ambient pressure. If this voltage is significantly different, the pressure transducer S2 or the board may be faulty. A leak in the sample system to vacuum may also cause this voltage to be between about 0.6 and 4.5. Make sure that the front panel reading of the sample pressure is at about 1 in-Hg-A less than ambient pressure. Ensure that the tubing is connected to the upper port, which is closer to the sensor’s contacts; the lower port does not measure pressure. Figure 7-16: Pressure / Flow Sensor Assembly 7.5.16.3. Ozone Flow Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP3. With proper ozone flow (250 cm3/min), this should be approximately 3.0 ± 0.3 V (this voltage will vary with altitude). With flow stopped (pump turned off), the voltage should be approximately 0 V. If the voltage is incorrect, the flow sensor or the board may be faulty. A cross-leak to vacuum inside the Perma Pure dryer may also cause this flow to increase significantly, and the voltage will increase accordingly. Also, make sure that the gas flows from P1 to P2 as labeled on the flow sensor (“high” pressure P1 to “low” pressure P2 or “Port” 1 to “Port” 2). 7.5.17. NO2 CONVERTER The NO2 converter assembly can fail in two ways, an electrical failure of the band heater and/or the thermocouple control circuit and a performance failure of the converter itself. NO2 converter heater failures can be divided into two possible problems: 07270B DCN6512 Temperature is reported properly but heater does not heat to full temperature. In this case, the heater is either disconnected or broken or the power relay is broken. 253 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Disconnect the heater cable coming from the relay board and measure the resistance between any two of the three heater leads with a multi-meter. The resistance between A and B should be about 1000 Ω and that between A and C should be the same as between B and C, about 500 Ω each. If any of these resistances is near zero or without continuity, the heater is broken. Temperature reports zero or overload (near 500° C). This indicates a disconnected or failing thermocouple or a failure of the thermocouple circuit. First, check that the thermocouple is connected properly and the wire does not show signs of a broken or kinked pathway. If it appears to be properly connected, disconnect the yellow thermocouple plug (marked K) from the relay board and measure the voltage (not resistance) between the two leads with a multi-meter capable of measuring in the low mV range. The voltage should be about 12 mV (ignore the sign) at 315° C and about 0 mV at room temperature. Measure the continuity with an Ohm-meter. It should read close to zero Ω. If the thermocouple does not have continuity, it is broken. If it reads zero voltage at elevated temperatures, it is broken. To test the thermocouple at room temperature, heat up the converter can (e.g., with a heat gun) and see if the voltage across the thermocouple leads changes. If the thermocouple is working properly, the electronic circuit is broken. In both cases, consult the factory. If the converter appears to have performance problems (conversion efficiency is outside of allowed range of 96-102%), check the following: 254 Conversion efficiency setting in the CAL menu. If this value is different from 1.000, this correction needs to be considered. Section 5.2.5 describes this parameter in detail. Accuracy of NO2 source (gas tank standard). NO2 gas standards are typically certified to only ±2% and often change in concentrations over time. You should get the standard re-certified every year. If you use GPT, check the accuracy of the ozone source. Age of the converter. The NO2 converter has a limited operating life and may need to be replaced every ~3 years or when necessary (e.g., earlier if used with continuously high NO2 concentrations). We estimate a lifetime of about 10000 ppm-hours (a cumulative product of the NO2 concentration times the exposure time to that concentration). However, this lifetime heavily depends on many factors such as absolute concentration (temporary or permanent poisoning of the converter is possible), sample flow rate and pressure inside the converter, converter temperature, duty cycle etc. This lifetime is only an estimated reference and not a guaranteed lifetime. In some cases with excessive sample moisture, the oxidized molybdenum metal chips inside the converter cartridge may bake together over time and restrict air flow through the converter, in which case it needs to be replaced. To avoid this problem, we recommend the use of a sample gas conditioner (Section 5.10). Section 6.3.4 describes how to replace the NO2 converter cartridge. With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NO reading is negative, while the NO2 reading remains around zero. The converter destroys NO and needs to be replaced. With no NO2 in the sample gas and a properly calibrated analyzer, the NOX reading is significantly higher than the actual (gas standard) NO concentration. The converter produces NO2 and needs to be replaced. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.5.18. O3 GENERATOR The ozone generator can fail in two ways, electronically (printed circuit board) and functionally (internal generator components). Assuming that air is supplied properly to the generator, the generator should automatically turn on 30 minutes after the instrument is powered up or if the instrument is still warm. See Section 10.3.6 for ozone generator functionality. Accurate performance of the generator can only be determined with an ozone analyzer connected to the outlet of the generator. However, if the generator appears to be working properly but the sensitivity or calibration of the instrument is reduced, suspect a leak in the ozone generator supply air. A leak in the dryer or between the dryer and the generator can cause moist, ambient air to leak into the air stream, which significantly reduces the ozone output. The generator will produce only about half of the nominal O3 concentration when run with moist, ambient air instead of dried air. In addition, moist supply air will produce large amounts of nitric acid in the generator, which can cause analyzer components downstream of the generator to deteriorate and/or causes significant deposit of nitrate deposits on the reaction cell window, reducing sensitivity and causing performance drift. Carry out a leak check as described earlier in this Section. 7.5.19. BOX TEMPERATURE The box temperature sensor (thermistor) is mounted on the motherboard below the bottom edge of the CPU board when looking at it from the front. It cannot be disconnected to check its resistance. Box temperature will vary with, but will usually read about 5° C higher than, ambient (room) temperature because of the internal heating zones from the NO2 converter, reaction cell and other devices. To check the box temperature functionality, we recommend to check the BOX_TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu (Section 6.13.1). At about 30° C, the signal should be around 1500 mV. We recommend to use a certified or calibrated external thermometer / temperature sensor to verify the accuracy of the box temperature by placing it inside the chassis, next to the thermistor labeled XT1 (above connector J108) on the motherboard. 7.5.20. PMT TEMPERATURE PMT temperature should be low and constant. It is more important that this temperature is maintained constant than it is to maintain it low. The PMT cooler uses a Peltier, thermo-electric cooler element supplied with 12 V DC power from the switching power supply PS2. The temperature is controlled by a proportional temperature controller located on the preamplifier board. Voltages applied to the cooler element vary from 0.1 to 12 VDC. The temperature set point (hard-wired into the preamplifier board) will vary by ±1C due to component tolerances. The actual temperature will be maintained to within 0.1° C around that set point. On power-up of the analyzer, the front panel enables the user to watch that temperature drop from about ambient temperature down to its set point of 6-8° C. If the temperature fails to adjust after 30 minutes, there is a problem in the cooler circuit. If the control circuit on the preamplifier board is faulty, a temperature of –1° C is reported. 07270B DCN6512 255 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.6. REPAIR PROCEDURES This section contains some procedures that may need to be performed when a major component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement. that maintenance procedures (e.g., replacement of regularly changed expendables) are discussed in Section 6 (Maintenance) are not listed here. Also that Teledyne API Technical Support may have a more detailed service for some of the below procedures. Contact Technical Support. 7.6.1. DISK-ON-MODULE REPLACEMENT Replacing the Disk-on-Module (DOM) will cause loss of all DAS data; it also may cause loss of some instrument configuration parameters unless the replacement DOM carries the exact same firmware version. Whenever changing the version of installed software, the memory must be reset. Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the analyzer to malfunction, and invalidate measurements. After the memory is reset, the A/D converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in Step 1 below must be re-entered before the instrument will function correctly. Also, zero and span calibration should be performed. 1. Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as range, auto-cal, analog output, serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM 2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the mounting screws. 3. When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the Disk-on-Module in the right most socket of the CPU board. 4. The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision, date and initials of the programmer. 5. Remove the nylon fastener that mounts the DOM over the CPU board, and lift the DOM off the CPU. Do not bend the connector pins. 6. Install the new Disk-on-Module, making sure the notch at the end of the chip matches the notch in the socket. 7. It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket. Press the DOM all the way in and reinsert the offset clip. 8. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine. 9. If the replacement DOM carries a firmware revision, re-enter all of the setup information. 256 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.6.2. O3 GENERATOR REPLACEMENT The ozone generator is a black, brick-shaped device with printed circuit board attached to its rear and two tubes extending out the right side in the front of the analyzer. To replace the ozone generator: 1. Turn off the analyzer power, remove the power cord and the analyzer cover. 2. Disconnect the 1/8” black tube from the ozone scrubber cartridge and the ¼” clear tube from the plastic extension tube at the brass fitting nearest to the ozone generator. 3. Unplug the electrical connection on the rear side of the brick. 4. Unscrew the two mounting screws that attach the ozone generator to the chassis and take out the entire assembly. 5. If you received a complete replacement generator with circuit board and mounting bracket attached, simply reverse the above steps to replace the current generator. 6. Make sure to carry out a leak check and a recalibration after the analyzer warmed up for about 30 minutes. 7.6.3. SAMPLE AND OZONE DRYER REPLACEMENT The T200H/M standard configuration is equipped with a dryer for the ozone supply air. An optional dryer is available for the sample stream and a combined dryer for both gas streams can also be purchased. To change one or all of these options: 1. Turn off power to the analyzer and pump, remove the power cord and the analyzer cover. 2. Locate the dryers in the center of the instrument, between sensor and NO2 converter. They are mounted to a bracket, which can be taken out when unscrewing the two mounting screws (if necessary). 3. Disconnect all tubing that extends out of the dryer assembly, These are usually the purge tube connecting to the vacuum manifold, the tube from the exit to the ozone flow meter (ozone dryer) or to the NO/NOx valve (sample dryer) or two tubes to the ozone flow meter and the NO/NOX valve (combo-dryer). Take extra care not to twist any of the white plastic fittings on the dryer, which connect the inner drying tube to the outer purge tube. 4. the orientation of the dryer on the bracket. 5. Cut the tie wraps that hold the dryer to the mounting bracket and take out the old dryer. If necessary, unscrew the two mounting screws on the bracket and take out the entire assembly. 07270B DCN6512 257 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 6. Attach the replacement dryer to the mounting bracket in the same orientation as the old dryer. 7. Fix the dryer to the bracket using new tie wraps. 8. Cut off excess length of the wraps. 9. Put the assembly back into the chassis and tighten the mounting screws. 10. Re-attach the tubes to vacuum manifold, flow meter and/or NO/NOx valve using at least two wrenches. : Take extra care not to twist the dryer’s white plastic fittings, as this will result in large leaks that are difficult to trouble-shoot and fix. 11. Carry out a detailed leak check (Section 7.5.2), 12. Close the analyzer. 13. Power up pump and analyzer and re-calibrate the instrument after it stabilizes. 7.6.4. PMT SENSOR HARDWARE CALIBRATION The sensor module hardware calibration is used in the factory to adjust the slope and offset of the PMT output and to optimize the signal output and HVPS. If the instrument’s slope and offset values are outside of the acceptable range and all other more obvious causes for this problem have been eliminated, the hardware calibration can be used to adjust the sensor as has been done in the factory. This procedure is also recommended after replacing the PMT or the preamplifier board. 1. Perform a full zero calibration using zero air (Section 5.3, 7.4, or 7.6). 2. On the preamplifier board (located on the sensor housing, Figure 3-5) find the following components shown in Figure 7-17: HVPS coarse adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F). HVPS fine adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F). Gain adjustment potentiometer (Full scale is 10 turns). 3. Turn the gain adjustment potentiometer 12 turns clockwise to its maximum setting. 4. Feed NO to the analyzer: For the T200H use 450 ppm NO. For the T200M use 18 ppm NO. 5. Wait until the STABIL value is below 0.5 ppm 6. Scroll to the NORM PMT value on the analyzer’s front panel. 7. With the NO gas concentrations mentioned instep 5 above, the NORM PMT value should be 3600 mV. 8. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment to its minimum setting (0). Set the HVPS fine adjustment switch to its maximum setting (F). 258 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 9. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch to the lowest setting that will give you just above 3600 mV NORM PMT signal. The coarse adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT signal in 100-300 mV steps. Figure 7-17: Pre-Amplifier Board Layout 10. Adjust the HVPS fine adjustment such that the NORM PMT value is 3600-3700 mV. The fine adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT value by about 30 mV. It may be necessary to go back and forth between coarse and fine adjustments if the proper value is at the threshold of the min/max coarse setting. Note Do not overload the PMT by accidentally setting both adjustment switches to their maximum setting. Start at the lowest setting and increment slowly. Wait 10 seconds between adjustments.. 11. If the NORM PMT value set above is now between 3560-3640 mV, skip this step. Otherwise, adjust the NORM PMT value with the gain potentiometer down to 3600±10 mV. This is the final very-fine adjustment. 12. that during adjustments, the NORM PMT value may be fluctuating, as the analyzer continues to switch between NO and NOX streams as well as between measure and AutoZero modes. You may have to mentally average the values of NO and NOX response for this adjustment. 13. Perform a software span calibration (Section 5.3, 7.4, or 7.6) to normalize the sensor response to its new PMT sensitivity. 14. Review the slope and offset values, the slopes should be 1.000±0.300 and the offset values should be 0.0±20 mV (-20 to +150 mV is allowed). 07270B DCN6512 259 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.6.5. REPLACING THE PMT, HVPS OR TEC The photo multiplier tube (PMT) should last for the lifetime of the analyzer. However, in some cases, the high voltage power supply (HVPS) or the thermo-electric cooler (TEC) may fail. In case of PMT, HVPS or TEC failure, the sensor assembly needs to be opened in order to change one of these components. Refer to Figure 7-18 for the structure of the T200H/M sensor assembly and follow the steps below for replacement of one of its components. We recommend to ensure that the PMT, HVPS or TEC modules are, indeed, faulty to prevent unnecessary opening of the sensor. CAUTION Although it is possible for a skilled technician to change the PMT or HVPS through the front panel with the sensor assembly mounted to the analyzer, we recommend to remove the entire assembly and carry this procedure out on a clean, anti-static table with the user wearing an anti-static wrist strap to prevent static discharge damage to the assembly or its circuits. 1. Power down the analyzer, disconnect the power cord. 2. Remove the cover and disconnect all pneumatic and electrical connections from the sensor assembly. 3. If the TEC is to be replaced, remove the reaction cell assembly at this point by unscrewing two holding screws. This is necessary only if the PMT cold block is to be removed. This step is not necessary if the HVPS or the PMT only are exchanged. Figure 7-18: 260 T200H/M Sensor Assembly 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 7-19. Troubleshooting & Repair 3-Port Reaction Cell Oriented to the Sensor Housing 4. Remove the two connectors on the PMT housing end plate facing towards the front panel. 5. Remove the end plate itself (4 screws with plastic washers). 6. Remove the dryer packages inside the PMT housing. 7. Along with the plate, slide out the OPTIC TEST LED and the thermistor that measures the PMT temperature. 8. Unscrew the PMT assembly, which is held to the cold block by two plastic screws. 9. Discard the plastic screws and replace with new screws at the end of this procedure (the threads get stripped easily and it is recommended to use new screws). a) Carefully remove the assembly consisting of the HVPS, the gasket and the PMT. Both may be coated with a white, thermal conducting paste. b) Do not contaminate the inside of the housing with this grease, as it may contaminate the PMT glass tube on re-assembly. 10. Change the PMT or the HVPS or both, clean the PMT glass tube with a clean, antistatic wipe and do not touch it after cleaning. 11. If the cold block or TEC is to be changed: a) Disconnect the TEC driver board from the preamplifier board, remove the cooler fan duct (4 screws on its side) including the driver board. b) Disconnect the driver board from the TEC and set the sub-assembly aside. 12. Remove the end plate with the cooling fins (4 screws) and slide out the PMT cold block assembly, which contains the TEC. 13. Unscrew the TEC from the cooling fins and the cold block and replace it with a new unit. 14. Re-assemble this TEC subassembly in reverse order. Make sure to use thermal grease between TEC and cooling fins as well as between TEC and cold block and that the side opening in the cold block will face the reaction cell when assembled. 07270B DCN6512 261 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 15. Evenly tighten the long mounting screws for good thermal conductivity. Note The thermo-electric cooler needs to be mounted flat to the heat sink. If there is any significant gap, the TEC might burn out. Make sure to apply the thermal pads before mounting it and tighten the screws evenly and cross-wise.. 16. Re-insert the TEC subassembly in reverse order. Make sure that the O-ring is placed properly and the assembly is tightened evenly. 17. Re-insert the PMT/HVPS subassembly in reverse order and don’t forget the gasket between HVPS and PMT. a) Use new plastic screws to mount the PMT assembly on the PMT cold block. b) Improperly placed O-rings will cause leaks, which – in turn – cause moisture to condense on the inside of the cooler and likely cause a short in the HVPS. 18. Reconnect the cables and the reaction cell (evenly tighten these screws). 19. Replace the sensor assembly into the chassis and fasten with four screws and washers. 20. Reconnect all electrical and pneumatic connections. 21. Leak check the system. 22. Power up the analyzer. 23. Verify the basic operation of the analyzer using the ETEST and OTEST features or zero and span gases, then carry out a hardware calibration of the analyzer (Section 13) followed by a software calibration. 262 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Troubleshooting & Repair 7.7. REMOVING / REPLACING THE RELAY PCA FROM THE INSTRUMENT This is the most commonly used version of the Relay PCA. It includes a bank of solid state AC relays. This version is installed in analyzers where components such as AC powered heaters must be turned ON & OFF. A retainer plate is installed over the relay to keep them securely seated in their sockets. Retainer Mounting Screws AC Relay Retainer Plate Figure 7-20: Relay PCA with AC Relay Retainer In Place The Relay retainer plate installed on the relay PCA covers the lower right mounting screw of the relay PCA. Therefore, when removing the relay PCA, the retainer plate must be removed first. Mounting Screws AC Relay Retain Occludes Mounting Screw on P/N 045230200 Figure 7-21: 07270B DCN6512 Relay PCA Mounting Screw Locations 263 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 7.8. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS The following list contains some of the most commonly asked questions relating to the Model T200H/M NOx Analyzer. QUESTION Why does the instrument not appear on the LAN or Internet? ANSWER Most problems related to Internet communications via the Ethernet card will be due to problems external to the instrument (e.g. bad network wiring or connections, failed routers, malfunctioning servers, etc.) However, there are several symptoms that indicate the problem may be with the Ethernet card itself. If neither of the Ethernet cable’s two status LED’s (located on the back of the cable connector) is lit while the instrument is connected to a network: Verify that the instrument is being connected to an active network jack. Check the internal cable connection between the Ethernet card and the CPU board. Why does the ENTR button sometimes disappear on the front panel display? Sometimes the ENTR button will disappear if you select a setting that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter, such as trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00 or a reporting range outside the specified limits. Once you adjust the setting to an allowable value, the ENTR button will re-appear. Why is the ZERO or SPAN button not displayed during calibration? The T200H/M disables these buttons when the span or zero value entered by the user is too different from the gas concentration actual measured value at the time. This is to prevent the accidental recalibration of the analyzer to an out-of-range response curve. EXAMPLE: The span set point is 80 ppm and the measurement response is only 5 ppm. Section 7 describes this in detail. Why does the analyzer not respond to span gas? There are several reasons why this can happen. Section 10.3.2 has some possible answers to this question. Can I automate the calibration of my analyzer? Any analyzer with zero/span valve or IZS option can be automatically calibrated using the instrument’s AutoCal feature. What do I do if the concentration on the instrument's front panel display does not match the value recorded or displayed on my data logger even if both instruments are properly calibrated? This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons: (1) a difference in circuit ground between the analyzer and the data logger or a wiring problem; (2) a scale problem with the input to the data logger. The analog outputs of the analyzer can be manually calibrated to compensate for either or both of these effects, see Section 6.13.4; analog outputs are not calibrated, which can happen after a firmware upgrade (Section 6.13.5). How do I measure the sample flow? Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated flow meter to the sample inlet port when the instrument is operating. For the T200H in its basic configuration, the sample flow should be 290 cm³/min 10%. For the T200M in its basic configuration, the sample flow should be 250 cm³/min 10%. See Table 9-3 for more detailed information about gas flow rates. Section 7 includes detailed instructions on performing a check of the sample gas flow. 264 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual QUESTION Troubleshooting & Repair ANSWER Can I use the DAS system in place of a strip chart recorder or data logger? Yes. Section 4.7 describes the setup and operation of the DAS system in detail. How often do I need to change the particulate filter? Once per week or as needed. Table 6-1 contains a maintenance schedule listing the most important, regular maintenance tasks. Highly polluted sample air may require more frequent changes. How long does the sample pump last? The sample pump should last one to two years and the pump head should be replaced when necessary. Use the RCEL pressure indicator on the front panel to see if the pump needs replacement. If this value goes above 10 in-Hg-A, on average, the pump head needs to be rebuilt. Why does my RS-232 serial connection not work? There are several possible reasons: The wrong cable, please use the provided or a generic “straightthrough” cable (do not use a “null-modem” type cable), The DCE/DTE switch on the back of the analyzer is not set properly; make sure that both green and red lights are on, The baud rate of the analyzer’s COM port does not match that of the serial port of your computer/data logger. See Section 11.5.11 more trouble-shooting information. 7.9. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE If this manual and its trouble-shooting / repair sections do not solve your problems, technical assistance may be obtained from: Teledyne-API, Technical Support 9480 Carroll Park Drive, San Diego, CA 92121 Phone: +1 858 657 9800 or 1-800 324 5190 Fax: +1 858 657 9816 Email: sda_techsupport@teledyne.com. Before you contact Technical Support, fill out the problem report form in Appendix C, which is also available online for electronic submission at http://www.teledyneapi.com/forms/. 07270B DCN6512 265 Troubleshooting & Repair Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual This page intentionally left blank. 266 07270B DCN6512 8. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The T200H/M Nitrogen Oxides Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled instrument that determines the concentration of nitric oxide (NO), total nitrogen oxides (NOX, the sum of NO and NO2) and nitrogen dioxide (NO2) in a sample gas drawn through the instrument. It requires that sample and calibration gases are supplied at ambient atmospheric pressure in order to establish a constant gas flow through the reaction cell where the sample gas is exposed to ozone (O3), initiating a chemical reaction that gives off light (chemiluminescence). The instrument measures the amount of chemiluminescence to determine the amount of NO in the sample gas. A catalyticreactive converter converts any NO2 in the sample gas to NO, which is then – including the NO in the sample gas – is then reported as NOX. NO2 is calculated as the difference between NOX and NO. Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and usually does not require physical adjustments to the instrument. During calibration, the microprocessor measures the sensor output signal when gases with known amounts of NO or NO2 are supplied and stores these results in memory. The microprocessor uses these calibration values along with the signal from the sample gas and data of the current temperature and pressure of the gas to calculate a final NOX concentration. The concentration values and the original information from which it was calculated are stored in the unit’s internal data acquisition system (DAS Section 4.7.2) and are reported to the user through a vacuum fluorescence display or several output ports. 8.1. MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE 8.1.1. CHEMILUMINESCENCE The principle of the T200H/M’s measurement method is the detection of chemiluminescence, which occurs when nitrogen oxide (NO) reacts with ozone (O3). This reaction is a two-step process. In the first step, one molecule of NO and one molecule of O3 collide and chemically react to produce one molecule of oxygen (O2) and one molecule of nitrogen dioxide (NO2). Some of the NO2 retains a certain amount of excess energy from the collision and, hence, remains in an excited state, which means that one of the electrons of the NO2 molecule resides in a higher energy state than is normal (ded by an asterisk in Equation 8-1). NO + O3 → NO2* + O2 Equation 8-1 Thermodynamics requires that systems seek the lowest stable energy state, hence, the NO2 molecule quickly returns to its ground state in a subsequent step, releasing the excess energy in form of a quantum of light (h) with wavelengths between 600 and 3000 nm, with a peak at about 1200 nm (Equation 9-2, Figure 8-1). 07270B DCN6512 267 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual NO2* → NO2 + hν (Equation 9-2) All things being constant, the relationship between the amount of NO present in the reaction cell and the amount of light emitted from the reaction is very linear. More NO produces more light, which can be measured with a light-sensitive sensor in the nearinfrared spectrum (Figure 8-1). In order to maximize the yield of reaction (1), the T200H/M supplies the reaction cell with a large, constant excess of ozone (about 30005000 ppm) from the internal ozone generator. Model 200E Instrument Response Intensity 140 a.u. 120 a.u. NO + O3 Emission Spectrum 100 a.u. 80 a.u. 60 a.u. PMT Response 40 a.u. Optical Hi-Pass Filter Performance 20 a.u. 0 a.u. 0.5µm 0.7µm 0.9µm 1.1µm 1.3µm 1.5µm 1.7µm 1.9µm Wavelength M200EH/EM Sensitivity Window Figure 8-1: T200H/M Sensitivity Spectrum However, only about 20% of the NO2 that is formed through reaction 10-1 is in the excited state. In addition, the excited NO2 can collide with another collision partner M in the reaction cell (mostly other molecules but also cell walls) and transfer its excess energy to its collision partner without emitting any light at all (Equation 9-3). In fact, by far the largest portion of the NO2* returns to the ground state this way, leaving only a few percent yield of usable chemiluminescence. NO2* + M → NO2 + M (Equation 9-3) In order to enhance the light yield of the reaction, the reaction cell is maintained at reduced pressure. The probability of a collision between the NO2* molecule and a collision partner M increases proportionally with the reaction cell pressure. This nonradiating collision with the NO2* molecules is usually referred to as quenching, an unwanted process further described in Section 8.2.4.2. 268 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.1.2. NOX AND NO2 DETERMINATION The only gas that is truly measured in the T200H/M is NO. Any NO2 contained in the gas is not detected in the above process since NO2 does not react with O3 to undergo chemiluminescence. In order to measure the concentration of NO or NOX (which is defined here as the sum of NO and NO2 in the sample gas), the T200H/M periodically switches the sample gas stream through a converter cartridge filled with molybdenum (Mo, “moly”) chips heated to a temperature of 315° C. The heated molybdenum reacts with NO2 in the sample gas and produces a variety of molybdenum oxides and NO according to Equation 9-4. xNO2 yMo → xNO M oy Oz (at 315 C ) (Equation 9-4) Once the NO2 in the sample gas has been converted to NO, it is routed to the reaction cell where it undergoes the chemiluminescence reaction described in Equations 9-1 and 9-2. Figure 8-2: NO2 Conversion Principle By converting the NO2 in the sample gas into NO, the analyzer can measure the total NOX (NO+NO2) content of the sample gas. By switching the NO2 converter in and out of the sample gas stream every 6 - 10 seconds, the T200H/M analyzer is able to quasicontinuously measure both the NO and the total NOX content. The NO2 concentration, finally, is not measured but calculated by simply subtracting the known NO content of the sample gas from the known NOX content. 07270B DCN6512 269 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.2. CHEMILUMINESCENCE DETECTION 8.2.1. THE PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE The T200H/M uses a photo-multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of light created by the NO and O3 reaction in the reaction cell. A PMT is typically a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes. Photons enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons. These electrons are accelerated by an applied high voltage and multiply through a sequence of such acceleration steps (dynodes) until a useable current signal is generated. This current increases or decreases with the amount of detected light (Section 10.4.3 for more details), is converted to a voltage and amplified by the preamplifier board and then reported to the motherboard’s analog inputs. Figure 8-3: Reaction Cell with PMT Tube 8.2.2. OPTICAL FILTER Another critical component in the method by which your T200H/M detects chemiluminescence is the optical filter that lies between the reaction cell and the PMT (Figure: 10-3). This filter is a high pass filter that is only transparent to wavelengths of light above 645 nm. In conjunction with the response characteristics of the PMT, this filter creates a very narrow window of wavelengths of light to which the T200H/M will respond (refer to Figure 8-1). The narrow band of sensitivity allows the T200H/M to ignore extraneous light and radiation that might interfere with the T200H/M’s measurement. For instance, some oxides of sulfur can also undergo chemiluminescence when in contact with O3 but emit light at shorter wavelengths (~ 260 nm to 480 nm). 270 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.2.3. AUTO ZERO Inherent in the operation of any PMT is a certain amount of noise. This is due to a variety of factors such as black body infrared radiation given off by the metal components of the reaction cell, unit to unit variations in the PMT units and even the constant universal background radiation that surrounds us at all times. In order to reduce this amount of noise and offset, the PMT is kept at a constant 7° C (45° F) by a thermo-electric cooler (TEC). While this intrinsic noise and offset is significantly reduced by cooling the PMT, it is not eradicated. To determine how much noise remains, the T200H/M diverts the sample gas flow directly to the exhaust manifold without passing the reaction cell once every minute for about 5 seconds (Figure 8-4). During this time, only O3 is present in the reaction cell, effectively turning off the chemiluminescence reaction. Once the chamber is completely dark, the T200H/M records the output of the PMT and keeps a running average of these AZERO values. This average offset value is subtracted from the raw PMT readings while the instrument is measuring NO and NOX to arrive at a auto-zero corrected reading. Figure 8-4: 07270B DCN6512 Reaction Cell During the AutoZero Cycle 271 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.2.4. MEASUREMENT INTERFERENCES It should be d that the chemiluminescence method is subject to interferences from a number of sources. The T200H/M has been successfully tested for its ability to reject interference from most of these sources. Table 8-1 lists the most important gases, which may interfere with the detection of NO in the T200H/M. 8.2.4.1. Direct Interference Some gases can directly alter the amount of light detected by the PMT due to chemiluminescence in the reaction cell. This can either be a gas that undergoes chemiluminescence by reacting with O3 in the reaction cell or a gas that reacts with other compounds and produces excess NO upstream of the reaction cell. 8.2.4.2. Third Body Quenching As shown in Equation 9-3, other molecules in the reaction cell can collide with the excited NO2*, preventing the chemiluminescence of Equation 9-2, a process known as quenching. CO2 and H2O are the most common quenching interferences, but N2 and O2 also contribute to this interference type. Quenching is an unwanted phenomenon and the extent to which it occurs depends on the properties of the collision partner. larger, more polarized molecules such as H2O and CO2 quench NO chemiluminescence more effectively than smaller, less polar and electronically “harder” molecules such as N2 and O2. The influence of water vapor on the T200H/M measurement can be eliminated with an optional, internal sample gas dryer. The concentrations of N2 and O2 are virtually constant in ambient air measurements, hence provide a constant amount of quenching and the interference of varying CO2 amounts is negligible at low concentrations. The T200H and T200M analyzers are typically used in high CO2 concentration environments. The pneumatic setup of these two analyzer models minimizes the interference from CO2 such that the analyzers conform to the standards set forth by the US-EPA in Method 20 - NOx from Stationary Gas Turbines, available at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc/promgate.html 272 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 8-1: GAS CO2 SOX Principles of Operation List of Interferents INTERFERENCE TYPE REJECTION METHOD Dilution: Viscosity of CO2 molecules causes them to collect in aperture of Critical Flow Orifice altering flow rate of NO. If high concentrations of CO2 are suspected, special calibration methods must be performed to account for the affects of the CO2. 3rd Body Quenching: CO2 molecules collide with NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and preventing emission of photons. Contact Teledyne API Technical Support department for details. Some SOX variants can also initiate a chemiluminescence reaction upon exposure to O3 producing excess light. Wavelengths of light produced by chemiluminescence of SOX are screened out by the Optical Filter. Chemically reacts with NH3, O2 and H2O in O3 generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate) and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms highly corrosive HNO3 (Nitric Acid) Most of the ammonium sulfate and ammonium nitrate produced is removed from the sample gas by an air purifier located between the O3 Generator and the reaction cell. 3rd Body quenching: SOX molecules collide with NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and preventing emission of photons. If high concentrations of SOX are suspected, special calibration methods must be performed to account for the affects of the SO2. Contact Teledyne API Technical Support department for details. H20 NH3 3rd Body quenching: H2O molecules collide with NO2* molecules absorbing excess energy kinetically and preventing emission of photons. Analyzer’s operating in high humidity areas must have some method of drying applied to the sample gas supply (Section 5.10 for more details). Chemically reacts with NH3 and SOX in O3 generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate) and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque white deposits on optical filter Window. Also forms highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid) Removed from the O3 gas stream by the Perma Pure® Dryer (Section 8.3.7 for more details). Direct Interference: NH3 is converted to H2O and NO by the NO2 converter. Excess NO reacts with O3 in reaction cell creating excess chemiluminescence. If a high concentration of NH3 is suspected, steps must be taken to remove the NH3 from the sample gas prior to its entry into the NO2 converter. Chemically reacts with H2O, O2 and SOX in O3 generator to create (NH3)2SO4 (ammonium sulfate) and NH3NO2 (ammonium nitrate) which form opaque white deposits on optical filter window. Also forms highly corrosive HNO3 (nitric acid). The Perma Pure® dryer built into the T200H/M is sufficient for removing typical ambient concentration levels of NH3. In cases with excessively high CO2 concentrations (larger than 0.5%), the effect can be calibrated out by using calibration gases with a CO2 content equal to the measured air. Only very high and highly variable CO2 concentrations will then be cause of measurable interference. For those applications, we recommend to use other analyzer models. Please consult sales or our website. 8.2.4.3. Light Leaks The T200H/M sensitivity curve includes a small portion of the visible light spectrum (Figure 10-1), hence, it is important to make sure than the reaction cell is completely sealed with respect to light. To ensure this, all pneumatic tubing leading into the reaction cell is either opaque (vacuum exit tubing) in order to prevent light from entering the cell or light penetration is prevented by stainless steel filters and orifices (gas entries). 07270B DCN6512 273 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.3. PNEUMATIC OPERATION Note It is important that the sample airflow system is leak-tight and not pressurized over ambient pressure. Regular leak checks should be performed on the analyzer as described in the maintenance schedule, Table 6-1. Procedures for correctly performing leak checks are provided in Section 7.5 8.3.1. PUMP AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD Note Relative Pressure versus absolute pressure. In this manual vacuum readings are given in inches of mercury absolute pressure (in-Hg-A), i.e. indicate an absolute pressure referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum). The gas flow for the T200H/M is created by an external pump (Figure 8-5) that is pneumatically connected through a 6.4 mm / 0.25” tube to the analyzer’s EXHAUST port located on the rear panel. This pump creates a vacuum of approximately 5 in-Hg-A at one standard liter/minute, which is provided to various pneumatic components by a vacuum manifold located just in front of the rear panel. Gas flow is created by keeping the analyzer’s sample gas inlet near ambient pressure, usually by means of a small vent installed in the sample line at the inlet, in effect pulling the gas through the instrument’s pneumatic systems. There are several advantages to this external pump / pull-through configuration. 274 By using an external pump, it is possible to remove a significant source of acoustic noise and vibration from the immediate vicinity of the sensor. The PMT can act as a “microphone”, amplifying noise and vibration within the chassis. This is one of the main reasons, why the T200H/M has an external pump. Pumping heats and compresses the sample air, complicating the measurement process if the pump is upstream. Most importantly, however, certain physical parts of the pump itself are made of materials that might chemically react with the sample gas. Placing the pump downstream of the reaction cell avoids these problems. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 8-5: Principles of Operation External Pump Pack Finally, the T200H/M requires a steady, high under-pressure, which cannot be achieved reliably over extended periods of time with small vacuum pumps. The external pump used for the T200H/M has a very long lifetime and duty cycle and provides a very good vacuum for its entire lifetime. However, the pump is too large to fit into the chassis of the analyzer. 8.3.2. SAMPLE GAS FLOW The sample gas is the most critical flow path in the analyzer, as the medium has to be routed through a variety of valves and tubes for the measurement of zero offset and concentrations of both NO and NOX (and possibly the drying of the gas if the optional sample dryer is installed). At any point before and in the reaction cell, the integrity of the sample gas cannot be compromised. Sample gas flow in the T200H/M analyzer is not a directly measured value, but is rather calculated from the sample pressure using the flow principle across a critical orifice. In general, the differential pressure ratio between sample pressure and reaction cell pressure needs to exceed 2:1 to allow critical flow. The actual flow rate is then only dependent on the size of the orifice and the upstream pressure. Refer to Section 8.3.3 for a detailed description of the instrument’s method of gas flow rate control. 07270B DCN6512 275 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.3.2.1. NO/NOx and AutoZero cycles For the routing of the sample gas flow, the analyzer uses a variety of valves. The NO/NOX valve directs the sample gas either directly to the reaction cell or through the unit’s NO2 converter, alternating every ~4 s. The AutoZero valve directs the sample gas stream to completely bypass the reaction cell for dark noise measurement once every minute, which is then subtracted as a measurement offset from the raw concentration signal. The valve cycle phases are summarized in the following table. Table 8-2: PHASE NO/ NOX VALVE STATUS NO Measure Open to AutoZero valve NOX Measure Open to NO2 converter AUTOZERO VALVE STATUS Open to reaction cell Open to reaction cell T200H/M Valve Cycle Phases TIME INDEX 0-2s ACTIVITY Wait period (NO dwell time). Ensures reaction cell has been flushed of previous gas. 2-4s Analyzer measures chemiluminescence in reaction cell. 4–6s Wait period (NOX dwell time). Ensures reaction cell has been flushed of previous gas. 6–8s Analyzer measures NO + O3 chemiluminescence in reaction cell. 0–4s Wait period (AZERO dwell time). Ensures reaction cell has been flushed of sample gas and chemiluminescence reaction is stopped. FIGURE Figure 8-2 Figure 8-2 Cycle repeats every ~8 seconds AutoZero Open to AutoZero valve Open to vacuum manifold 4-6s Figure 8-4 Analyzer measures background noise without sample gas Cycle repeats every minute 8.3.3. FLOW RATE CONTROL - CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICES The Model T200H/M analyzers use special flow control assemblies (Figure 8-8) located at various locations within the instrument to maintain constant flow rates for both the O3 supply air and the sample gas. These assemblies consists of: A critical flow orifice. Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice. A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the critical flow orifice and the assembly housing. The figures that follow highlight the location of these flow control assemblies: 276 07270B DCN6512 Principles of Operation EXHAUST MANIFOLD O3 FLOW SENSOR Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 8-6: 07270B DCN6512 Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T200H 277 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual FLOW PRESSURE SENSOR PCA NO/NOX VALVE SAMPLE GAS INLET NO2 Converter VACUUM PRESSURE SENSOR SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR EXHAUST GAS OUTLET Gas Flow Control Assemblies AUTOZERO VALVE O3 FLOW SENSOR Principles of Operation O3 EXHAUST MANIFOLD NOX Exhaust Scrubber GENERATOR Orifice Dia. 0.007" Orifice Dia. 0.007" REACTION CELL Orifice Dia. 0.004" O3 Scrubber PMT Filter PUMP PERMAPURE DRYER Figure 8-7: Note 278 INSTRUMENT CHASSIS Location of Gas Flow Control Assemblies for T200M Location of flow control assemblies in the T200H/M with zero/span option 50 installed are the same as shown in Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.3.3.1. Critical Flow Orifice The most important component of the flow control assemblies is the critical flow orifice. Critical flow orifices are a remarkably simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. By restricting the flow of gas though the orifice, a pressure differential is created. This pressure differential combined with the action of the analyzer’s pump draws the gas through the orifice. As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop, the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio stays at least 2:1 the gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical flow orifice. Figure 8-8: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas molecules, moving at the speed of sound, pass through the orifice. With nominal pressures of 28 and 4 in-Hg-A for the sample and reaction cell pressures, respectively the necessary ratio of sample to reaction cell pressure of 2:1 is largely exceeded and accommodates a wide range of possible variability in atmospheric pressure and pump degradation extending the useful life of the pump. Once the pump does degrades to the point where the vacuum pressure exceeds 14 in-Hg-A so that the ratio between sample and vacuum pressures is less than 2:1 a critical flow rate can no longer be maintained. At this point, the instrument will display “XXXX" indicating an invalid sample flow rate. 07270B DCN6512 279 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual The following table lists the gas flow rates of the critical flow orifices in the standard T200H/M Table 8-3: LOCATION T200H/M Critical Flow Orifice Diameters and Gas Flow Rates PURPOSE ORIFICE DIAMETER NOMINAL FLOWRATE (cm³/min) T200H T200M T200H T200M 1 Bypass manifold out to NO/NOx valve and NO2 converter Controls rate of flow of sample gas into the NO2 converter and reaction cell. 0.003” 0.007” 40 250 Vacuum manifold: Bypass manifold 1 Port Controls rate of sample gas flow that bypasses the analyzer when bypassing the reaction cell during the auto-zero cycle. 0.007” N/A 250 N/A 290 250 80 80 370 330 TOTAL INLET GAS FLOW – Standard Configuration Controls rate of flow of zero purge gas through the O2 sensor (when installed and enabled) when inactive. Vacuum manifold: O2 sensor port 0.004" 0.004" TOTAL INLET GAS FLOW – With O2 Sensor Option O3 supply inlet of reaction cell. Dry air return of Perma Pure® dryer 1 Controls rate of flow of ozone gas into the reaction cell. 0.007” 0.007” 250 250 Controls flow rate of dry air return / purge air of the dryer. 0.004" 0.004" 80 80 Bypass manifold is built into the 3-port reaction cell. In addition to controlling the gas flows, the critical flow orifices at the inlets of the reaction cell also maintain an under-pressure inside the reaction cell, effectively reducing the number of molecules in the chamber and therefore increasing the chemiluminescence yield as the likelihood of third body quenching is reduced (Section 8.2.4.1). The T200H/M sensitivity reaches a peak at about 2 in-Hg-A, below which the sensitivity drops due to a low number of molecules and decreased yield in the chemiluminescence reaction. EFFECT OF TEMPERATURE ON CRITICAL FLOW Changes in temperature will cause the critical flow orifice materials to expand or contract. Even though these changes are extremely small, they can alter the diameter of the critical flow orifice enough to cause noticeable changes in the flow rate though the orifice. To alleviate this problem the two most important of the flow assemblies (those controlling the sample gas an O3 gas flow)in the T200H/M are maintained at a constant temperature. 8.3.4. SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER To remove particles in the sample gas, the analyzer is equipped with a PTFE membrane filter of 47 mm diameter (also referred to as the sample filter) with a 1 µm pore size. The filter is accessible through the front panel, which folds down (after removal of the CE Mark safety screw), and should be changed according to the maintenance schedule in Table 9-1. 280 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.3.5. OZONE GAS AIR FLOW The excess ozone needed for reaction with NO in the reaction cell is generated inside the analyzer because of the instability and toxicity of ozone. Besides the ozone generator itself, this requires a dry air supply and filtering of the gas before it is introduced into the reaction cell. Due to its toxicity and aggressive chemical behavior, O3 must also be removed from the gas stream before it can be vented through the exhaust outlet. In contrast to the sample flow, the ozone flow is measured with a mass flow sensor, which is mounted on the pneumatic sensor board, just behind the PMT sensor assembly. This mass flow sensor has a full scale range of 0-1000 cm³/min and can be calibrated through software to its span point (Section 4.13.7.5). As the flow value displayed on the front panel is an actual measurement (and not a calculated value), the flow variability may be higher than that of the sample flow, which is based on a calculation from (more stable) differential pressures. On the other hand, the drift, i.e. long-term change, in the ozone flow rate may be higher and usually indicates a flow problem. As with all other test parameters, we recommend to monitor the ozone flow over time for predictive diagnostics and maintenance evaluation. CAUTION Ozone (O3) is a toxic gas. Obtain a Material and Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for this gas. Read and rigorously follow the safety guidelines described there. Always make sure that the plumbing of the O3 generation and supply system is maintained and leak-free. 07270B DCN6512 281 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.3.6. O3 GENERATOR The T200H/M uses a corona discharge (CD) tube for creating its O3. Corona discharge generation is capable of producing high concentrations of ozone efficiently and with low excess heat. Although there are many cell designs, the fundamental principle remains the same (Figure 8-9). Figure 8-9: Ozone Generator Principle The T200H/M utilizes a dual-dielectric design. This method utilizes a glass tube with hollow walls. The outermost and innermost surfaces are coated with electrically conductive material. The air flows through the glass tube, between the two conductive coatings, in effect creating a capacitor with the air and glass acting as the dielectric. The layers of glass also separate the conductive surfaces from the air stream to prevent reaction with the O3. As the capacitor charges and discharges, electrons are created and accelerated across the air gap and collide with the O2 molecules in the air stream splitting them into elemental oxygen. Some of these oxygen atoms recombine with O2 to O3. The quantity of ozone produced is dependent on factors such as the voltage and frequency of the alternating current applied to the CD cells. When enough high-energy electrons are produced to ionize the O2 molecules, a light emitting, gaseous plasma is formed, which is commonly referred to as a corona, hence the name corona discharge generator. 282 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.3.7. PERMA PURE® DRYER The air supplied to the O3 generation system needs to be as dry as possible. Normal room air contains a certain amount of water vapor, which greatly diminishes the yield of ozone produced by the ozone generator. Also, water can react with other chemicals inside the O3 Generator to produce chemicals that damage the optical filter located in the reaction cell (Table 10-1) such as ammonium sulfate or highly corrosive nitric acid. To accomplish this task the T200H/M uses a Perma Pure® single tube permeation dryer. The dryer consists of a single tube of Nafion® , a co-polymer similar to Teflon® that absorbs water very well but not other chemicals. The Nafion® tube is mounted within an outer, flexible plastic tube. As gas flows through the inner Nafion® tube, water vapor is absorbed into the membrane walls. The absorbed water is transported through the membrane wall and evaporates into the dry, purge gas flowing through the outer tube, countercurrent to the gas in the inner tube (Figure 8-10). Figure 8-10: Semi-Permeable Membrane Drying Process This process is called per-evaporation and is driven by the humidity gradient between the inner and outer tubes as well as the flow rates and pressure difference between inner and outer tubing. Unlike micro-porous membrane permeation, which transfers water through a relatively slow diffusion process, per-evaporation is a simple kinetic reaction. Therefore, the drying process occurs quickly, typically within milliseconds. The first step in this process is a chemical reaction between the molecules of the Nafion® material and water, other chemical components of the gases to be dried are usually unaffected. The chemical reaction is based on hydrogen bonds between the water molecule and the Nafion material. Other small polar gases that are capable of hydrogen bonds can be absorbed this way, too, such as ammonia (NH3) and some low molecular amines. The gases of interest, NO and NO2, do not get absorbed and pass the dryer unaltered. To provide a dry purge gas for the outer side of the Nafion tube, the T200H/M returns some of the dried air from the inner tube to the outer tube (Figure 8-11). When the analyzer is first started, the humidity gradient between the inner and outer tubes is not 07270B DCN6512 283 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual very large and the dryer’s efficiency is low at first but improves as this cycle reduces the moisture in the sample gas and settles at a minimum humidity. Figure 8-11: T200H/M Perma Pure® Dryer Just like on startup, if the instrument is turned on after having been off for more than 30 minutes, it takes a certain amount of time for the humidity gradient to become large enough for the Perma Pure® Dryer to adequately dry the air. In this case, called a cold start, the O3 Generator is not turned on for 30 minutes. When rebooting the instrument within less than 30 minutes of power-down, the generator is turned on immediately. The Perma Pure® Dryer used in the T200H/M is capable of adequately drying ambient air to a dew point of ≤ -5˚C (~4000 ppm residual H2O) at a flow rate of 1 standard liter per minute (slpm) or down to ≤ -15˚C (~1600 ppm residual H2O) at 0.5 slpm. The Perma Pure® Dryer is also capable of removing ammonia from the sample gas up to concentrations of approximately 1 ppm. 284 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.3.8. OZONE SUPPLY AIR FILTER The T200H/M uses ambient air as the supply gas for the O3 generator and may produce a variety of byproducts. Small amounts of water, ammonia and various sulfur oxides can combine to create ammonium sulfate, ammonium nitrate, nitric acid and other compounds. Whereas sulfates and nitrates can create powdery residues inside the reaction cell causing sensitivity drift, nitric acid is a very aggressive compound, which can deteriorate the analyzer’s components. In order to remove these chemical byproducts from the O3 gas stream, the output of the O3 generator flows through a special filter between the generator and the reaction cell. Any NOX that may be produced in the generator (from reaction of O2 or O3 and N2 in the air) and may cause an artifact in the measurement, is calibrated out through the Autozero functionality, which checks the background signal of the O3 stream only once per minute. 8.3.9. OZONE SCRUBBER Even though ozone is unstable and typically reacts to form O2, the break-down is not quite fast enough to ensure that it is completely removed from the exhaust gas stream of the T200H/M by the time the gas exits the analyzer. Due to the high toxicity and reactivity of O3, a special catalytic ozone scrubber is used to remove all of the O3 exiting the reaction cell. Besides its efficient destruction of O3, this catalyst does not produce any toxic or hazardous gases as it only converts ozone to oxygen. The O3 scrubber is located inside the NO2 converter housing next to the NO2 converter in order to utilize residual heat given of by the converter heater. Even though the catalyst is 100% efficient at scrubbing ozone at room temperature, heating it significantly reduces the necessary residence time (the amount of time the gas must be in contact with the catalyst) for 100% efficiency and full efficiency can be maintained at higher gas flow rates. As this is a true catalytic converter, there are no maintenance requirements as would be required for charcoal-based scrubbers. A certain amount of fine, black dust may exit the catalyst, particularly if the analyzer is subjected to sudden pressure drops (for example, when disconnecting the running pump without letting the analyzer properly and slowly equilibrate to ambient pressure). To avoid the dust from entering the reaction cell or the pump, the scrubber is equipped with sintered stainless steel filters of 20 µm pore size on either end and on some models, an additional dust filter may be attached to the exhaust port. 07270B DCN6512 285 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.3.10. PNEUMATIC SENSORS Note The T200H/M displays all pressures in inches of mercury absolute (in-HgA), i.e. absolute pressure referenced against zero (a perfect vacuum). The T200H/M uses three pneumatic sensors to verify gas streams. These sensors are located on a printed circuit assembly, called the pneumatic pressure/flow sensor board, located just behind the sensor assembly. 8.3.10.1. Vacuum Manifold The vacuum manifold is the central exit port for all analyzer pneumatics. All gas streams of the analyzer exit through this assembly and connect to the instrument’s pump. Figure 8-12 shows the standard configuration. Configurations will vary depending on the optional equipment that is installed. An IZS option, for example, will add another FT8 connector and orifice assembly to the manifold, an optional sample dryer may add a Tee-fitting so that two ¼” tubes can be connected to the same port. At this time, the vacuum manifold does not yet support the orifice holder shown in Figure 6-5. To exchange the critical orifice installed in the vacuum manifold, the user needs to either blow the orifice out with reversed pressure or remove the entire manifold for this task. However, orifices installed in the vacuum manifold should not have to be cleaned under normal circumstances. Figure 8-12: Vacuum Manifold 8.3.10.2. Sample Pressure Sensor An absolute pressure transducer connected to the input of the NO/NOX valve is used to measure the pressure of the sample gas before it enters the analyzer’s reaction cell. This is the “upstream” pressure mentioned above, which is used to compute sample flow rate. In conjunction with the vacuum pressure sensor, it is also used to validate the critical flow condition (2:1 pressure ratio) through the sample gas critical flow orifice (Section 286 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.3.3). If the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section 8.8.3), the output of this sensor is also used to supply pressure data for that calculation. The actual pressure value is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel display as the test function SAMP. The flow rate of the sample gas is displayed as SAMP FLW. 8.3.10.3. Vacuum Pressure Sensor An absolute pressure transducer connected to the exhaust manifold is used to measure the pressure downstream from and inside the instrument’s reaction cell. The output of the sensor is used by the CPU to calculate the pressure differential between the gas upstream of the reaction cell and the gas downstream from it and is also used as the main diagnostic for proper pump operation. If the ratio between the upstream pressure and the downstream pressure falls below 2:1, a warning message (SAMPLE FLOW WARN) is displayed on the analyzer’s front panel (Section 6.2.2) and the sample flow rate will display XXXX instead of an actual value. If this pressure exceeds 10 in-Hg-A, an RCEL PRESSURE WARNING Is issued, even though the analyzer will continue to calculate a sample flow up to ~14 in Hg. Also, if the temperature/pressure compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (Section 8.8.3), the output of this sensor is used to supply pressure data for that calculation. This measurement is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel as the test function RCEL. 8.3.10.4. O3 Supply Air Flow Sensor A mass flow meter connected between the Perma Pure® dryer and the O3 generator measures the flow rate of O3 supply air through the analyzer. This information is used to validate the O3 gas flow rate. If the flow rate exceeds ±15% of the nominal flow rate (250 cm³/min), a warning message OZONE FLOW WARNING is displayed on the analyzer’s front panel (Section 6.2.2) and the O3 generator is turned off. As second warning, OZONE GEN OFF, is displayed. This flow measurement is viewable through instrument’s front panel display as the test function OZONE FL. 8.3.11. DILUTION MANIFOLD Certain applications require to measure NOX in sample gases that do not contain any oxygen. However, the molybdenum NO2 converter requires a minimum amount of oxygen to operate properly and to ensure constant conversion efficiency. For these special applications, the analyzer may be equipped with a dilution manifold (Figure 8-13) to provide the instrument with an internal sample stream that contains about 2.5% O2. This manifold is mounted between converter housing and vacuum manifold on a small mounting bracket. If the dilution manifold is to be mounted in the T200H/M analyzer. The manifold is equipped with two orifice holders that control the flow of the O2-free sample gas and the bleeds in a small amount of zero air before the combined sample stream goes to the NO/NOX valve for measurement. The zero air is produced by an external zero air scrubber cartridge, mounted on the rear panel. The dilution manifold is not temperature controlled, although the residual heat of the NO2 converter housing provides some temperature stability. Tight temperature stability is not critical to the dilution application. 07270B DCN6512 287 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 8-13: Dilution Manifold Please inquire with Teledyne-API sales if the analyzer can be modified to fit your application. 8.4. OXYGEN SENSOR (OPT 65A) PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION 8.4.1. PARAMAGNETIC MEASUREMENT OF O2 The oxygen sensor used in the T200H/M analyzer utilizes the fact that oxygen is attracted into strong magnetic field (in contrast with most other gases) to obtain fast, accurate oxygen measurements. The sensor’s core is made up of two nitrogen filled glass spheres, which are mounted on a rotating suspension within a magnetic field (Figure 8-14). A mirror is mounted centrally on the suspension and light is shone onto the mirror, which reflects the light onto a pair of photocells that then generate a signal. The signal generated by the photocells is passed to a feedback loop, which outputs a current to a wire winding (in effect, a small DC electric motor) mounted on the suspended mirror. Oxygen from the sample stream is attracted into the magnetic field displacing the nitrogen filled spheres and causing the suspended mirror to rotate. This changes the amount of light reflected onto the photocells and therefore the output levels of the photocells. The feedback loop increases the amount of current fed into the wire winding in order to move the mirror back into its original position. The more O2 present, the more the mirror moves and the more current is fed into the wire winding by the feedback control loop. A sensor measures the amount of current generated by the feedback control loop which is directly proportional to the concentration of oxygen within the sample gas mixture (see Figure 8-14). 288 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Figure 8-14: Principles of Operation Oxygen Sensor - Principle of Operation 8.4.2. OPERATION WITHIN THE T200H/M ANALYZER The oxygen sensor option is transparently integrated into the core analyzer operation. All functions can be viewed or accessed through the front panel, just like the functions for NOX. The O2 concentration is displayed in the upper right-hand corner, alternating with NOX, NO and NO2 concentrations. Test functions for O2 slope and offset are viewable from the front panel along with the analyzer’s other test functions. O2 sensor calibration is performed via the front panel CAL function and is performed in a nearly identical manner as the standard NOX/NO calibration. See Section 5 for more details. Stability of the O2 sensor can be viewed (see 3.3.2.1) The O2 concentration range is 0-100% (user selectable) with 0.1% precision and accuracy and is available to be output via one of the instrument’s four user selectable analog outputs (see Section 6.13.4). The temperature of the O2 sensor is maintained at a constant 50° C by means of a PID loop and can be viewed on the front panel as test function O2 TEMP. The O2 sensor assembly itself does not have any serviceable parts and is enclosed in an insulated canister. 8.4.3. PNEUMATIC OPERATION OF THE O2 SENSOR Pneumatically, the O2 sensor is connected after the particulate filter and draws a flow of about 80 cm³/min in addition to the normal sample flow rate (See Table 10.-3 for nominal sample inlet gas flow rates) and is separately controlled with its own critical flow orifice located inside the vacuum manifold. 07270B DCN6512 289 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.5. ELECTRONIC OPERATION Figure 8-15 shows a block diagram of the major electronic components of the T200H/M. Analog IN RS232 COM2 USB Male Female COM port Ethernet Analog Outputs A1 Optional 4-20 mA A2 A3 Touchscreen or USB Control Inputs: 1– 6 USB Display Status Outputs: 1– 8 A4 (I 2C Bu s) Analog Outputs (D/A) CO M2 (RS–232 or RS–485) A/D Converter( V/F) Power-Up Circuit Box Temp LVDS transmitter board External Digital I/O) C OM1 (RS–232 ONLY) PC 104 CPU Card Disk On Module MOTHER BOARD Flash Chip PC 104 Bus PMT Temperature Sensor HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL PMT TEMPERATURE OPTIC TEST CONTROL ELECTRIC TEST CONTROL REACTION CELL TEMPERATURE O2 OPTION TEMPERATURE PUMP Analog Sensor Inputs Internal Digital I/O PMT OUTPUT (PMT DET) Thermistor Interface (Externally Powered) I 2C Bus Pneumatic Sensor Board I2 C Status LED Sample Pressure Sensor Vacuum Pressure Sensor O3 Flow Sensor PMT CPU Status LED RELAY BOARD TEMPERATUR E SIGNAL NO/NO x Valve Reaction Cell Heater Autozero Valve MOLYBDENUM CONVERT ER Molybdenum Converter Heater PREAMP PCA Sample Cal Valve Option Option PMT PMT TEC TEC Drive PCA Figure 8-15: O 2 Sensor Option MOLYBDENUM CONVERTER TEMPERATURE T200H/M Electronic Block Diagram The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer (CPU) that controls various internal processes, interprets data, calculates data, and reports results using specialized firmware developed by Teledyne API. It communicates with the user, receives data from and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices through the motherboard, the main printed circuit assembly on the rear panel. 290 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.5.1. CPU The unit’s CPU card, installed on the motherboard located inside the rear panel, is a low power (5 VDC, 720mA max), high performance, Vortex 86SX-based microcomputer running Windows CE. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification. Figure 8-16: T200H/M CPU Board Annotated The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage: a Disk on Module (DOM) with an embedded 2MB flash chip. 8.5.1.1. Disk On Module (DOM) The DOM is a 44-pin IDE flash drive with storage capacity to 128 MB. It is used to store the computer’s operating system files, the Teledyne API firmware and peripheral files, and the operational data generated by the analyzer’s internal data acquisition system (DAS). 8.5.1.2. Flash Chip This non-volatile, embedded flash chip includes 2 MB of storage for calibration data as well as a backup of the analyzer configuration. Storing these key data on a less heavily accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption. In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the analyzer will continue to operate with just the DOM. However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring the unit to be recalibrated. 07270B DCN6512 291 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.5.2. SENSOR MODULE, REACTION CELL Electronically, the T200H/M sensor assembly (see Figure 9-6) consists of several subassemblies with different tasks: to detect the intensity of the light from the chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 in the reaction cell, to produce a current signal proportional to the intensity of the chemiluminescence, to control the temperature of the PMT to ensure the accuracy and stability of the measurements and to drive the high voltage power supply that is needed for the PMT. The individual functions are described individually below, Section 7.6.5 shows the sensor assembly and its components. 8.5.2.1. Reaction Cell Heating Circuit The stability of the chemiluminescence reaction between NO and O3 can be affected by changes in the temperature and pressure of the O3 and sample gases in the reaction cell. In order to reduce temperature effects, the reaction cell is maintained at a constant 50 C, just above the high end of the instrument’s operation temperature range. Two AC heaters, one embedded into the bottom of the reaction cell, the other embedded directly above the chamber’s exhaust fitting, provide the heat source. These heaters operate off of the instrument’s main AC power and are controlled by the CPU through a power relay on the relay board (Section 8.5.7). A thermistor, also embedded in the bottom of the reaction cell, reports the cell’s temperature to the CPU through the thermistor interface circuitry of the motherboard (Section 8.5.9.3). 292 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.5.3. PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE (PMT) The T200H/M uses a photo multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of chemiluminescence created in the sample chamber. PMT Housing End Plate This is the entry to the PMT Exchange PMT Output Connector PMT Preamp PCA PMT Power Supply & Aux. Signal Connector High voltage Power Supply (HVPS) PMT O-Test LED PMT Cold Block Connector to PMT Pre Amp PCA 12V Power Connector Insulation Gasket PMT Temperature Sensor Light from Reaction Chamber shines through hole in side of Cold Block Thermo-Electric Cooler (TEC) PMT Heat Exchange Fins TEC Driver PCA Cooling Fan Housing Figure 8-17: 07270B DCN6512 PMT Housing Assembly 293 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual A typical PMT is a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes. Photons from the reaction are filtered by an optical high-pass filter, enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons. A high voltage potential across these focusing electrodes directs the electrons toward an array of high voltage dynodes. The dynodes in this electron multiplier array are designed so that each stage multiplies the number of emitted electrons by emitting multiple, new electrons. The greatly increased number of electrons emitted from one end of electron multiplier are collected by a positively charged anode at the other end, which creates a useable current signal. This current signal is amplified by the preamplifier board and then reported to the motherboard. Figure 8-18: Basic PMT Design A significant performance characteristic of the PMT is the voltage potential across the electron multiplier. The higher the voltage, the greater is the number of electrons emitted from each dynode of the electron multiplier, making the PMT more sensitive and responsive to small variations in light intensity but also more noisy (dark noise). The gain voltage of the PMT used in the T200H/M is usually set between 450 V and 800 V. This parameter is viewable through the front panel as test function HVPS (see Section 6.2.1). For information on when and how to set this voltage, see Section 11.6.3.8. The PMT is housed inside the PMT module assembly (see Figure 10-18). This assembly also includes the high voltage power supply required to drive the PMT, an LED used by the instrument’s optical test function, a thermistor that measures the temperature of the PMT and various components of the PMT cooling system including the thermo-electric cooler (TEC). 294 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.5.4. PMT COOLING SYSTEM The performance of the analyzer’s PMT is significantly affected by temperature. Variations in PMT temperature are directly reflected in the signal output of the PMT. Also the signal to noise ratio of the PMT output is radically influenced by temperature as well. The warmer The PMT is, the noisier its signal becomes until the noise renders the concentration signal useless. To alleviate this problem a special cooling system exists that maintains the PMT temperature at a stable, low level TEC PCA sets appropriate drive voltage for cooler Preamp PCA sends buffered and amplified thermistor signal to TEC PCA TEC Control PCA PMT Preamp PCA Heat Sink ThermoElectric Cooler Thermistor outputs temp of cold block to preamp PCA PMT Cold Block Heat form PMT is absorbed by the cold block and transferred to the heat sink via the TEC then bled off into the cool air stream. Cooling Fan Figure 8-19: PMT Cooling System 8.5.4.1. TEC Control Board The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located in the sensor housing assembly, under the slanted shroud, next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan. Using the amplified PMT temperature signal from the PMT preamplifier board (see Section 10.4.5), it sets the drive voltage for the thermoelectric cooler. The warmer the PMT gets, the more current is passed through the TEC causing it to pump more heat to the heat sink. A red LED located on the top edge of this circuit board indicates that the control circuit is receiving power. Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly. For the definitions and acceptable signal levels of these test points see Section 11. 8.5.5. PMT PREAMPLIFIER The PMT preamplifier board amplifies the PMT signal into a useable analog voltage (PMT) that can be processed by the motherboard into a digital signal to be used by the CPU to calculate the NO, NO2 and NOx concentrations of the gas in the sample chamber. The output signal of the PMT is controlled by two different adjustments. First, the voltage across the electron multiplier array of the PMT is adjusted with a set of two hexadecimal switches. Adjusting this voltage directly affects the HVPS voltage and, hence, the signal from the PMT. Secondly, the gain of the amplified signal can further 07270B DCN6512 295 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual be adjusted through a potentiometer. These adjustments should only be performed when encountering problems with the software calibration that cannot be rectified otherwise. See Section 11.6.3.8 for this hardware calibration. O Test Control From CPU PMT Fine Gain Set PMT Coarse Gain Set (Rotary Switch) (Rotary O Test LED PMT HVPS Drive Voltage To Motherboard PMT Preamp PCA O-Test Generator D-A Converter PMT Output E Test Control From CPU MUX Amp to Voltage Converter/ Amplifier Low Pass Noise Filter E-Test Generator PMT Temp Analog Signal PMT Temp Sensor TEC Control PCA PMT Signal Offset to Motherboard PMT Temperature Feedback Circuit PMT Output Signal (PMT) to Motherboard Figure 8-20: PMT Preamp Block Diagram The PMT temperature control loop maintains the PMT temperature around 7° C and can be viewed as test function PMT TEMP on the front panel (see Section 6.2.1). The electrical test (ETEST) circuit generates a constant, electronic signal intended to simulate the output of the PMT (after conversion from current to voltage). By bypassing the detector’s actual signal, it is possible to test most of the signal handling and conditioning circuitry on the PMT preamplifier board. See section 6.9.6 for instructions on performing this test. The optical test (OTEST) feature causes an LED inside the PMT cold block to create a light signal that can be measured with the PMT. If zero air is supplied to the analyzer, the entire measurement capability of the sensor module can be tested including the PMT and the current to voltage conversion circuit on the PMT preamplifier board. See section 6.9.5 for instructions on performing this test. 296 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.5.6. PNEUMATIC SENSOR BOARD The flow and pressure sensors of the T200H/M are located on a printed circuit assembly just behind the PMT sensor. Refer to Section 7.5.16 for information on how to test this assembly. The signals of this board are supplied to the motherboard for further signal processing. All sensors are linearized in the firmware and can be span calibrated from the front panel. 8.5.7. RELAY BOARD The relay board is the central switching and power distribution unit of the analyzer. It contains power relays, valve drivers and status LEDs for all heated zones and valves, as well as thermocouple amplifiers, power distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the analyzer. The relay board communicates with the motherboard over the I2C bus and can be used for detailed trouble-shooting of power problems and valve or heater functionality. See Figure 7-4 for an annotated view of the relay board. 8.5.7.1. Relay PCA Location and Layout Generally the relay PCA is located in the right-rear quadrant of the analyzer and is mounted vertically on the back side of the same bracket as the instrument’s DC power supplies, however the exact location of the relay PCA may differ from model to model (see Figure 3-5) 8.5.7.2. Heater Control The heater control loop is illustrated in Figure 8-21. Two thermocouples (T/C) inputs can be configured for either type-J or type-K thermocouples. Additionally: 07270B DCN6512 Both T/C’s can be configured as either grounded or ungrounded thermocouples. Standard configuration of the both type of thermocouples is 10 mV/°C. In order to accommodate the T200H’s Mini High-Con converter option, a type-K; 5mV/°C output configuration has been added. 297 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Thermistor(s) – Low Temperature Sensing: (e.g. Sample Chamber and Reaction Cell temperatures) MOTHER BOARD A/D Converter (V/F) RELAY PCA Preamplifiers and Signal Conditioning THERMOCOUPLE CONFIGURATION JUMPER (JP5) Themocouple(s) (High Temperature Sensing; e.g. Moly and HiCon Converter temperatures) CPU Cold Junction Compensation DC Control Logic Solid State AC Relays DC HEATERS Figure 8-21: AC HEATERS Heater Control Loop Block Diagram. 8.5.7.3. Thermocouple Inputs and Configuration Jumper (JP5) Although the relay PCA supports two thermocouple inputs, the current T200H/M series analyzers only utilize one. By default, this single thermocouple input is plugged into the TC1 input (J15). TC2 (J16) is currently not used. See Figure 7-4 for location of J15 and J16 CAUTION Avoid damage to the unit: use only the recommended thermocouple type and its specific settings. If in doubt, call T-API Technical Support for information about the correct part. 298 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table8-4: TC INPUT Principles of Operation Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs JUMPER PAIR DESCRIPTION 1 – 11 FUNCTION Gain Selector Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC - IN = J TC gain factor Output Scale Selector Selects preamp gain factor for J or K TC - IN = 5 mV / °C - OUT = K TC gain factor 2 – 12 - OUT = 10 mV / °C TC1 3 – 13 Type J Compensation When present, sets Cold Junction Compensation for J type Thermocouple 4 – 14 Type K Compensation When present, sets Cold Junction Compensation for K type Thermocouple Selects between Isolated and grounded TC - IN = Isolate TC Termination Selector 5 – 15 - OUT = Grounded TC Gain Selector Same as Pins 1 – 11 above. 7 – 17 Output Scale Selector Same as Pins 2 – 12 above. 8 – 18 Type J Compensation Same as Pins 3 – 13 above. 9 – 19 Type K Compensation Same as Pins 4 – 14 above. 10 – 20 Termination Selector Same as Pins 5 – 15 above. Figure 8-22: 07270B DCN6512 Termination Selector 10 – 20 Type J Compensation 9 – 19 Output Scale Selector 7 – 17 Input Gain Selector 6 – 16 Termination Selector 5 – 15 TC2 Type J Compensation 4 – 14 Type J Compensation 3 – 13 Output Scale Selector 2 – 12 Input Gain Selector 1 – 11 TC1 Type J Compensation 8 – 18 TC2 6 – 16 Thermocouple Configuration Jumper (JP5) Pin-Outs 299 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Table 8-5: TC TYPE TERMINATION TYPE OUTPUT SCALE TYPE Typical Thermocouple Settings JUMPER BETWEEN PINS USED ON JUMPER COLOR 5mV / °C 2 – 12 4 – 14 T200H/M with Mini HiCon Converter BROWN T200H/M with Mini HiCon Converter GREY INPUT TC1 (J15) K GROUNDED K ISOLATED 5mV / °C 2 – 12 4 – 14 5 – 15 K ISOLATED 10mV / °C 4 – 14 5 – 15 T200H/M models with Moly Converter PURPLE J ISOLATED 10mV / °C 1 – 11 3 – 13 5 – 15 T200H/M models with Moly Converter RED J GROUNDED 10mV / °C 1 – 11 3 – 13 T200H/M models with Moly Converter GREEN 8.5.7.4. Valve Control The relay board also hosts two valve driver chips, each of which can drive up four valves. The main valve assembly in the T200H/M is the NO/NOX - Auto-zero solenoid valve assembly mounted right in front of the NO2 converter housing. These two valves are actuated with 12 V supplied from the relay board and driven by the CPU through the I2C bus. A second set of valves may be installed if the zero/span valve is enabled in the analyzer. Specialty manifold valves may be present in the analyzer. 300 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.5.8. STATUS LEDS & WATCH DOG CIRCUITRY Thirteen LEDs are located on the analyzer’s relay board to indicate the status of the analyzer’s heating zones and valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator. Table 11-2 shows the states of these LEDs and their respective functionality. D7 (Green) – Zero / Span Valve Status D4 (Yellow) – Manifold Heater D3 (Yellow) – NO 2 Converter Heater D2 (Yellow) – Reaction Cell Heater D8 (Green) – Sample / Cal Valve Status D9 (Green ) – Auto / Zero Valve Status D10 (Green) – NOx / NO Valve Status D5(Yellow) D6 (Yellow) – O 2 Sensor Heater D1 (RED) Watchdog Indicator Figure 8-23: Status LED Locations – Relay PCA 8.5.8.1. Watchdog Indicator (D1) The most important of the status LED’s on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watch-dog LED. It is controlled directly analyzer’s CPU over the I2C bus. Special circuitry on the relay PCA watches the status of D1. Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds, indicating that the CPU or I2C bus has stopped functioning, this Watchdog Circuit automatically shuts all valves and turn off all heaters. 07270B DCN6512 301 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.5.9. MOTHERBOARD This is the largest electronic assembly in the analyzer and is mounted to the rear panel as the base for the CPU board and all I/O connectors. This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A/D conversion, digital input/output, PC104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal processing and is a pass through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals. 8.5.9.1. A to D Conversion Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzer’s various sensors, are converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the analog to digital converter (A/D).Under the control of the CPU, this functional block selects a particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word. The A/D consists of a voltage-to-frequency (V-F) converter, a programmable logic device (PLD), three multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices. The V-F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage. The PLD counts the output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends the result of that count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU. The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but in the is used in uni-polar mode with a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and under-range. This allows signals from -0.05V to +5.05V to be fully converted. For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter: Reference ground and +4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU. The CPU uses these values to compute the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for subsequent conversions. See Section 6.13.5.4 for instructions on performing this calibration. 8.5.9.2. Sensor Inputs The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D converter through the master multiplexer from two connectors on the motherboard. Terminating resistors (100 kΩ ) on each of the inputs prevent cross-talk between the sensor signals. PMT DETECTOR OUTPUT: This signal, output by the PMT preamp PCA, is used in the computation of the NO, NO2 and NOx concentrations displayed at the top right hand corner of the front panel display and output through the instruments analog outputs and com ports. PMT HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL: This input is based on the drive voltage output by the PMT pram board to the PMT’s high voltage power supply (HVPS). It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the voltage setting of the HVPS and stored in the instruments memory as the test function HVPS. HVPS is viewable as a test function (see Section 6.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel. PMT TEMPERATURE: This signal is the output of the thermistor attached to the PMT cold block amplified by the PMT temperature feedback circuit on the PMT preamp 302 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation board. It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the current temperature of the PMT. This measurement is stored in the analyzer. Memory as the test function PMT TEMP and is viewable as a test function (see Section 6.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel. NO2 CONVERTER TEMPERATURE: This parameter is measured with a Type-K thermocouple attached to the NO2 converter heater and its analog signal is amplified by the circuitry on the relay board. It is sent to the CPU and then digitized and is used to calculate the current temperature of the NO2 converter. It is also stored in the DAS and reported as test function MOLY TEMP. SAMPLE GAS PRESSURE: This is measured upstream of the reaction cell, stored in the DAS and reported as SAMPLE. The vacuum gas pressure is measured downstream of the reaction cell and is stored in the DAS and reported as RCEL. For more information on these sensor’s functions see Section 8.3.10. O3 GAS FLOW This sensor measures the gas flow upstream of the ozone generator, stored in the DAS and reported as test function OZONE FL. For more information on this sensor’s function see Section 8.3.10. 8.5.9.3. Thermistor Interface This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negativecoefficient, thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are: REACTION CELL TEMPERATURE SENSOR: A thermistor embedded in the reaction cell manifold. This temperature is used by the CPU to control the reaction cell heating circuit and as a parameter in the temperature/pressure compensation algorithm. This measurement is stored in the analyzer’s DAS and reported as test function RCEL TEMP. BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR: A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It measures the analyzer’s inside temperature. This information is stored by the CPU and can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes through the front panel display. It is also used as part of the NO, NOX and NO2 calculations when the instrument’s Temperature/Pressure Compensation feature is enabled. This measurement is stored in the analyzer. Memory as the test function BOX TEMP and is viewable as a test function (Section 4.2.1) through the analyzer’s front panel. The thermistor inside the PMT cold block as well as the thermistor located on the preamplifier board are both converted to analog signals on the preamplifier board before being sent to the motherboard’s A/D converter. O2 SENSOR TEMPERATURE: For instruments with the oxygen sensor option installed, the thermistor measuring the temperature of the heating block mounted to the sensor is reported as test function O2 TEMP on the front panel. This temperature is maintained at 50° C. 07270B DCN6512 303 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.5.10. ANALOG OUTPUTS The analyzer comes equipped with four Analog Outputs: A1, A2, A3 and a fourth that is a spare. A1 and A2 Outputs: The first two, A1 and A2 are normally set up to operate in parallel so that the same data can be sent to two different recording devices. While the names imply that one should be used for sending data to a chart recorder and the other for interfacing with a data logger, either can be used for both applications. Output Loop-back: All of the functioning analog outputs are connected back to the A/D converter through a Loop-back circuit. This permits the voltage outputs to be calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures (see Section 6.13.5.4) 8.5.11. EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O The external digital I/O performs two functions. The STATUS outputs carry logic-level (5V) signals through an optically isolated 8-pin connector on the rear panel of the analyzer. These outputs convey on/off information about certain analyzer conditions such as CONC VALID. They can be used to interface with certain types of programmable devices (Section 6.15.1.1). The CONTROL inputs can be initiated by applying 5V DC power from an external source such as a PLC or data logger (Section 6.15.1.2). Zero and span calibrations can be initiated by contact closures on the rear panel. 8.5.12. I2C DATA BUS I2C is a two-wire, clocked, bi-directional, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in commercial and consumer electronic systems. A transceiver on the motherboard converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The data are then fed to the relay board and optional analog input circuitry. 8.5.13. POWER-UP CIRCUIT This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during analyzer start-up and sets the analog outputs, external digital I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and the instrument software can establish control. 304 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.6. POWER DISTRIBUTION & CIRCUIT BREAKER The analyzer operates in two main AC power ranges: 100-120 VAC and 220-240 VAC (both ± 10%) between 47 and 63 Hz. A 5 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF switch. In case of a wiring fault or incorrect supply power, the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the analyzer. CAUTION Should the power circuit breaker trip correct the condition causing this situation before turning the analyzer back on. SENSOR SUITES ANALOG SENSORS (e.g. UV sensors, Temp Sensors, Flow Sensors, PMT HVPS, etc.) Sensor Control & I/O Logic AC POWER LOGIC DEVICES Pre-Amplifiers & Amplifiers DC POWER (e.g. CPU, I2C bus, Touchscreen, Display, MotherBoard, etc.) PS 1 +5 VDC PUMP AC HEATERS AC HEATERS for O2 SENSOR UV Lamp P/S ±15 VDC Configuration Jumpers ON / OFF SWITCH Configuration Jumpers Configuration Jumpers PS 2 (+12 VDC) RELAY PCA Solenoid Drivers AC POWER IN MODEL SPECIFIC VALVES (e.g. NOX – NO Valves, Auto-zero valves, etc.) Figure 8-24: OPTIONAL VALVES (e.g. Sample/Cal, Zero/Spans, etc.) TEC and Cooling Fan(s) Power Distribution Block Diagram Under normal operation, the T200H/M draws about 1.5 A at 115 V and 2.0 A during start-up. 07270B DCN6512 305 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.7. FRONT PANEL/DISPLAY INTERFACE ELECTRONICS Users can input data and receive information directly through the front panel touchscreen display. The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board. The touch screen is interfaced to the CPU by means of a touch screen controller that connects to the CPU via the internal USB bus and emulates a computer mouse. Figure 8-25: Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram 8.7.1. FRONT PANEL INTERFACE PCA The front panel interface PCA controls the various functions of the display and touch screen. For driving the display it provides connection between the CPU video controller and the LCD display module. This PCA also contains: 306 power supply circuitry for the LCD display module a USB hub that is used for communications with the touch screen controller and the two front panel USB peripheral device ports the circuitry for powering the display backlight 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.8. SOFTWARE OPERATION The instrument’s core module is a high performance, X86-based microcomputer running Windows CE. Inside Windows CE, special software developed by Teledyne API interprets user commands from the various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks, stores data in the CPU’s various memory devices and calculates the concentration of the gas being sampled. Windows CE API FIRMWARE Memory Handling DAS Records Calibration Data System Status Data Instrument Operations Calibration Procedures Configuration Procedures Autonomic Systems Diagnostic Routines PC/104 BUS INSTRUMENT HARDWARE Interface Handling Sensor input data Measurement Algorithms Figure 8-26: 07270B DCN6512 Display Messages Touchscreen Analog output data RS232 & RS485 External Digital I/O PC/104 BUS Basic Software Operation 307 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.8.1. ADAPTIVE FILTER The T200H/M NOX analyzer software processes sample gas concentration data through a built-in adaptive filter. Unlike other analyzers that average the output signal over a fixed time period, the T200H/M averages over a defined number of samples, with samples being about 8 seconds apart (reflecting the switching time of 4 s each for NO and NOX). This technique is known as boxcar filtering. During operation, the software may automatically switch between two different filters lengths based on the conditions at hand. During constant or nearly constant concentrations, the software, by default, computes an average of the last 42 samples, or approximately 5.6 minutes. This provides smooth and stable readings and averages out a considerable amount of random noise for an overall less noisy concentration reading. If the filter detects rapid changes in concentration the filter reduces the averaging to only 6 samples or about 48 seconds to allow the analyzer to respond more quickly. Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter. First, the instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 50 ppb. Second, the instantaneous concentration must differ from the average in the long filter by at least 10% of the average in the long filter. If necessary, these boxcar filter lengths can be changed between 1 (no averaging) and 1000 samples but with corresponding tradeoffs in rise time and signal-to-noise ratio. Signal noise increases accordingly when in adaptive filter mode, but remains within the official T200H/M specifications as long as the filter size remains at or above 3 samples. In order to avoid frequent switching between the two filter sizes, the analyzer has a delay of 120 s before switching out of adaptive filter mode, even if the two threshold conditions are no longer met. that the filter settings in NOX only or NO only 8.8.2. CALIBRATION - SLOPE AND OFFSET Aside from the hardware calibration of the preamplifier board (Section 13) upon factory checkout, calibration of the analyzer is usually performed in software. During instrument calibration (Section 7) the user enters expected values for span gas concentration through the front panel keypad and supplies the instrument with sample gas of know NO and NOX concentrations. The readings are then compared to the expected values and the software computes values for the new instrument slope and offset for both NO and NOX response. These values are stored in memory for use in calculating the NO, NOX and NO2 concentration of the sample gas. By default, the DAS stores 200 software calibration settings for documentation, review and data analysis. Instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be viewed on the front panel. NO SLOPE, NOX SLOPE, NO OFFS and NOX OFFS are four of the test parameters accessible through the buttons. 308 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Principles of Operation 8.8.3. TEMPERATURE/PRESSURE COMPENSATION (TPC) The software features a compensation of some temperature and pressure changes critical in the measurement of NO and NOX concentration. When the TPC feature is enabled (default setting), the analyzer divides the value of the PMT output signal (PMTDET) by a value called TP_FACTOR. TP_FACTOR is calculated according to the following equation. RCELLTEMP(K) 7 (in Hg) SAMP(in Hg BOXTEMP(K) TP _ FACTOR A B C D 323(K) 298(K) RCEL(in Hg) 29.92(in Hg) (Equation 9-5) Where A, B, C, D are gain functions. TP_FACTOR are: The four parameters used to compute RCELL TEMP: The temperature of the reaction cell, measured in K. RCEL: The pressure of the gas in the vacuum manifold, measured in in-Hg-A. SAMP: The pressure of the sample gas before it reaches the reaction cell, measured in in-Hg-A. This measurement is ~1 in-Hg-A lower than atmospheric pressure. BOX TEMP: The temperature inside the analyzer’s case measured in K. This is typically about 5 K higher than room temperature. The current value of all four of these measurements are viewable as TEST FUNCTIONS through the instrument’s front panel display. that, as RCEL TEMP, BOX TEMP and SAMP pressure increase, the value of TP_FACTOR increases and, hence, the PMTDET value decreases. Conversely, increases in the reaction cell pressure (RCEL) decrease TP_FACTOR and, hence increase the PMTDET value. These adjustments are meant to counter-act changes in the concentrations caused by these parameters. Each of the terms in the above equation is attenuated by a gain function with a numerical value based on a preset gain parameter (shown below in CAPITALIZED ITALICS) normalized to the current value of the parameter being attenuated. The gain functions A, B, C and D are defined as: A = 1 + [( rcell _ temp(K ) 1) × RCTEMP _ TPC _ GAIN ] 323(K ) (Equation 9-6) 5(" Hg ) B = 1+ [( 1) × RCPRESS _ TPC _ GAIN ] rcell _ pressure (" Hg ) (Equation 9-7) rcell _ temp(K ) C = 1+ [( 1) × SPRESS _ TPC _ GAIN ] 323(K ) (Equation 9-8) D = 1+ [( box _ temp(K ) 1) × BXTEMP _ TPC _ GAIN ] 298(K ) (Equation 9-9) The preset gain parameters are set at the factory and may vary from analyzer to analyzer. Section 6.12 describes the method for enabling/disabling the TPC feature. 07270B DCN6512 309 Principles of Operation Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 8.8.4. NO2 CONVERTER EFFICIENCY COMPENSATION Over time, the molybdenum in the NO2 converter oxidizes and looses its original capacity of converting NO2 into NO, eventually resulting in a decreased converter efficiency (CE). Even though we recommend to replace the converter if CE drops below 96%, the analyzer’s firmware allows adjusting minor deviations of the CE from 1.000 and enables reporting the true concentrations of NO2 and NOX. Converter efficiency is stored in the instrument’s memory as a decimal fraction that is multiplied with the NO2 and NOX measurements to calculate the final concentrations for each. Periodically, this efficiency factor must be measured and - if it has changed from previous measurements - entered into the analyzer’s memory (Section 5.2.5). 8.8.5. INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS) The DAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that stores trending data for users to anticipate when an instrument will require service. Large amounts of data can be stored in non-volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further processing with common data analysis programs. The DAS has a consistent user interface among all Teledyne API A-Series, E-Series, and T-Series instruments. New data parameters and triggering events can be added to the instrument as needed. Section 6.7 describes the DAS and its default configuration in detail, Section 6.2 shows the parameters that can be used for predictive diagnostics. Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters, the DAS can store several months of data, which are retained even when the instrument is powered off. However, if new firmware or a new DAS configuration are uploaded to the analyzer, we recommend retrieving data before doing so to avoid data loss. The DAS permits users to access the data through the instrument’s front panel or the remote interface. The latter can automatically report stored data for further processing. APICOM, a user-friendly remote control program is the most convenient way to view, retrieve and store DAS data (Section 6.15.2.8) 310 07270B DCN6512 A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge 9. A PRIMER ON ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE Teledyne API considers the prevention of damage caused by the discharge of static electricity to be extremely important part of making sure that your analyzer continues to provide reliable service for a long time. This section describes how static electricity occurs, why it is so dangerous to electronic components and assemblies as well as how to prevent that damage from occurring. 9.1. HOW STATIC CHARGES ARE CREATED Modern electronic devices such as the types used in the various electronic assemblies of your analyzer, are very small, require very little power and operate very quickly. Unfortunately, the same characteristics that allow them to do these things also make them very susceptible to damage from the discharge of static electricity. Controlling electrostatic discharge begins with understanding how electro-static charges occur in the first place. Static electricity is the result of something called triboelectric charging which happens whenever the atoms of the surface layers of two materials rub against each other. As the atoms of the two surfaces move together and separate, some electrons from one surface are retained by the other. Materials Makes Contact + Materials Separate + + PROTONS = 3 ELECTRONS = 3 PROTONS = 3 ELECTRONS = 3 NET CHARGE = 0 NET CHARGE = 0 Figure 9-1: + PROTONS = 3 ELECTRONS = 2 PROTONS = 3 ELECTRONS = 4 NET CHARGE = -1 NET CHARGE = +1 Triboelectric Charging If one of the surfaces is a poor conductor or even a good conductor that is not grounded, the resulting positive or negative charge cannot bleed off and becomes trapped in place, or static. The most common example of triboelectric charging happens when someone wearing leather or rubber soled shoes walks across a nylon carpet or linoleum tiled floor. With each step, electrons change places and the resulting electro-static charge builds up, quickly reaching significant levels. Pushing an epoxy printed circuit board across a workbench, using a plastic handled screwdriver or even the constant jostling of StyrofoamTM pellets during shipment can also build hefty static charges 07270B DCN6512 311 A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Table 9-1: Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Static Generation Voltages for Typical Activities MEANS OF GENERATION 65-90% RH 10-25% RH 1,500V 35,000V Walking across vinyl tile 250V 12,000V Worker at bench 100V 6,000V Poly bag picked up from bench 1,200V 20,000V Moving around in a chair padded with urethane foam 1,500V 18,000V Walking across nylon carpet 9.2. HOW ELECTRO-STATIC CHARGES CAUSE DAMAGE Damage to components occurs when these static charges come into contact with an electronic device. Current flows as the charge moves along the conductive circuitry of the device and the typically very high voltage levels of the charge overheat the delicate traces of the integrated circuits, melting them or even vaporizing parts of them. When examined by microscope the damage caused by electro-static discharge looks a lot like tiny bomb craters littered across the landscape of the component’s circuitry. A quick comparison of the values in Table 9-1 with the those shown in the Table 9-2, listing device susceptibility levels, shows why Semiconductor Reliability News estimates that approximately 60% of device failures are the result of damage due to electro-static discharge. Table 9-2: Sensitivity of Electronic Devices to Damage by ESD DEVICE DAMAGE SUSCEPTIBILITY VOLTAGE RANGE DAMAGE BEGINS OCCURRING AT CATASTROPHIC DAMAGE AT MOSFET 10 100 VMOS 30 1800 NMOS 60 100 GaAsFET 60 2000 EPROM 100 100 JFET 140 7000 SAW 150 500 Op-AMP 190 2500 CMOS 200 3000 Schottky Diodes 300 2500 Film Resistors 300 3000 This Film Resistors 300 7000 ECL 500 500 SCR 500 1000 Schottky TTL 500 2500 Potentially damaging electro-static discharges can occur: 312 Any time a charged surface (including the human body) discharges to a device. Even simple contact of a finger to the leads of a sensitive device or assembly can allow enough discharge to cause damage. A similar discharge can occur from a charged conductive object, such as a metallic tool or fixture. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge When static charges accumulated on a sensitive device discharges from the device to another surface such as packaging materials, work surfaces, machine surfaces or other device. In some cases, charged device discharges can be the most destructive. A typical example of this is the simple act of installing an electronic assembly into the connector or wiring harness of the equipment in which it is to function. If the assembly is carrying a static charge, as it is connected to ground a discharge will occur. Whenever a sensitive device is moved into the field of an existing electro-static field, a charge may be induced on the device in effect discharging the field onto the device. If the device is then momentarily grounded while within the electrostatic field or removed from the region of the electrostatic field and grounded somewhere else, a second discharge will occur as the charge is transferred from the device to ground. 9.3. COMMON MYTHS ABOUT ESD DAMAGE I didn’t feel a shock so there was no electro-static discharge: The human nervous system isn’t able to feel a static discharge of less than 3500 volts. Most devices are damaged by discharge levels much lower than that. I didn’t touch it so there was no electro-static discharge: Electro-static charges are fields whose lines of force can extend several inches or sometimes even feet away from the surface bearing the charge. It still works so there was no damage: Sometimes the damaged caused by electrostatic discharge can completely sever a circuit trace causing the device to fail immediately. More likely, the trace will be only partially occluded by the damage causing degraded performance of the device or worse, weakening the trace. This weakened circuit may seem to function fine for a short time, but even the very low voltage and current levels of the device’s normal operating levels will eat away at the defect over time causing the device to fail well before its designed lifetime is reached. These latent failures are often the most costly since the failure of the equipment in which the damaged device is installed causes down time, lost data, lost productivity, as well as possible failure and damage to other pieces of equipment or property. Static Charges can’t build up on a conductive surface: There are two errors in this statement. Conductive devices can build static charges if they are not grounded. The charge will be equalized across the entire device, but without access to earth ground, they are still trapped and can still build to high enough levels to cause damage when they are discharged. A charge can be induced onto the conductive surface and/or discharge triggered in the presence of a charged field such as a large static charge clinging to the surface of a nylon jacket of someone walking up to a workbench. 07270B DCN6512 As long as my analyzer is properly installed, it is safe from damage caused by static discharges: It is true that when properly installed the chassis ground of your analyzer is tied to earth ground and its electronic components are prevented from building static electric charges themselves. This does not prevent discharges from static fields built up on other things, like you and your clothing, from discharging through the instrument and damaging it. 313 A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual 9.4. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF STATIC CONTROL It is impossible to stop the creation of instantaneous static electric charges. It is not, however difficult to prevent those charges from building to dangerous levels or prevent damage due to electro-static discharge from occurring. 9.4.1. GENERAL RULES Only handle or work on all electronic assemblies at a properly set up ESD station. Setting up an ESD safe workstation need not be complicated. A protective mat properly tied to ground and a wrist strap are all that is needed to create a basic anti-ESD workstation (see figure 9-2). P r o t e c t iv e M a t W r is t S t r a p G r o u n d P o in t Figure 9-2: Basic anti-ESD Work Station For technicians that work in the field, special lightweight and portable anti-ESD kits are available from most suppliers of ESD protection gear. These include everything needed to create a temporary anti-ESD work area anywhere. Always wear an Anti-ESD wrist strap when working on the electronic assemblies of your analyzer. An anti-ESD wrist strap keeps the person wearing it at or near the same potential as other grounded objects in the work area and allows static charges to dissipate before they can build to dangerous levels. Anti-ESD wrist straps terminated with alligator clips are available for use in work areas where there is no available grounded plug. Also, anti-ESD wrist straps include a current limiting resistor (usually around one meg-ohm) that protects you should you accidentally short yourself to the instrument’s power supply. 314 Simply touching a grounded piece of metal is insufficient. While this may temporarily bleed off static charges present at the time, once you stop touching the grounded metal new static charges will immediately begin to re-build. In some conditions, a charge large enough to damage a component can rebuild in just a few seconds. Always store sensitive components and assemblies in anti-ESD storage bags or bins: Even when you are not working on them, store all devices and assemblies in a closed anti-Static bag or bin. This will prevent induced charges from building up on the device or assembly and nearby static fields from discharging through it. Use metallic anti-ESD bags for storing and shipping ESD sensitive components and assemblies rather than pink-poly bags. The famous, “pink-poly” bags are made of a plastic that is impregnated with a liquid (similar to liquid laundry detergent) which very slowly sweats onto the surface of the plastic creating a slightly conductive layer over the surface of the bag. 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge While this layer may equalizes any charges that occur across the whole bag, it does not prevent the build up of static charges. If laying on a conductive, grounded surface, these bags will allow charges to bleed away but the very charges that build up on the surface of the bag itself can be transferred through the bag by induction onto the circuits of your ESD sensitive device. Also, the liquid impregnating the plastic is eventually used up after which the bag is as useless for preventing damage from ESD as any ordinary plastic bag. Anti-Static bags made of plastic impregnated with metal (usually silvery in color) provide all of the charge equalizing abilities of the pink-poly bags but also, when properly sealed, create a Faraday cage that completely isolates the contents from discharges and the inductive transfer of static charges. Storage bins made of plastic impregnated with carbon (usually black in color) are also excellent at dissipating static charges and isolating their contents from field effects and discharges. Never use ordinary plastic adhesive tape near an ESD sensitive device or to close an anti-ESD bag. The act of pulling a piece of standard plastic adhesive tape, such as Scotch® tape, from its roll will generate a static charge of several thousand or even tens of thousands of volts on the tape itself and an associated field effect that can discharge through or be induced upon items up to a foot away. 9.4.2. BASIC ANTI-ESD PROCEDURES FOR ANALYZER REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE 9.4.2.1. Working at the Instrument Rack When working on the analyzer while it is in the instrument rack and plugged into a properly grounded power supply. 1. Attach your anti-ESD wrist strap to ground before doing anything else. Use a wrist strap terminated with an alligator clip and attach it to a bare metal portion of the instrument chassis. This will safely connect you to the same ground level to which the instrument and all of its components are connected. 2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away. 3. Open the casing of the analyzer and begin work. Up to this point, the closed metal casing of your analyzer has isolated the components and assemblies inside from any conducted or induced static charges. 4. If you must remove a component from the instrument, do not lay it down on a nonESD preventative surface where static charges may lie in wait. 5. Only disconnect your wrist strap after you have finished work and closed the case of the analyzer. 9.4.2.2. Working at an Anti-ESD Work Bench. When working on an instrument of an electronic assembly while it is resting on an antiESD work bench: 1. Plug your anti-ESD wrist strap into the grounded receptacle of the work station before touching any items on the work station and while standing at least a foot or so away. This will allow any charges you are carrying to bleed away through the ground 07270B DCN6512 315 A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual connection of the workstation and prevent discharges due to field effects and induction from occurring. 2. Pause for a second or two to allow any static charges to bleed away. 3. Only open any anti-ESD storage bins or bags containing sensitive devices or assemblies after you have plugged your wrist strap into the workstation. Lay the bag or bin on the workbench surface. Before opening the container, wait several seconds for any static charges on the outside surface of the container to be bled away by the workstation’s grounded protective mat. 4. Do not pick up tools that may be carrying static charges while also touching or holding an ESD Sensitive Device. Only lay tools or ESD-sensitive devices and assemblies on the conductive surface of your workstation. Never lay them down on any non-ESD preventative surface. 5. Place any static sensitive devices or assemblies in anti-static storage bags or bins and close the bag or bin before unplugging your wrist strap. 6. Disconnecting your wrist strap is always the last action taken before leaving the workbench. 9.4.2.3. Transferring Components from Rack to Bench and Back When transferring a sensitive device from an installed Teledyne API analyzer to an AntiESD workbench or back: 1. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation. 2. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin. 3. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate: If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point. If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface. In either case wait several seconds. 4. Place the item in the container. 5. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape. Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields. Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device. 6. Once you have arrived at your destination, allow any surface charges that may have built up on the bag or bin during travel to dissipate: 316 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Connect your wrist strap to ground. If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point. If you are at a anti-ESD work bench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface In either case wait several seconds 7. Open the container. 9.4.2.4. Opening Shipments from Teledyne API Packing materials such as bubble pack and Styrofoam pellets are extremely efficient generators of static electric charges. To prevent damage from ESD, Teledyne API ships all electronic components and assemblies in properly sealed anti-ESD containers. Static charges will build up on the outer surface of the anti-ESD container during shipping as the packing materials vibrate and rub against each other. To prevent these static charges from damaging the components or assemblies being shipped make sure that you always unpack shipments from Teledyne API by: 1. Opening the outer shipping box away from the anti-ESD work area. 2. Carry the still sealed ant-ESD bag, tube or bin to the anti-ESD work area. 3. Follow steps 6 and 7 of Section 9.4.2.3 above when opening the anti-ESD container at the work station. 4. Reserve the anti-ESD container or bag to use when packing electronic components or assemblies to be returned to Teledyne API. 9.4.2.5. Packing Components for Return to Teledyne API Always pack electronic components and assemblies to be sent to Teledyne API in antiESD bins, tubes or bags. WARNING DO NOT use pink-poly bags. NEVER allow any standard plastic packaging materials to touch the electronic component/assembly directly This includes, but is not limited to, plastic bubble-pack, Styrofoam peanuts, open cell foam, closed cell foam, and adhesive tape DO NOT use standard adhesive tape as a sealer. tape Use ONLY anti-ESD 1. Never carry the component or assembly without placing it in an anti-ESD bag or bin. 2. Before using the bag or container allow any surface charges on it to dissipate: 07270B DCN6512 317 A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual If you are at the instrument rack, hold the bag in one hand while your wrist strap is connected to a ground point. If you are at an anti-ESD workbench, lay the container down on the conductive work surface. In either case wait several seconds. 3. Place the item in the container. 4. Seal the container. If using a bag, fold the end over and fastening it with anti-ESD tape. Note 318 Folding the open end over isolates the component(s) inside from the effects of static fields. Leaving the bag open or simply stapling it shut without folding it closed prevents the bag from forming a complete protective envelope around the device. If you do not already have an adequate supply of anti-ESD bags or containers available, Teledyne API Technical Support department will supply them. Follow the instructions listed above for working at the instrument rack and workstation. 07270B DCN6512 A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge GLOSSARY Note: Some terms in this glossary may not occur elsewhere in this manual. Term Description/Definition 10BaseT an Ethernet standard that uses twisted (“T”) pairs of copper wires to transmit at 10 megabits per second (Mbps) 100BaseT same as 10BaseT except ten times faster (100 Mbps) APICOM name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne-API to its customers ASSY Assembly CAS Code-Activated Switch CD Corona Discharge, a frequently luminous discharge, at the surface of a conductor or between two conductors of the same transmission line, accompanied by ionization of the surrounding atmosphere and often by a power loss CE Converter Efficiency, the percentage of light energy that is actually converted into electricity CEM Continuous Emission Monitoring Chemical formulas that may be included in this document: 07270B DCN6512 CO2 carbon dioxide C3H8 propane CH4 methane H2O water vapor HC general abbreviation hydrocarbon HNO3 nitric acid H2S hydrogen sulfide NO nitric oxide NO2 nitrogen dioxide NOX nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO2 NOy nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen: the sum of NOX plus other compounds such as HNO3 (definitions vary widely and may include nitrate (NO3), PAN, N2O and other compounds as well) NH3 ammonia O2 molecular oxygen for 319 A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Term 3 320 O3 SO2 Description/Definition ozone sulfur dioxide cm metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter (replaces the obsolete abbreviation “cc”) CPU Central Processing Unit DAC Digital-to-Analog Converter DAS Data Acquisition System DCE Data Communication Equipment DFU Dry Filter Unit DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other addressable device connected to the network DIAG Diagnostics, the diagnostic settings of the analyzer. DOM Disk On Module, a 44-pin IDE flash drive with up to 128MB storage capacity for instrument’s firmware, configuration settings and data DOS Disk Operating System DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory DR-DOS Digital Research DOS DTE Data Terminal Equipment EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory also referred to as a FLASH chip or drive ESD Electro-Static Discharge ETEST Electrical Test Ethernet a standardized (IEEE 802.3) computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs), facilitating communication and sharing resources FEP Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon® Flash non-volatile, solid-state memory FPI Fabry-Perot Interface: a special light filter typically made of a transparent plate with two reflecting surfaces or two parallel, highly reflective mirrors GFC Gas Filter Correlation 2 I C bus a clocked, bi-directional, serial bus for communication between individual analyzer components IC Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic components such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used in electronic assemblies IP Internet Protocol IZS Internal Zero Span 07270B DCN6512 Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Term A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Description/Definition LAN Local Area Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display LED Light Emitting Diode LPM Liters Per Minute MFC Mass Flow Controller M/R Measure/Reference MOLAR MASS the mass, expressed in grams, of 1 mole of a specific substance. Conversely, one mole is the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in grams as the atomic mass of that substance. EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12 grams. Conversely, one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs 12 grams. Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements. NDIR Non-Dispersive Infrared NIST-SRM National Institute of Standards and Technology - Standard Reference Material PC Personal Computer PCA Printed Circuit Assembly, the PCB with electronic components, ready to use PC/AT Personal Computer / Advanced Technology PCB Printed Circuit Board, the bare board without electronic component PFA Per-Fluoro-Alkoxy, an inert polymer; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon® PLC Programmable Logic Controller, a device that is used to control instruments based on a logic level signal coming from the analyzer PLD Programmable Logic Device PLL Phase Lock Loop PMT Photo Multiplier Tube, a vacuum tube of electrodes that multiply electrons collected and charged to create a detectable current signal P/N (or PN) Part Number PSD Prevention of Significant Deterioration PTFE Poly-Tetra-Fluoro-Ethylene, a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may react on other surfaces; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon® PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing Rdg Reading 07270B DCN6512 321 A Primer on Electro-Static Discharge Teledyne API - Model T200H/T200M Operation Manual Term 322 Description/Definition RS-232 specification and standard describing a serial communication method between DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and DCE (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment) devices, using a maximum cable-length of 50 feet RS-485 specification and standard describing a binary serial communication method among multiple devices at a data rate faster than RS-232 with a much longer distance between the host and the furthest device SAROAD Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data SLAMS State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan SLPM Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure STP Standard Temperature and Pressure TCP/IP Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard communications protocol for Ethernet devices TEC Thermal Electric Cooler TPC Temperature/Pressure Compensation USB Universal Serial Bus: a standard connection method to establish communication between peripheral devices and a host controller, such as a mouse and/or keyboard and a personal computer or laptop VARS Variables, the variable settings of the instrument V-F Voltage-to-Frequency Z/S Zero / Span 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Kd6 (E-Series) APPENDIX A - Software Documentation, V.1.0.3 (T-Series) APPENDIX A - Software Documentation, V.1.0.3 (T-Series) Kd6 (E-Series) APPENDIX A-1: MODELS T200H/M, 200EH/EM SOFTWARE MENU TREES ....................................................... 2 APPENDIX A-2: SETUP VARIABLES FOR SERIAL I/O .......................................................................................... 8 APPENDIX A-3: WARNINGS AND TEST MEASUREMENTS................................................................................ 21 APPENDIX A-4: M SIGNAL I/O DEFINITIONS....................................................................................................... 26 APPENDIX A-5: DAS FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................................................ 31 APPENDIX A-6: TERMINAL COMMAND DESIGNATORS .................................................................................... 35 APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS REGISTER MAP......................................................................................................... 37 07270B DCN6512 A-1 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-1: Models T200H/M, 200EH/EM Software Menu Trees SAMPLE TEST1 A1: A2: A3: A4: User User User User Selectable Range Selectable Range2 Selectable Range2 Selectable Range2 NOX STB SAMP FLW 0ZONE FLW PMT NORM PMT AZERO HVPS RCELL TEMP BOX TEMP PMT TEMP MF TEMP O2 CELL TEMP3 MOLY TEMP RCEL SAMP NOX SLOPE NOX OFFSET NO SLOPE NO OFFSET O2 SLOPE3 O2 OFFSET3 TIME ZERO 1 MSG1 HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH 2 SPAN CONC NOX NO NO2 ZERO CLR SETUP SPAN Press to cycle through the active warning messages. Press to clear an active warning messages. CONC CONV CAL CFG PRIMARY SETUP MENU SET ACAL4 DAS RANGE PASS CLK MORE SECONDARY SETUP MENU 1 Only appears when warning messages are active. User selectable analog outputs A1 – A4 (see Section X.X.X) 3 Only appears if analyzer is equipped with O2 sensor option. 4 Only appears if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve options. 2 Figure A-1: A-2 CALS4 O23 NOX LOW CALZ4 COMM VARS DIAG ALARM Basic Sample Display Menu 07270B DCN6512 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) SAMPLE ACAL 1 CFG PREV DAS NEXT RNGE PASS Go to iDAS Menu Tree MODE OFF MODEL TYPE AND NUMBER PART NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER SOFTWARE REVISION LIBRARY REVISION iCHIP SOFTWARE PREV REVISION HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION 2 CPU TYPE & OS REVISION DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION SAVED ACAL menu and its submenus only appear if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve options. 2 Only appears if Dilution option is active 3 Only appears if Hessen protocol is active. 4 O 2 Modes only appear if analyzer is equipped with O2 sensor option. 5 DOES NOT appear if one of the three O2 modes is selected TIME NEXT UNIT DISABLED ZERO ZERO-LO ZERO-LO-HI ZERO-HI LO LO-HI HI O2 ZERO 4 O2 ZERO-SP 4 O2 SPAN 4 Figure A-2: 07270B DCN6512 MORE ON SEQ 1) SEQ 2) SEQ 3) 1 CLK PPM DIL 3 MGM DATE Go to SECONDARY SETUP Menu Tree SET ON TIMER ENABLE DURATION CALIBRATE 5 RANGE TO CAL OFF STARTING DATE STARTING TIME DELTA DAYS DELTA TIME LOW 5 HIGH 5 Primary Setup Menu (Except DAS) A-3 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) SETUP SAMPLE CFG ACAL1 RNGE PASS CLK MORE DAS VIEW PREV EDIT NEXT ENTER PASSWORD: 818 CONC CALDAT CALCHE HIRES DIAG PREV NEXT CONC CALDAT CALCHE HIRES DIAG VIEW PV10 PREV NEXT NX10 Selects the data point to be viewed Cycles through parameters assigned to this DAS channel PREV NEXT YES2 Cycles through list of available trigger events3 INS DEL YES NEXT NX10 NAME EVENT PARAMETERS REPORT PERIOD NUMBER OF RECORDS RS-232 REPORT CHANNEL ENABLE NO CAL MODE Create/edit the name of the channel Sets the time lapse between each report ON PREV NEXT INS DEL EDIT2 PRNT OFF YES2 Cycles through list of currently active parameters for this channel YES EDIT PRNT SAMPLE MODE PRECISION 1 ACAL menu only appear if analyzer is equipped with Zero/Span or IZS valve options. 2 Cycles through list of available & currently active parameters for this channel PREV NEXT Figure A-3: A-4 INST AVG MIN MAX Editing an existing DAS channel will erase any data stored on the channel options. 3 Changing the event for an existing iDAS channel DOES NOT erase the data stored on the channel. Primary Setup Menu iDAS Submenu 07270B DCN6512 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) SAMPLE CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS SETUP MORE CLK COMM INET1 HESN2 ENTER PASSWORD: 818 Go to COMM / Hessen Menu Tree ID EDIT DIAG VARS COM1 BAUD RATE EDIT PREV DHCP OFF EDIT EDIT 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 QUIET COMPUTER SECURITY HESSEN PROTOCOL E, 7, 1 RS-485 MULTIDROP PROTOCOL ENABLE MODEM ERROR CHECKING XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE HARDWARE HANDSHAKE HARDWARE FIFO COMMAND PROMPT INSTRUMENT IP3 GATEWAY IP3 SUBNET MASK3 TCP PORT4 HOSTNAME5 ON JUMP EDIT PRNT 0) DAS_HOLD_OFF 1) TPC_ENABLE 2) RCELL_SET 3) DYN_ZERO 4) DYN_SPAN 5) CONC_PRECISION 6) CLOCK_ADJ 7) SERVICE_CLEAR 8) TIME_SINCE_SVC 9) SVC_INTERVAL TEST PORT TEST ON NEXT ENTER PASSWORD: 818 Go to DIAG Menu Tree 1 E-Series: only appears if optional Ethernet PCA is installed. NOTE: When Ethernet PCA is present COM2 submenu disappears. 2 Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON (See COM1 & COM2 – MODE submenu above). 3 INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP & SUBNET MASK are only editable when DHCP is OFF. 4 5 Although TCP PORT is editable regardless of the DHCP state, do not change the setting for this property. HOST NAME is only editable when DHCP is ON. OFF Figure A-4: 07270B DCN6512 Secondary Setup Menu COMM and VARS Submenus A-5 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) SAMPLE CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS SETUP MORE CLK COMM HESN2 INET1 ID COM1 COM2 ENTER PASSWORD: 818 ENTER PASSWORD: 818 ENTER PASSWORD: 818 RESPONSE MODE BCC TEXT NOX, 211, REPORTED NO, 212, REPORTED NO2, 213 REPORTED EDIT Go to COMM / VARS Menu Tree GAS LIST STATUS FLAGS NEXT INS DEL YES NO EDIT PRNT GAS TYPE GAS ID REPORTED O2, 214, REPORTED ON OFF 1 E-Series: only appears if Ethernet Option is installed. 2 Only appears if HESSEN PROTOCOL mode is ON. Figure A-5: Go to DIAG Menu Tree CMD PREV A-6 DIAG VARS Set/create unique gas ID number NOX NO NO2 O2 Secondary Setup Menu Hessen Protocol Submenu 07270B DCN6512 APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) SETUP SAMPLE CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE DIAG COMM VARS ENTER PASSWORD: 818 PREV DISPLAY SEQUENCE CONFIGURATION ANALOG CONFIGURATION ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNAL I/O Press ENTR to start test PREV NEXT 0) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) EXT ZERO CAL EXT SPAN CAL EXT LOW SPAN REMOTE RANGE HI MAINT MODE LANG2 SELECT 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25) 26) 27) 28) 29) 30) 31) 32) 33) 34) 35) SAMPLE LED CAL LED FAULT LED AUDIBLE BEEPER ELEC TEST OPTIC TEST PREAMP RANGE HIGH O3GEN STATUS ST SYSTEM OK ST CONC VALID ST HIGH RANGE ST ZERO CAL ST SPAN CAL ST DIAG MODE ST LOW SPAN CAL ST O2 CAL ST SYSTEM OK2 ST CONC ALARM 1 ST CONC ALARM 2 RELAY WATCHDOG RCELL HEATER CONV HEATER MANIFOLD HEATER O2 CELL HEATER ZERO VALVE CAL VALVE AUTO ZERO VALVE NOX VALVE LOW SPAN VALVE HIGH SPAN VALVE FLOW ELECTRICAL OZONE GEN OVERRIDE CALIBRATION TEST OPTIC TEST Press ENTR to start test ON Press ENTR to start test PREV AOUTS CALIBRATED DATA DATA DATA DATA ON OUT OUT OUT OUT NEXT INS PREV AIN CALIBRATED OFF DEL YES Cycles through list of already programmed display sequences 11 21 31 41 SAMP OFF EDIT EDIT NO NOX NXL NXH NO NOL NOH NO2 N2L N2H O2 NEXT DISPLAY DATA RANGE OVER RANGE AUTO 2 CALIBRATED OUTPUT RANGE OFFSET 2 CAL ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF Sets the degree of offset CAL 2 Auto Cal 0.1V 1V 5V 10V 1 Correspond to analog Output A1 – A4 on back of analyzer 2 Only appears if one of the voltage ranges is selected. 3 Manual adjustment menu only appears if either the Auto Cal feature is OFF or the range is set for CURRent. Manual Cal3 DATA SCALE UPDATE Sets the scale width of the reporting range. Cycles through the list of iDAS data types. OZONE PRNT CAL 36 INTERNAL ANALOG to VOLTAGE SIGNALS 61 (see Appendix A) ENTR DISPLAY DURATION Sets time lapse between data updates on selected output CURR U100 Figure A-6: 07270B DCN6512 NEXT UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 DIAG Menu A-7 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Table A-1: Setup Variable Numeric Units Setup Variables Default Value Value Range Description Low Access Level Setup Variables (818 password) DAS_HOLD_OFF Minutes 15 0.5–20 Duration of DAS hold off period. MEASURE_MODE — NO-NOX, NO, NOX 8 NOX, NOXNO, Gas measure mode. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. NON-OX STABIL_GAS — NOX NO, NO2, NOX, Selects gas for stability measurement. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. O2 14, CO2 15 TPC_ENABLE — ON OFF, ON ON enables temperature/ pressure compensation; OFF disables it. DYN_ZERO — OFF ON, OFF ON enables remote dynamic zero calibration; OFF disables it. DYN_SPAN — OFF ON, OFF ON enables remote dynamic span calibration; OFF disables it. IZS_SET 3 ºC 51 30–70 IZS temperature set point and warning limits. AUTO 3, AUTO, 3 4, 5 0, Number of digits to display to the right of the decimal point for concentrations on the display. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. Warnings: 50–52 CONC_PRECISION — 1, 2, 3, 4 STAT_REP_GAS 8 — NOX NO, NO2, NOX, CO2 15, Selects gas to report in TAI protocol status message. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. O2 14 REM_CAL_DURATION 8 Minutes 20 1–120 Duration of automatic calibration initiated from TAI protocol. CLOCK_ADJ Sec./Day 0 -60–60 Time-of-day clock speed adjustment. SERVICE_CLEAR — OFF OFF ON ON resets the service interval timer. TIME_SINCE_SVC Hours 0 0–500000 Time since last service. SVC_INTERVAL Hours 0 0–100000 Sets the interval between service reminders. CAL_ON_NO2 3 — OFF ON, OFF ON enables span calibration on pure NO2; OFF disables it. A-8 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Setup Variable APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Numeric Default Value Description Units Value Range Medium Access Level Setup Variables (929 password) LANGUAGE_SELECT — ENGL ENGL, SECD, EXTN Selects the language to use for the user interface. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. MAINT_TIMEOUT Hours 2 0.1–100 Time until automatically switching out of softwarecontrolled maintenance mode. LATCH_WARNINGS — ON ON, OFF ON enables latching warning messages; OFF disables latching DAYLIGHTSAVING_ENABLE — ON ON, OFF ON enables Daylight Saving Time change; OFF disables DST. BXTEMP_TPC_GAIN — 0 0–10 Box temperature compensation attenuation factor. RCTEMP_TPC_GAIN — 0 0–10 Reaction cell temperature compensation attenuation factor. RCPRESS_TPC_GAIN — 1 0–10 Reaction cell pressure compensation attenuation factor. SPRESS_TPC_GAIN — 1 0–10 Sample pressure compensation attenuation factor. CE_CONC1A — 1 0-10000 Target CE concentration cal pt A for range 1. CONV_EFF1A — 1 0.8–1.2, Converter efficiency cal pt A for range 1. 0.1–2 6, 19 CE_CONC1B 19 — 1 0-10000 Target CE concentration cal pt B for range 1. CONV_EFF1B 19 — 1 0.1–2 Converter efficiency cal pt B for range 1. CE_OFFSET1 19 — 1 0.1–2 CE linearization Offset for range 1. CE_SLOPE1 19 — 1 -10–10 CE linearization Slope for range 1. CE_CONC2A — 1 0-10000 Target CE concentration cal pt A for range 2. CONV_EFF2A — 1 0.8–1.2, Converter efficiency cal pt A for range 2. 0.1–2 6, 19 CE_CONC2B 19 — 1 0-10000 Target CE concentration cal pt B for range 2. CONV_EFF2B 19 — 1 0.1–2 Converter efficiency cal pt B for range 2. CE_OFFSET2 19 — 1 0.1–2 CE linearization Offset for range 2. CE_SLOPE2 19 — 1 -10–10 CE linearization Slope for range 2. NEG_NO2_SUPPRESS — ON ON, OFF ON suppresses negative NO2 in during switching mode; OFF does not suppress negative NO2 readings 07270B DCN6512 A-9 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Setup Variable FILT_SIZE Numeric Units Samples Default Value 42, Value Range Description 1–500 Moving average filter size. 10 4,9 SG_FILT_SIZE Samples 60 1–500 Moving average filter size in single-gas measure modes. FILT_ADAPT — ON ON, OFF ON enables adaptive filter; OFF disables it. FILT_OMIT_DELTA PPM 0.05 3, 0.005–0.13,5, Absolute change in concentration to omit readings. 4 10 , 5–100 4, 0.03 5, 0.1–100 9 0.8 FILT_OMIT_PCT % 10 3,4, 1–100 Percent change in concentration to omit readings. 0.04 3, 0.005–0.13,5, 5 4, 5–100 4, Absolute change in concentration to shorten filter. 8 FILT_SHORT_DELT PPM 9 5 0.015 5, 0.5 FILT_SHORT_PCT % 0.1–100 9 9 8 3,5, 1–100 Percent change in concentration to shorten filter. 1–500 Moving average filter size in adaptive mode. 1–500 Moving average filter size in adaptive mode, in single-gas measure modes. 0–200 Delay before leaving adaptive filter mode. 0–200 Delay before leaving adaptive filter mode in single-gas measure modes. 4 5 , 79 FILT_ASIZE Samples 3, 4 2 , 45 SG_FILT_ASIZE Samples 6, 4 FILT_DELAY Seconds 5 120 3, 4 60 , 200 5, 80 9 SG_FILT_DELAY Seconds 200 5, 60 CO2_DWELL 15 Seconds 1 0.1–30 Dwell time before taking each sample. CO2_FILT_ADAPT 15 — ON ON, OFF ON enables CO2 adaptive filter; OFF disables it. CO2_FILT_SIZE 15 Samples 48 1–300 CO2 moving average filter size. Samples 12 1–300 CO2 moving average filter size in adaptive mode. CO2_FILT_DELTA 15 % 2 0.01–10 Absolute CO2 conc. change to trigger adaptive filter. CO2_FILT_PCT 15 % 10 0.1–100 Percent CO2 conc. change to trigger adaptive filter. CO2_FILT_DELAY 15 Seconds 90 0–300 Delay before leaving CO2 adaptive filter mode. CO2_DIL_FACTOR 15 — 1 0.1–1000 Dilution factor for CO2. Used only if is dilution enabled with FACTORY_OPT variable. CO2_FILT_ASIZE A-10 15 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Setup Variable Numeric Units APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Default Value Value Range Description O2_DWELL 14 Seconds 1 0.1–30 Dwell time before taking each sample. O2_FILT_ADAPT 14 — ON ON, OFF ON enables O2 adaptive filter; OFF disables it. O2_FILT_SIZE 14 Samples 60 1–500 O2 moving average filter size in normal mode. O2_FILT_ASIZE 14 Samples 10 1–500 O2 moving average filter size in adaptive mode. O2_FILT_DELTA 14 % 2 0.1–100 Absolute change in O2 concentration to shorten filter. O2_FILT_PCT 14 % 2 0.1–100 Relative change in O2 concentration to shorten filter. O2_FILT_DELAY 14 Seconds 20 0–300 Delay before leaving O2 adaptive filter mode. O2_DIL_FACTOR 14 — 1 0.1–1000 Dilution factor for O2. Used only if is dilution enabled with FACTORY_OPT variable. NOX_DWELL Seconds 2.5 3, 0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve to NOX position. 0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve to NOX position in single-gas measure modes. 4 4.2 , 4 5, 3.5 9 SG_NOX_DWELL Seconds 4 5, 1 NOX_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30 Number of samples to take in NOX mode. SG_NOX_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30 Number of samples to take in NOX mode in single-gas measure modes. NO_DWELL Seconds 1.5 3,5, 0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve to NO position. 0.1–30 Dwell time after switching valve to NO position in single-gas measure modes. 4.2 4, 3.0 9 SG_NO_DWELL Seconds 1.5 5, 1 NO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30 Number of samples to take in NO mode. SG_NO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–30 Number of samples to take in NO mode in single-gas measure modes. USER_UNITS — PPB 3, 5, PPB 3, 5 PPM 3, 4, 9 PPM 4, 9 , , UGM 3, 5, Concentration units for user interface. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. MGM 3, 4, 9 DIL_FACTOR — 1 1–1000 Dilution factor. Used only if is dilution enabled with FACTORY_OPT variable. AGING_ENABLE20 — OFF ON, OFF ON enables aging offset and slope compensation. 07270B DCN6512 A-11 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Setup Variable Numeric Units Default Value Value Range Description AGING_OFFSET_RATE20 mV/day 0 -1.0–1.0 Aging offset rate of change per day. AGING_SLOPE_RATE20 Change/day 0 -0.01–0.01 Aging slope rate of change per day. AZERO_ENABLE — ON, ON, OFF ON enables auto-zero; OFF disables it. 0–60 Auto-zero frequency. 0.1–60 Dwell time after opening autozero valve. 0–60 Dwell time after closing auto-zero valve. OFF AZERO_FREQ Minutes 8 1 3,5, 24 AZERO_DWELL Seconds 2 3, 4 4 , 1.5 5 AZERO_POST_DWELL Seconds 2 3, 4 4 , 1.5 5 AZERO_SAMPLE Samples 2 1–10 Number of auto-zero samples to average. SG_AZERO_SAMP Samples 2 1–10 Number of auto-zero samples to average in single-gas measure modes. AZERO_FSIZE 3,4,6,8 Samples 15 3, 1–50 Moving average filter size for auto-zero samples. 200 3, 3 0–1000 , 4000 5 0–5000 5 Maximum auto-zero offset allowed. -100–999.99 Target NOX concentration during zero calibration of range 1. 0.01–9999.99 Target NOX concentration during span calibration of range 1. -100–999.99 Target NO concentration during zero calibration of range 1. 0.01–9999.99 Target NO concentration during span calibration of range 1. 0.01–9999.99 Target NO2 concentration during converter efficiency calibration of range 1. 8 AZERO_LIMIT mV 4 NOX_TARG_ZERO1 Conc 0 NOX_SPAN1 Conc. 400, 4 80 , 20 11, 16 9 NO_TARG_ZERO1 Conc 0 NO_SPAN1 Conc. 400, 4 80 , 20 11, 16 9 NO2_SPAN1 Conc. 400, 80 4, 20 11, 16 9 NOX_SLOPE1 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4 NOX slope for range 1. NOX_OFFSET1 mV 0 -10–10 NOX offset for range 1. NO_SLOPE1 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4 NO slope for range 1. NO_OFFSET1 mV 0 -10–10 NO offset for range 1. NOX_TARG_ZERO2 Conc 0 -100–999.99 Target NOX concentration during zero calibration of range 2. A-12 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Setup Variable Numeric Units NOX_SPAN2 Conc. APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Default Value 400, Value Range Description 0.01–9999.99 Target NOX concentration during span calibration of range 2. -100–999.99 Target NO concentration during zero calibration of range 2. 0.01–9999.99 Target NO concentration during span calibration of range 2. 0.01–9999.99 Target NO2 concentration during converter efficiency calibration of range 2. 80 4, 20 11, 16 9 NO_TARG_ZERO2 Conc 0 NO_SPAN2 Conc. 400, 4 80 , 20 11, 16 9 NO2_SPAN2 Conc. 400, 4 80 , 20 11, 16 9 NOX_SLOPE2 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4 NOX slope for range 2. NOX_OFFSET2 mV 0 -10–10 NOX offset for range 2. NO_SLOPE2 PPM/mV 1 0.25–4 NO slope for range 2. mV 0 -10–10 NO offset for range 2. % 12 0.01–100, 0.01–9999.99 Target CO2 concentration during span calibration. CO2 slope. NO_OFFSET2 CO2_TARG_SPAN_CONC 15 16 15 CO2_SLOPE CO2_OFFSET 15 — 1 0.5–5 % 0 -10–10, CO2 offset. -100–100 O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC O2_SLOPE 14 O2_OFFSET 14 RANGE_MODE 14 16 % 20.95 0.1–100 Target O2 concentration during span calibration. — 1 0.5–2 O2 slope. % 0 -10–10 O2 offset. — SNGL SNGL, Range control mode. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. IND, AUTO, REM 4,5 PHYS_RANGE1 PPM 0.1–2500, 2, 9 Low pre-amp range. 9 20 , 5–5000 , 500 4, 5–10000 4 1 11 PHYS_RANGE2 PPM 22, 0.1–2500, 220 9, 5–5000 9, 5500 4, 5–10000 4 100 CONC_RANGE1 Conc. 11 500, 4 CONC_RANGE2 1 Conc. 1–20000, 4 100 , 1–10000 , 20 9 1–500 9 500, 4 100 , 07270B DCN6512 High pre-amp range. 1–20000, 4 1–10000 , D/A concentration range 1 or range for NOX. D/A concentration range 2 or range for NO. A-13 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Setup Variable CONC_RANGE3 1 Numeric Units Conc. Default Value 200 9 1–500 9 500, 1–20000, 4 CO2_RANGE 15 O2_RANGE 14 RCELL_SET Value Range 4 Description D/A concentration range 3 or range for NO2. 100 , 1–10000 , 20 9 1–500 9 % 15 0.1–500 CO2 concentration range. % 100 0.1–500 O2 concentration range. 30–70 Reaction cell temperature set point and warning limits. 30–70 Manifold temperature set point and warning limits. NONE, MOLY, Converter type. “CONV” is minihicon. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. Changing this variable changes CONV_SET accordingly. ºC 50 3,4 , 40 5 Warnings: 45–55 3,4, 35–45 5 MANIFOLD_SET 5 ºC 50 4,6,8, 40 5 Warnings: 45–55 4,6,8, 35–45 5 CONV_TYPE — MOLY 3,5, 9, 4 CONV, O3KL CONV , O3KL CONV_SET ºC 6 315, 200 0–800 Converter temperature set point and warning limits. 0–70 Nominal box temperature set point and warning limits. 6 Warnings: 305–325, 190–210 6 BOX_SET ºC 30 Warnings: 7–48 PMT_SET ºC 7 3,4 , 0–40 55 3,4 PMT temperature warning limits. Set point is not used. , -10–40 5 Warnings: 5–12 3,4, 3–7 5 SFLOW_SET cc/m 500, 0–1000, 4 290 , 100–1000 4, 9 Sample flow warning limits. Set point is not used. 360 4+14, 250 9, 320 9+14 Warnings: 350–600, 200–600 4,9, 300–700 4+14, 9+14 A-14 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Setup Variable Numeric Units APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Default Value SAMP_FLOW_SLOPE — 1 OFLOW_SET cc/m 80, Value Range Slope term to correct sample flow rate. 0.001–100 250 0–500, 4, 9 100–1000 Description 4, 9 Ozone flow warning limits. Set point is not used. Warnings: 50–150, 200–600 4, 9 OZONE_FLOW_SLOPE — 1 0.001–100 Slope term to correct ozone flow rate. RCELL_PRESS_CONST2 — 3.6 -99.999– 99.999 Reaction cell pressure compensation constant #2. RCELL_PRESS_CONST3 — -1.1 -99.999– 99.999 Reaction cell pressure compensation constant #3. PRESS_FILT_SIZE Samples 3, 1–20, Sample and reaction cell pressure moving average filter size. 30 5 1–120 5 PRESS_SAMP_FREQ 5 Seconds 20 1–120 Sample and reaction cell pressure sampling frequency. RS232_MODE — 0 0–65535 RS-232 COM1 mode flags. Add values to combine flags. 1 = quiet mode 2 = computer mode 4 = enable security 16 = enable Hessen protocol 12 32 = enable multidrop 64 = enable modem 128 = ignore RS-232 line errors 256 = disable XON / XOFF support 512 = disable hardware FIFOs 1024 = enable RS-485 mode 2048 = even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit 4096 = enable command prompt BAUD_RATE — 115200 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 RS-232 COM1 baud rate. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. MODEM_INIT — “AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0” Any character in the allowed character set. Up to 100 characters long. RS-232 COM1 modem initialization string. Sent verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up or manually. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. 07270B DCN6512 A-15 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Setup Variable RS232_MODE2 Numeric Units BitFlag Default Value 0, Value Range 0–65535 38 Description RS-232 COM2 mode flags. (Same settings as RS232_MODE, plus these when MODBUS option is installed:) 8192 = enable dedicated MODBUS ASCII protocol 16384 = enable dedicated MODBUS RTU or TCP protocol BAUD_RATE2 — 19200, 9600 8 300, 1200, 2400, RS-232 COM2 baud rate. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 MODEM_INIT2 — “AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0” Any character in the allowed character set. Up to 100 characters long. RS-232 COM2 modem initialization string. Sent verbatim plus carriage return to modem on power up or manually. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. RS232_PASS Password 940331 0–999999 RS-232 log on password. MACHINE_ID ID 200 0–9999 Unique ID number for instrument. COMMAND_PROMPT — “Cmd> ” Any character in the allowed character set. Up to 100 characters long. RS-232 interface command prompt. Displayed only if enabled with RS232_MODE variable. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. TEST_CHAN_ID — NONE NONE, Diagnostic analog output ID. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. PMT DETECTOR, OZONE FLOW, SAMPLE FLOW, SAMPLE PRESSURE, RCELL PRESSURE, RCELL TEMP, MANIFOLD TEMP, IZS TEMP, CONV TEMP, PMT TEMP, BOX TEMP, HVPS VOLTAGE A-16 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Setup Variable REMOTE_CAL_MODE 3 Numeric Units — APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Default Value LOW Value Range LOW, HIGH, CO2 15, Description Range to calibrate during remote calibration. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. O2 14 PASS_ENABLE — OFF ON, OFF ON enables passwords; OFF disables them. STABIL_FREQ Seconds 10 1–300 Stability measurement sampling frequency. STABIL_SAMPLES Samples 25 2–40 Number of samples in concentration stability reading. HVPS_SET Volts 650 3,5, 0–2000 High voltage power supply warning limits. Set point is not used. 0–100 Reaction cell pressure warning limits. Set point is not used. 4 550 , 600 9 Warnings: 400–900 3,5 , 400–700 4, 450–750 9 RCELL_PRESS_SET In-Hg 6 Warnings: 0.5–15 RCELL_CYCLE Seconds 10 0.5–30 Reaction cell temperature control cycle period. RCELL_PROP 1/ºC 1 0–10 Reaction cell PID temperature control proportional coefficient. RCELL_INTEG — 0.1 0–10 Reaction cell PID temperature control integral coefficient. RCELL_DERIV — 0 (disabled) 0–10 Reaction cell PID temperature control derivative coefficient. MANIFOLD_CYCLE 5 Seconds 5 0.5–30 Manifold temperature control cycle period. MANIFOLD_PROP 5 1/ºC 0.2 0–10 Manifold PID temperature control proportional coefficient. MANIFOLD_INTEG 5 — 0.1 0–10 Manifold PID temperature control integral coefficient. MANIFOLD_DERIV 5 — 0.5 0–10 Manifold PID temperature control derivative coefficient. IZS_CYCLE 3 Seconds 2 0.5–30 IZS temperature control cycle period. IZS_PROP 3 1/ºC 1 0–10 IZS temperature PID proportional coefficient. IZS_INTEG 3 — 0.03 0–10 IZS temperature PID integral coefficient. IZS_DERIV 3 — 0 0–10 IZS temperature PID derivative coefficient. 07270B DCN6512 A-17 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Setup Variable CO2_CELL_SET 15 Numeric Units ºC Default Value 50 Value Range Description 30–70 CO2 sensor cell temperature set point and warning limits. Warnings: 45–55 15 Seconds 10 0.5–30 CO2 cell temperature control cycle period. CO2_CELL_PROP 15 — 1 0–10 CO2 cell PID temperature control proportional coefficient. CO2_CELL_INTEG 15 — 0.1 0–10 CO2 cell PID temperature control integral coefficient. CO2_CELL_DERIV 15 — 0 (disabled) 0–10 CO2 cell PID temperature control derivative coefficient. STD_O2_CELL_TEMP 14 ºK 323 1–500 Standard O2 cell temperature for temperature compensation. O2_CELL_SET 14 ºC 50 30–70 O2 sensor cell temperature set point and warning limits. CO2_CELL_CYCLE Warnings: 45–55 14 Seconds 10 0.5–30 O2 cell temperature control cycle period. O2_CELL_PROP 14 — 1 0–10 O2 cell PID temperature control proportional coefficient. O2_CELL_INTEG 14 — 0.1 0–10 O2 cell PID temperature control integral coefficient. O2_CELL_DERIV 14 — 0 (disabled) 0–10 O2 cell PID temperature control derivative coefficient. STAT_REP_PERIOD 8 Seconds 1 0.5–120 TAI protocol status message report period. SERIAL_NUMBER — “00000000 ” Any character in the allowed character set. Up to 100 characters long. Unique serial number for instrument. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. DISP_INTENSITY — HIGH HIGH, Front panel display intensity. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. O2_CELL_CYCLE MED, LOW, DIM I2C_RESET_ENABLE ALARM_TRIGGER A-18 17 — ON OFF, ON I2C bus automatic reset enable. Cycles 3 1–100 Number of times concentration must exceed limit to trigger alarm. 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Setup Variable CLOCK_FORMAT Numeric Units — APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Default Value “TIME=%H:% M:%S” Value Range Any character in the allowed character set. Up to 100 characters long. Description Time-of-day clock format flags. Enclose value in double quotes (") when setting from the RS-232 interface. “%a” = Abbreviated weekday name. “%b” = Abbreviated month name. “%d” = Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31). “%H” = Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23). “%I” = Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12). “%j” = Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366). “%m” = Month as decimal number (01 – 12). “%M” = Minute as decimal number (00 – 59). “%p” = A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock. “%S” = Second as decimal number (00 – 59). “%w” = Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6; Sunday is 0). “%y” = Year without century, as decimal number (00 – 99). “%Y” = Year with century, as decimal number. “%%” = Percent sign. FACTORY_OPT — 0, 512 0–0x7fffffff 5,6 Factory option flags. Add values to combine flags. 1 = enable dilution factor 2 = display units in concentration field 4 = zero/span valves installed 8 18 = low span valve installed 3 16 = IZS and zero/span valves installed 32 = enable software-controlled maintenance mode 64 = display temperature in converter warning message 128 = enable switch-controlled maintenance mode 256 = not used 512 = enable manifold temperature control 1024 = enable concentration alarms 17 2048 = enable Internet option 22 07270B DCN6512 A-19 APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O Setup Variable Numeric Units T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Default Value Value Range Description 4096 = suppress front panel warnings 8192 = enable non-zero offset calibration 16384 = enable pressurized zero calibration 32768 = enable pressurized span calibration 0x10000 = enable external analog inputs 21 1 Multi-range modes. 2 Hessen protocol. 3 T200, M200E. 4 T200H, M200EH. 5 T200U, M200EU. 6 M200EUP. 7 “De-tuned” instrument. 8 TAI protocol 9 T200M, M200EM. 10 User-configurable D/A output option. 11 SUNLAW special. 12 Must power-cycle instrument for these options to fully take effect. 14 O2 option. 15 CO2 option. 16 CO2 PPM sensor. 17 Concentration alarm option. 18 Low span option. 19 2 point Converter Efficiency option. 20 Aging Compensation option. 21 T Series external analog input option. 22 E Series internet option. A-20 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements Table A-2: Warning Messages Name 1 Message Text Description Warnings WSYSRES SYSTEM RESET Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU was reset. WDATAINIT DATA INITIALIZED Data storage was erased. WCONFIGINIT CONFIG INITIALIZED Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or erased. WNOXALARM1 9 NOX ALARM 1 WARN NOX concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded WNOXALARM2 9 NOX ALARM 2 WARN NOX concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded WNOALARM1 9 NO ALARM 1 WARN NO concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded WNOALARM2 9 NO ALARM 2 WARN NO concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded 9 NO2 ALARM 1 WARN NO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded WNO2ALARM2 9 NO2 ALARM 2 WARN NO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded WO2ALARM1 5+9 O2 ALARM 1 WARN O2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded WO2ALARM2 5+9 O2 ALARM 2 WARN O2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded 8+9 CO2 ALARM 1 WARN CO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded WCO2ALARM2 8+9 CO2 ALARM 2 WARN CO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded WSAMPFLOW SAMPLE FLOW WARN Sample flow outside of warning limits specified by SFLOW_SET variable. WOZONEFLOW OZONE FLOW WARNING Ozone flow outside of warning limits specified by OFLOW_SET variable. WOZONEGEN OZONE GEN OFF Ozone generator is off. This is the only warning message that automatically clears itself. It clears itself when the ozone generator is turned on. WRCELLPRESS RCELL PRESS WARN Reaction cell pressure outside of warning limits specified by RCELL_PRESS_SET variable. WBOXTEMP BOX TEMP WARNING Chassis temperature outside of warning limits specified by BOX_SET variable. WRCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP WARNING Reaction cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by RCELL_SET variable. WMANIFOLDTEMP 4 MANIFOLD TEMP WARN Bypass or dilution manifold temperature outside of warning limits specified by MANIFOLD_SET variable. WCO2CELLTEMP 8 CO2 CELL TEMP WARN CO2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by CO2_CELL_SET variable. WO2CELLTEMP 5 O2 CELL TEMP WARN O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits specified by O2_CELL_SET variable. WIZSTEMP IZS TEMP WARNING IZS temperature outside of warning limits specified by IZS_SET variable. WNO2ALARM1 WCO2ALARM1 07270B DCN6512 A-21 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements Name 1 Message Text Description Warnings WCONVTEMP CONV TEMP WARNING Converter temperature outside of warning limits specified by CONV_SET variable. WPMTTEMP PMT TEMP WARNING PMT temperature outside of warning limits specified by PMT_SET variable. WAUTOZERO AZERO WRN XXX.X MV WPREREACT 11 PRACT WRN XXX.X MV 11 Auto-zero reading above limit specified by AZERO_LIMIT variable. Value shown in message indicates auto-zero reading at time warning was displayed. WHVPS HVPS WARNING High voltage power supply output outside of warning limits specified by HVPS_SET variable. WDYNZERO CANNOT DYN ZERO Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN_ZERO was set to ON. WDYNSPAN CANNOT DYN SPAN Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN_SPAN was set to ON. WREARBOARD REAR BOARD NOT DET Rear board was not detected during power up. WRELAYBOARD RELAY BOARD WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board. WFRONTPANEL FRONT PANEL WARN Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel. WANALOGCAL ANALOG CAL WARNING The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated. 1 The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”. 2 Engineering firmware only. 3 Current instrument units. 4 Factory option. 5 O2 option. 6 User-configurable D/A output option. 7 Optional. 8 CO2 option. 9 Concentration alarm option. 10 M200EUP. 11 T200U, T200U_NOy, M200EU and M200EU_NOy. 12 T-Series External analog input option. A-22 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Table A-3: Test Measurement Name APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements Test Measurements Message Text Description Test measurements NONOXCONC NO=396.5 NOX=396.5 3 Simultaneously displays NO and NOX concentrations. RANGE not 6 RANGE=500.0 PPB 3 D/A range in single or auto-range modes. RANGE1 not 6 RANGE2 not 6 RANGE3 not 6 STABILITY RANGE1=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #1 range in independent range mode. RANGE2=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #2 range in independent range mode. RANGE3=500.0 PPB 3 D/A #3 range in independent range mode. NOX STB=0.0 PPB 3 O2 STB=0.0 PCT 5 CO2 STB=0.0 PCT 8 Concentration stability (standard deviation based on setting of STABIL_FREQ and STABIL_SAMPLES). Select gas with STABIL_GAS variable. RESPONSE 2 RSP=8.81(1.30) SEC Instrument response. Length of each signal processing loop. Time in parenthesis is standard deviation. SAMPFLOW SAMP FLW=460 CC/M Sample flow rate. OZONEFLOW OZONE FL=87 CC/M Ozone flow rate. PMT PMT=800.0 MV Raw PMT reading. NORMPMT NORM PMT=793.0 MV PMT reading normalized for temperature, pressure, auto-zero offset, but not range. AUTOZERO AZERO=1.3 MV Auto-zero offset. HVPS HVPS=650 V High voltage power supply output. RCELLTEMP RCELL TEMP=50.8 C Reaction cell temperature. BOX TEMP=28.2 C Internal chassis temperature. REM BOX TMP=30.1 C Remote chassis temperature. PMTTEMP PMT TEMP=7.0 C PMT temperature. MANIFOLDTEMP 4 MF TEMP=50.8 C Bypass or dilution manifold temperature. CO2 CELL TEMP=50.8 C CO2 sensor cell temperature. O2 CELL TEMP=50.8 C O2 sensor cell temperature. BOXTEMP REMBOXTEMP 10 CO2CELLTEMP O2CELLTEMP 8 5 IZSTEMP IZS TEMP=50.8 C IZS temperature. CONVTEMP MOLY TEMP=315.0 C Converter temperature. Converter type is MOLY, CONV, or O3KL. SAMPRESTTEMP 10 SMP RST TMP=49.8 C Sample restrictor temperature. RCELLPRESS RCEL=7.0 IN-HG-A Reaction cell pressure. SAMPPRESS SAMP=29.9 IN-HG-A Sample pressure. NOXSLOPE NOX SLOPE=1.000 NOX slope for current range, computed during zero/span calibration. NOXOFFSET NOX OFFS=0.0 MV NOX offset for current range, computed during zero/span calibration. NOSLOPE NO SLOPE=1.000 NO slope for current range, computed during zero/span calibration. NOOFFSET NO OFFS=0.0 MV NO offset for current range, computed during zero/span calibration. 07270B DCN6512 A-23 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements Test Measurement Name Message Text Description Test measurements NO2=0.0 PPB 3 NO2 NO2_1 7 NO2_2 7 NO2 concentration for current range. NO2_1=0.0 PPB 3 NO2 concentration for range #1. NO2_2=0.0 PPB 3 NO2 concentration for range #2. NOX NOX=396.5 PPB 3 NOX_1 7 NOX_1=396.5 PPB 3 NOX concentration for range #1. NOX_2 7 NOX_2=396.5 PPB 3 NOX concentration for range #2. NO NO=396.5 PPB 3 NO concentration for current range. 3 NO concentration for range #1. NO_2=396.5 PPB 3 NO concentration for range #2. CO2 RANGE=100.00 PCT D/A #4 range for CO2 concentration. CO2 SLOPE=1.000 CO2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration. CO2OFFSET 8 CO2 OFFSET=0.000 CO2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration. CO2 8 CO2=15.0 % CO2 concentration. NO_1 7 NOX concentration for current range. NO_1=396.5 PPB NO_2 7 CO2RANGE CO2SLOPE O2RANGE 8, not 6 8 5, not 6 O2 RANGE=100.00 PCT D/A #4 range for O2 concentration. O2SLOPE 5 O2 SLOPE=1.000 O2 slope computed during zero/span calibration. O2OFFSET 5 O2 OFFSET=0.00 % O2 offset computed during zero/span calibration. O2 5 O2=0.00 % O2 concentration. TEST=3627.1 MV Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output, selected with TEST_CHAN_ID variable. XIN1 12 AIN1=37.15 EU External analog input 1 value in engineering units. XIN2 12 AIN2=37.15 EU External analog input 2 value in engineering units. XIN3 12 AIN3=37.15 EU External analog input 3 value in engineering units. XIN4 12 AIN4=37.15 EU External analog input 4 value in engineering units. XIN5 12 AIN5=37.15 EU External analog input 5 value in engineering units. XIN6 12 AIN6=37.15 EU External analog input 6 value in engineering units. XIN7 12 AIN7=37.15 EU External analog input 7 value in engineering units. XIN8 12 AIN8=37.15 EU External analog input 8 value in engineering units. TESTCHAN A-24 5,6,8 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Test Measurement Name APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Measurements Message Text Description Test measurements CLOCKTIME TIME=10:38:27 Current instrument time of day clock. 1 The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”. 2 Engineering firmware only. 3 Current instrument units. 4 Factory option. 5 O2 option. 6 User-configurable D/A output option. 7 Optional. 8 CO2 option. 9 Concentration alarm option. 10 M200EUP. 11 T200U, T200U_NOy, M200EU and M200EU_NOy. 12 T-Series External analog input option. 07270B DCN6512 A-25 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions Table A-4: Signal Name Signal I/O Definitions Bit or Channel Number Description Internal inputs, U7, J108, pins 9–16 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex 0–7 Spare Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex ELEC_TEST 0 OPTIC_TEST 1 1 = electrical test on 0 = off 1 = optic test on 0 = off PREAMP_RANGE_HI 2 1 = select high preamp range 0 = select low range O3GEN_STATUS 3 0 = ozone generator on 1 = off I2C_RESET 4–5 Spare 6 1 = reset I2C peripherals 0 = normal I2C_DRV_RST 7 0 = hardware reset 8584 chip 1 = normal Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 321 hex EXT_ZERO_CAL 0 0 = go into zero calibration 1 = exit zero calibration EXT_SPAN_CAL 1 0 = go into span calibration 1 = exit span calibration EXT_LOW_SPAN 20 2 0 = go into low span calibration 1 = exit low span calibration REMOTE_RANGE_HI 21 3 CAL_MODE_0 5 0 CAL_MODE_1 1 Three inputs, taken as binary number (CAL_MODE_2 is MSB) select calibration level and range: CAL_MODE_2 2 0 & 7 = Measure 0 = remote select high range 1 = default range 1 = Zero, range #3 2 = Span, range #3 3 = Zero, range #2 4 = Span, range #2 5 = Zero, range #1 6 = Span, range #1 4–5 Spare 6–7 Always 1 Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 325 hex 0–5 Spare 6–7 Always 1 Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 321 hex 0–7 A-26 Spare 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Signal Name APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions Bit or Channel Number Description Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9–12 = bits 0–3, default I/O address 325 hex 0–3 Spare Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1–12 = bits 4–7, default I/O address 325 hex ST_SYSTEM_OK2 12 4 1 = system OK 0 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode MB_RELAY_36 18 Controlled by MODBUS coil register OUT_CAL_MODE 13 1 = calibration mode 0 = measure mode ST_CONC_ALARM_1 17 5 1 = conc. limit 1 exceeded 0 = conc. OK MB_RELAY_37 18 OUT_SPAN_CAL Controlled by MODBUS coil register 13 1 = span calibration 0 = zero calibration ST_CONC_ALARM_2 17 6 1 = conc. limit 2 exceeded 0 = conc. OK MB_RELAY_38 OUT_PROBE_1 18 Controlled by MODBUS coil register 13 0 = select probe #1 1 = not selected ST_HIGH_RANGE2 19 7 1 = high auto-range in use (mirrors ST_HIGH_RANGE status output) 0 = low auto-range MB_RELAY_39 18 OUT_PROBE_2 Controlled by MODBUS coil register 13 0 = select probe #2 1 = not selected A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 323 hex ST_SYSTEM_OK 0 0 = system OK 1 = any alarm condition ST_CONC_VALID 1 0 = conc. valid 1 = conc. filters contain no data ST_HIGH_RANGE 2 0 = high auto-range in use ST_ZERO_CAL 3 0 = in zero calibration 1 = low auto-range 1 = not in zero ST_SPAN_CAL 4 0 = in span calibration 1 = not in span ST_DIAG_MODE 5 0 = in diagnostic mode 1 = not in diagnostic mode ST_LOW_SPAN_CAL 20 6 0 = in low span calibration 1 = not in low span ST_O2_CAL 11 7 0 = in O2 calibration mode 1 = in measure or other calibration mode 07270B DCN6512 A-27 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions Signal Name Bit or Channel Number Description B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 324 hex ST_CO2_CAL 15 0 0 = in CO2 calibration mode 1 = in measure or other calibration mode 1–7 Spare Front panel I2C keyboard, default I2C address 4E hex MAINT_MODE 5 (input) 0 = maintenance mode 1 = normal mode LANG2_SELECT 6 (input) 0 = select second language 1 = select first language (English) SAMPLE_LED 8 (output) 0 = sample LED on CAL_LED 9 (output) 0 = cal. LED on 1 = off 1 = off FAULT_LED 10 (output) 0 = fault LED on 1 = off AUDIBLE_BEEPER 14 (output) 0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only) 1 = off Relay board digital output (PCF8575), default I2C address 44 hex RELAY_WATCHDOG 0 RCELL_HEATER 1 Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep relay board active 0 = reaction cell heater on 1 = off CONV_HEATER 2 0 = converter heater on 1 = off 10 MANIFOLD_HEATER 3 0 = bypass or dilution manifold heater on 1 = off IZS_HEATER 4 0 = IZS heater on 1 = off CO2_CELL_HEATER 15 0 = CO2 sensor cell heater on 1 = off O2_CELL_HEATER 11 5 0 = O2 sensor cell heater on 1 = off 6 SPAN_VALVE 0 = let span gas in 1 = let zero gas in ZERO_VALVE 3 0 = let zero gas in 1 = let sample gas in CAL_VALVE 7 0 = let cal. gas in 1 = let sample gas in AUTO_ZERO_VALVE 8 0 = let zero air in 1 = let sample gas in NOX_VALVE 9 0 = let NOX gas into reaction cell 1 = let NO gas into reaction cell NO2_CONVERTER 4 0 = turn on NO2 converter (measure NOx) 1 = turn off NO2 converter (measure NO) A-28 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) Signal Name LOW_SPAN_VALVE 20 APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions Bit or Channel Number 10 Description 0 = let low span gas in 1 = let high span/sample gas in SPAN_VALVE 3 11 0 = let span gas in 1 = let sample gas in NO2_VALVE 16 12 0 = let NO2 gas into reaction cell 1 = let NOX/NO gas into reaction cell VENT_VALVE 7 0 = open vent valve 1 = close vent valve 13–15 Spare Rear board primary MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 32A hex PMT_SIGNAL 0 PMT detector HVPS_VOLTAGE 1 HV power supply output PMT_TEMP 2 PMT temperature 3 CO2 concentration sensor 4 Temperature MUX 5 Spare 6 O2 concentration sensor SAMPLE_PRESSURE 7 Sample pressure RCELL_PRESSURE 8 Reaction cell pressure REF_4096_MV 9 4.096V reference from MAX6241 OZONE_FLOW 10 Ozone flow rate 11 Diagnostic test input CO2_SENSOR O2_SENSOR 15 11 TEST_INPUT_11 SAMP_REST_TEMP 4 Sample restrictor temperature CONV_TEMP 12 Converter temperature TEST_INPUT_13 13 Diagnostic test input 14 DAC loopback MUX 15 Ground reference REF_GND Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 326 hex BOX_TEMP 0 Internal box temperature RCELL_TEMP 1 Reaction cell temperature 2 IZS temperature IZS_TEMP CO2_CELL_TEMP 15 CO2 sensor cell temperature 3 Spare O2_CELL_TEMP 11 4 O2 sensor cell temperature TEMP_INPUT_5 5 Diagnostic temperature input REM_BOX_TEMP 4 Remote box temperature TEMP_INPUT_6 6 Diagnostic temperature input MANIFOLD_TEMP 10 7 Bypass or dilution manifold temperature Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs, MUX default I/O address 327 hex DAC_CHAN_1 0 DAC channel 0 loopback DAC_CHAN_2 1 DAC channel 1 loopback DAC_CHAN_3 2 DAC channel 2 loopback DAC_CHAN_4 3 DAC channel 3 loopback 07270B DCN6512 A-29 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-4: M Signal I/O Definitions Signal Name Bit or Channel Number Description Rear board analog outputs, default I/O address 327 hex 0 CONC_OUT_1 DATA_OUT_1 6 Data output #1 CONC_OUT_2 DATA_OUT_2 1 6 2 6 DATA_OUT_4 Concentration output #3 (NO2) Data output #3 TEST_OUTPUT 3 11, 15 CONC_OUT_4 Concentration output #2 (NO) Data output #2 CONC_OUT_3 DATA_OUT_3 Concentration output #1 (NOX) Test measurement output Concentration output #4 (CO2 or O2) 6 Data output #4 External analog input board, default I2C address 5C hex XIN1 22 0 External analog input 1 XIN2 22 1 External analog input 2 XIN3 22 2 External analog input 3 XIN4 22 3 External analog input 4 XIN5 22 4 External analog input 5 XIN6 22 5 External analog input 6 XIN7 22 6 External analog input 7 XIN8 22 7 External analog input 8 1 Hessen protocol. 2 T200H, M200EH. 3 T200U, M200EU. 4 M200EUP. 5 Triple-range option. 6 User-configurable D/A output option. 7 Pressurized zero/span option. 8 Dual NOX option. 9 MAS special. 10 Factory option. 11 O2 option. 12 Optional 13 Probe-select special. 15 CO2 option. 16 NO2 valve option. 17 Concentration alarm option. 18 MODBUS option. 19 High auto range relay option 20 Low span option. 21 Remote range control option 22 T-Series external analog input option. A-30 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions Table A-5: DAS Trigger Events Name Description ATIMER Automatic timer expired EXITZR Exit zero calibration mode EXITLS 1 Exit low span calibration mode EXITHS Exit high span calibration mode EXITMP Exit multi-point calibration mode EXITC2 4 EXITO2 Exit CO2 calibration mode 3 Exit O2 calibration mode SLPCHG CO2SLC Slope and offset recalculated 4 CO2 slope and offset recalculated O2SLPC 3 O2 slope and offset recalculated EXITDG Exit diagnostic mode CONC1W 5 CONC2W 5 Concentration exceeds limit 1 warning Concentration exceeds limit 2 warning AZEROW Auto-zero warning OFLOWW Ozone flow warning RPRESW Reaction cell pressure warning RTEMPW MFTMPW Reaction cell temperature warning 2 Bypass or dilution manifold temperature warning C2TMPW 4 CO2 sensor cell temperature warning O2TMPW 3 O2 sensor cell temperature warning IZTMPW IZS temperature warning CTEMPW Converter temperature warning PTEMPW PMT temperature warning SFLOWW Sample flow warning BTEMPW Box temperature warning HVPSW HV power supply warning 1 Low span option. 2 Factory option. 3 O2 option. 4 CO2 option. 5 Concentration alarm option. 07270B DCN6512 A-31 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions Table A-6: Description 9 Name PMTDET DAS Parameters (Data Types) Units PMT detector reading mV Raw PMT detector reading for NOX mV Raw PMT detector reading for NO mV NOX slope for range #1 — NOX slope for range #2 — NOX slope for range #3 — NOSLP1 NO slope for range #1 — NOSLP2 NO slope for range #2 — NO slope for range #3 — NXOFS1 NOX offset for range #1 mV NXOFS2 NOX offset for range #2 mV NXOFS3 7 NOX offset for range #3 mV NOOFS1 NO offset for range #1 mV RAWNOX 6 6 RAWNO NXSLP1 NXSLP2 NXSLP3 7 NOSLP3 7 NOOFS2 NO offset for range #2 mV NOOFS3 7 NO offset for range #3 mV CO2SLP 5 CO2 slope — CO2OFS 5 CO2 offset % O2SLPE 3 O2 slope — 3 O2 offset % NXZSC1 NOX concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 2 NXZSC2 NOX concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 2 NXZSC3 7 NOX concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 2 NOZSC1 NO concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 2 NOZSC2 NO concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 2 NOZSC3 7 NO concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 2 N2ZSC1 NO2 concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 2 N2ZSC2 NO2 concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 2 N2ZSC3 7 NO2 concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB CO2ZSC 5 CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset % O2ZSCN 3 O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset % O2OFST A-32 2 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions Description 9 Name Units NXCNC1 NOX concentration for range #1 PPB 2 NXCNC2 NOX concentration for range #2 PPB 2 NXCNC3 7 NOX concentration for range #3 PPB 2 NOCNC1 NO concentration for range #1 PPB 2 NOCNC2 NO concentration for range #2 PPB 2 NOCNC3 7 NO concentration for range #3 PPB 2 N2CNC1 NO2 concentration for range #1 PPB 2 N2CNC2 NO2 concentration for range #2 PPB 2 N2CNC3 7 NO2 concentration for range #3 PPB 2 CO2CNC 5 CO2 concentration % O2 concentration % STABIL Concentration stability PPB 2 AZERO Auto zero offset (range de-normalized) mV O3FLOW Ozone flow rate cc/m RCPRES Reaction cell pressure "Hg Reaction cell temperature °C Bypass or dilution manifold temperature °C CO2 sensor cell temperature °C O2 sensor cell temperature °C IZTEMP IZS block temperature °C CNVEF1 Converter efficiency factor for range #1 — CNVEF2 Converter efficiency factor for range #2 — Converter efficiency factor for range #3 — CNVTMP Converter temperature °C PMTTMP PMT temperature °C SMPFLW Sample flow rate cc/m Sample pressure "Hg Sample restrictor temperature °C Internal box temperature °C O2CONC 3 RCTEMP MFTEMP 1 C2TEMP 5 3 O2TEMP CNVEF3 7 SMPPRS SRSTMP 8 BOXTMP RBXTMP 8 Remote box temperature °C HVPS High voltage power supply output Volts REFGND Ground reference (REF_GND) mV RF4096 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) mV TEST11 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_11) mV TEST13 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_13) mV TEMP5 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) °C TEMP6 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6) °C External analog input 1 value Volts XIN1 10 10 External analog input 1 slope eng unit / V XIN1OFST 10 External analog input 1 value eng unit XIN2 10 XIN1SLPE External analog input 2 value Volts XIN2SLPE 10 External analog input 2 slope eng unit / V XIN2OFST 10 External analog input 2 value eng unit 07270B DCN6512 A-33 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions Description 9 Name XIN3 10 XIN3SLPE 10 XIN3OFST 10 Units External analog input 3 value Volts External analog input 3 slope eng unit / V External analog input 3 value eng unit External analog input 4 value Volts XIN4SLPE 10 External analog input 4 slope eng unit / V 10 External analog input 4 value eng unit External analog input 5 value Volts XIN4 10 XIN4OFST XIN5 10 10 External analog input 5 slope eng unit / V XIN5OFST 10 External analog input 5 value eng unit XIN6 10 External analog input 6 value Volts External analog input 6 slope eng unit / V XIN5SLPE XIN6SLPE 10 XIN6OFST 10 External analog input 6 value eng unit External analog input 7 value Volts XIN7SLPE 10 External analog input 7 slope eng unit / V 10 External analog input 7 value eng unit External analog input 8 value Volts XIN7 10 XIN7OFST XIN8 10 10 External analog input 8 slope eng unit / V XIN8OFST 10 External analog input 8 value eng unit XIN8SLPE 1 Factory option. 2 Current instrument units. 3 O2 option. 4 Optional. 5 CO2 option. 6 Engineering firmware only. 7 Triple-range option. 8 M200EUP. 9 All NOX references become NOy for T200U_NOy and M200EU_NOy. 10 T-Series external analog input option. A-34 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators Table A-7: Terminal Command Designators COMMAND ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX ? [ID] LOGON [ID] password LOGOFF [ID] T [ID] W [ID] C [ID] D [ID] V [ID] 07270B DCN6512 DESCRIPTION Display help screen and this list of commands Establish connection to instrument Terminate connection to instrument SET ALL|name|hexmask Display test(s) LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print test(s) to screen name Print single test CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Disable test(s) SET ALL|name|hexmask Display warning(s) LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX] Print warning(s) name Clear single warning CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask Clear warning(s) ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2] Enter calibration mode ASEQ number Execute automatic sequence COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN Compute new slope/offset EXIT Exit calibration mode ABORT Abort calibration sequence LIST Print all I/O signals name[=value] Examine or set I/O signal LIST NAMES Print names of all diagnostic tests ENTER name Execute diagnostic test EXIT Exit diagnostic test RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode] Reset instrument PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT] Print iDAS configuration RECORDS ["name"] Print number of iDAS records REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number] [FROM= ][TO= ][VERBOSE|COMPACT|HEX] (Print DAS records)(date format: MM/DD/YYYY(or YY) [HH:MM:SS] Print iDAS records CANCEL Halt printing iDAS records LIST Print setup variables name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]] Modify variable name="value" Modify enumerated variable CONFIG Print instrument configuration MAINT ON|OFF Enter/exit maintenance mode MODE Print current instrument mode DASBEGIN [] DASEND Upload iDAS configuration CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND Upload single iDAS channel CHANNELDELETE ["name"] Delete iDAS channels A-35 APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in [brackets] are optional designators. The following key assignments also apply. TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS ESC CR (ENTER) Ctrl-C Abort line Execute command Switch to computer mode COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS LF (line feed) Ctrl-T A-36 Execute command Switch to terminal mode 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Description 10 MODBUS Register Address (decimal, 0-based) Units MODBUS Floating Point Input Registers (32-bit IEEE 754 format; read in high-word, low-word order; read-only) 0 Instantaneous PMT detector reading mV 2 NOX slope for range #1 — 4 NOX slope for range #2 — 6 NO slope for range #1 — 8 NO slope for range #2 mV 10 NOX offset for range #1 mV 12 NOX offset for range #2 mV 14 NO offset for range #1 mV 16 NO offset for range #2 mV 18 NOX concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 20 NOX concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 22 NO concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 24 NO concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 26 NO2 concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 28 NO2 concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 30 NOX concentration for range #1 PPB 32 NOX concentration for range #2 PPB 34 NO concentration for range #1 PPB 36 NO concentration for range #2 PPB 38 NO2 concentration for range #1 PPB 40 NO2 concentration for range #2 PPB 42 Concentration stability PPB Auto zero offset (range de-normalized) mV 44 Pre React 11 46 Ozone flow rate cc/m 48 Reaction cell pressure "Hg 50 Reaction cell temperature C 52 Manifold temperature °C 54 Converter efficiency factor for range #1 — 56 Converter efficiency factor for range #2 — 58 Converter temperature °C 60 PMT temperature C 62 Sample flow rate cc/m 07270B DCN6512 A-37 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Description 10 MODBUS Register Address (decimal, 0-based) Units 64 Sample pressure “Hg 66 Internal box temperature C 68 High voltage power supply output Volts 70 Ground reference (REF_GND) mV 72 4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV) mV 74 Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_13) mV 76 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6) °C IZS temperature C 80 9 Sample restrictor temperature C 82 9 Remote box temperature C Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_11) mV 82 Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5) °C 84 1 Raw PMT detector reading for NOX mV 78 80 86 1 Raw PMT detector reading for NO mV 100 3 NOX slope for range #3 — 102 3 NO slope for range #3 mV 104 3 NOX offset for range #3 mV NO offset for range #3 mV NOX concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 110 3 NO concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 112 3 NO2 concentration for range #3 during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset PPB 114 3 106 3 108 3 NOX concentration for range #3 PPB 116 3 NO concentration for range #3 PPB 118 3 NO2 concentration for range #3 PPB 120 3 Converter efficiency factor for range #3 — 130 12 External analog input 1 value Volts 132 12 External analog input 1 slope eng unit /V 134 12 External analog input 1 offset eng unit 136 12 External analog input 2 value Volts 138 12 External analog input 2 slope eng unit /V 140 12 External analog input 2 offset eng unit 142 12 External analog input 3 value Volts 144 12 External analog input 3 slope eng unit /V 146 12 External analog input 3 offset eng unit 148 12 External analog input 4 value Volts 150 12 External analog input 4 slope eng unit /V 152 12 External analog input 4 offset eng unit 154 12 External analog input 5 value Volts A-38 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Description 10 MODBUS Register Address (decimal, 0-based) Units 156 12 External analog input 5 slope eng unit /V 158 12 External analog input 5 offset eng unit 160 12 External analog input 6 value Volts 162 12 External analog input 6 slope eng unit /V 164 12 External analog input 6 offset eng unit 166 12 External analog input 7 value Volts 168 12 External analog input 7 slope eng unit /V 170 12 External analog input 7 offset eng unit 172 12 External analog input 8 value Volts 174 12 External analog input 8 slope eng unit /V 176 12 External analog input 8 offset eng unit 200 5 O2 concentration % 202 5 O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset % 204 5 O2 slope — 206 5 O2 offset % 208 5 O2 sensor cell temperature °C 300 6 CO2 concentration % 302 6 CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new slope and offset % 304 6 CO2 slope — 306 6 CO2 offset % 308 6 CO2 sensor cell temperature °C MODBUS Floating Point Holding Registers (32-bit IEEE 754 format; read/write in high-word, low-word order; read/write) 0 Maps to NOX_SPAN1 variable; target conc. for range #1 Conc. units 2 Maps to NO_SPAN1 variable; target conc. for range #1 Conc. units 4 Maps to NOX_SPAN2 variable; target conc. for range #2 Conc. units 6 Maps to NO_SPAN2 variable; target conc. for range #2 Conc. units 100 3 Maps to NOX_SPAN3 variable; target conc. for range #3 Conc. units 102 3 Maps to NO_SPAN3 variable; target conc. for range #3 Conc. units 200 5 Maps to O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable; target conc. for range O2 gas % Maps to CO2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable; target conc. for range CO2 gas % 300 6 MODBUS Discrete Input Registers (single-bit; read-only) 0 Manifold temperature warning 1 Converter temperature warning 2 Auto-zero warning 3 Box temperature warning 4 PMT detector temperature warning 07270B DCN6512 A-39 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Description 10 MODBUS Register Address (decimal, 0-based) 5 Reaction cell temperature warning 6 Sample flow warning 7 Ozone flow warning 8 Reaction cell pressure warning 9 HVPS warning 10 System reset warning 11 Rear board communication warning 12 Relay board communication warning 13 Front panel communication warning 14 Analog calibration warning 15 Dynamic zero warning 16 Dynamic span warning 17 Invalid concentration 18 In zero calibration mode 19 In span calibration mode 20 In multi-point calibration mode 21 System is OK (same meaning as SYSTEM_OK I/O signal) 22 Ozone generator warning 23 Units IZS temperature warning 24 8 In low span calibration mode 25 7 NO concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded 26 7 NO concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded 27 7 NO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded 28 7 NO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded 29 7 NOX concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded 30 7 200 NOX concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded 5 201 5 Calibrating O2 gas O2 sensor cell temperature warning 202 5+7 O2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded 203 5+7 O2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded 300 6 Calibrating CO2 gas 301 6 CO2 sensor cell temperature warning 302 6+7 CO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded 6+7 CO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded 303 A-40 07270B DCN6512 T200H/M and 200EH/EM Menu Trees (05147H DCN6512) APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map Description 10 MODBUS Register Address (decimal, 0-based) Units MODBUS Coil Registers (single-bit; read/write) 0 Maps to relay output signal 36 (MB_RELAY_36 in signal I/O list) 1 Maps to relay output signal 37 (MB_RELAY_37 in signal I/O list) 2 Maps to relay output signal 38 (MB_RELAY_38 in signal I/O list) 3 20 Maps to relay output signal 39 (MB_RELAY_39 in signal I/O list) 2 Triggers zero calibration of NOX range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.) 21 2 Triggers span calibration of NOX range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.) 22 2 Triggers zero calibration of NOX range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.) 23 2 Triggers span calibration of NOX range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.) 1 Engineering firmware only. 2 Set DYN_ZERO or DYN_SPAN variables to ON to enable calculating new slope or offset. Otherwise a calibration check is performed. 3 Triple-range option. 4 Optional. 5 O2 option. 6 CO2 option. 7 Concentration alarm option. 8 Low span option. 9 M200EUP. 10 All NOX references become NOy for M200EU_NOy. 11 M200EU and M200EU_NOy. 12 T-Series external analog input option. 07270B DCN6512 A-41 This page intentionally left blank. A-42 07270B DCN6512 APPENDIX B - Spare Parts Note Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by Teledyne Advanced Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI) may result in non-compliance with European standard EN 61010-1. Note Due to the dynamic nature of part numbers, please refer to the TAPI Website at http://www.teledyne-api.com or call Customer Service at 800-324-5190 for more recent updates to part numbers. 07270B DCN6512 B-1 This page intentionally left blank. B-2 07270B DCN6512 T200H Spare Parts List (Reference: 07351, 2012 July 17, 14:26p PARTNUMBER 000940100 000940300 000940400 000940500 001761800 002270100 002730000 003290000 005960000 005970000 008830000 009690200 009690300 009810300 009810600 009811000 010680100 010820000 011630000 011930100 013140000 014080100 016290000 016301400 016680600 018080000 018720100 02190020A 022630200 037860000 040010000 040030800 040400000 040410200 040900000 041800500 041920000 042680100 043220100 043420000 044440000 044530000 044540000 044610100 045230200 045500200 045500400 045500500 046030000 07270B DCN6512 DESCRIPTION CD, ORIFICE, .003 GREEN CD, ORIFICE, .020 VIOLET CD, ORIFICE, .004 BLUE (KB) CD, ORIFICE, .007 ORANGE (KB) ASSY, FLOW CTL, 90CC, 1/4" TEE-TMT, B AKIT, GASKETS, WINDOW, (12 GASKETS = 1) CD, FILTER, 665NM (KB) THERMISTOR, BASIC (VENDOR ASSY)(KB) AKIT, EXP, ACT CHARCOAL, (2 BTL@64 FL-OZ EA) AKIT, EXP, PURAFIL (2 BTL@64 FL-OZ EA) COLD BLOCK (KB) AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19,100=1) 47mm AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19, 30=1) 47mm ASSY, PUMP PK, 115V/60HZ w/FL34/NO/SO ASSY, PUMP PACK, 100V/60HZ w/FL34 ASSY, PUMP, NOX, 220-240V/50-60HZ FL34 BAND HTR W/TC, 50W @115V, CE/VDE * ASSY, THERMOCOUPLE, HICON HVPS INSULATOR GASKET (KB) CD, PMT (R928), NOX, * ASSY, COOLER FAN (NOX/SOX) ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB) ASSY, SAMP FILT, 47MM, ANG BKT, 1UM, TEE PCA, O3 GEN DRIVER, NOX (OBS) AKIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES, (12) ASSY, MOLYCON, w/O3 DESTRUCT ASSY, TC, TYPE K, LONG, WELDED MOLY PCA, TEMP CONTROL BOARD, W/PS ORING, TEFLON, RETAINING RING, 47MM (KB) ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL (B/F) PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, (NOX) ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL ASSY, VACUUM MANIFOLD ORIFICE HOLDER, REACTION CELL (KB) PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR ASSY, THERMISTOR ASSY, VALVE (SS) THERMOCOUPLE INSULATING SLEEVE * ASSY, HEATER/THERM, O2 SEN ASSY, HICON w/O3 DESTRUCT OPTION, O2 SENSOR ASSY,(KB) ASSY, THERMISTOR, NOX ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON PCA, RELAY CARD ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 3 MIL ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, NOX ORIFICE AKIT, CH-43, 3 REFILLS B-3 T200H Spare Parts List (Reference: 07351, 2012 July 17, 14:26p 047210000 048830000 049310100 049760300 050610700 050610900 050611100 051210000 051990000 052930200 054250000 055740000 055740100 055740200 058021100 059940000 061400000 062390000 064540000 064540100 064540200 065190100 065200100 066970000 067240000 067300000 067300100 067300200 067900000 068810000 069500000 072150000 072280100 072640100 072700000 CN0000073 CN0000458 CN0000520 CP0000036 FL0000001 FL0000003 FL0000034 FM0000004 FT0000010 HW0000005 HW0000020 HW0000030 HW0000036 HW0000041 HW0000099 HW0000101 HW0000453 B-4 ASSY, MINI-HICON GUTS, GROUNDED AKIT, EXP KIT, EXHAUST CLNSR, SILCA GEL PCA,TEC DRIVER,PMT,(KB) ASSY, TC PROG PLUG, MOLY,TYP K, TC1 OPTION, 100-120V/50-60Hz,NOX (KB) OPTION, 220-240V/50-60Hz, NOX (KB) OPTION, 100V/50Hz, NOX (OBS) DESTRUCT w/FTGS, O3 * ASSY, SCRUBBER, INLINE EXHAUST, DISPOS ASSY, BAND HEATER TYPE K, NOX OPTION, CO2 SENSOR (20%) (WO) ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 115V/60HZ ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/60HZ ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/50HZ PCA, MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP(KB) OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, Amb/H/M * ASSY, DUAL HTR, MINI-HICON, 120/240VAC ASSY, MOLY GUTS w/WOOL ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 115V/60HZ ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/60HZ ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/50HZ ASSY, NOX CELL TOP-FLO* ASSY SENSOR, TOP-FLOW PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *(KB) PCA, AUX-I/O BD, ETHERNET, ANALOG & USB PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET & USB LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN(KB) PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD PCA, SERIAL & VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD ASSY. TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, PULSE, 250HZ DOM, w/SOFTWARE, T200H * MANUAL, OPERATORS, T200H/T200M POWER ENTRY, 120/60 (KB) PLUG, 12, MC 1.5/12-ST-3.81 (KB) PLUG, 10, MC 1.5/10-ST-3.81 (KB) TEMP CONTROLLER, FUJI,PXR, RELAY OUTPUT FILTER, SS (KB) FILTER, DFU (KB) FILTER, DISPOSABLE, PENTEK (IC-101L) FLOWMETER (KB) CONNECTOR-ORING, SS, 1/8" (KB) FOOT SPRING ISOLATOR TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL) STANDOFF,#6-32X3/4" STANDOFF, #6-32X.5, HEX SS M/F ISOLATOR SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP 07270B DCN6512 T200H Spare Parts List (Reference: 07351, 2012 July 17, 14:26p HW0000685 KIT000095 KIT000219 KIT000231 KIT000253 KIT000254 OP0000030 OP0000033 OR0000001 OR0000002 OR0000025 OR0000027 OR0000034 OR0000039 OR0000044 OR0000083 OR0000086 OR0000094 OR0000101 PU0000005 PU0000011 PU0000052 PU0000054 PU0000083 RL0000015 RL0000019 SW0000006 SW0000025 SW0000040 SW0000058 SW0000059 WR0000008 07270B DCN6512 LATCH, MAGNETIC, FRONT PANEL (KB) AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER AKIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT KIT, RETROFIT, Z/S VALVE ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38 OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC CO2 MODULE, 0-20% ORING, 2-006VT *(KB) ORING, 2-023V ORING, 2-133V ORING, 2-042V ORING, 2-011V FT10 ORING, 2-012V (KB) ORING, 2-125V ORING, 105M, 1MM W X 5 MM ID, VITON(KB) ORING, 2-006, CV-75 COMPOUND(KB) ORING, 2-228V, 50 DURO VITON(KB) ORING,2-209V PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB) REBUILD KIT, THOMAS 607(KB) PUMP, THOMAS 688, 220/240V 50HZ/60HZ PUMP, THOMAS 688, 100V, 50/60HZ KIT, REBUILD, PU80, PU81, PU82 RELAY, DPDT, (KB) SSRT RELAY, TA2410, CE MARK SWITCH, THERMAL, 60 C (KB) SWITCH, POWER, CIRC BREAK, VDE/CE *(KB) PWR SWITCH/CIR BRK, VDE CE (KB) SWITCH, THERMAL/450 DEG F(KB) PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN POWER CORD, 10A(KB) B-5 T200M Spare Parts List (Reference 07367, 2012 July 12, 14:20p) PARTNUMBER 040410300 040900000 041800500 041920000 042680100 043170000 043420000 044340000 044430200 044530000 044540000 044610100 045230200 045500200 047050500 048830000 049310100 049760300 050610700 050610900 050611100 051210000 051990000 052930200 054250000 055740000 055740100 055740200 057660000 058021100 059940000 061400000 062390000 040400000 040030800 040010000 037860000 018720100 018080000 016301400 016290000 014080100 013140000 011930100 011630000 009811000 009810600 009810300 009690300 B-6 DESCRIPTION ASSY, VACUUM MANIFOLD ORIFICE HOLDER, REACTION CELL (KB) PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR ASSY, THERMISTOR ASSY, VALVE (SS) MANIFOLD, RCELL, (KB) * ASSY, HEATER/THERM, O2 SEN ASSY, HTR, BYPASS MANIFOLD ASSY, BYPASS MANIFOLD OPTION, O2 SENSOR ASSY,(KB) ASSY, THERMISTOR, NOX ASSY, VALVES, MOLY/HICON PCA, RELAY CARD ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, 7 MIL ASSY, ORIFICE HOLDER, SHORT, 7 MIL AKIT, EXP KIT, EXHAUST CLNSR, SILCA GEL PCA,TEC DRIVER,PMT,(KB) ASSY, TC PROG PLUG, MOLY,TYP K, TC1 OPTION, 100-120V/50-60Hz,NOX (KB) OPTION, 220-240V/50-60Hz, NOX (KB) OPTION, 100V/50Hz, NOX (OBS) DESTRUCT w/FTGS, O3 * ASSY, SCRUBBER, INLINE EXHAUST, DISPOS ASSY, BAND HEATER TYPE K, NOX OPTION, CO2 SENSOR (20%) (WO) ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 115V/60HZ ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/60HZ ASSY, PUMP, NOx PUMP PACK, 220V/50HZ ASSY, DFU FILTER PCA, MOTHERBD, GEN 5-ICOP(KB) OPTION, SAMPLE GAS CONDITIONER, Amb/H/M * ASSY, DUAL HTR, MINI-HICON, 120/240VAC ASSY, MOLY GUTS w/WOOL ASSY, HEATERS/THERMAL SWITCH, RX CELL PCA, PRESS SENSORS (2X), FLOW, (NOX) ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL (B/F) ORING, TEFLON, RETAINING RING, 47MM (KB) ASSY, MOLYCON, w/O3 DESTRUCT AKIT, DESSICANT BAGGIES, (12) ASSY, SAMP FILT, 47MM, ANG BKT, 1UM, TEE WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB) ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX ASSY, COOLER FAN (NOX/SOX) CD, PMT (R928), NOX, * HVPS INSULATOR GASKET (KB) ASSY, PUMP, NOX, 220-240V/50-60HZ FL34 ASSY, PUMP PACK, 100V/60HZ w/FL34 ASSY, PUMP PK, 115V/60HZ w/FL34/NO/SO AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19, 30=1) 47mm 07270B DCN6512 T200M Spare Parts List (Reference 07367, 2012 July 12, 14:20p) 009690200 002730000 002270100 001761800 000941200 000940500 000940400 000940300 064540000 064540100 064540200 065190000 066430100 066970000 067240000 067300000 067300100 067300200 067900000 068810000 069500000 072150000 072280100 072630000 072700000 075980300 CN0000073 CN0000458 CN0000520 FL0000001 FL0000003 FM0000004 FT0000010 HW0000005 HW0000020 HW0000030 HW0000036 HW0000099 HW0000101 HW0000453 HW0000685 KIT000095 KIT000219 KIT000231 KIT000253 KIT000254 OP0000030 OP0000033 OR0000001 OR0000002 OR0000025 OR0000027 07270B DCN6512 AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL19,100=1) 47mm CD, FILTER, 665NM (KB) AKIT, GASKETS, WINDOW, (12 GASKETS = 1) ASSY, FLOW CTL, 90CC, 1/4" TEE-TMT, B CD, ORIFICE, .008, RED/NONE CD, ORIFICE, .007 ORANGE (KB) CD, ORIFICE, .004 BLUE (KB) CD, ORIFICE, .020 VIOLET ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 115V/60HZ ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/60HZ ASSY, PUMP NOX INTERNAL, 230V/50HZ ASSY, NOX CELL TOP-FLO* PCA, OZONE PULSE DRIVER, 250 HZ PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *(KB) PCA, AUX-I/O BD, ETHERNET, ANALOG & USB PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET & USB LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN(KB) PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD PCA, SERIAL & VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD ASSY. TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE ASSY, O3 GEN BRK, PULSE, 250HZ DOM, w/SOFTWARE, T200M * MANUAL, OPERATORS, T200H/T200M KIT, NOX RCELL SS MNFLD W/NZZL, ORFC HLDR 3 PORT POWER ENTRY, 120/60 (KB) PLUG, 12, MC 1.5/12-ST-3.81 (KB) PLUG, 10, MC 1.5/10-ST-3.81 (KB) FILTER, SS (KB) FILTER, DFU (KB) FLOWMETER (KB) CONNECTOR-ORING, SS, 1/8" (KB) FOOT SPRING ISOLATOR TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL) STANDOFF, #6-32X.5, HEX SS M/F ISOLATOR SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP LATCH, MAGNETIC, FRONT PANEL (KB) AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER AKIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT KIT, RETROFIT, Z/S VALVE ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37 ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38 OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC CO2 MODULE, 0-20% ORING, 2-006VT *(KB) ORING, 2-023V ORING, 2-133V ORING, 2-042V B-7 T200M Spare Parts List (Reference 07367, 2012 July 12, 14:20p) OR0000034 OR0000039 OR0000044 OR0000083 OR0000086 OR0000094 OR0000101 PU0000005 PU0000011 PU0000052 PU0000054 PU0000083 RL0000015 SW0000025 SW0000059 WR0000008 B-8 ORING, 2-011V FT10 ORING, 2-012V (KB) ORING, 2-125V ORING, 105M, 1MM W X 5 MM ID, VITON(KB) ORING, 2-006, CV-75 COMPOUND(KB) ORING, 2-228V, 50 DURO VITON(KB) ORING,2-209V PUMP, THOMAS 607, 115V/60HZ (KB) REBUILD KIT, THOMAS 607(KB) PUMP, THOMAS 688, 220/240V 50HZ/60HZ PUMP, THOMAS 688, 100V, 50/60HZ KIT, REBUILD, PU80, PU81, PU82 RELAY, DPDT, (KB) SWITCH, POWER, CIRC BREAK, VDE/CE *(KB) PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN POWER CORD, 10A(KB) 07270B DCN6512 Appendix C Warranty/Repair Questionnaire T200H/M, M200EH/EM (05149B DCN5798) CUSTOMER:_____________________________________ PHONE: ________________________________ CONTACT NAME: ________________________________ FAX NO. _______________________________ SITE ADDRESS:_____________________________________________________________________________ MODEL TYPE: ______________ SERIAL NO.: _________________ FIRMWARE REVISION: ___________ 1. Are there any failure messages? ______________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ (Continue on back if necessary) PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE: TEST FUNCTION RECORDED VALUE NOx STAB UNITS ACCEPTABLE VALUE PPB/PPM 1 PPB WITH ZERO AIR CM 3 500 ± 50 OZONE FLOW CM 3 80 ± 15 PMT SIGNAL WITH ZERO AIR MV -20 to 150 MV 0-5000MV 1 2 0-5,000 PPM , 200 PPM SAMPLE FLOW PMT SIGNAL AT SPAN GAS CONC PPB NORM PMT SIGNAL AT SPAN GAS CONC MV PPB 0-5000MV 1 2 0-5,000 PPM , 200 PPM AZERO MV -20 to 150 HVPS V 400 to 900 RCELL TEMP ºC 50 ± 1 BOX TEMP ºC AMBIENT ± 5ºC ºC 7 ± 2ºC ºC 30ºC to 70ºC IZS TEMP ºC 50 ± 1ºC MOLY TEMP ºC 315 ± 5ºC PMT TEMP 3 O2 CELL TEMP 3 RCEL IN-HG-A <10 SAMP IN-HG-A AMBIENT ± 1 NOx SLOPE 1.0 ± 0.3 NOx OFFSET mV 50 to 150 NO SLOPE 1.0 ± 0.3 NO OFFSET mV 50 to 150 3 O2 SLOPE 0.5 to 2.0 O2 OFFSET3 % -10 to + 10 PMT SIGNAL DURING ETEST MV PMT SIGNAL DURING OTEST MV 2000 ± 1000 MV 4096mv ±2mv and Must be Stable MV 0± 0.5 and Must be Stable REF_4096_MV 4 REF_GND4 1 2 T200H, M200EH T200M, M200EM 4 Located in Signal I/O list under DIAG menu 3 2000 ± 1000 If option is installed TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com PHONE: (858) 657-9800 TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 FAX: (858) 657-9816 07270B DCN6512 C-1 Appendix C Warranty/Repair Questionnaire T200H/M, M200EH/EM (05149B DCN5798) 2. What is the rcell & sample pressures with the sample inlet on rear of machine capped? RCELL PRESS - __________________ IN-HG-A SAMPLE PRESSURE: _______________ IN-HG-A 3. What are the failure symptoms? ______________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ 4. What test have you done trying to solve the problem? _____________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ 5. If possible, please include a portion of a strip chart pertaining to the problem. Circle pertinent data. Thank you for providing this information. Your assistance enables Teledyne Instruments to respond faster to the problem that you are encountering. OTHER NOTES: ____________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________ TELEDYNE INSTRUMENTS CUSTOMER SERVICE EMAIL: api-customerservice@teledyne.com PHONE: (858) 657-9800 TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190 FAX: (858) 657-9816 07270B DCN6512 C-2 07270B DCN6512 APPENDIX D – Wire List and Electronic Schematics 07270B DCN 6512 D-1 This page intentionally left blank. D-2 07270B DCN 6512 T200X INTERCONNECT LIST (Reference 0691101C DCN5936) CONNECTION FROM Cable Part Signal Assembly PN # 0364901 CBL, AC POWER AC Line Power Entry CN0000073 AC Neutral Power Entry CN0000073 Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 AC Line Switched Power Switch SW0000025 AC Neutral Switched Power Switch SW0000025 Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 AC Line Switched Power Switch SW0000025 AC Neutral Switched Power Switch SW0000025 Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 AC Line Switched Power Switch SW0000025 AC Neutral Switched Power Switch SW0000025 Power Grnd Power Entry CN0000073 03829 CBL, DC POWER TO MOTHERBOARD DGND Relay PCA 045230100 +5V Relay PCA 045230100 AGND Relay PCA 045230100 +15V Relay PCA 045230100 AGND Relay PCA 045230100 -15V Relay PCA 045230100 +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 +12V Relay PCA 045230100 Chassis Gnd Relay PCA 045230100 04022 CBL, DC POWER, FANM KEYBOARD, TEC, SENSOR PCA TEC +12V TEC PCA 049310100 TEC +12V RET TEC PCA 049310100 DGND Relay PCA 045230100 +5V Relay PCA 045230100 DGND LCD Interface PCA 066970000 +5V LCD Interface PCA 066970000 +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 +12V Relay PCA 045230100 P/Flow Sensor AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P/Flow Sensor +15V Relay PCA 045230100 Pressure signal 1 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 Pressure signal 2 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 Flow signal 1 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 Flow signal 2 P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 Shield P/Flow Sensor PCA 040030800 Shield Motherboard 058021100 Thermocouple signal 1 Motherboard 058021100 TC 1 signal DGND Motherboard 058021100 Thermocouple signal 2 Motherboard 058021100 TC 2 signal DGND Motherboard 058021100 04023 CBL, I2C, RELAY PCA TO MOTHERBOARD I2C Serial Clock Motherboard 058021100 I2C Serial Data Motherboard 058021100 I2C Reset Motherboard 058021100 I2C Shield Motherboard 058021100 04024 CBL, NOX, ZERO/SPAN, IZS VALVES Zero/Span valve +12V Relay PCA 045230100 Zero/Span valve +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 Sample valve +12V Relay PCA 045230100 Sample valve +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 AutoZero valve +12V Relay PCA 045230100 AutoZero valve +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 NONOx valve +12V Relay PCA 045230100 NONOx valve +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 07270B DCN 6512 J/P Pin L N L N L N L N Assembly CONNECTION TO PN J/P Pin Power Switch Power Switch Shield Chassis PS2 (+12) PS2 (+12) PS2 (+12) PS1 (+5, ±15) PS1 (+5, ±15) PS1 (+5, ±15) Relay PCA Relay PCA Relay PCA SW0000025 SW0000025 SW0000025 L N 060820000 060820000 060820000 068010000 068010000 068010000 045230100 045230100 045230100 SK2 SK2 SK2 SK2 SK2 SK2 J1 J1 J1 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 P15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 P1 P1 P10 P10 P14 P14 P11 P11 P11 P11 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P110 P110 P110 P110 P110 1 2 1 2 2 3 7 8 3 4 2 4 5 1 S 9 2 8 1 7 Relay PCA Relay PCA LCD Interface PCA LCD Interface PCA Relay PCA Relay PCA Chassis fan Chassis fan P/Flow Sensor PCA P/Flow Sensor PCA Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Relay PCA Relay PCA Relay PCA Relay PCA Relay PCA 045230100 045230100 066970000 066970000 045230100 045230100 040010000 040010000 040030800 040030800 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 045230100 045230100 045230100 045230100 045230100 P10 P10 P14 P14 P11 P11 P1 P1 P1 P1 P110 P110 P110 P110 P110 P17 P17 P17 P17 P17 8 7 8 1 1 2 1 2 3 6 6 5 4 3 12 S 1 2 3 4 P107 P107 P107 P107 3 5 2 6 Relay PCA Relay PCA Relay PCA Relay PCA 045230100 045230100 045230100 045230100 P3 P3 P3 P3 1 2 4 5 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 P4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Zero/Span valve Zero/Span valve Sample valve Sample valve AutoZero valve AutoZero valve NONOx valve NONOx valve 042680100 042680100 042680100 042680100 042680100 042680100 042680100 042680100 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 D-3 T200X INTERCONNECT LIST (Reference 0691101C DCN5936) CONNECTION FROM CONNECTION TO Cable Part Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin Assembly PN # 0402603 CBL, IZS & O2 SENSOR HEATERS/THERMISTORS, REACTION CELL & MANIFOLD THERMISTORS Rcell thermistor A Reaction cell thermistor 041920000 P1 2 Motherboard 058021100 Rcell thermistor B Reaction cell thermistor 041920000 P1 1 Motherboard 058021100 IZS or CO2 thermistor A Motherboard 058021100 P27 6 IZS or CO2 thermistor/htr 05282\06693 IZS or CO2 thermistor B Motherboard 058021100 P27 13 IZS or CO2 thermistor/htr 05282\06693 IZS or CO2 heater L IZS or CO2 thermistor/htr 05282\06693 P1 4 Relay PCA 045230100 IZS or CO2 heater L IZS or CO2 thermistor/htr 05282\06693 P1 1 Relay PCA 045230100 Shield Relay PCA 045230100 O2 sensor heater Relay PCA 045230100 P18 6 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 O2 sensor heater Relay PCA 045230100 P18 7 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 Shield Relay PCA 045230100 P18 12 O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 O2 sensor thermistor A O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 3 Motherboard 058021100 O2 sensor thermistor B O2 sensor therm./heater 043420000 P1 1 Motherboard 058021100 Byp/dil. man. thermistor A Motherboard 058021100 P27 1 Manifold thermistor 043420000 Byp/dil. man. thermistor B Motherboard 058021100 P27 8 Manifold thermistor 043420000 Configuration jumper intern. Relay PCA 045230100 P18 3 Relay PCA 045230100 Configuration jumper intern. Relay PCA 045230100 P18 8 Relay PCA 045230100 04027 CBL, NO2 CONVERTER, REACTION CELL & MANIFOLD HEATERS Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Manifold heater 1 044340000 P1 1 Relay PCA 045230100 Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Manifold heater 1 044340000 P1 2 Relay PCA 045230100 Bypass/dil. manifold heater L Relay PCA 045230100 P2 11 Manifold heater 2 044340000 Bypass/dil. manifold heater N Relay PCA 045230100 P2 15 Manifold heater 2 044340000 Moly heater A Relay PCA 045230100 P2 7 Moly heater A 039700100 Moly heater C Relay PCA 045230100 P2 6 Moly heater C 039700100 Moly heater B Relay PCA 045230100 P2 10 Moly heater B 039700100 Configuration jumper intern. Relay PCA 045230100 P2 13 Relay PCA 045230100 Configuration jumper intern. Relay PCA 045230100 P2 8 Relay PCA 045230100 Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 1 Reaction cell heater 1B 040400000 Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 1 Reaction cell heater 2B 040400000 Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 2 Reaction cell heater 1A 040400000 Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 3 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000 Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 4 Reaction cell heat switch 040400000 Reaction cell heater/switch Relay PCA 045230100 P2 5 Reaction cell heater 2A 040400000 04105 CBL, KEYBOARD, DISPLAY TO MOTHERBOARD Kbd Interrupt LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 7 Motherboard 058021100 DGND LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 2 Motherboard 058021100 SDA LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 5 Motherboard 058021100 SCL LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 6 Motherboard 058021100 Shld LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J1 10 Motherboard 058021100 04176 CBL, DC POWER TO RELAY PCA DGND Relay PCA 045230100 P8 1 Power Supply Triple 068010000 +5V Relay PCA 045230100 P8 2 Power Supply Triple 068010000 +15V Relay PCA 045230100 P8 4 Power Supply Triple 068010000 AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P8 5 Power Supply Triple 068010000 -15V Relay PCA 045230100 P8 6 Power Supply Triple 068010000 +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P8 7 Power Supply Single 068020000 +12V Relay PCA 045230100 P8 8 Power Supply Single 068020000 04433 CBL, PREAMPLIFIER TO RELAY PCA Preamplifier DGND Relay PCA 045230100 P9 1 Preamp PCA 041800500 Preamplifier +5V Relay PCA 045230100 P9 2 Preamp PCA 041800500 Preamplifier AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P9 3 Preamp PCA 041800500 Preamplifier +15V Relay PCA 045230100 P9 4 Preamp PCA 041800500 Preamplifier -15V Relay PCA 045230100 P9 6 Preamp PCA 041800500 04437 CBL, PREAMPLIFIER TO TEC Preamp TEC drive VREF Preamp PCA 041800500 J1 1 TEC PCA 049310100 Preamp TEC drive CTRL Preamp PCA 041800500 J1 2 TEC PCA 049310100 Preamp TEC drive AGND Preamp PCA 041800500 J1 3 TEC PCA 049310100 D-4 J/P Pin P27 P27 P1 P1 P18 P18 P18 P1 P1 P1 P27 P27 P1 P1 P18 P18 7 14 2 3 1 2 11 4 2 P2 P2 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P2 P2 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 11 12 1 2 1 2 3 14 9 4 6 3 1 2 5 J106 J106 J106 J106 J106 1 8 2 6 5 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 J1 3 1 6 4 5 3 1 P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 1 2 3 4 6 J3 J3 J3 1 2 3 4 11 1 2 4 9 07270B DCN 6512 T200X INTERCONNECT LIST (Reference 0691101C DCN5936) CONNECTION FROM Cable Part Signal Assembly PN # 04671 CBL, MOTHERBOARD TO XMITTER BD (MULTIDROP OPTION) GND Motherboard 058021100 RX0 Motherboard 058021100 RTS0 Motherboard 058021100 TX0 Motherboard 058021100 CTS0 Motherboard 058021100 RS-GND0 Motherboard 058021100 RTS1 Motherboard 058021100 CTS1/485Motherboard 058021100 RX1 Motherboard 058021100 TX1/485+ Motherboard 058021100 RS-GND1 Motherboard 058021100 RX1 Motherboard 058021100 TX1/485+ Motherboard 058021100 RS-GND1 Motherboard 058021100 06737 CBL, I2C to AUX I/O (ANALOG IN OPTION) ATX+ AUX I/O PCA 067300000 ATXAUX I/O PCA 067300000 LED0 AUX I/O PCA 067300000 ARX+ AUX I/O PCA 067300000 ARXAUX I/O PCA 067300000 LED0+ AUX I/O PCA 067300000 LED1+ AUX I/O PCA 067300000 06738 CBL, CPU COM to AUX I/O (USB OPTION) RXD1 CPU PCA 067240000 DCD1 CPU PCA 067240000 DTR1 CPU PCA 067240000 TXD1 CPU PCA 067240000 DSR1 CPU PCA 067240000 GND CPU PCA 067240000 CTS1 CPU PCA 067240000 RTS1 CPU PCA 067240000 RI1 CPU PCA 067240000 06738 CBL, CPU COM to AUX I/O (MULTIDROP OPTION) RXD 067240000 CPU PCA DCD 067240000 CPU PCA DTR 067240000 CPU PCA TXD 067240000 CPU PCA DSR 067240000 CPU PCA GND 067240000 CPU PCA CTS 067240000 CPU PCA RTS 067240000 CPU PCA RI 067240000 CPU PCA 06739 CBL, CPU LAN TO AUX I/O PCA ATXCPU PCA 067240000 ATX+ CPU PCA 067240000 LED0 CPU PCA 067240000 ARX+ CPU PCA 067240000 ARXCPU PCA 067240000 LED0+ CPU PCA 067240000 LED1 CPU PCA 067240000 LED1+ CPU PCA 067240000 CBL, CPU USB to Front Panel 06741 GND CPU PCA 067240000 LUSBD3+ CPU PCA 067240000 LUSBD3CPU PCA 067240000 VCC CPU PCA 067240000 07270B DCN 6512 Assembly CONNECTION TO PN J/P Pin J/P Pin P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 P12 2 14 13 12 11 10 8 6 9 7 5 9 7 5 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 J4 2 14 13 12 11 10 8 6 9 7 5 9 7 5 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 J106 J106 J106 J106 J106 J106 J106 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 COM1 1 COM1 2 COM1 3 COM1 4 COM1 5 COM1 6 COM1 7 COM1 8 COM1 10 AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA 0673000 or -02 0673000 or -02 0673000 or -02 0673000 or -02 0673000 or -02 0673000 or -02 0673000 or -02 0673000 or -02 0673000 or -02 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 COM1 1 COM1 2 COM1 3 COM1 4 COM1 5 COM1 6 COM1 7 COM1 8 COM1 10 Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop Xmitter bd w/Multidrop 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 069500000 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN LAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA AUX I/O PCA 06730XXXX 06730XXXX 06730XXXX 06730XXXX 06730XXXX 06730XXXX 06730XXXX 06730XXXX J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 J2 USB USB USB USB 8 6 4 2 LCD Interface PCA LCD Interface PCA LCD Interface PCA LCD Interface PCA 066970000 066970000 066970000 066970000 JP9 JP9 JP9 JP9 D-5 T200X INTERCONNECT LIST (Reference 0691101C DCN5936) CONNECTION FROM Cable Part Signal Assembly PN J/P Pin # 06746 CBL, MB TO 06154 CPU GND Motherboard 058021100 P12 2 RX0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 14 RTS0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 13 TX0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 12 CTS0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 11 RS-GND0 Motherboard 058021100 P12 10 RTS1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 8 CTS1/485Motherboard 058021100 P12 6 RX1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 9 TX1/485+ Motherboard 058021100 P12 7 RS-GND1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 5 RX1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 9 TX1/485+ Motherboard 058021100 P12 7 RS-GND1 Motherboard 058021100 P12 5 06915 CBL, PREAMP, O2 SENSOR, O3 GEN, FAN, RELAY PCA & MOTHERBOARD +15V Relay PCA 045230100 P12 4 AGND Relay PCA 045230100 P12 3 +12V Relay PCA 045230100 P12 8 +12V RET Relay PCA 045230100 P12 7 O3GEN enable signal Ozone generator 07228XXXX P1 6 ETEST Motherboard 058021100 P108 8 OTEST Motherboard 058021100 P108 16 PHYSICAL RANGE Motherboard 058021100 P108 7 PMT TEMP Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 5 HVPS Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 6 PMT SIGNAL+ Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 7 AGND Preamp PCA 041800500 P6 S AGND Motherboard 058021100 P109 9 O2 SIGNAL Motherboard 058021100 P109 7 O2 SIGNAL + Motherboard 058021100 P109 1 DGND O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 5 +5V O2 Sensor (optional) OP0000030 P1 6 WR256 CBL, TRANSMITTER TO INTERFACE LCD Interface PCA 066970000 J15 D-6 Assembly CONNECTION TO PN J/P Pin Shield CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA CPU PCA 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 067240000 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM1 COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 COM2 485 485 485 1 8 4 7 6 8 7 1 4 6 1 2 3 Ozone generator Ozone generator PMT cooling fan PMT cooling fan Motherboard Preamp PCA Preamp PCA Preamp PCA Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard Motherboard O2 Sensor (optional) O2 Sensor (optional) O2 Sensor (optional) Relay PCA Relay PCA 07228XXXX 07228XXXX 013140000 013140000 058021100 041800500 041800500 041800500 058021100 058021100 058021100 058021100 OP0000030 OP0000030 OP0000030 045230100 045230100 P1 P1 P1 P1 P108 P6 P6 P6 P109 P109 P109 P109 P1 P1 P1 P5 P5 4 5 1 2 15 1 2 4 4 5 6 11 S 9 10 1 2 Transmitter PCA 068810000 J1 07270B DCN 6512 07270B DCN 6512 D-7 1 2 3 4 6 5 VERSION TABLE 016680000 - CE MARK VERSION STD PROD. VERSION UP TO 10/99 016680100 - NON CE MARK (OBSOLETE) +15V +15V 016680200 - SUB PS 17 SWITCHER FOR LINEAR SUPPLY DELETE COMPONENTS T1, D1, D2, C9, C11, PTC1, PTC2, U2 ADD COMPONENTS PS1 +15V D R1 R5 TP1 016680300 - LOW OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER REPLACE R4 WITH RS297 127KOHM 1.2K 4.7K 1% +15V TP6 R6 + Q1 IRFZ924 C2 .01 C1 C7 L1 J2 1000uF/25V 1 2 3 4 .1 10 16 2 9 6 7 1 4 C3 .1 VR2 100K "FREQ" J1 SD VREF INV+ COMP RT CT INV+SEN C5 .1 6 5 4 3 2 1 68uH TP2 U1 C 016680400 - HI OUTPUT + FIXED FREQ REPLACE VR2 WITH A WIRE JUMPER REPLACE R4 WITH RS13 11 KOHM 10 R2 10K 1% VIN C_B C_A E_B E_A OSC -SEN GND 15 13 12 14 11 3 5 8 R7 Q2 IRFZ24 + 016680600 - HI OUTPUT,E SERIES DELETE COMPONENTS T1,D1,D2,C9,PTC1,PTC2,U2 C8 1000uF/25V 10 R8 1.2K C SG3524B + D C6 100pF R10 C4 4.7uF/16V 3K TP3 Text R11 150K R4 10K 1% TP4 115V 15V 2 3 115V B D1 8 1 1.1A 1N4007 IN Text R9 GND PTC2 T1 3 OUT .1 R13 10K 1% R12 7 6 + C9 2200uF/35V 10K 1% 2 1 +15V TP5 LM7815 U2 C10 .1 C11 15V 4 5 PWR XFRMR PTC1 D2 1.1A 1N4007 Text B .22 R14 VR1 1K 20T 4.7K 1% "PW" C12 .22 R15 4.7K 1% Error : LOGO.BMP file not found. 10/15/96 REV. D: Added PTC1,2 secondary overcurrent protection. 11/21/96 REV. E: Minor cosmetic fixes The information herein is the property of API and is submitted in strictest confidence for reference only. Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is prohibited. This document or any information contained in it may not be duplicated without proper authorization. A 10/01/99 REV. F 1 D-8 2 ADDED VERSION TABLE AT D6 3 4 5 APPROVALS DATE OZON_ GEN A DRAWN DRIVER CHECKED SIZE B APPROVED DRAWING NO. REVISION 01669 G SHEET LAST MOD. 1 30-Nov-2006 of 1 6 07270B DCN 6512 1 2 3 4 6 5 D 1 2 D 5 +15 7 1 4 +15 2 5 4 6 1 6 2 3 7 +15 +15 3 +15 1 2 2 C 5 7 +15 10 4 6 +15 3 1 1 2 3 4 12 8 11 11 9 8 67 8 12 8 11 8 32 7 10 5 9 2 6 1 4 5 9 3 8 3 2 1 10 1 C B B 12 4 67 14 13 +15 +15 5 + +15 + The information herein is the property of API and is submitted in strictest confidence for reference only. Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is prohibited. This document or any information contained in it may not be duplicated without proper authorization. A 1 07270B DCN 6512 +15 2 3 4 5 APPROVALS DRAW N CH ECKED DATE THERMOELECT SIZ E DRAW ING NO. REVISION B 01840 APPROVED A COOLER_CONTROL B LAST MOD. 14-Jul-1999 SH EET 1 of 1 6 D-9 1 2 3 4 6 5 D 1 0.1 ISO_-15V +12V C4 1000PF 9 C6 ISO_+15V D U4 15 12 11 VOUT VIN 7 2 R1 R2 4.75K 9.76K GND TP6 C5 220PF 3 5 6 3 OPA277 8 15 +VS2 VREF SENSE VRADJ VIN(10) +V SR SSENSE GATEDRV U2 7 1 +VS1 TESTPOINT TP2 4 4 TESTPOINT TP1 U3 2 D1 1N914 OFFADJ OFFADJ SPAN 4MA 16MA VREFIN VIN(5V) GND 16 1 ISO_+15V 13 14 Q1 MOSFETP 7 6 8 10 9 IOUT+ XTR110 J1 +12V C7 -12V 0.1 -VS1 GND1 -VS2 GND2 -12V C ISO_+15V HEADER 4X2 IOUT- VINVIN+ ISO124 10 8 2 4 6 8 ISO_-15V +15V 1 3 5 7 2 C 16 IOUTIOUT+ +15V C1 0.47 ISO+15 TP3 1 2 5 6 7 ISO_+15V ISO_GND TP5 B C2 0.47 ISO_GND ISO_-15V VS 0V 0V +VOUT -VOUT SIN SOUT 14 8 B DCP010515 C3 0.47 VIN- TP4 ISO-15 U1 JP1 JUMPER2 Error : LOGO.BMP file not found. A 1 D-10 2 Date Rev. Change Description Engineer 8/9/00 A INITIAL RELEASE (FROM 03039) KL 3 4 The information herein is the property of API and is submitted in strictest confidence for reference only. Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is prohibited. This document or any information contained in it may not be duplicated without proper authorization. 5 APPROVALS DATE PCA 03631, Isolated 0-20ma, E Series A DRAWN CHECKED SIZE B APPROVED DRAWING NO. REVISION 03632 A LAST MOD. SHEET 19-Jul-2002 1 of 1 6 07270B DCN 6512 1 2 J1 1 2 3 4 4 PIN D 3 4 5 6 General Trace Width Requirements 1. Vcc (+5V) and I2C VCC should be 15 mil 2. Digitial grounds should be at least 20 mils 3. +12V and +12V return should be 30 mils 4. All AC lines (AC Line, AC Neutral, RELAY0 - 4, All signals on JP2) should be 30 mils wide, with 120 mil isolation/creepage distance around them 5. Traces between J7 - J12 should be top and bottom and at least 140 mils. 6. Traces to the test points can be as small as 10 mils. AC_Line AC_Neutral RELAY0 VCC RELAY1 RN1 330 R1 R2 2.2K 2.2K RELAY0 K1 RELAY1 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 K3 JP2 Heater Config Jumper RELAY2 2 COMMON0 LOAD0 TS0 RELAY0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 K2 RELAY2 I2C_Vcc 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 I2C_Vcc 2 1 1 JP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 HEADER 4X2 D 3 +- SLD-RLY +- 4 COMMON1 LOAD1 TS1 RELAY1 TS0 TS1 TS2 SLD-RLY A SLD-RLY +- YEL RL0 YEL RL1 D8 D9 YEL RL2 GRN VA0 GRN VA1 GRN VA2 D10 GRN VA3 1 IO10 IO11 IO12 IO13 IO14 IO15 2 SN74HC04 VCC U2B Q1 VCC 4 11 3 R5 10K JP4 1 2 3 C3 1 1 07270B DCN 6512 11 B VALVE3 VCC 8 PIN CON10THROUGH 2 J11 1 14 U2F REV B J12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 13 AUTH CAC DATE 10/3/02 CE MARK LINE VOLTAGE TRACE SPACING FIX 12 A Title CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH CON10THROUGH Size B Date: File: APPLIES TO PCB 03954 4 Te T + 7 SPARE J10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 Te T VCC 1 SYNC DEMOD J9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 C6 2000/25 TP1 TP2 TP3 TP4 TP5 TP6 TP7 DGND +5V AGND +15V -15V +12RT +12V 1 CON10THROUGH VLV_ENAB 10 1 CON10THROUGH VALVE2 2 1 10/16 1 MTHR BRD J8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 8 U2E + 1 KEYBRD J7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 VALVE1 2 + C4 C5 10/16 2 A DC PWR IN J5 DGND 1 VCC 2 AGND 3 +15V 4 AGND 5 -15V 6 +12RET 7 +12V 8 EGND 9 CHS_GND 10 CON10THROUGH VALVE0 UDN2540B(16) 9 1 R4 1M 2 1 D17 RLS4148 MAX693 J4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 WTCDG OVR AK C2 0.001 1 2 3 6 7 8 IN 4 OUT4 IN 3 K ENABLE OUT 3 IN 2 OUT 2 IN 1 K OUT 1 U2D A JP3 1 2 HEADER 1X2 6 R6 10K 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 K VBATT RESET VOUT RESET' VCC WDO' GND CD IN' BATT_ONCD OUT' LOW LINE' WDI OSC IN PFO' OSC SEL PFI 16 15 14 10 9 U2C I2C_Vcc IRF7205 GND GND GND GND U4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +12V U5 13 12 5 4 R3 20K VCC C U2A 5 B COMMON2 LOAD2 TS2 RELAY2 AC_Neutral IO3 IO4 PCF8575 12 D7 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 P00 P01 P02 P03 P04 SCL P05 SDA P06 P07 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 Vss 22 23 A0 A1 A2 INT D4 KA 24 J3 1 2 3 4 5 CON5 21 2 3 1 D3 RED U1 Vdd C1 0.1 C D2 K D1 WDOG I2C_Vcc J216 PIN 1 2 RELAY0 3 4 5 6 7 RELAY1 8 9 10 11 12 RELAY2 13 14 15 16 5 M100E/M200E Relay PCB Number 03956 Revision A 3 3 30-Jun-2004 Sheet 1 of N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddb Drawn By: 6 D-11 1 2 3 4 5 6 AC_Line J20 1 2 3 4 5 6 RELAY3 RN2 330 D RELAY4 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 RELAY3 1 K4 RELAY4 2 1 4 3 K5 Aux Relay Connector D MOLEX6 2 AC_Neutral I2C_Vcc 3 I2C_Vcc +- SLD-RLY RL3 RL4 VA4 D12 GRN D13 GRN D14 GRN D15 GRN D16 GRN VA5 VA6 VA7 TR0 TR1 C K C D11 GRN KA D6 YEL A SLD-RLY D5 YEL 4 +- IO3 IO4 IO10 IO11 IO12 VCC 1 SN74HC04 16 15 14 10 9 VLV_ENAB IN 4 OUT4 IN 3 K ENABLE OUT 3 IN 2 OUT 2 IN 1 K OUT 1 GND GND GND GND U3D 9 J6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 U6 2 VCC IO13 +12V 11 U3A 8 1 2 3 6 7 8 13 12 5 4 UDN2540B(16) U3B U3E IO14 3 Valve4 Valve5 Valve6 Valve7 CON10 4 11 10 B B U3C 14 VCC U3F IO15 13 5 6 12 J13 1 2 MINIFIT-2 C13 0.1 7 +12V Q2 IRL3303 Use 50 mil traces +12V J14 1 2 MINIFIT-2 Q3 IRL3303 A A Title Use 40 mil traces Size B Date: File: +12RET 1 D-12 2 3 Te T 4 Te T 5 100E/200E/400E RELAY PCB Number 03956 Revision A 3 3 30-Jun-2004 Sheet 2 of N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddb Drawn By: 6 07270B DCN 6512 1 2 3 4 R7 2.55K +15V 5 6 VDD_TC ZR1 C15 C7 D 0.1 +15V 5.6V D LTC1050 U8 K 1 2 2 4 CCW CW JP5 1 2 JUMPER R13 332K 1K CCW K R17 R19 J17 1 2 3 4 MICROFIT-4 1 10K 5K C C9 0.1 ZR2 5.6V A AK VEE_TC W W C8 0.1 C R15 11K C17 CW R11 249K R9 TYPE k K TC Connector -15V CW 5 4 1 OPA2277 J18 - 2 + 1 ZR3 10V 3 6 TYPE J J TC Connector R21 20k U7A 3 KA C16 0.1 8 7 J15 2 + 1 - 8 A 0.1 R8 2.55K VDD_TC B 8 7 ZR4 LTC1050 U9 U7B 3 6 7 2 J16 2 + 1 20k R22 5 6 10V B K -15V KA A C10 0.1 4 1 J 8 K 7 R- 5 R14 676K 1K JP6 1 2 JUMPER R16 11K R20 10K R18 Vin Gnd C14 0.1 R10 U10 3 TOUT CW R12 249K 2 TYPE J J TC Connector 5 OPA2277 - C20 1 uF 5K C11 LT1025 4 0.1 C12 0.1 A A VEE_TC Title TYPE K J19 - 2 + 1 K TC Connector Size B Date: File: 1 07270B DCN 6512 2 3 Te 4 Te 5 100E/200E/400E RELAY PAB Number 03956 Revision A 3 3 30-Jun-2004 Sheet 3 of N:\PCBMGR\RELEASED\03954cc\PROTEL\03954a.ddb Drawn By: 6 D-13 1 2 3 4 +15V D R2 1.1K S1 ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 VR2 D 3 C2 1.0UF 1 LM4040CIZ TP4 TP5 S1/S4_OUT S2_OUT TP3 S3_OUT TP2 10V_REF TP1 GND 3 2 1 S2 ASCX PRESSURE SENSOR C 1 2 3 4 5 6 +15V J1 6 5 4 MINIFIT6 +15V C R1 499 S3 FLOW SENSOR FM_4 1 2 3 2 +15V 1 2 3 4 B 3 C1 1.0UF 1 CN_647 X 3 S4 VR1 LM4040CIZ C3 1.0 B CON4 The information herein is the property of API and is submitted in strictest confidence for reference only. Unauthorized use by anyone for any other purposes is prohibited. This document or any information contained in it may not be duplicated without proper authorization. A 1 D-14 2 3 APPROVALS DATE SCH, PCA 04003, PRESS/FLOW, 'E' SERIES DRAWN A CHECKED SIZE APPROVED LAST MOD. B DRAWING NO. REVISION 04354 D SHEET 3-Dec-2007 1 of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ot Used R2 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C C Title D Size A Date: File: 1 07270B DCN 6512 2 3 SCH, E-Series Analog Output Isolator, PCA 04467 Number Revision 04468 6/28/2004 N:\PCBMGR\..\04468B.sch D B Sheet of Drawn By: 4 D-19 ',*287 6+'1 ',*,2 6+'1 ',*,2 '>@ ,2: ',*,2 '>@ '>@ ,2: ',*,2 E3VFK ' ' ',*287 6+'1 '>@ '>@ 6+'1 '>@ ,2: ',*,2 ',*,2 ,2: ',*,2 ',*,2 ,25 ',*,2 ,25 ',*,2 E3VFK '>@ ',*,2 '>@ ',*,1 '>@ ',*,2 E3VFK 6(1625,1 7(0308; '$&08; 7(03 ,2: '$& '$& '$& & 7(0308; '$&08; 7(03 ,2: '$& '$& '$& '>@ '$&9 '$& '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 6+'1 '>@ '>@ '$&9 '$& '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 6+'1 & E3VFK $1$,1 ,25 9)5($' '>@ 9)352* '$&08; &+*$,1 '>@ ,25 9)5($' '>@ 9)352* '$&08; &+*$,1 7(0308; ,2: 6+'1 95() 7& 7& 7& 7(0308; ,2: 6+'1 95() 7& 7& 7& E3VFK $1$287 ,2: '>@ '$&9 &6'$&$ &6'$&% '$& '$& '$& '$& 6+'$& % '>@ ,2: '>@ '$&9 &6'$&$ &6'$&% '$& '$& '$& '$& 6+'$& '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 :5'$& 95() 7& '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 :5'$& 95() 7& % E3VFK VKHHW E3VFK '>@ ,2: ,25 6+'$& ',*,2 ',*,2 7(03 '$&9 :5'$& 9)352* $ '>@ 3&,) '>@ ,2: ,25 6+'$& ',*,2 ',*,2 7(03 '$&9 :5'$& 9)352* &+*$,1 9)5($' 6+'1 ',*,2 ',*,2 7& 6+'1 ,&B5(6(7 ,&B'59B567 ,&B5(6(7 ,&B'59B567 &+*$,1 9)5($' 6+'1 ',*,2 ',*,2 7& 6+'1 ,&B5(6(7 ,&B'59B567 ,&B5(6(7 ,&B'59B567 $ E3VFK 7LWOH 6L]H 2UFDG% 'DWH )LOH D-20 6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31 1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ % 0D\ 6KHHWRI 1 ?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE 'UDZQ%\ 07270B DCN 6512 9&& ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' *1' 8% ' +& 35( &/. ' &/5 4 ' 8$ 35( &/. ' &/5 ,&B'59B567 ,2(1 +& $ 8% 8& 8$ +& 35( &/. ' &/5 4 4 ,17 $ 07270B DCN 6512 5 5 . . 8' 35( &/. ' &/5 4 4 '*1' 6'$ 9&& 6&/ 3&) &/. ,$&. ,17 $ 5(6(7 9&& &6 5' :5 6&/ '% '% '% '% '% '% '% '% ,54 ,54 6'$ '*1' 966 X)FHUDPLF & 5 N :', 5 9&& 6&/ '6 '' %/8( ,& % 56 5 6&/ 6+'$& 6'$ '6 %/8( 8& +& 6'$ 8' +& ,& /7& &6 7LWOH 1RWHV 7KLVVFKHPDWLFLVIRU3&$ 7KLVVFKHPDWLFLVIRU3&% 6L]H 2UFDG% 'DWH )LOH 0,&52),7 ,'&+($'(5 5(6(7 -3 X)9 8 6&/ & +& 9&& .%,17 -3 ,1/,1( 73 73 - .%,17 6'$ 9&& & 73 9&& ,'&+($'(5 - ,&B5(6(7 +& -3 0,&52),7 6+'1 ' 73 73 73 6+'1 8% +& 8 ,25 ,2: '6 /('5('VPW 6<6&/. ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 5 N 5 . - ', ', ', ', '2 '2 '2 '2 ', ', ', ', '2 '2 '2 '2 '' 3&&' 9&& ; 8$ 8 4 9&& - ,25 ,2: '2 '2 '2 '2 '2 '2 '2 '2 ', ', ', ', ', ', ', ', 7& -,72'&)2+0 9&& 9&& ,25 ,2: 9&& 4 +& 5 . 9&& +& -3 ,'&+($'(5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 73 4 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' +& ,&B5(6(7 VKRUWHGVOGUVLGH 9 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ 8' < < < < < < < < 2& &/. (1 * * +& 9&& ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 51 .[ $''5 [ '()$8/7 $''5 [ -3,167$//(' 3LQV VKRUWHGRQ3&% -3 $(1 ,2(1 & +($'(5'()$8/7(' X)FHUDPLF $+&*8 -3 ,25 8 +& ,'&+($'(5 73 +& 3 4 8$ +& 8$ ,2: ',*,2 ',*,2 ',*,2 7(03 '$&9 :5'$& 9)352* &+*$,1 9)5($' ;& ;' ;( ;) 73 ,2: * * ',*,2 -3 9&& ',*,2 5 ,17 +& +& % % % % % % % % $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ (1$% < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < < 9&& 8& 8 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ 127,167$//(' 9&& 8 $ % & ' *1' *1' *1' *1' *1' 26& 9 %$/( 7& '$&. ,54 ,54 ,54 ,54 ,54 6<6&/. 5()5(6+ '54 '$&. '54 '$&. ,25 ,2: 60(05 60(0: .(< 9 (1';)5 9 '54 9 ,54 9 5(6(7'59 *1' +& 8' $ '>@ +& $ ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 8% $ $(1 +& ,& $ 5 N 8 % -% 3& $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ VKRUWHGVOGUVLGH & $ $ $ $ & ' *1' $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $(1 ,2&+5'< ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ,2&+(&. -$ 3& $ 6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31 1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ % 0D\ 6KHHWRI 1 ?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE 'UDZQ%\ D-21 5; 7; 56*1' /('*51VPW 5 . - 5 127,167$//(' /('*51 & 6: 6:6/,'(3'7 = = = 9&& 9 95(7 9 07 07 07 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( % 9 07 07 07 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( - 73 07 73 73 73 73 73 79 60'$/&& 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 5;IRU&RP % 79$55$< '% 0 '7( 127,167$//(' '6 7;IRU&RP 02/(; 1& 5;' 7;' 1& *1' 1& 576 &76 1& '6 /('5(' 9 5(7 '*1' 9 9 $*1' 9 $*1' (*1' &+$6*1' 9&& 5 127,167$//(' $8;&'&&32:(5&,1 5 5 . 5 . 9&& - ,1/,1( 5 N & ' 9 '&(VLGHRIVZLWFKLVVLGHWRZDUGVSLQ 5; 576 7; &76 56*1' 5; 576 7; &76 56*1' 79 79$55$< 60'$/&& 5 . . /('5(' $ . $ &RP56$ '6 '6 7;IRU&RP ' 576 &76 5;IRU&RP &RP56%56 - '% )(0$/( 07 07 02817,1*+2/( 02817,1*+2/( 9&& ' 0%56&7 ' X)97$17$/80 & & ''B X)97$17$/80 '' 5PXVWEH ZLWKLQRI- 0%56&7 5 $ $ 127,167$//(' 7LWOH 6L]H 2UFDG% 'DWH )LOH D-22 6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31 1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ % 0D\ 6KHHWRI 1 ?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE 'UDZQ%\ 07270B DCN 6512 &6'$&$ &65$1*( &6'$&% &65$1*( &6'$&% '$& '$& '$& '$& $ 5 56 73 : % $*1' 5 5 N . '>@ '*1' '$&5$1*( 2))6(7352*5$0 & 8 $ 73 & &6'$&% ' &/. 8 '$&%,7 '287 &6 ',1 &/. 92$ *1' 9&& 92% % 8 % 23$ 6+'$& 8 327',*,7$/ $ : % $*1' 79 5 N . 0%56&7 $ 5 - & S) 5 23$8$ '$& ,QVWDOO-IRU P$RQWK FKDQQHO $ $ : % $*1' & S) ,QVWDOO5 5LIP$ RQWKFKDQQHO QRWXVHG 56 23$8$ 8% 5 & 8$ X)FHUDPLF 5 $ - 0,&52),7 % '$&9 N 5 '$&9 . '$&9 9&& & X)FHUDPLF : % $*1' : % $*1' 23$8$ 73 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 0%56&7 8& 5 $ 23$8$ 8' 5 N . 7LWOH 5 6L]H 6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31 2UFDG% 'DWH )LOH 07270B DCN 6512 & S) & 9 '$& & & S) 56 6+'1 ' & S) & S) 5 73 '*1' & S) X)FHUDPLF ' 'DQG' 0XVWEHORFDWHG ZLWKLQRI8 & S) 9 &6 6', &/. 6'2 9&& ''B 5 '8$/'$&$ 9&& 79$55$< +($'(5,'& & X)FHUDPLF ' &/. 8' 23$8$ - 79 9&& 62&.(78 : % $*1' 73 X)FHUDPLF 9 $ 5 N 23$ & X)FHUDPLF : % $*1' 8& 23$8$ 95() 5 . 9 X)FHUDPLF 73 73 $ 6+'$& - ,'& '$& & ,'& 9&& & X)FHUDPLF 79$55$< 56 6+'1 9&& ,'& & 9 8% 23$8$ - & 8$ X)FHUDPLF &6 6', &/. 6'2 &6'$&$ 9&& 60'$/&& 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 )(%($' 60'$/&& ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' $1$/2*92/7$*( &855(172873876 - / ' / * / / * / / * / / * )(%($' 7(50%/2&. 9 : % $*1' 9 ' &/. 2& &/. 327',*,7$/ $ 23$8$ ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' +& 8 X)FHUDPLF '8$/'$&$ 8 62&.(78 9 & X)FHUDPLF &/. +& 9&& '$&%,7 '287 92$ &6 *1' ',1 9&& &/. 92% 8 :5'$& 73 &6'$&$ ' &/. 8& ' 7& +& ,2: ,62/$7('0$237,21$/%2$5'6 ,2: 8% '$&9 '$&9 1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ % 0D\ 6KHHWRI 1 ?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE 'UDZQ%\ D-23 9 ' X)9 2( &/. ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6(/ 51 .[ 9&& 8 % 8$ . ' %$6 5 . '' ' %$6 8% /) 9&& & ' ' ' 9 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' +& $ 8 +& 73 2( &/. ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 9&& 1& 96 1& 5() 1& 9, 2379 96 &26 &/. $'.3 73 X)FHUDPLF 9&& 3/$&( 2+0 5(6,6725$6 &/26($6 3266,%/(72 ;$1'; 73 73 73 '% 5'0%<7( '% *1' 8 '% 7,( 7,( '% ;LOLQ[&3/' 7', 706 7&. D-24 ; 0%+0+= 7& 7,( 7,( 7,( 7,( )5(4 7,( 7,( 9&&,2 *1' 7'2 6(/ % 9&& & X)FHUDPLF 6(/ 73 ' ,25 6$ 6% 6& 67$57 9)5($' 06% 0,' /6% $ 7LWOH 'DWH )LOH & 73 2UFDG% ; 5 6L]H & X)FHUDPLF /) X)FHUDPLF X)97$17$/80 -,72'&$$(0+= & ' ' ' 5 . & & 5 . 5 ,& ' &203 &203 $*1' *1' )287 9 & X)97$17$/80 5 5DQG5UHGXFHWKHJDLQ IRUDQDORJLQSXWVE\VR WKDWZHFDQUHDGVOLJKWO\ DERYHIXOOVFDOHWRSUHYHQW RYHUIORZRI$'&UHDGLQJ 9 X) 9 ,2: & X) . 56 8 +& 73 5 . 5 '>@ 9)352* %$6 & +& ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 9 56 & 23287 23 23 9, 9, 5 &$B 7& 6+'1 % 56 5 9&& 5 . ' ' ' ' 9&& 96 *1' 96 X)9 8 $ 8 9 6 6 6 6 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 9&& & 95()&/,3 '' ,2: 9&& 73 8 '*'< 9 92/7$*(5() &+*$,1 0&+,3 5 9 95() 8% 23$ 9 1& 1& 1& 9,1 9287 15 75,0 *1' 8 5LQGXFHVDQ RIIVHWLQDQDORJ VLJQDOWRJLYHD OLYH IRUVHQVRUV ZLWKRUVOLJKWO\ QHJDWLYHRXWSXW X)FHUDPLF & & X)FHUDPLF 23$ X)9FHUDPLF 7& 8$ ' $'&95() 5'/6% '% '% 7,( 7,( 7,( '% 9)&/. ,&/. 9&&,17 7,( *1' 95() 1& 1& (1% $ $ $ $ & X)97$17$/80 5'06% 7,( '% 9&&,17 ,25 *1' 6$ 6% 6& 5($' 67$57 X)FHUDPLF 51 .[ 966 & $108; & & 966 . & 5 287 &+ &+ &+ &+ 51 .[ 56 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 & X)FHUDPLF & X)FHUDPLF 8 &+ &+ &+ &+ & 9 $1$/2*,13876 73 73 95() $*1' &+ &+ &+ &+ '$&08; 5 9 9 7(0308; ,& 23$8$ - 0,&52),7 - 0,&52),7 &+ &+ &+ &+ &+ &+ ' &+ &+ &+ &+ &+ &+ 6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31 1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ % 0D\ 6KHHWRI 1 ?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE 'UDZQ%\ 07270B DCN 6512 9 %<3$66&$36 0867%(:,7+,1 2)7+( 5(*8/$725 ,1387287387 3,16 9$1$ 8 ,1 287 212)) 1& *1' ' ' & X)97$17$/80 /3 ,0 & X) '>@ 9&& 7(0308; & ' ' ' 6+'1 7(03 8 ' ,2: 9 ,QVWDOO;7 WKURXJKKROH 25;7 60' EXWQRWERWK 8 0$;&:1 287 966 *1' 9 (1% $ $ $ 56 :5 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 56 5 . 5 . 5 . 5 . 5 . 5 . 5 . 7+(50,67(5 ;7 9$1$ ;7 7+(50,67(5 - 7+(50,67(5 5 . 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 7+(50,67(5 0,&52),7 +& % & % 99 8 '$&08; & X)FHUDPLF 9&& & X)FHUDPLF 5 . ' ' ' ' 9&& 96 *1' 96 6 6 6 6 ,1 ,1 ,1 ,1 '*'< 51 51 .[ '$& '$& '$& '$& '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 '$&9 .[ $ $ 7LWOH 6L]H 2UFDG% 'DWH )LOH 07270B DCN 6512 6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31 1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ % 0D\ 6KHHWRI 1 ?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE 'UDZQ%\ D-25 &21752/,13876 9&& S) 5 5 5 / / / & S) 5 5 5 5 S)9 S)9 & S)9 S)9 3ODFHWKHVHWHUPLQDWLRQUHVLVWRUVDWWKHHQGRIHDFKGDWD OLQH(DFKGDWDOLQH VKRXOGEHODLGRXWDVDGDLV\FKDLQWKHVLJQDOSDVVLQJ IURPRQH,&WRWKHQH[W 9&& & & & / )(%($' & 8 36 & & 5 ' '>@ & S) (;7B9B287 & +& ' ' & ' & < < < < < < < < ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' & $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ ' ',*,2 ,25 ' ' & & / ' & 7(50%/2&. & & / & / )(%($' & (;7(51$/ &21752/ ,1 $ * * ' / / / 73 8 8 36 - 51 .[ & 51 [ & ' S) % % & 51 .[ 8 51 / & )(%($' S) (;7B9B287 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ 6L]H 2UFDG% 'DWH )LOH D-26 ,25 ',*,2 ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '>@ $ 7LWOH S) < < < < < < < < +& & & 7(50%/2&. & / & $ / / / / & (;7(51$/ &21752/ ,1 % 8 36 - * * [ 6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31 1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ % 0D\ 6KHHWRI 1 ?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE 'UDZQ%\ 07270B DCN 6512 9&& & ',*,2 ,2: 73 6+'1 6+'1 8% ' +& ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 8 +& 2( &/. ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 '>@ & ',*,7$/2873876 51 [ ' 8 8 & 36 & & S) S) / / / / )(%($' 36 & - / / / / )(%($' & & )(%($' & & ) 9&& S) & 5(6(77$%/()86($9 ' & & 7(50%/2&. S) / $67$7862873876 / )(%($' (;7B9B287 ',2'(6&+277.< % % $ $ 7LWOH 6L]H 2UFDG% 'DWH )LOH 07270B DCN 6512 6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31 1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ % 0D\ 6KHHWRI 1 ?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE 'UDZQ%\ D-27 9&& ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 '>@ 8 & & S) / / / / )(%($' 36 - / )(%($' &2B(;7B5(7 & & % ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 2( &/. ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 9 4 9 62 ' . ',2'(6&+277.< 4 5 9 . 62 / / / / )(%($' S) 5(/$<63'7 . . ' ',2'(6&+277.< 5 S) - 5(/$<63'7 ' ',2'(6&+277.< 5 % & +& 8$ ,2: 36 ',*,2 8 +& (;7(51$/&211(&725 62/'(56,'( S) & 6+'1 4 9 . 62 . 5(/$<63'7 ' ',2'(6&+277.< $ 5 4 . $ 7LWOH . 62 6L]H 2UFDG% 'DWH )LOH D-28 (;7(51$/ 5($53$1(/ $/$502873876 7(50%/2&. 5(/$<63'7 95(7 & S) S) 8 &21752/2873876 7(50%/2&. 51 [ / / / / )(%($' 9&& & & & ' & ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' +& S) & & 8 & & 2( &/. & ,2: 36 & ',*,2 8 +& 8 & 6+'1 6+'1 ' ',*,7$/2873876 51 [ 6FKHPDWLFIRU(6HULHV*0RWKHUERDUG3&$31 1XPEHU 5HYLVLRQ % 0D\ 6KHHWRI 1 ?3&%0*5?5-(VHULHV0RWKHUERDUG*HQHUDWLRQ?6RXUFH?EGGE 'UDZQ%\ 07270B DCN 6512 1 2 MT1 MT2 MT3 CHASSIS CHASSIS CHASSIS A MT4 MT5 CHASSIS CHASSIS TP3 3 MT6 MT7 CHASSIS CHASSIS MT8 4 MT9 5 SDA CHASSIS CHASSIS SDA TP1 J1 TP4 3.3V SCL R6 R1 10K 10K DithB U/D R2 R3 R4 10K L/R 10K 10K 10K aHSync aVsync Mode 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 R5 TP2 FBMH3216HM501NT FB2 SCL 0039300100 J7 aR2 aR4 aR6 B aB2 aB4 aB6 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 FBMH3216HM501NT 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 aG3 aG5 aG7 aB3 aB5 aB7 aDCLK R21 jumper Default:R21B B bDCLK CLK BACKL aData Enable aData Enable C2 0.0022 CA_112 aR3 aR5 aR7 B30B-PHDSS (LF)(SN) C C1 22uF/6.3V JMK316BJ226KL A aG2 aG4 aG6 3.3V R7 100K C7 1.0 GMK107BJ105KA +5V 5 4 3 2 1 A FB16 FBMH3216HM501NT FB17 0039300100 FBMH3216HM501NT FBMH3216HM501NT 5V-GND 5V-GND 52 51 i BackLightDrive R46 NI R47 0 R48 NI 3.3V +5V JP2 Internal Dithering 0 = Enable 1 = Disable 1 3 Scan Direction U/D L/R Scan Dir. 0 1 UD, LR 1 0 DU, RL 0 0 UD, RL 1 1 DU, LR (1 = H, 0 = L) FB4 5V-GND J8 G0 G2 G4 R0 R2 R4 B0 B2 B4 DEN 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 FBMH3216HM501NT NI G1 G3 G5 J3 2 4 6 5 7 9 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DEN 9 10 11 12 B5 13 B4 14 B3 15 16 B2 17 B1 18 B0 19 20 G5 21 G4 22 G3 23 24 G2 25 G1 26 G0 27 28 R5 29 R4 30 R3 31 32 R2 33 R1 34 R0 35 36 37 38 39 40 10 11 12 R1 R3 R5 13 14 15 Mode B1 B3 B5 C3 22uF/6.3V JMK316BJ226KL 0 R28 B30B-PHDSS (LF)(SN) DCLK FB3 J14 10 9 8 7 6 +5V FB1 J2 50 49 48 Bklght47 46 45 Vcom 44 Mode 43 aData Enable 42 aVsync 41 aHSync 40 aB7 39 aB7 aB6 38 aB6 aB5 37 aB5 aB4 36 aB4 aB3 35 aB3 aB2 34 aB2 33 aB1 32 aB0 aG7 31 aG7 aG6 30 aG6 aG5 29 aG5 aG4 28 aG4 aG3 27 aG3 aG2 26 aG2 25 aG1 24 aG0 aR7 23 aR7 aR6 22 aR6 aR5 21 aR5 aR4 20 aR4 aR3 19 aR3 aR2 18 aR2 17 aR1 16 aR0 15 14 13 L/R 12 U/D 11 10 Vgh 9 Vgl 8 AVdd aReset 7 6 Vcom 5 DithB 4 3 2 1 Bklght+ 6 C4 0.0022 CA_112 16 17 18 6X3 Jumper C5 22uF/6.3V JMK316BJ226KL C6 0.0022 CA_112 5V-GND JP3 L/R GM800480X-70-TTX2NLW CL586-0529-2 U/D 1 3 2 4 6 5 7 9 8 10 11 12 B NI C 41 42 CL586-0527-7 4X3 Jumper D Make FEMA Data Image United Radiant Tech. Model GM800480W FG0700A0DSWBG01 UMSH-8173MD-1T JP2 1-2, 4-5, 7-8, 10-11, 13-14, 16-17 3-2, 6-5, 9-8, 12-11, 15-14, 18-17 2-3, 4/ 5/ 6 NC, 7/ 8/ 9 NC, 10-11, 13-14, 16/ 17/ 18 NC JP3 1-2, 4-5, 7-8, 10-11 2-3, 5-6, 8-9, 11-12 2-3, 5-6, 8-9, 11-12 D Title GUI Interface Size B Date: File: 1 07270B DCN 6512 2 3 4 5 Number Revision 06698 6/24/2010 N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P1.R3.schdoc D Sheet 1 of 4 Drawn By: RT 6 D-29 1 2 3 4 5 6 A A TP5 AVdd: +10.4V R8 3.3V R13 9.76 D3 BAT54S R14 2.0 C16 18 0.33 21 CAT4139TD-GT3 FDV305N 1 G D S 3 2 B C18 0.33 Q1 R16 464K 20 2 19 R18 80.6K 5V-GND 3.3V 8 13 22 A BACKL B C35 0.1 R25 10K R26 10K 14 15 SCL SDA AO A1 A2 SCL SDA P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 INT 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 12 FBP VGH PGND 10 VCOM CTRL C19 0.33 23 GD 14 R17 806K 15 HTSNK Vgh: +16V 3.3V R31 A B C22 24pf C23 C24 C25 C26 43pf 43pf 43pf 0.1 TP10 Vcom: +4V C27 1.0 GMK107BJ105KA Default:R31B R22 jumper Backlight Brightness Control R22 R27 Control Mode Remote – Video Port NO A Remote – I2C YES B Fixed Bright (default) NO B S1 S2 SW_46 C Vcom 3.3V Default: NI Maint_SW Lang_Select R19 66.5K TP9 25 SW_46 Opt. Main Sw Opt. Lang. Sw. R31 NO NO B 8 PCF8574 +5V 16 CPI PGND R23 33K 10K Vss 1 2 3 TPS65150PWP B Vgh R27 jumper Default:R27B 5V-GND U3 C12 TMK325BJ226MM 22uf/25V D4 BAT54S C17 0.33 17 DRVP GND C21 470pf 16 R24 10K Vdd C U2 COMP R11 806K R15 100K 1 FBN ADJ C20 0.220 +5V C13 24pf 9 SUP FB REF GMK107BJ105KA C15 1.0 ? 7 1 DRVN FDLY 1K 5 Vgl Bklght- SW R12 24 5V-GND 3 DLY2 FB K A MBRM120LT1G 3 SHDN 1 DLY1 SW GND 4 Vin 3.9uH 2 5 Vgl: -7V 4 U1 TP7 C14 1.0 GMK107BJ105KA 2 VIN TP8 11 R10 10K C11 22uF/6.3V JMK316BJ226KL AVdd D2 L2 Bklght+ 22uH C10 4.7uF/16V 487K 6 CD214A-B140LF D1 L1 C9 4.7uF/16V C8 0.001 IN +5V R9 309K SW TP6 5V-GND 5V-GND D D Title GUI Interface Size B Date: File: 1 D-30 2 3 4 5 Number Revision 06698 6/24/2010 N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P2.R3.schdoc D Sheet 2 of 4 Drawn By: RT 6 07270B DCN 6512 2 3 4 5 +5V J9 VBUS DD+ ID GND USB-B-MINI 6 IN 6 CHASSIS SHTDN A JP4 4 BP C28 1uF C29 470pf C30 1uF 5V-GND 3.3V 1 2 U4 D_N D_P USB3.3V 3.3V-REG OUT 8 1 2 3 4 5 A 6 GND 1 FB13 C38 USB3.3V 4 3 J11 SDA R32 5V-GND SDA 5V-GND 1 2 3 4 0.1uF R39 100K 5V-GND B R33 100K 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 C39 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 VBUS USB3.3V FBMH3216HM501NT CHASSIS R36 12K GND SUS/R0 +3.3V USBUSB+ XTL2 CLK-IN 1.8VPLL RBIAS +3.3PLL C34 0.1 +5V FB8 PWR3 OCS2 PWR2 3.3VCR U8 +1.8V USB2514-AEZG OCS1 PWR1 TEST +3.3V 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 CHASSIS C32 1uF 5V-GND C41 FB9 0.1 1 2 3 4 USB3.3V C33 0.1uF 5V-GND C43 0.1uF DS2 GRN 5V-GND F2 +5V 5V-GND 0.1uF 5V-GND 1 2 3 4 FB11 8 7 6 5 +5V FB12 0.5A/6V 5V-GND 0.1uF C45 5V-GND D Title GUI Interface Size B Date: File: 07270B DCN 6512 USB-A_VERT J6 F3 Configuration Select Mode R32 R45 Default A A MBUS B B Install 100K for A, 0 Ohm for B 2 5V-GND 4 GND 3 D+ 2 D1 +5V U11 C36 0.1uF 5V-GND 1 C C42 CHASSIS 5V-GND D USB-A_VERT J5 FB10 0.5A/6V USB3.3V 5V-GND 4 GND 3 D+ 2 D1 +5V 5V-GND C44 1uF R37 100K 8 7 6 5 U9 C60 0.1uF D4_P D4_N D3_P D3_N D2_P D2_N 1K C40 5V-GND 5 D1_N D1_P R38 0.5A/6V 0.1uF 5V-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 5V-GND B USB-A_R/A J4 5V-GND 37 0.1 C59 FB5 CHASSIS +5V A 0.1 GND D+ D+5V F1 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 R20 49.9 FB7 U7 R45 5V-GND NI A SCL C31 BUS +5 C SCL USB3.3V USB3.3V 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 2 VBUS-DET RESET HS-IND/S1 SCL/S0 +3.3V SDA/R1 OCS4 PWR4 OCS3 CHS -V 5V-GND R30 100K 5V-GND 70553-004 +5V B OUT 1 D1D1+ D2D2+ +3.3V D3D3+ D4D4+ CHS R35 100K 6 7 8 9 10 GND LL GND RL D+ SHLD DRT +5 LT TSHARC-12C A1 +V E 24MHZ DS1 GND R29 NI To old TScreen J12 1K A B 1 2 3 4 5 0.01uF U5 70553-004 YEL 5 C37 To new TScreen LL RL SD RT LT 1uF 5V-GND B 1 2 3 4 5 JP5 R34 100K 5 J10 RT RL SD LL LT 3 4 5 Number Revision 06698 6/24/2010 N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P3.R3.schdoc D Sheet 3 of 4 Drawn By: RT 6 D-31 1 2 3 4 5 6 A A 3.3V TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE CIRCUITRY ( TBD) FB15 FBMH3216HM501NT C61 0.1 J13 J15 B CHASSIS 7 2 9 4 5 6 3 8 1 12 11 10 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 G3168-05000202-00 Y0_P1 0 R49 1 Y0_N1 Y1_P1 0 R50 3 0 R51 5 Y1_N1 0 R52 Y2_N1 0 R54 Y2_P1 CLKOUT_N1 CLKOUT_P1 2 U6 4 Y0_P Y0_N Y1_P Y1_N Y2_N Y2_P 6 7 8 0 R53 9 10 0 R55 9 8 11 10 14 15 11 12 0 R56 bDCLK 13 14 CLKOUT_N CLKOUT_P 6 R40 3.3V 10K FB18 3.3V R41 100 R42 100 R43 100 28 36 42 48 R44 100 12 20 FBMH3216HM501NT 7 13 18 C62 FB6 19 21 0.1 FB14 Vcc PIN 28 C46 22uF/6.3V JMK316BJ226KL C 23 16 17 22 HEADER-7X2 Option MH1 MH2 MH3 MH4 Vcc PIN 36 Vcc PIN 42 Vcc PIN 48 Y0P Y0M Y1P Y1M Y2M Y2P D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 CLKOUT CLKINM CLKINP SHTDN NC VCC VCC VCC VCC LVDS/VCC PLLVCC LVDSGND LVDSGND LVDSGND PLLGND PLLGND GND GND GND GND GND 24 26 27 29 30 31 33 34 35 37 39 40 41 43 45 46 47 1 2 4 5 aR2 aR3 aR4 aR5 aR6 aR7 aG2 aG3 aG4 aG5 aG6 aG7 aB2 aB3 aB4 aB5 aB6 aB7 B BACKL aData Enable NOTE: To receive backlight control (BACKL) from CPU board when using ICOP_0096 LVDS Transmitter. The connection from pin 42 on the TTL video connector (VSYNC) to U1-23 must be broken and connected to pin 43. 3 25 32 38 44 SN75LVDS86A C49 C47 C50 C48 C51 C53 C52 C54 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01 C C55 C56 C57 C58 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01 D D Title GUI Interface Size B Date: File: 1 D-32 2 3 4 5 Number Revision 06698 6/24/2010 N:\PCBMGR\..\06696.P4.R3.schdoc D Sheet 4 of 4 Drawn By: RT 6 07270B DCN 6512 1 2 3 MT1 4 MT2 A From ICOP CPU CHASSIS-0 CHASSIS U1 +3.3V J2 VAD6 VAD8 VAD10 B VBD2 VBD4 VBD6 VBD10 VAD6 VAD7 VAD8 VAD9 VAD10 VAD11 VBD10 VBD11 VAD0 VAD1 VAD2 VAD3 VBD2 VBD3 VBD4 VBD5 VBD6 VBD7 44 45 47 48 1 3 4 6 7 9 10 12 13 15 16 18 19 20 22 BACKL 23 VBDE 25 Header 22X2 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 VAD0 VAD2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 A To LCD Display VAD1 VAD3 VAD7 VAD9 VAD11 VBD3 VBD5 VBD7 VBD11 22.1 VBGCLK VBDE 5 11 17 24 46 R1 10K R2 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 GND GND GND GND GND Y0M Y0P Y1M Y1P Y2M Y2P CLKIN CLKOUTM CLKOUTP SHTDN NC NC VCC VCC VCC LVDSVCC PLLVCC VLDSGND VLDSGND VLDSGND PLLGND PLLGND 41 40 39 38 35 34 Y0_N Y0_P Y1_N Y1_P Y2_N Y2_P J1 Y2_P Y2_N Y1_P CLKIN 26 33 CLKOUT_N 32 CLKOUT_P 27 Y1_N Y0_P +3.3V Y0_N CLKOUT_P 14 43 CLKOUT_N 2 8 21 37 29 42 36 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 30 28 MH1 MH2 MH3 MH4 CHASSIS B +3.3V G3168-05000101-00 SN75LVDS84A C C +3.3V BACKL J3 Y0_P Y1_P Y2_N CLKOUT_N +3.3V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Y0_N Y1_N Y2_P CLKOUT_P Header 7X2 D C1 22uF/6.3V JMK316BJ226KL C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01 0.1 0.01 Title Size A Date: File: 1 07270B DCN 6512 2 D LVDS, Transmitter Board 3 Number Revision B 06882 5/7/2010 N:\PCBMGR\..\06882-P1-R0.SchDoc Sheet 1 of 1 Drawn By: RT 4 D-33 1 2 3 4 U6 1 6 2 5 3 4 A A +5V R7 1.37K J1 12 +5V CHASSIS-1 R8 1.37K SP3050 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 16 15 14 13 10 STRAIGHT THROUGH ETHERNET J2 ATX+ ATXARX+ LED0 LED0+ ARXLED1+ LED1 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 DF11-8DP-2DS(24) CONN_RJ45_LED C +5V SDA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Header 8 3 GND TP1 P2 2 1 U7 SMF05T2G 4 B 5 B +5V-ISO P3 U8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SDA SCL SCL 4 12 11 1 + R10 2.2k Header 8 VDD1 VDD2 LME0505 GND1 GND2 5 14 13 7 +5V-OUT TP2 L1 47uH C C28 4.7uF R16 1k TP4 C17 100uF TP3 ISO-GND DS3 GRN GND GND Title D Size A LG1 1 D-34 D Auxiliary I/O Board (PWR-ETHERNET) 2 Date: File: 3 Number Revision A 06731 1/28/2010 Sheet 1 of 3 N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-1_ETHERNET.SchDoc Drawn By: RT 4 07270B DCN 6512 1 2 3 4 V-BUS A A V-BUS C19 0.1uF R11 2.2k C22 0.1uF 3.3V C24 DS4 6 9 11 B 12 J4 3 2 1 4 4 5 7 8 V-BUS C23 0.1uF GND 18 19 20 21 22 R12 4.75k GRN D+ DVBUS GND VDD RST SUSPEND TXD RTS DTR SUSPEND RXD CTS DSR DCD RI GND D+ U10 DVREG-I VBUS 17 16 15 14 13 10 CHASSIS 1 6 2 5 3 C nc nc 28 24 1 2 26 24 28 TXD-A RTS-A DTR-A 14 13 12 25 23 27 1 2 3 RXD-A CTS-A DSR-A DCD-A RI-A 19 18 17 16 15 U11 USB C20 0.1uF 4.7uF CP2102 21 22 GND U9 C1+ C1C2+ C2- VCC ONLINE VV+ TI1 TI2 TI3 TO1 TO2 TO3 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RI1 RI2 RI3 RI4 RI5 STAT SHTDN RO2 GND 26 23 3 27 GND J3 9 TXD-B 10 RTS-B 11 DTR-B 1 7 5 9 4 8 3 2 10 6 RXD-B CTS-B DSR-B DCD-B RI-B 4 5 6 7 8 20 25 4 C26 1uF RXD CTS DSR N/C TXD RTS DTR DCD RI GND B DF11-10DP-2DS(24) 0 R14 SP3243EU C25 0.1uF C21 0.1uF GND 0 R15 C NUP2202W1 GND GND MT1 MT2 MT-HOLE CHASSIS MT-HOLE CHASSIS-1 Title D Size A Date: File: 1 07270B DCN 6512 D Auxiliary I/O Board (USB) 2 3 Number Revision A 06731 1/28/2010 N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-2_USB.SchDoc Sheet 2 of 3 Drawn By: RT 4 D-35 1 2 3 4 +5V-ISO R9 4.99 A A +5V-ADC C2 0.1uF P1 C3 0.1uF C5 0.1uF C6 0.1uF C7 0.1uF U1 AN-CH0 AN-CH1 AN-CH2 AN-CH3 AN-CH4 AN-CH5 AN-CH6 AN-CH7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 B C4 0.1uF C27 4.7uF C1 0.1uF ISO-GND U2 ANALOG INPUT C8 0.1uF 4 7 8 11 22 24 14 U3 1 2 3 C9 0.1uF 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 6 5 4 1 2 3 SMS12 6 5 4 SMS12 CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 VDD VDD SHTDN SDA SCL A2 A1 A0 NC NC REF NC REF-AJ NC NC NC NC NC AGND DGND 1 2 13 ISO-GND 9 5 10 12 6 4.75k R1 27 26 28 25 3 C10 4.7uF C11 0.01uF B 4.75k R2 MAX1270BCAI+ ISO-GND ISO-GND ISO-GND ISO-GND +5V-ISO +5V-ISO +5V +5V-ISO 5 C C13 0.1uF C14 0.1uF R5 2.2k R6 2.2k 1 GND SDA SCL VDD2 NC SDA2 NC NC SCL2 GND2 GND2 VDD1 NC SDA1 NC NC SCL1 GND1 GND1 NC7WZ17P6X 6 U4A 14 15 12 13 10 11 16 9 ISO-GND R3 2.2k R4 2.2k SDA DS1 SCL DS2 YEL YEL C 2 U5 3 2 5 4 8 6 7 1 C12 0.1uF ISO-GND ISO-GND 3 4 U4B NC7WZ17P6X ADuM2251 Title D GND Size A Date: File: 1 D-36 2 D Auxiliary I/O Board (ADC) ISO-GND 3 Number Revision A 06731 1/28/2010 N:\PCBMGR\..\06731-3_ADC.SchDoc Sheet 3 of 3 Drawn By: RT 4 07270B DCN 6512
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Author : Create Date : 2012:07:31 14:20:08-07:00 Modify Date : 2012:07:31 15:26:03-07:00 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04 Creator Tool : Acrobat PDFMaker 9.1 for Word Metadata Date : 2012:07:31 15:26:03-07:00 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.4.2 (Windows) Format : application/pdf Creator : Title : Document ID : uuid:c61a4c9e-83e5-4103-9466-75c333b80184 Instance ID : uuid:3f21577d-7e7f-4cc9-9e18-b2db39ab0cd5 Page Layout : OneColumn Page Count : 412EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools